Overview 1

Name and Function of Each Unit 2

JMR-7230-S3/S Common Basic Operations 3
JMR-7225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH Range and Bearing Measurement Methods 4
JMR-7210-6X/6XH
JMR-7272-S Basic Operation of the Radar 5
JMR-7282-S/SH Target Tracking and AIS 6
JMR-9230-S3/S True and False Echoes on Display 7
JMR-9225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH
JMR-9210-6X/6XH
Functions of the ECDIS 8
JMR-9272-S Route Planning 9
JMR-9282-S/SH Route Monitoring 10
Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 11
12
Marine Radar Equipment
Automatic Sailing

Operating a Chart 13
Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart
Manually 14
15
Instruction Manual
Logbook

Setting Up Screen View 16

<Function>
Setting Up Alerts 17
Setting Up the Operation Mode 18
Adjusting and Setting Up Equipment (for
Services) 19
Playing Back Data Recorded During
Navigation [Playback] 20
Maintenance & Inspection 21
Failures and After-Sale Services 22
About Disposal 23
Specifications 24
Radar Antenna Block Diagrams APP A
Alert List APP B
Setting the Interswitch APP C
Menu List and Materials APP D
 㻌

Contents 2
3
Function
4
Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar....................................................... 5-1 5
5.1 Overview Flowchart ............................................................................................................... 5-1
6
5.2 Starting and Shutting Down the Radar .................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.1 Powering on and starting .............................................................................................. 5-3 7
5.2.2 Exiting radar operation .................................................................................................. 5-6
5.3 Observation Environment and Image Adjustment ................................................................ 5-7
8
5.3.1 Adjusting screen brightness .......................................................................................... 5-7 9
5.3.2 Changing the observation range ................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.3 Adjusting tune ............................................................................................................... 5-9 10
5.3.4 Adjusting gain ............................................................................................................. 5-10
11
5.3.5 Rejecting sea clutter (Sea) ......................................................................................... 5-12
5.3.6 Rejecting rain/snow clutter .......................................................................................... 5-14 12
5.3.7 Adjusting to optimal images (Selection of observation scenes) ................................. 5-16
5.4 General Radar Operation .................................................................................................... 5-19
13
5.4.1 Interference Rejection (IRFunction) .......................................................................... 5-19 14
5.4.2 Changing the transmitter pulse length ........................................................................ 5-20
5.4.3 Enhancing targets ....................................................................................................... 5-21 15
5.4.4 Using video processing (Echo Process) ..................................................................... 5-22
16
5.4.5 Setting the azimuth mode ........................................................................................... 5-23
5.4.6 Setting a motion mode ................................................................................................ 5-25 17
5.4.6.1 Resetting Own Ship to its Initial Position in [TM] (True Motion display) Mode ..... 5-26
5.4.7 Setting the Stabilization Mode .................................................................................... 5-27 18
5.4.8 Moving own ship’s display position (Off Center) ......................................................... 5-27
19
5.4.9 Displaying other ship’s trails (Trails) ........................................................................... 5-28
5.4.9.1 Trails motion mode ............................................................................................... 5-28 20
5.4.9.2 Changing motion mode of trails ............................................................................ 5-30
5.4.9.3 Setting the length of the trail ................................................................................. 5-30
21
5.4.9.4 Clearing trails data ................................................................................................ 5-31 22
5.4.10 Doubling the size of radar image ................................................................................ 5-32
5.4.11 Hiding the heading line (HL OFF) ............................................................................... 5-34 23
5.4.12 Hiding graphics information on radar display ............................................................. 5-35
5.4.13 Setting true bearing..................................................................................................... 5-35
24
5.4.14 Setting own ship speed ............................................................................................... 5-36 25
5.4.14.1 Switching own ship speed device ......................................................................... 5-36
5.4.14.2 Entering the ship’s heading/own ship’s speed manually ...................................... 5-38 26
27

㻌 (1) Contents

7ZPNA4447E
Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS ............................................................... 6-1
6.1 Restrictions ........................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Collision Avoidance Issue (Explanation) ............................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 Collision Avoidance in Navigation ................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.2 Marine Accidents and Collisions ................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.3 Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance .......................................................................... 6-4
6.2.4 Relative Vector and True Vector ................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.5 Radar and Collision Avoidance ..................................................................................... 6-5
6.3 Displaying Symbols ............................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.1 Displaying/hiding target tracking symbols/AIS target symbols ..................................... 6-6
6.3.2 Types and Definitions of Target Tracking Symbols ....................................................... 6-6
6.3.3 Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols ............................................................... 6-7
6.3.4 About AIS AtoN (Aids to Navigation)........................................................................... 6-12
6.3.5 About AIS-SART Information ...................................................................................... 6-12
6.3.6 About Display Priority of AIS Targets .......................................................................... 6-13
6.3.7 Switching between Ground Vector and Water Vector ................................................. 6-14
6.3.8 Association Target Symbols ........................................................................................ 6-14
6.4 Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.4.1 Setting the Cursor Mode to AUTO Mode .................................................................... 6-15
6.4.2 Setting Vector .............................................................................................................. 6-15
6.4.2.1 Vector modes ........................................................................................................ 6-15
6.4.2.2 Setting vector mode .............................................................................................. 6-17
6.4.2.3 Vector Length (Vector Time) ................................................................................. 6-17
6.4.2.4 Setting the Vector Length ..................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.3 Setting collision decision criteria ................................................................................. 6-18
6.4.3.1 Setting CPA limit ................................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.3.2 Setting TCPA limit ................................................................................................. 6-19
6.4.4 Showing the CPA ring (RADAR only) ......................................................................... 6-20
6.5 Setting and Operating Target Tracking ............................................................................... 6-21
6.5.1 Acquiring target ........................................................................................................... 6-21
6.5.1.1 Automatic acquisition (automatic acquisition) mode ............................................ 6-21
6.5.1.2 ACQ MANUAL (manual acquisition) mode........................................................... 6-22
6.5.1.3 Using manual acquisition and auto acquisition together ...................................... 6-23
6.5.2 Setting up the automatic acquisition/activation zone (AZ) .......................................... 6-23
6.5.2.1 Using [New Target Warning] dialog box in the [Alert] menu ................................. 6-24
6.5.2.2 Using the cursor ................................................................................................... 6-25
6.5.2.3 Using the EBL/VRM dial for the setting ................................................................ 6-26
6.5.3 Tracked target information display .............................................................................. 6-27
6.5.4 Erasing unwanted tracked targets .............................................................................. 6-28
6.5.5 Displaying Target ID No. ............................................................................................. 6-29
6.5.6 Editing tracked target properties ................................................................................. 6-31
6.5.6.1 Adding Tracked Target ID Name .......................................................................... 6-31

Contents (2)
 6.5.6.2 Setting track color of tracked target ...................................................................... 6-33
6.5.7 Setting target for which ground is fixed to a reference target ..................................... 6-34
2
6.5.8 Operation Test for Target Tracking .............................................................................. 6-36 3
6.5.8.1 [Test Video] ........................................................................................................... 6-37
6.5.8.2 [TT Simulator] (Target tracking simulator) ............................................................ 6-38 4
6.5.8.3 [Gate Display] ....................................................................................................... 6-40
6.5.8.4 [Status] display ..................................................................................................... 6-42
5
6.6 Setting and Operating AIS .................................................................................................. 6-43 6
6.6.1 Enabling AIS Function ................................................................................................ 6-43
6.6.2 Activating AIS targets (Activate AIS) ........................................................................... 6-43
7
6.6.2.1 Manual activation .................................................................................................. 6-43
8
6.6.2.2 Automatic activation ............................................................................................. 6-44
6.6.3 Deactivating AIS targets .............................................................................................. 6-44 9
6.6.4 Displaying AIS information .......................................................................................... 6-45
6.6.5 Displaying Target ID No. ............................................................................................. 6-53
10
6.6.6 Checking and setting AIS target property ................................................................... 6-54 11
6.6.6.1 Setting track color of AIS target ............................................................................ 6-54
6.6.7 Conditions for deciding AIS target to be lost ............................................................... 6-55 12
6.7 Alert Display ........................................................................................................................ 6-56
13
6.7.1 Danger target alarm (CPA/TCPA) ............................................................................... 6-57
6.7.2 Alarm for new target acquired in automatic acquisition guard zone (New target) ...... 6-58 14
6.7.3 Lost target notification (Lost) ...................................................................................... 6-59
6.7.4 Target Tracking function alarm (TT Data) ................................................................... 6-60
15
6.7.5 Gyro set notification (Set Gyro) .................................................................................. 6-60 16
6.8 Track Function..................................................................................................................... 6-61
6.8.1 Setting the Past position ............................................................................................. 6-61 17
6.8.2 Setting the other ship's tracks ..................................................................................... 6-61
18
6.8.2.1 Setting track color ................................................................................................. 6-62
6.8.2.2 Turning on/off other ship's track function .............................................................. 6-62 19
6.8.2.3 Setting other ship's track colors ............................................................................ 6-62
6.8.2.4 Turning on/off other ship's track display ............................................................... 6-62 20
6.8.2.5 Setting up the display interval of other ship’s track .............................................. 6-63
21
6.8.2.6 Clearing other ship's track .................................................................................... 6-63
6.8.2.7 Saving and loading other ship's track data ........................................................... 6-63 22
6.9 Entering Own Ship's AIS Voyage Data ............................................................................... 6-64
6.10 Editing and Sending AIS Messages .................................................................................... 6-65
23
6.11 AIS Message Tray ............................................................................................................... 6-68 24
6.11.1 Displaying the AIS message tray ................................................................................ 6-68
6.11.2 Switching message display ......................................................................................... 6-70
25
6.11.3 Sending a message in the message tray after editing ................................................ 6-71 26
6.12 Highlighting TT/AIS Symbols .............................................................................................. 6-72
6.13 Trial Maneuvering................................................................................................................ 6-74 27

(3) Contents
 6.13.1 Outline of Trial Maneuvering ....................................................................................... 6-74
6.13.2 Performing a trial maneuver ....................................................................................... 6-77
6.14 Displaying the TT/AIS Target List ........................................................................................ 6-79
6.14.1 Displaying TT/AIS List ................................................................................................. 6-79
6.14.1.1 Switching between a standard window and an extended window ....................... 6-80
6.14.2 TT List ......................................................................................................................... 6-82
6.14.3 AIS List ........................................................................................................................ 6-83
6.15 Confirming Own Ship's AIS Information .............................................................................. 6-85
6.16 Displaying the Last Lost AIS Target .................................................................................... 6-86

Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display .............................................. 7-1

7.1 Radar Wave with the Horizon ............................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Intensity Reflected from the Target ....................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 Sea Clutter and Rain/Snow Clutter ....................................................................................... 7-5
7.3.1 Sea clutter ..................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.3.2 Rain and snow clutter ................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.3 Coping with sea clutter and rain/snow clutter ............................................................... 7-8
7.4 False Echoes ........................................................................................................................ 7-9
7.4.1 Shadow ......................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.2 Side lobe effect ............................................................................................................. 7-9
7.4.3 False echo by secondary reflection ............................................................................ 7-10
7.4.4 False echo by multiple reflection ................................................................................ 7-11
7.4.5 Second time echoes ................................................................................................... 7-11
7.4.6 Radar interference ...................................................................................................... 7-12
7.5 Radar Transponder (SART) Screen Display ....................................................................... 7-13
7.6 Display of AIS-SART ........................................................................................................... 7-15
7.6.1 Radar screen display example ................................................................................... 7-15
7.6.2 Numeric data display example .................................................................................... 7-16

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) ........................................................... 8-1

8.1 General Flowchart ................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Work Flowchart While Sailing ....................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Starting and Preparing the ECDIS ........................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.1 Powering on and starting .............................................................................................. 8-3
8.2.2 Starting the ECDIS ........................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.2.1 Starting the ECDIS from the Task Menu ................................................................. 8-4
8.2.2.2 Starting ECDIS from a non-ECDIS task screen ..................................................... 8-5
8.2.3 Entering an ARCS PIN Number (ARCS Only) .............................................................. 8-6
8.3 Moving the Chart ................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.3.1 Moving the chart with the [HOME] button ..................................................................... 8-7
8.3.2 Moving the chart with the cross-hair cursor .................................................................. 8-8
8.3.3 Moving the chart with the hand cursor .......................................................................... 8-9
8.3.4 Switching a chart to be displayed by [My Port List] .................................................... 8-10

Contents (4)
 8.3.5 Displaying the chart by entering the position .............................................................. 8-11
8.4 Zooming In/Out the Chart.................................................................................................... 8-12
2
8.4.1 Enlarging a Selected Area (S-57/C-MAP Only) .......................................................... 8-12 3
8.4.2 Enlarging/reducing a chart with the Zoom function .................................................... 8-14
8.4.2.1 Enlarging/reducing with the [ZOOM IN]/[ZOOM OUT] key on the trackball 4
operation unit (S-57/C-MAP only)......................................................................... 8-14
5
8.4.2.2 Enlarging/reducing with the zoom slider (S-57/C-MAP only) ............................... 8-14
8.4.2.3 Enlarging/reducing with the [Large]/[Small] buttons (RNC only) .......................... 8-16 6
8.4.3 Switching between scale and range (S-57/C-MAP only) ............................................ 8-17
8.5 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)............................................................ 8-18
7
8.5.1 Switching object display .............................................................................................. 8-19 8
8.5.2 Customizing object display ......................................................................................... 8-20
8.6 Selecting Motion/Bearing Mode .......................................................................................... 8-22 9
8.6.1 Setting motion mode ................................................................................................... 8-23
10
8.6.2 Setting Bearing mode (S-57/C-MAP only) .................................................................. 8-25
8.7 Registering and Displaying My Port List ............................................................................. 8-27 11
8.7.1 Registering to My Port List .......................................................................................... 8-27
8.7.2 Deleting a port ............................................................................................................. 8-28
12
8.8 Selecting a S-57 chart ......................................................................................................... 8-29 13
8.9 Selecting an ARCS chart..................................................................................................... 8-30
8.9.1 Selecting charts from all.............................................................................................. 8-30
14
8.9.2 Changing active panels (ARCS only) ......................................................................... 8-31 15
8.9.3 Changing a low resolution chart (ARCS only) ............................................................ 8-32
8.9.4 Changing a high resolution chart (ARCS only) ............................................................... 8-33 16
8.9.5 Displaying the note and diagram (ARCS only) ............................................................ 8-34
8.10 Multi View Display and Wide Range View Window Display of Charts ................................ 8-35
17
8.10.1 Display of multi view ................................................................................................... 8-36 18
8.10.1.1 Displaying multi view ............................................................................................ 8-36
8.10.1.2 Multi view operation procedure............................................................................. 8-38 19
8.11 Verifying Object Information (Pick Report Function) ........................................................... 8-42 20
8.11.1 Pick Report of the S-57 chart...................................................................................... 8-42
8.11.1.1 Displaying a Pick Report of the S-57 chart........................................................... 8-42 21
8.11.1.2 Verifying Object Information ................................................................................. 8-44
8.11.1.4 Verifying Chart Update History ............................................................................. 8-50
22
8.11.2 Pick report of the C-MAP chart ................................................................................... 8-51 23
8.11.3 Pick report of the ARCS chart ..................................................................................... 8-52
8.12 Marking the Position of Own Ship with an Event Mark ....................................................... 8-53 24
8.13 Displaying Radar Images on a Chart by Overlaying ........................................................... 8-54 25
8.13.1 Turning On/Off overlay display ................................................................................... 8-55
8.13.2 Turning On/Off range ring display ............................................................................... 8-57 26
8.13.3 Turning On/Off bearing scale ...................................................................................... 8-58
8.13.4 Radar image adjustment ............................................................................................. 8-59
27

(5) Contents
 8.14 Setting a true bearing .......................................................................................................... 8-60
8.15 Setting an own ship’s speed ............................................................................................... 8-61
8.15.1 Switching an own ship’s speed sensor ....................................................................... 8-61
8.15.2 Entering the ship’s heading/own ship’s speed manually ............................................ 8-62

Section 9 Route Planning.............................................................................. 9-1

9.1 Overview of the Route Planning Function ............................................................................. 9-2
9.2 Setting Route Display............................................................................................................ 9-3
9.2.1 Setting [Route] after selecting [View] - [Options] on the menu ..................................... 9-3
9.2.2 Setting [Settings] - [Route] on the menu ....................................................................... 9-5
9.3 Starting and Ending the [Route Planning] Dialog Box .......................................................... 9-9
9.3.1 Starting the [Route Planning] dialog box ...................................................................... 9-9
9.3.2 Ending the [Route Planning] dialog box ....................................................................... 9-9
9.4 Name and Function of Each Section of the [Route Planning] dialog Box ........................... 9-10
9.4.1 Route Planning bar ..................................................................................................... 9-10
9.4.2 Route planning tab ...................................................................................................... 9-15
9.5 Saving a Route .................................................................................................................... 9-17
9.6 Planning a Route by Using Table Editing ............................................................................ 9-21
9.6.1 Table editing operation flow ........................................................................................ 9-21
9.6.1.1 Creating a new route file ....................................................................................... 9-21
9.6.1.2 Editing a route ...................................................................................................... 9-22
9.6.2 Creating a new route file by table editing.................................................................... 9-23
9.6.3 Deleting WPT data ...................................................................................................... 9-26
9.6.4 Editing a route by table editing ................................................................................... 9-26
9.6.4.1 Inserting WPT ....................................................................................................... 9-29
9.6.4.2 Deleting WPT ....................................................................................................... 9-29
9.6.4.3 Dividing a leg ........................................................................................................ 9-30
9.6.4.4 Copying the entire route ....................................................................................... 9-30
9.6.4.5 Pasting the copied route ....................................................................................... 9-31
9.6.4.6 Inserting the other route ....................................................................................... 9-31
9.6.4.7 Insert the same WPT as the last WPT ................................................................. 9-32
9.7 Planning a New Route by Graphic Editing .......................................................................... 9-33
9.7.1 Graphic editing operation flow .................................................................................... 9-33
9.7.1.1 Creating a new route file ....................................................................................... 9-33
9.7.1.2 Editing a route file ................................................................................................. 9-34
9.7.2 Creating a new route file by graphic editing ............................................................... 9-35
9.7.2.1 Creating a route by using EBL/VRM .................................................................... 9-37
9.7.2.2 Creating a route by using the assistant circle function ......................................... 9-39
9.7.3 Editing a route by graphic editing ............................................................................... 9-41
9.7.3.1 Inserting a WPT between WPTs ........................................................................... 9-43
9.7.3.2 Moving a WPT ...................................................................................................... 9-44
9.7.3.3 Changing XTD (cross track limit) .......................................................................... 9-46
9.7.3.4 Adding WPT on the context menu ........................................................................ 9-47

Contents (6)
 9.7.3.5 Moving WPT on the context menu ....................................................................... 9-48
9.7.3.6 Deleting WPT on the context menu ...................................................................... 9-49
2
9.7.3.7 Copying and pasting a route on the context menu ............................................... 9-50 3
9.7.3.8 Rotating a route on the context menu .................................................................. 9-51
9.7.3.9 Moving a route on the context menu .................................................................... 9-52 4
9.7.3.10 Inserting other route on the context menu ............................................................ 9-53
9.7.3.11 Inserting WPT between WPTs on the context menu ............................................ 9-54
5
9.7.3.12 Dividing a leg on the context menu ...................................................................... 9-56 6
9.7.3.13 Changing XTD (cross track limit) on the context menu ........................................ 9-57
9.8 Creating an Alternate Route ................................................................................................ 9-59
7
9.8.1 Creating an alternate route ......................................................................................... 9-61
8
9.8.2 Saving an alternate route ............................................................................................ 9-62
9.8.2.1 Overwriting without changing the file name .......................................................... 9-62 9
9.8.2.2 Saving the file by naming ..................................................................................... 9-63
9.9 Checking Route Data .......................................................................................................... 9-64
10
9.9.1 Checking a route based on the safety standards ....................................................... 9-64 11
9.9.2 Checking a route based on the limits.......................................................................... 9-68
9.10 Navigation Calculation Function ......................................................................................... 9-70
12
9.10.1 ROT (Rate of Turn) ..................................................................................................... 9-70 13
9.10.2 ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) .................................................................................. 9-70
9.10.3 TWOL (Time to Go)..................................................................................................... 9-71 14
9.11 Importing/Exporting a Route File ........................................................................................ 9-72
9.11.1 Importing a route file ................................................................................................... 9-72
15
9.11.2 Exporting a route file ................................................................................................... 9-73 16
9.12 Error Messages that are Displayed when a Route is Created ............................................ 9-74
17
Section 10 Route Monitoring ........................................................................ 10-1
10.1 Route Monitoring ................................................................................................................. 10-1
18
10.1.1 Starting route monitoring ............................................................................................. 10-1 19
10.1.2 Ending route monitoring .............................................................................................. 10-2
10.2 Selecting and Deleting Route Files ..................................................................................... 10-3 20
10.2.1 Selecting a route to be displayed ................................................................................ 10-3
21
10.2.2 Deleting a route file ..................................................................................................... 10-4
10.3 [Voyage Information] (Voyage Monitoring Information) Dialog Box .................................... 10-5 22
10.4 [Voyage Calculation] Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 10-11
23
10.4.1 Calculating a schedule .............................................................................................. 10-13
10.4.2 Calculating a distance ............................................................................................... 10-14 24
10.4.3 Example of distance calculation ............................................................................... 10-16
10.5 Comparing the Data between the Planned Route and the Actual Route .......................... 10-18
25
10.6 Verifying Detail Information of WPT .................................................................................. 10-20 26
Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor .................................................. 11-1 27
11.1 Setting a Dragging Anchor Monitoring Area ........................................................................ 11-2

(7) Contents
 11.1.1 Setting a dragging anchor monitoring circle ............................................................... 11-2
11.1.2 Setting a dragging anchor monitoring polygon ........................................................... 11-4
11.2 Starting and Ending Dragging Anchor Monitoring ............................................................... 11-5
11.2.1 Starting dragging anchor monitoring ........................................................................... 11-5
11.2.2 Ending dragging anchor monitoring ............................................................................ 11-6
11.3 Editing/Deleting a Dragging Anchor Monitoring Area on the Chart ..................................... 11-7
11.3.1 Changing a size of a dragging anchor monitoring circle on the chart ........................ 11-7
11.3.2 Changing a size of a dragging anchor monitoring circle on the context menu ........... 11-8
11.3.3 Changing a shape of a dragging anchor monitoring polygon on the chart ................. 11-8
11.3.4 Changing a shape of a dragging anchor monitoring polygon on the context menu ... 11-9

Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option) ................................................................. 12-1

12.1 Flow of Starting Automatic Sailing ....................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Selecting a Route ................................................................................................................ 12-6
12.2.1 Using the existing planned route ................................................................................ 12-6
12.2.2 Creating a new route .................................................................................................. 12-8
12.3 Selecting a Waypoint at which Automatic Sailing Starts ................................................... 12-10
12.4 Starting Automatic Sailing ................................................................................................. 12-12
12.5 Stopping Automatic Sailing ............................................................................................... 12-14
12.6 Alerts at Automatic Sailing ................................................................................................ 12-15

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) .............................................................. 13-1

13.1 Updating a Chart Manually ................................................................................................. 13-3
13.2 Displaying/Searching an S-57 Chart [Select S-57 Chart] ................................................... 13-4
13.2.1 Displaying a chart ....................................................................................................... 13-4
13.2.2 Search a chart ............................................................................................................. 13-5
13.2.2.1 Searching the position that is clicked on by the cursor ........................................ 13-5
13.2.2.2 Searching by using a chart name ......................................................................... 13-6
13.3 Displaying a Chart by Inputting a Position .......................................................................... 13-7
13.4 Confirming/Accepting/Rejecting an S-57 Updated Chart.................................................... 13-8
13.5 Displaying a Date-dependent Object ................................................................................ 13-10
13.6 Displaying a Chart Boundary ............................................................................................ 13-12
13.6.1 Setting a boundary to be displayed on the chart ...................................................... 13-12
13.6.2 Displaying chart information ..................................................................................... 13-13
13.7 Confirming Temporary/Preliminary Information of an ARCS Chart ................................... 13-14
13.8 Adjusting an ARCS Chart Position .................................................................................... 13-15
13.8.1 Offsetting an ARCS chart .......................................................................................... 13-15
13.8.2 Transforming a geodetic datum of an ARCS chart to WGS-84 ................................ 13-17
13.9 Displaying a Chart Abbreviation List ................................................................................. 13-21
13.11 Displaying update data of the C-MAP chart ...................................................................... 13-27
13.12 Displaying license information of C-MAP .......................................................................... 13-29
13.12.1 Setting license information display to ON ................................................................. 13-29

Contents (8)
 13.12.2 C-MAP license information ....................................................................................... 13-30
13.12.2.1 License information display timing ................................................................. 13-30
2
13.12.2.2 License information ........................................................................................ 13-32 3
13.13 Displaying ECDIS Chart 1 ................................................................................................. 13-33
13.13.1 Import ECDIS Chart 1 ............................................................................................... 13-33 4
13.13.2 Confirm display of ECDIS Chart 1 ............................................................................ 13-34
5
13.14 Displaying differences at chart update .............................................................................. 13-36
13.14.1 Displaying differences at S-57 chart update ............................................................. 13-36 6
13.14.2 Displaying differences at C-MAP chart update ......................................................... 13-37
13.15 Chart pick report ................................................................................................................ 13-38
7
13.16 Maintaining a Chart ........................................................................................................... 13-39 8
Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually .................... 14-1 9
14.1 Creating/Editing a User Map ............................................................................................... 14-3
14.1.1 Display the "User Map" menu. .................................................................................... 14-4
10
14.1.2 Display the File Operation submenu........................................................................... 14-5 11
14.1.2.1 [File Operation] dialog box.................................................................................... 14-5
14.1.3 Creating a new user map ............................................................................................ 14-7 12
14.1.4 Editing the existing user map ...................................................................................... 14-8
14.1.4.1 Editing the user map that is currently displayed ................................................... 14-8
13
14.1.5 Displaying a user map ................................................................................................ 14-9 14
14.1.6 Operating a user map file ......................................................................................... 14-10
14.1.6.1 Deleting a user map file ...................................................................................... 14-10 15
14.1.6.2 Copying a user map file ...................................................................................... 14-10
16
14.1.6.3 Importing a user map file .................................................................................... 14-11
14.1.6.4 Exporting a user map file .................................................................................... 14-11 17
14.1.6.5 Merging multiple user map files .......................................................................... 14-12
14.1.6.6 Performing geodetic datum conversion .............................................................. 14-13
18
14.2 Using Map Creation Tools (User Map Creation/Editing) ................................................... 14-14 19
14.2.1 User map information bar ......................................................................................... 14-14
14.2.1.1 Displaying a user map information bar ............................................................... 14-14 20
14.2.2 Drawing toolbar ......................................................................................................... 14-15
21
14.2.3 Selecting an object type ............................................................................................ 14-16
14.2.3.1 Using a user map object ..................................................................................... 14-17 22
14.2.4 Selecting a color of an object .................................................................................... 14-18
14.2.5 Creating an object in the EBL/VRM mode ................................................................ 14-19 23
14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying latitude and longitude ........................................... 14-19
24
14.2.6.1 Creating an object of symbol/circle/ellipse/arc/arrow/text .................................. 14-20
14.2.6.2 Creating an object of simple line/polygon/highlight ............................................ 14-20 25
14.2.7 Deleting an object ..................................................................................................... 14-20
14.2.8 Object property dialog box ........................................................................................ 14-21
26
14.2.8.1 Selecting an object ............................................................................................. 14-21 27
14.2.8.2 Setting a comment .............................................................................................. 14-22

(9) Contents
 14.2.9 Changing an object display scale range ................................................................... 14-23
14.2.10 Moving an object ....................................................................................................... 14-23
14.3 Updating a Chart Manually (ARCS) (ECDIS Screen Only) ............................................... 14-25
14.3.1 Displaying the Manual Update submenu .................................................................. 14-26
14.3.2 Selecting a chart to be updated ................................................................................ 14-27
14.3.2.1 Searching the position that is clicked on with the cursor .................................... 14-28
14.3.2.2 Searching a chart with the chart name ............................................................... 14-28
14.3.2.3 Displaying the chart screen that is selected from the list ................................... 14-28
14.3.3 Updating a chart manually ........................................................................................ 14-29
14.3.4 Displaying the selected chart only ............................................................................ 14-30
14.3.5 Displaying the object/redisplaying the hidden object ................................................ 14-30
14.4 How to Use the Map Creation Tools (At Manual Update of ARCS) .................................. 14-31
14.4.1 Deleting or hiding an object (ARCS/C-MAP) ............................................................ 14-31
14.4.2 Selecting an object type ............................................................................................ 14-32
14.5 Creating an Object(At Manual Update of ARCS) .............................................................. 14-33
14.5.1 Creating a symbol object (Symbol) ........................................................................... 14-34
14.5.1.1 Creating an object by specifying the latitude and longitude ............................... 14-34
14.5.1.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation ...................................................... 14-35
14.5.2 Creating a simple line and Alerts line (Line object) ................................................... 14-36
14.5.2.1 Creating a vertex by entering the position .......................................................... 14-39
14.5.2.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation ...................................................... 14-39
14.5.3 Creating a circle, ellipse, and an arc (Line object) .................................................... 14-41
14.5.3.1 Creating an object by specifying a position for the center and size of the
object .................................................................................................................. 14-43
14.5.4 Creating a polygon and Alerts area (Area object) ..................................................... 14-44
14.5.4.1 Creating a vertex by entering the position .......................................................... 14-46
14.5.4.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation ...................................................... 14-47
14.5.5 Creating circle, ellipse, and fan areas (Area object) ................................................. 14-49
14.5.5.1 Creating an object by specifying the center position and the object size ........... 14-51
14.5.6 Creating a text (Text object) ...................................................................................... 14-52
14.5.6.1 Creating a text by specifying the latitude and longitude ..................................... 14-53
14.5.6.2 Creating a text with EBL/VRM operation ............................................................ 14-53
14.5.6.3 Editing a text ....................................................................................................... 14-54
14.5.6.4 Editing a template ............................................................................................... 14-54
14.5.6.5 Changing a text angle ......................................................................................... 14-56
14.5.7 Creating an arrow (Line object) ................................................................................ 14-57
14.5.7.1 Creating an object by specifying the starting point/ending point position
coordinates ......................................................................................................... 14-58
14.5.7.2 Drawing an object with EBL/VRM operation ...................................................... 14-59
14.5.8 Creating Mariner's Mark/Line drawing objects (ECDIS screen only)........................ 14-60
14.5.8.1 Information mark ................................................................................................. 14-60
14.5.8.2 Clearing line ........................................................................................................ 14-62
14.5.8.3 Tidal Stream mark............................................................................................... 14-65

Contents (10)
 14.5.8.4 Highlighted display ............................................................................................. 14-67
14.6 Collective Deletion of Objects [Delete by Type/Color] ...................................................... 14-73
2
14.7 Managing/Editing Objects [Mark Line/List]........................................................................ 14-74 3
14.7.1 Displaying the [Mark/Line List] dialog box ................................................................ 14-74
14.7.2 Displaying a user map list ......................................................................................... 14-75
4
14.7.2.1 Displaying an object on a chart .......................................................................... 14-75
5
14.7.2.2 Deleting an object ............................................................................................... 14-76
14.7.3 Displaying a Mariner's Mark/Line List (ECDIS screen only) ..................................... 14-76 6
14.7.3.1 Displaying an object on a chart .......................................................................... 14-76
14.7.3.2 Deleting an object ............................................................................................... 14-76
7
14.7.3.3 Deleting objects collectively from an object list .................................................. 14-77 8
14.7.4 Displaying a manual update list (ECDIS screen only) .............................................. 14-77
14.7.4.1 Displaying an object on a chart .......................................................................... 14-78 9
14.7.4.2 Hiding an object .................................................................................................. 14-78
14.7.4.3 Redisplaying an object ....................................................................................... 14-78
10
14.7.4.4 Specifying a chart type ....................................................................................... 14-78 11
14.8 Updating a Chart Manually (S-57/S-63/C-MAP) ............................................................... 14-79
14.8.1 Displaying the Manual Update submenu .................................................................. 14-80
12
14.8.2 Selecting a chart to be updated ................................................................................ 14-82 13
14.8.2.1 Displaying a chart list for the C-MAP chart ......................................................... 14-83
14.8.2.2 Searching the position that is clicked on with the cursor .................................... 14-83 14
14.8.2.3 Searching a chart with the chart name ............................................................... 14-84
14.8.2.4 Absence/expiration of the C-MAP chart license ................................................. 14-84
15
14.8.3 Updating a chart manually ........................................................................................ 14-84 16
14.8.4 Displaying selected chart only .................................................................................. 14-84
14.8.5 Entering an editor of the manual update .................................................................. 14-85 17
14.9 How to Use the Map Creation Tools （at Manual Update of S-57/S-63/C-MAP） ............. 14-86
18
14.9.1 Deleting or hiding an object (S-57/S-63) .................................................................. 14-86
14.9.2 Selecting an object type ............................................................................................ 14-87 19
14.10 Creating an Object（S-57/S-63/C-MAP） ............................................................................ 14-88
14.10.1 Creating a symbol object (Symbol) ........................................................................... 14-89
20
14.10.1.1 Creating an object by specifying the latitude and longitude ........................... 14-90 21
14.10.1.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation .................................................. 14-90
14.10.2 Creating a simple line and Alerts line (Line object) ................................................... 14-92 22
14.10.2.1 Creating a vertex by entering the position...................................................... 14-95
23
14.10.2.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation .................................................. 14-95
14.10.3 Creating a circle, ellipse, and an arc (Line object) .................................................... 14-96 24
14.10.3.1 Creating an object by specifying a position for the center and size of the
object .................................................................................................................. 14-98 25
14.10.4 Creating a polygon and Alerts area (Area object) ..................................................... 14-99
26
14.10.4.1 Creating a vertex by entering the position.................................................... 14-101
14.10.4.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation ................................................ 14-102 27
14.10.5 Creating circle, ellipse, and fan areas (Area object) ............................................... 14-103

(11) Contents
 14.10.5.1 Creating an object by specifying the center position and the object size .... 14-105
14.10.6 Creating a text (Text object) .................................................................................... 14-106
14.10.6.1 Creating a text by specifying the latitude and longitude............................... 14-107
14.10.6.2 Creating a text with EBL/VRM operation...................................................... 14-107
14.10.6.3 Editing a text ................................................................................................. 14-108
14.10.6.4 Editing a template......................................................................................... 14-108
14.10.6.5 Changing a text angle .................................................................................. 14-110
14.10.7 Creating an arrow (Line object) ...............................................................................14-111
14.10.7.1 Creating an object by specifying the starting point/ending point position
coordinates ....................................................................................................... 14-112
14.10.7.2 Drawing an object with EBL/VRM operation ................................................ 14-113
14.10.8 Property of a Sounding object ................................................................................ 14-114
14.10.9 Editing attributes of an object ................................................................................. 14-115
14.10.9.1 Type E .......................................................................................................... 14-115
14.10.9.2 Type L ........................................................................................................... 14-116
14.10.9.3 Type F .......................................................................................................... 14-116
14.10.9.4 Type I ............................................................................................................ 14-117
14.10.9.5 Type A/S ....................................................................................................... 14-117
14.10.10 Highlighted display of an object ........................................................................ 14-118
14.10.11 Reviewing manual update ................................................................................ 14-121
14.10.12 Object Delete function ...................................................................................... 14-125
14.10.13 Object Remove function ................................................................................... 14-126
14.11 Displaying a Pick Report of Manual Update Objects .......................................................... 14-127

Section 15 Logbook ....................................................................................... 15-1

15.1 Browsing a Logbook............................................................................................................ 15-1
15.1.1 Event detail information .............................................................................................. 15-3
15.2 Editing a Logbook ............................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.1 Adding an event .......................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.2 Editing event detail information ................................................................................... 15-6
15.3 Outputting Event Data ......................................................................................................... 15-7
15.3.1 Outputting a logbook as a file ..................................................................................... 15-7

Section 16 Setting up Screen View .............................................................. 16-1

16.1 Setting Chart Display Mode (Multi View Mode) (ECDIS only) ............................................ 16-3
16.1.1 Setting Multi-Screen.................................................................................................... 16-3
16.2 Setting Screen Display Options .......................................................................................... 16-4
16.2.1 Setting up the display of Own Ship symbol ................................................................ 16-7
16.2.2 Setting up the display of ECDIS own ship’s track ..................................................... 16-11
16.2.3 Setting up the display of RADAR own ship’s track ................................................... 16-13
16.2.4 Setting up the display of Route Monitoring ............................................................... 16-15
16.2.5 Changing the color of the alternative route ............................................................... 16-17
16.2.6 Setting up the display of User Map ........................................................................... 16-18

Contents (12)
 16.2.7 Setting up the display of Mariner's Mark/Line ........................................................... 16-20
16.2.8 Setting up Radar Overlay and Transparency of Echo/Trails .................................... 16-21
2
16.2.9 Setting up the display of TT/AIS Target .................................................................... 16-22 3
16.2.10 Setting up the display of Other Ship’s Track ............................................................. 16-25
16.2.11 Setting up the display of Chart Common .................................................................. 16-30 4
16.2.12 Setting up the display of RADAR Chart .................................................................... 16-39
16.2.13 Setting up the display of ECDIS Chart...................................................................... 16-42
5
16.2.14 Setting up AIO/T&P display ...................................................................................... 16-52 6
16.2.15 Set display of danger detection highlight .................................................................. 16-53
16.2.16 Setting up the display of range/bearing measurement function ............................... 16-54 7
16.2.17 Setting up the display of Unit of Setting Value .......................................................... 16-55
8
16.2.18 Setting up display of Own Ship Track Control, display format of Own Ship/Cursor
Position and display of Sub-Information dialog ........................................................ 16-57 9
16.2.19 Setting up the Water Depth display .......................................................................... 16-58
16.2.20 Setting up the Rudder graph ..................................................................................... 16-59
10
16.2.21 Setting up the Gyro/Rudder graph ............................................................................ 16-60 11
16.2.22 Setting up the Engine Graph .................................................................................... 16-61
16.2.23 Setting up the graph range of the ROT slide bar ...................................................... 16-62 12
Section 17 Setting up Alerts ......................................................................... 17-1 13
17.1 Selecting Setting Items ....................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1.1 Displaying the [Alert] dialog box ................................................................................. 17-1
14
17.1.2 Selecting a setting item ............................................................................................... 17-2 15
17.2 Collision Avoidance Alert Generation Conditions ................................................................ 17-4
17.2.1 Setting the CPA/TCPA limit values ............................................................................. 17-4
16
17.2.2 Setting the status of the AIS target that is targeted for lost warning ........................... 17-5 17
17.3 New Target Alarm Generation Conditions ........................................................................... 17-6
17.3.1 Switching AZ1/AZ2 to enable/disable ......................................................................... 17-7 18
17.3.1.1 Enabling AZ1 or AZ2 ............................................................................................. 17-7
19
17.3.1.2 Disabling AZ1 or AZ2 ............................................................................................ 17-7
17.4 Depth/Safety Contour Alert Generation Conditions ............................................................ 17-8 20
17.5 Setting Up Look-ahead ..................................................................................................... 17-10
17.5.1 Switching to enable/disable a danger detection vector/sector ................................. 17-11
21
17.5.2 Setting up the size of a danger detection vector ...................................................... 17-11 22
17.5.3 Setting up the size of a danger detection sector ...................................................... 17-11
17.6 Special Condition Area Generation Conditions ................................................................. 17-12 23
17.7 Track Control Alert Generation Conditions ....................................................................... 17-14 24
17.8 Position Integrity Alert Generation Conditions .................................................................. 17-15
17.8.1 Setting up the generation condition of the Position monitor warning ....................... 17-15 25
17.8.2 Setting up the HDOP exceeded caution generation condition ................................. 17-16
26
17.9 Setting up Alert Processing ............................................................................................... 17-17
17.10 Setting Up the Alert Timer ................................................................................................. 17-18 27

(13) Contents
 17.10.1 Setting up the timer ................................................................................................... 17-18
17.10.2 Setting up the time .................................................................................................... 17-18

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode .................................................. 18-1

18.1 Basic Operation of the [Settings] Dialog Box ...................................................................... 18-1
18.2 Basic Settings for Radar Signal Processing ....................................................................... 18-4
18.3 Setting Radar Signal Processing ........................................................................................ 18-6
18.4 Presetting Each Observation Scene ................................................................................... 18-8
18.5 Setting Other Ship’s Radar Trails ...................................................................................... 18-14
18.6 Setting Radar Antennas .................................................................................................... 18-15
18.6.1 Setting radar antennas ............................................................................................. 18-15
18.7 Setting Associations .......................................................................................................... 18-16
18.8 Setting Own Ship's Dynamic Trait ..................................................................................... 18-18
18.9 Setting Operation Tests ..................................................................................................... 18-19
18.10 Setting AIS/TT Filters ....................................................................................................... 18-21
18.11 Setting the Target Track Function to ON/OFF ................................................................... 18-23
18.12 Setting Parameter Values at Route Plan Creation ............................................................ 18-24
18.13 Setting Automatic Sailing Parameter Values..................................................................... 18-26
18.14 Setting the Temporary Route Setting Values .................................................................... 18-29
18.15 Setting Chart Operation .................................................................................................... 18-31
18.16 Setting Logbook ................................................................................................................ 18-34
18.17 Setting NAVTEX ................................................................................................................ 18-37
18.18 Setting Navigation Equipment ........................................................................................... 18-42
18.19 Setting Colors and Brightness .......................................................................................... 18-43
18.20 Setting Sounds .................................................................................................................. 18-47
18.21 Setting Key Assignment .................................................................................................... 18-50
18.22 Setting Preferences Information ....................................................................................... 18-54
18.23 Setting Screen Capture ..................................................................................................... 18-63

Contents (14)
 1
Section 5 Basic Operation of the 2
Radar 3
4
5
5
Use the radar as your navigation aid. 7
Final decision on the ship operation must be made by the ship operator himself.
If you depend entirely on the radar information for the final decision on the ship 8
operation, such an accident as collision and stranding may occur.
9
If momentary power interruption has occurred on the ship during the radar operation,
10
the image may distort or may not appear. If this occurs, turn on the power again.
11
12
5.1 Overview Flowchart 13
14
15
• Do no put anything on the operation section. 16
In particular, if a hot object is placed on the operation section, deformation is likely
to occur. 17
• Do not allow a heavy impact to be applied to the operation section, trackball or
dial.
18
A trouble may occur.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-1 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
 Power ON this system and start the radar. Refer to "5.2.1 Powering on and starting".

Adjust reception gain, sea clutter and rain/snow Refer to "5.3 Observation Environment and
Image Adjustment".
clutter so that the observation range as well as the
target display become the clearest.

Acquire data, and then measure the range and Refer to "5.4 General Radar Operation".

bearing of the target.

Refer to "5.2.2 Exiting radar operation".

Exit the operation of the Radar.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-2

 1
5.2 Starting and Shutting Down the 2
Radar 3
5.2.1 Powering on and starting 4
Note
5
• Wait for about 2 seconds before turning on the power again.
5
• Immediately after the radar is installed, at start of the system after it has not been used for a
long time, or after the magnetron is replaced, preheat the equipment in the standby state for 20 7
to 30 minutes before setting it into the transmit state.
If the preheating time is short, the magnetron causes sparks, resulting in its unstable oscillation. 8
• Start transmission on a short pulse range and change the range to the long pulse ranges in
9
turn. If the transmission is unstable in the meantime, immediately place the system back into
the standby state and maintain it in the standby state for 5 to 10 minutes before restarting the 10
operation. Repeat these steps until the operation are stabilized.
11
1 Check that the ship’s mains are turned on.
12
2 Press the Power button on the operation unit. 13
This equipment starts and Task Menu appears on the screen.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-3 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
 3 Click on the [Collision Avoidance (RADAR)] button on Task Menu.

The RADAR screen appears.

The preheating time is displayed at the center of the screen.

Preheating time

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-4

 1
When the magnetron radar antenna is connected, “Preheat” is displayed on the Standby/Send
switching button. 2
3
4
5
5
7
8
4 Wait until preheating is complete.
9
When the preheating time expires, the preheating time display disappears, and the display of 10
the Standby/Transmit switch button changes from "Preheat" to "Standby".
11
5 Click on the Standby/Transmit switch button.
Radar transmission starts and the radar antenna rotates. 12
The display of the Standby/Transmit switch button changes from "Standby" to "Transmit".
13
Note
Even if the Standby/Transmit switch button is clicked on while "Preheat" is being displayed, radar
14
transmission cannot be performed. 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-5 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
5.2.2 Exiting radar operation
1 Click on the Standby/Transmit switch button in Radar system information.
Radar transmission stops and the rotation of the radar antenna stops.
The display of the Standby/Transmit switch button changes from "Transmit" to "Standby".

Memo
If observation using the radar is being scheduled within a comparably short period of time,
keep this state. Observation can be started immediately by just clicking on the
Standby/Transmit switch button.

2 Press the Power button on the operation unit.

The power to this equipment is turned OFF.

Before starting maintenance, turn off power. Cut off all the power
supplies to the equipment.
Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the
power switch is turned off, and conducting maintenance work may result
in electric shock, equipment failure, or accidents.

When turning off the power supply, do not hold down the power button of
the operation unit.
Otherwise, a trouble may occur due to termination failure.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-6

 1
5.3 Observation Environment and Image 2
Adjustment 3
5.3.1 Adjusting screen brightness 4
1 Adjust the screen brightness. 5
For the details of the adjustment, refer to "3.9 Adjusting the Brightness of the Screen and
Operation Unit". 5
In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust the brightness of the display that is high
enough to easily observe the radar display but does not glare.
7
8
5.3.2 Changing the observation range 9
1 Click on the Range Scale button in Presentation and mode information, and then
10
select Range from the pop-up menu.
11
Range Scale button
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
[Points on adjustments] 22
Increasing the observation range will enable a wider range to be observed.
However, a video image is small and the ability to detect targets near own ship decreases. 23
Therefore, when observing the vicinity of own ship, use the smaller observation range.
24
Decreasing the observation range will enable the vicinity of own ship to be enlarged. However,
caution must be taken because video images of the area beyond the observation range cannot 25
be displayed.
APP A
APP B
1
5-7 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
 Since the image within the previous observation range is displayed by
expanding/contracting for the period from immediately after switching of the
observation range from the next image updating, do not use this image for
navigation.
If this image is used for navigation, an accident may occur.

Note
An observation range under which the own ship display positon and the antenna position exceeds
the area 66% of the screen radius cannot be selected.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-8

 1
5.3.3 Adjusting tune
2
3
4
5
Normally, use the automatic tune mode.
If you use the manual tuning mode, an accident may be caused by 5
fluctuation of transmission and reception.
Use the manual tune mode only when best tuning is not possible in the
7
automatic tune mode due to deterioration of magnetron. 8
9
This equipment has the automatic tuning mode that performs tuning of the transmission frequency and
the reception frequency by automatic control, and the manual tuning mode in which the user performs 10
tuning. Normally use the automatic tune mode. Only when the best tuning is not possible by the
automatic tune mode due to the deterioration of magnetron, use the manual tune mode. 11
The tuning mode currently being used is displayed on the Tuning Mode button in Radar system
12
information.
13
Note
This function is effective when a magnetron radar antenna is connected. 14
15
When using the automatic tune mode 16
1 Click on the tune mode button.
[AUTO] (automatic) is displayed on the tune mode button.
17
Whenever the button is clicked on, the mode is switched between [AUTO] (automatic) and 18
[MAN] (manual).
19
20
Tuning Mode button
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-9 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
Using the manual tune mode
1 Click on the tune mode button.
[MAN] (manual) is displayed on the tune mode button.
Each time this button is clicked on, the display switches between [AUTO] (automatic) and
[MAN] (manual).

2 Move the fine tuning slider to the left and right sides.
The tuning status is displayed on the tuning bar according to the movement of the fine tuning
slider.
Make adjustments so that the display on the tuning bar indicates the maximum (the state in
which the tuning bar is positioned at the most right).

Tuning indication peak line

Indicates the maximum point of tuning.

This bar indicates the tuning state.

Fine tuning slider

5.3.4 Adjusting gain

Be sure to always adjust for the best gain.

If the gain is too high, undesired signals including receiver noise and
false echoes increase resulting in reduction of visibility of targets.
Otherwise, accidents may result.
On the contrary, if the gain is too low, targets including ships and
dangerous objects may not be clearly indicated.

Adjust the gain of the radar.

Memo
Set the optimum gain when making adjustments, giving consideration to the setting described in
"5.3.7 Adjusting to optimal images (Selection of observation scenes)".

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-10

 1
1 Drag the [Gain] (reception gain adjustment) slider dial in Radar signal information,
2
turn the trackball, and set up reception gain.
3
4
[Gain] (reception gain adjustment) slider
5
5
7
Moving the slider to the right increases gain.
Moving the slider to the left decreases gain. 8
The current reception gain level is indicated by the bar and a numeric value.
9
Current reception gain 10
11
[Points on adjustments]
As reception gain is increased, the range in which radar images can be observed widens; however, if 12
gain is increased too high, receiver noise, false echoes and other undesired signals will increase on
the screen, lowering the visibility of targets.
13
Also, it gets easier to see the screen display if gain is decreased to observe cluttered targets and close 14
range, but be careful not to overlook small targets.
15
Memo 16
If the optimal setting value was lost, it is recommended to reset to Initial setting value
the initial value and tune up again. 17
The initial setting value is indicated as shown in the figure at right.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-11 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
5.3.5 Rejecting sea clutter (Sea)

Never set the sea clutter suppression function before rejecting all the sea
clutters at close range. Detection of not only echoes from the wave and
so on but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects may be
suppressed.
When using the sea clutter suppression function, make sure to choose
the most appropriate setting for suppression.

Memo
Remove images by sea clutter by using the sea clutter suppression function.
When using the sea clutter suppression function, make the optimum setting, giving considerating
to the setting described in "5.3.7 Adjusting to optimal images (Selection of observation scenes)".

1 Drag the [Sea] (sea clutter adjustment) slider dial in Radar signal information, turn the
trackball, and adjust the amount of images by sea clutter displayed on the screen so
as to make display easy to observe.

[Sea] (sea clutter adjustment) slider

Moving the slider to the right decreases the amount of images by sea clutter.
Moving the slider to the left increases the amount of images by sea clutter.
The current level of sea clutter suppression is indicated by the bar and a numeric value.

Current level of sea clutter suppression

[Points on adjustments]
The sea clutter suppression function decreases the amount of images by sea clutter by lowering
reception gain at close range. When reception gain is lowered, the effectiveness of sea clutter
suppression increases; however, if excessive effect is applied, please note that targets having weak
signal strength such as buoys and small ships will disappear.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-12

 1
Memo
Initial setting value
2
If the optimal setting value was lost, it is recommended to reset to
the initial value and tune up again. 3
The initial setting value is indicated as shown in the figure at right.
4
5
Using the function of automatic sea clutter suppression mode 5
The sea clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of sea clutter is possible. Use this mode
when the sea clutter's intensity differs according to directional orientation. 7
1 Click on the Automatic Sea Clutter Suppression button. 8
[AUTO] (automatic) is displayed on the automatic sea clutter suppression button.
Each time this button is clicked on, the display switches between [AUTO] (automatic) and
9
[MAN] (manual).
10
11
12
Auto Sea Clutter Suppression button 13
14
2 Drag the sea clutter adjustment slider dial, turn the trackball, and adjust the amount of 15
images by sea clutter displayed on the screen.
Even while automatic sea clutter is being suppressed, the amount of images can be 16
fine-adjusted manually.
17
Canceling automatic sea clutter suppression
18
1 Click on the Automatic Sea Clutter Suppression button.
19
[MAN] (manual) is displayed on the automatic sea clutter suppression button.
20
Each time this button is clicked on, the display switches between [AUTO] (automatic) and
[MAN] (manual). 21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-13 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
5.3.6 Rejecting rain/snow clutter

Never set the rain/snow clutter suppression function too high.

Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but also images
targets such as other ships or dangerous objects may be suppressed.
When using the rain/snow clutter suppression function, make sure to
choose the most appropriate setting for suppression.

Memo
Remove images by rain/snow clutter by using the sea clutter suppression function.
When using the rain/snow clutter suppression function, make the optimum setting giving
considerating to the setting described in "5.3.7 Adjusting to optimal images (Selection of
observation scenes)".

1 Drag the [Rain] rain/snow clutter adjustment slider dial in Radar signal information,
turn the trackball, and adjust the amount of images by rain/snow clutter displayed on
the screen so as to make display easy to observe.

[Rain] (rain/snow clutter adjustment) slider

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-14

 1
Moving the slider to the right decreases the amount of images by rain/snow clutter.
Moving the slider to the left increases the amount of images by rain/snow clutter. 2
The current level of rain/snow clutter suppression is indicated by the bar and a numeric value.
3
Current level of rain/snow clutter suppression 4
5
[Points on adjustments]
5
When the amount of images by rain/snow clutter is decreased, the outlines of targets hidden by images
of rain/snow will appear, but please note that small targets may be missed. Since this can also reduce 7
sea clutter, it is effective to use it together with the sea clutter rejection function.
Normally, set the level of rain/snow clutter suppression to 0. 8
9
Memo
If the optimal setting value was lost, it is recommended to reset to Initial setting value
10
the initial value and tune up again.
The initial setting value is indicated as shown in the figure at right.
11
12
13
Using the automatic rain/snow clutter suppression mode
The rain/snow clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of rain/snow clutter is possible. Use 14
this mode when the rain/snow clutter's intensity differs according to directional orientation.
15
1 Click on the Automatic Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression button.
16
[AUTO] (automatic) is displayed on the automatic rain/snow clutter suppression
button. 17
Each time this button is clicked on, the display switches between [AUTO] (automatic) and
[MAN] (manual).
18
19
20
21
22
23
Auto Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression button
24
2 Click the left mouse button of the button on the [Rain] (rain/snow clutter adjustment) 25
slider, drag it with the trackball, and adjust the volume of the echo created by
rain/snow clutter that is displayed on the screen. APP A
Even while auto rain/snow clutter is being suppressed, the amount of images can be
fine-adjusted manually.
APP B
1
5-15 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
Canceling automatic rain/snow clutter suppression
1 Click on the Automatic Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression button.

[MAN] (manual) is displayed on the automatic rain/snow clutter suppression button.

Each time this button is clicked on, the display switches between [AUTO] (automatic) and
[MAN] (manual).

5.3.7 Adjusting to optimal images (Selection of

observation scenes)
To obtain optimal images, it is necessary to understand the features of radar signal processing settings
and perform adjustment according to the sea condition. When adjusting all setting values manually,
such adjustment may sometimes difficult even for experienced operators.

Thus, signal processing settings suitable for general usage are preset in the observation scene
selection function at the time of factory shipment. In many cases, optimal images can be obtained
quickly by selecting the observation scene corresponding to the current sea condition.

1 Click on the Observation Scene Selection button in Radar signal information.

Observation Scene Selection button

The [Observation Scene Selection] dialog is displayed.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-16

 1
2 Select the observation scene corresponding to the current sea condition
2
Refer to the following table about the definitions of observation scene.
3
4
5
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Observation
Scene
Definition 18
Standard Standard
Coast Coastal navigation 19
Use this scene to monitor a relatively short range, for example, bays and coasts
where many boats and ships are running. (Importance is attached to resolution.) 20
Open-sea Open-sea navigation
Use this scene to monitor a relatively long range, for example, the open-sea.
(Importance is attached to long range gain)
21
Fishnet Fishnet
Use this scene to detect small targets such as fishnets of round haul netters hidden
22
by sea clutter returns. (Importance is attached to sea clutter suppression, and gain to
moving targets lowers.) 23
Storm Storm
Use this scene when many rain/snow clutters or sea clutter are detected in stormy 24
weather. (Importance is attached to rain/snow clutter and sea clutter suppression,

Calm
and gain slightly lowers.)
Calm
25
Use this scene when only a few rain/snow clutter or sea clutter are detected.
Rain Rain
APP A
Use this scene when sea clutter is not strong but rain/snow clutter is strong.
(Importance is attached to rain/snow clutter suppression, and gain slightly lowers.) APP B
1
5-17 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
 Observation
Definition
Scene
Bird Bird
Use this scene to detect a flock of sea birds.
Long Long distance detection
Use this scene to monitor utmost distances in the broad ocean.
Buoy Buoy
Use this scene to detect small targets such as radio buoys outside of sea clutter.
(Targets having low detection probability are displayed.)
User1 User 1
General scene used when the nine scenes above are not applicable.
User2 User 2
General scene used when the nine scenes above are not applicable.

3 Adjust [Gain], [Sea] and [Rain] as necessary.

Note
When the setting value among the observation scene is changed from the initial value, underline is
displayed for the observation scene selection button and a button corresponding to the [Selection]
(observation scene selection) dialog is displayed.

Memo
Initial setting value
If the optimal setting value was lost, it is recommended to reset to
the initial value and tune up again.
The initial setting value is indicated as shown in the figure at right.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-18

 1
5.4 General Radar Operation 2
5.4.1 Interference Rejection (IR Function) 3
By setting IR (Interference Rejection) function, Interference by other radars is rejected.
4
Note 5
To observe the radar beacon and the SART signal, IR processing may occasionally suppress
these images, so set IR to Off (interference rejection function OFF). 5
1 Click on the RADAR Signal Processing Setting button in Radar signal information. 7
Radar signal processing setting button
8
9
10
11
12
The [RADAR Process] dialog box appears.
13
2 Click on [IR] and then select the interference rejection level from the list.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Setting items Functions and effects 22
[Off] Sets the IR function to Off.
[IR Low] Sets the IR level to the low level. 23
[IR Middle] Sets the IR level to the middle level.
[IR High] Sets the IR level to the high level. 24
[Points on setting]
25
When a high interference rejection level is selected, the radar’s ability of detecting small targets such APP A
as buoys and small boats is lower.
In general, [IR Low] should be selected. APP B
1
5-19 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
5.4.2 Changing the transmitter pulse length
1 Click on the Transmitter Pulse Length switch button in Radar signal information.

Transmitter pulse length switch button.

Each time this button is clicked on, the transmitter pulse length changes.
Example: [MP1] → [MP2] → [LP1] → [LP2]

Transmitter Recommended condition

Functions and effects
pulse length for selection
[SP] • The transmitter pulse becomes shorter, and the In bays/harbors where
range resolution improves. targets are densely crowded
• The effect of suppressing sea clutter and Rough sea state due to
rain/snow clutter improves. torrential rain or stormy
weather
[MP] • The normal transmitter pulse length is set. General navigation
• Both range resolution and gain are appropriately
set.
[LP] • The transmitter pulse becomes longer, and gain Detection of small targets in
improves. good weather conditions
• Small targets are zoomed and are easy to
observe.
• When the sea state is bad, detection
performance decreases.

Memo
Usable transmitter pulse length differs according to the type of radar antenna being used and the
observation range being used.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-20

 1
5.4.3 Enhancing targets
2
This function enlarges the display sizes of images to enhance targets.
3
1 Click on the RADAR Signal Processing Setting button in Radar system information.
4
Radar signal processing setting button
5
5
7
8
The [RADAR Process] dialog box appears.
9
2 Select the target enhancement level from the list in [Target Enhance].
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Setting items Functions and effects
Recommended use 18
condition
[ENH Off] Sets the target enhancement function to OFF. Set this function to Off when 19
resolution is particularly
necessary. 20
[ENH Level1] Enhances the radar echo by 1 level in the vertical Normal navigation
and horizontal directions of the screen. 21
[ENH Level2] Enhances the radar echo by 2 levels in the vertical
and horizontal directions of the screen.
Enhance the visibility of the
radar image
22
[ENH Level3] Enhances the radar echo by 3 levels in the vertical
and horizontal directions of the screen.
Detect small targets such
as buoys
23
24
[Setting points]
When [ENH Level3] is selected, sea clutter and rain/snow clutter are apt to be enlarged. To use, 25
suppress images of sea clutter and rain/snow clutter using the [Sea] (sea clutter adjustment) slider and
APP A
the [Rain] (rain/snow clutter adjustment) slider.
In general, [ENH Level1] or [ENH Level2] should be selected. APP B
1
5-21 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
5.4.4 Using video processing (Echo Process)
This function reduces undesirable noise and enhances targets.

Note
• When viewing a radar beacon, SART signal, or fast moving target on the radar display, select
[Process Off] (video process off).
• If video processing mode is set to [CORREL], a high speed target is less-visible .

1 Click on the RADAR Signal Processing Setting button in Radar signal information.

Radar signal processing setting button

The [RADAR Process] dialog box appears.

2 Select the video process mode from the list in [Echo Process].

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-22

 1
Setting items Effects and recommended use conditions
[Process Off] Sets the image processing function to Off. 2
[3 Scan CORREL] Use when the rain/snow clutter images are heavy.
[4 Scan CORREL] Use when enhancing the target while suppressing sea clutter images. 3
[5 Scan CORREL] Use when detecting small targets in sea clutter images.
[Remain] Use when own ship is rolling severely. 4
[Peak Hold] Use for detection of small targets of low detection probability.
5
5
5.4.5 Setting the azimuth mode
7
Set the bearing for the radar video to be displayed on the radar display.
8
1 Click on the Azimuth mode combo box in Presentation and mode information.
9
10
Azimuth Mode combo
box 11
12
13
14
2 Select the Azimuth mode. 15
Note 16
Available combinations vary depending on the settings of the azimuth mode and the
motion mode (refer to "5.4.6 Setting a motion mode".).
17
18
Azimuth mode N UP H UP C UP W UP C UP
Motion mode (Angle Setting) 19
TM  ×  × 
RM(T) or RM(R)      20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-23 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
The following azimuth modes can be set.

Setting items Description Display image

[N UP] North UP (North Up)
• The video is displayed so that the zenith of the PPI points to
the due north.
• Fixed targets do not flicker and are easily identified on the
chart, and the true bearing of a target can easily be read out.

[H UP] Head UP (Head Up)

• The video is displayed so that the ship’s heading line is
displayed at the top of the screen. Since targets are displayed
in their directions relative to the ship’s heading line, the
operator can view the video in the same field of view as in
operating the ship at sea. Therefore, This mode is suitable for
watching over other ships
• This is not available for TM (True Motion) mode.
[C UP] Course UP (Course Up)
• At the setting of Course Up, the ship’s heading (HDG) is fixed
North
and displayed immediately above the screen. Similar to true
bearing display, the positions of stationary targets will
not deviate even if yawing occurs in the ship: targets
are displayed stably and the bearing of the heading line
moves only according to the amount of change in own
ship's course. To change the course, select the Course
UP display by clicking on the Azimuth mode combo box
several times. A course can be set again.
[W UP] Way Point UP (Waypoint Up)
• The destination is displayed at the top of the screen.
[C UP (Angle Course UP by angle setting (Course Up by angle setting)
Setting)] • When C UP is selected, the [C UP (Angle Setting)] dialog box
is displayed. The course angle that is set in the dialog box is
displayed by being fixed at the top of the screen.

- Input the angle of the ship’s heading in the [Angle] input

box of the [C UP (Angle Setting)] dialog box.
- The angle can also be input (increase/decrease) by
operating the angle input slider.
- After completing the setting, click on the [X] button.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-24

 1
5.4.6 Setting a motion mode
2
By setting a motion mode, the display method of the own ship’s position on the radar screen can be
changed. 3
4
Switching Relative Motion (RM) Mode to True Motion (TM) Mode
1 Click on the Motion Mode combo box in Presentation and mode information.
5
Motion Mode combo box
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 Select the motion mode. 13
Note
14
Available combinations vary depending on the settings of the motion mode and the 15
azimuth mode (refer to "5.4.5 Setting the azimuth mode").
16
Azimuth mode N UP H UP C UP W UP C UP
Motion mode (Angle Setting) 17
TM
RM(T) or RM(R)


×



×



18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-25 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
 Setting items Description Display image
[TM] True Motion Mode (True Motion display)
• In Ground mode, the own ship’s display
position moves according to the Speed Fixed on the
radar display
Over the Ground (SOG) and fixed targets
such as land are fixed on the radar screen.
Moving
• In Water mode, the own ship’s display depending on
own ship's
position moves according to the Speed speed
Through Water (STW) and fixed targets
such as land move according to the
difference between the Speed Through
Water (STW) and the Speed Over the
Ground (SOG).
• When the own ship reaches to the true
motion status, the own ship’s position is set
at the position of about 60% of the screen
radius in direction opposite to the own ship’s
course by adding the influence of the tidal
current. The ship’s position starts to move
according to the own ship’s speed, course,
and influence of the tidal current. When the
own ship’s position reaches the position of
about 60% of the screen radius, the position
is reset to the position of about 66% of the
screen radius in the direction opposite to the
own ship’s course (COG) by adding the
influence of the tidal current at that time.
[RM(T)] Relative Motion Mode (Relative Motion
or display)
[RM(R)] • Own ship is fixed at the center of the radar
screen and fixed targets such as land move
relatively.
[TM Reset] TM Reset
• The own ship’s position is reset in [TM] (true
motion display) mode. For the details, refer
to "5.4.6.1 Resetting Own Ship to its Initial
Position in [TM] (True Motion display)
Mode".

5.4.6.1 Resetting Own Ship to its Initial Position in [TM]

(True Motion display) Mode
1 Select [TM Reset] from the Motion Mode.
Own ship is reset to its initial position as established when the relative motion mode is changed
to the true motion mode. The ship starts moving from that position.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-26

 1
5.4.7 Setting the Stabilization Mode
2
1 Click on the Stabilization Mode button in Presentation and mode information
3
Stabilization Mode combo box 4
5
5
7
2 Select the Stabilization Mode. 8
[GND]: Use the ship speed relative to ground in the Stabilization Mode.
9
[Sea]: Use the ship speed relative to water in the Stabilization Mode. 10
11
5.4.8 Moving own ship’s display position (Off 12
Center)
13
The own ship’s position can be moved from the display center to any position within 60% of the display
radius. This function is convenient for observing a wide coverage in any direction. 14
Note
15
This function is not available on the 96 NM range. 16
1 Click on the [Off Center] button in Presentation and mode information to turn the Off
17
Center mode to "On". 18
The Off Center mode is switched to On/Off whenever the button is clicked on.
19
Off Center mode is On:
20
Off Center mode is Off: 21
The cursor mode is set to the Off Center mode.
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-27 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
 2 Place the cursor on the position you want to move and click on it.
Own ship’s display position will be moved to the clicked position.

Note
An own ship display position can be moved within the range in which the own ship display
position and the antenna position do not exceed 60% of the screen radius.

HL HL

Position the cursor on Clicking fixes

the destination. own ship's position.

Returning own ship’s position to the center of the display

1 Click on the [Off Center] button in Presentation and mode information to disable the
Off Center mode.
The own ship position is returned to the center of the display (on relative motion) or the position
to be reset (on true motion).

5.4.9 Displaying other ship’s trails (Trails)

Other ships’ movements and speeds can be monitored from the lengths and directions of their trails,
serving for collision avoidance.

5.4.9.1 Trails motion mode

There are two types of trails: relative motion trail and true motion trail.
Relative motion trail: The system plots the trails of a target at a position relative to the own ship.
The operator can easily judge whether the target is approaching the own
ship.
While the own ship is moving, the system also plots the trails of land and
other fixed targets.
True motion trail: The system plots the absolute motion trails of a target, irrespective of the
own ship’s position.
The operator can easily judge the course and speed of the target.
The system does not plot the trails of land and other fixed targets.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-28

 1
Land Land
2
3
4
5
5
7
Trail Ship Trail Ship
8
True Motion Trail Relative Motion Trail
9
While the true motion trail mode is active, this equipment enables the continuous use of true motion
trail even if any of the following operations is performed: 10
• Motion mode change (TM/RM)
• TM reset 11
•
•
Azimuth mode change
Off Center
12
• Chart display on/off (Chart) 13
Note 14
Accurate true bearing signals and speed signals are necessary for using the true motion trail
mode.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-29 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
5.4.9.2 Changing motion mode of trails
The trail display mode can be switched by using the Trail true/relative switching button of other ship
information.

Note
The available trail motion modes vary depending of the motion mode that is set.

True motion display (TM): Only true motion trail is available.

Relative motion display (RM): Relative motion trail and true motion trail can be selected.
[RM(R)] is displayed when relative motion trail is used.
[RM(T)] is displayed when true motion trail is used.

1 Click on the Trails True/Relative switch button.

Each time this button is clicked on, the display mode of Trails switches between [T] and [R].

[T]: (True motion trail)

[R]: (Relative motion trail)
Foe the details of the motion mode of trails, refer to "5.4.9.1 Trails motion mode".

5.4.9.3 Setting the length of the trail

1 Click on the Trail Length switch combo box in [Trails] of other ships' information.

Select a radar trail length.

Short mode: Off, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60 min
Long mode: Off, 30 min, 1 hr, 2 to 24 hrs (at 1 hr interval from 1 to 24 hrs)

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-30

 1
Memo
Saved trails cannot be erased even when the trail lengths are changed the Trail Length switch 2
combo box.
Even after the trails display is turned off once, the past trails can be displayed traced back by 3
setting a desired time. The plot of the trail starts when starting the transmission.
4
The system is plotting trails even while the trails display is off.
If only a short time has elapsed after the commencement of transmission, the display may not 5
reach the specified value. The time not to reach is indicated by the length of the blue bar shown at
the lower part of the Trail Length switch combo box. 5
7
5.4.9.4 Clearing trails data 8
1 Click on the [CLR] (clear trails) button. 9
10
11
12
[CLR] (clear trails) button. 13
The confirmation dialog box appears.
14
2 Click on the [OK] button. 15
16
17
18
19
All the saved trails data will be cleared. The system starts plotting trails in initial state.
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-31 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
5.4.10 Doubling the size of radar image
This function doubles the size of radar video near a specified position.

Note
If the range is 0.125 NM and the motion mode is in the TM mode, this function is not available.

1 Click on the radar signal process setting button in Radar signal information.

Radar signal process setting button

[RADAR Process] dialog box appears.

2 Click on the [X2(Zoom)] (double zoom) button.

Each time this button is clicked on, the double zoom function is switched On and Off.

On display:

Off display:

When double zoom is set, the cursor mode changes to the off-set cursor.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-32

 1
3 Place the offset cursor on a location you want to zoom and click on it.
2
Using the cursor position as the reference, the screen display is enlarged by a magnification of
2 so that the midpoint between the cursor and own ship's position comes at the center of the 3
radar display.
4
Cursor mark
Cursor mark 5
5
7
8
9
Center of radar display
10
Own ship's
position

Own Ship's Position before Own Ship's Position after 11

Zooming Position Zooming Position
12
Canceling zoom display 13
1 Click on the [X2(Zoom)] button to turn the X2 Zoom function Off.
14
Off display:
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-33 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
5.4.11 Hiding the heading line (HL OFF)
1 Click on the disclosure button on the left toolbar.
When the left toolbar is set to expanded display, this operation is not required.

2 The ship’s heading line is hidden while the [HL Off] button is pressed down.
When the button is released, the ship’s heading line is redisplayed.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-34

 1
5.4.12 Hiding graphics information on radar display
2
On the radar screen of this equipment, various types of graphics information such as TT/AIS symbol,
user map, and chart information are displayed. When the visibility of the radar screen deteriorates due 3
to excessive amount of graphic information displayed, the visibility of the screen can be improved by
temporarily clearing the unnecessary graphic information by using this function.
4
1 While the [Data OFF] button on the left toolbar is being held down, graphic information
5
other than the TT and AIS of danger targets, radar images, radar trails and cross 5
cursors are hidden.
When the button is released, graphics information is redisplayed. 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
5.4.13 Setting true bearing 18
When the GYRO I/F is used to enter a gyro signal, there is a rare case in which a true bearing value
indicated by the master gyro does not match the true bearing value indicated by this equipment.
19
In that case, adjust the true bearing value of this system so that it matches the value indicated by the 20
master gyro.
21
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
A menu is displayed. 22
2 Click [Settings] - [General] on the menu. 23
The [General] dialog box appears.
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-35 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
 3 Click on the input box of [GYRO Setting].

4 Input a master gyro value on the software keyboard.

5.4.14 Setting own ship speed

5.4.14.1 Switching own ship speed device
1 Select the ship speed device from the STW Source combo box in the own ship
information.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-36

 1
• When using 1-axis log, heading speed component can be detected, but transverse
speed component cannot be detected. Then leeway effect (component drifted by 2
wind) cannot be detected.
• When using 2-axes ground log, its accuracy in shallow waters may be deteriorated,
3
and its speed in deep sea areas may be unable to be detected. 4
• When using a GPS, COG accuracy is less than ±3° at speed: from 1kn to 17kn, and
is less than ±1° at speed: more than 17kn. 5
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
1
5-37 Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar
5.4.14.2 Entering the ship’s heading/own ship’s speed
manually
If any device such as LOG, etc., connected to this equipment malfunctions, it is possible to manually
enter own ship’s heading/speed by the method described below to use the target tracking (TT) and true
motion display functions.

1 Select [Menu] from the corresponding combo box.

The [Sensor Selection/Status] dialog box is displayed.

2 When inputting a ship’s heading manually, select [MAN] from the [Heading] combo
box. To input an own ship speed manually, select [MAN] from the [STW] combo box.

3 Click on the input box.

4 Enter a numeric value by using the software keyboard.

Section 5 Basic Operation of the Radar 5-38

 1
Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 2
This section explains Target Tracking (hereinafter, referred to as target tracking or TT) and Automatic 3
Identification System (hereinafter referred to as AIS).
4
5
6
Use the target tracking function as your navigation aid. Final decision on the ship 7
operation must be made by the ship operator himself.
If you depend entirely on the information of the target tracking function for the final
8
decision on ship operation, an accident may occur.
9
An error may be contained in the vector, target value data and alarm indicated by the
target tracking function. Further, the target not detected by radar cannot be captured 10
or tracked.
If you depend entirely on the information of the radar for the final decision on ship 11
operation, such an accident as collision or stranding may result.
12
Simulation is a function for determining if the target tracking function is working
correctly or not. Accordingly, this function should be used only to check for the target 13
tracking function operation.
In particular, if this mode is used during navigation, a pseudo target will appear on the
14
radar screen and cannot be easily identified from the real target. This may cause 15
such an accident as collision. Do not use this mode during the navigation.
16
Target Tracking 17
This function calculates the course and speed of a target by automatically tracking the target's move.
This function enables the automatic acquisition of targets by using the automatic acquisition zone
18
function. 19
This function also enables the simulation of the ship maneuvering method to avoid collisions by using
the trial maneuver function. 20
Memo 21
If the mode is ground stabilization, SOG/COG used for own ship's information. If the mode is sea
22
stabilization, STW (speed through the water)/HDG (heading) is used for own ship's information.
Target tracking range is 32 NM. (Available all range scale) 23
24
For the details, refer to "6.5 Setting and Operating Target Tracking".
25
AIS 26
This function shows the target's information on the radar display, using other ship's information sent out
27
from the AIS unit.
For the details, refer to "6.6 Setting and Operating AIS".

6-1 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.1 Restrictions
The acquisition and Target Tracking functions have the following restrictions.

Depending on distance and echo size, resolution between adjacent targets during automatic target
tracking usually ranges somewhere between 0.03 to 0.05 NM. If multiple targets approach each other,
there is a possibility of swapping them or losing one of them. Such swapping or less of targets may
also occur if the target being tracked is affected by rain/snow clutter or sea clutter or moves very close
to land.

The intensity of echoes and the Target Tracking function have a correlationship, and thus the target will
be lost if no echoes are detected during six scans in succession.
If such a lost target exists, therefore, radar gain must be increased to support detection of the target. If,
however, radar gain is increased too significantly, sea clutter or other noise may be erroneously
detected and tracked as a target, and resultingly, a false alarm may be issued.

To execute accurate tracking, it becomes necessary first to appropriately adjust the gain, sea clutter
suppression, rain/snow clutter suppression and tune of the radar so that the target to be acquired and
tracked is clearly displayed on the radar display.
Inappropriate settings of these adjustments reduce the reliability/accuracy of automatic target tracking.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-2

 1
6.2 Collision Avoidance Issue 2
(Explanation) 3
6.2.1 Collision Avoidance in Navigation 4
Marine collision avoidance in navigation is one of the problems that have been recognized from of old. 5
This section contains a brief statement about the position of collision avoidance in navigation.
The navigation pattern of all mobile craft constitutes a system with some closed loops regardless of the 6
media through which the mobile craft travels, whether air, water, the boundary between air and water,
or space. This pattern consists of two closed loops in principle, one of which is a collision avoidance
7
with another mobile craft and the other is a loop of finding a right and safe way to reach a 8
predeterminate destination.
The following figure shows the conceptual diagram of navigation pattern by Mr. E.W. Anderson. The 9
closed loop of collision avoidance is shown on the left side and the closed loop of finding a safe route
on the right side.
10
11
Collision avoidance Destination Decision of route 12
Decided by radio wave, 13
visual and observation
Traffic rule
Vessel’s spacing loop
Route Guide loop 14
Dead
reckoning
Calculation
15
Visual and radio
wave monitoring
Collision
Cource and
speed
Compass
and log 16
avoidance loop
17
Instrument or
Judgement Maneuver
Control
judgement 18
loop
19
Ship traveling in controlled condition
20
Navigation Pattern 21
22
6.2.2 Marine Accidents and Collisions
23
Among marine accidents, collision accidents have been highlighted as the tonnages and speeds of
ships become higher along with the increase in traffic at sea. 24
If a tanker carrying dangerous articles such as crude oil collides with any other vessel, then not only
the vessels involved with the accident but other vessels in the vicinity, port facilities and inhabitants in
25
the coastal area as well as marine resources may also suffer immeasurable influence. 26
Collision accidents have a high percentage of the marine accidents that have occurred in recent years.
To cope with these problems, any effective measures are needed and some equipment to achieve 27
collision avoidance requirements has been developed at rapid strides.

6-3 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.2.3 Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance
There are two aspects in collision avoidance: collision prediction and avoidance. Putting it in extreme
terms, collision prediction is to predict that two or more vessels will happen to occupy the same point at
the same time, while collision avoidance is to maneuver vessels not to occupy the same point at the
same time.
In practical operation of vessels, a spot of collision has to be deemed to be a single point but a closed
zone. This closed zone is conceptually defined as a CPA (Closest Point of Approach). Further, the time
taken to arrive at CPA is required for collision prediction, and the danger of collision is judged
considering the TCPA (Time to CPA). The following figure illustrates a diagram caked "Collision
Triangle".

True vector of
target vessel

TCPA
(Time to CPA)

Target vessel

Collision Relative vector

triangle

Own ship

True vector of own

CPA ring ship

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-4

 1
6.2.4 Relative Vector and True Vector
2
From two points of view, collision prediction and avoidance, it is necessary to obtain the relative vector
of other ship for prediction and the true vector of other ship for collision avoidance in order to realize
3
other ship's aspect.
4
The relationship between the relative vector and true vector is shown in the following figure.
Furthermore, the meanings of both vectors are explained. 5
Both rough CPA and TCPA can be obtained easily from the relative speed vector of other ship. This
method has an advantage that the risks of collision with all other ships within the radar range can be 6
seen at a glance. On the other hand, the course and speed of other ship can easily be obtained from its
7
true speed vector, enabling other ship's aspect to be seen at a glance. Thus, the aspects of other ships
(transverse, outsail, parallel run, reverse run, etc.) as described in the act of prevention of collision at 8
sea can be readily understood. If there is a risk of collision with other ship, the operator can determine
which rule to be applied and how to operate own ship. 9
10
Target ship true vector
N
Va: Own ship’s speed 11
qa: Own ship’s course

N
VT: Target ship’s true speed
qT: Target ship’s true course 12
VR: Target ship’s relative speed

VT
qR: Target ship’s relative course
qA: Aspect 13
qO
qT
qA
14
Vo
qR 15
Relative vector

16
VR
Own ship true vector

17
CPA 18
19
6.2.5 Radar and Collision Avoidance 20
Radar is still playing an important role for collision prevention and positioning. 21
A plotter is used to further enhance the radar functionality. The plotter is capable of plotting other
positions of other ships in 3 to 6 minute intervals to monitor their movement. The plots of other ships 22
represent their tracks relative to own ship, and it is shown whether there is a risk of collision, namely
23
CPA and TCPA can be obtained. This method using a plotter is fairly effective, but the number of target
ship, which is manually plotted, is limited and it takes several minutes to measure those. 24
25
26
27

6-5 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.3 Displaying Symbols
This section describes the symbols that are used for target tracking and AIS.

6.3.1 Displaying/hiding target tracking symbols/AIS

target symbols
In the display setting at the time of shipment from the factory, the display of target tracking symbols and
of the AIS target symbols is enabled. However, choosing [Options] – [Target] from the View menu can
switch between display and hide.
For the details, refer to "16.2.7 Setting up the display of TT/AIS target".

6.3.2 Types and Definitions of Target Tracking

Symbols
Symbol Definition Remarks

This symbol is displayed until the vector is

Initial acquisition target
12 displayed after target acquisition.

The alarm sounds.

Target acquired in The alarm message (New Target) turns
12 automatic acquisition zone orange and blinks.
The symbol turns red and blinks.

Tracked target This means a tracked target.

12

The alarm sounds.

The alarm message (CPA/TCPA) turns red
Dangerous target
12 and blinks.
The symbol is enlarged and displayed in red.

When the numeric data is displayed, the

Numeric displayed target
target symbol is enclosed in a square.
12

The alarm sounds.

The alarm message (Lost) turns orange and
Lost target
12 blinks.
The symbol turns red.

The past positions of an AIS target are

Past position displayed as well as the target tracking
12 symbol.

The track of another ship as an AIS target is

Target track displayed as well as the target tracking
12 symbol.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-6

 1
Memo
When a target acquired from RADAR is displayed on the ECDIS screen, the ID is prefixed by “T1-“ or 2
“T2-“ (such as “T1-12” and “T2-12”). On the RADAR screen, only the ID is displayed, not the symbol.
3
Memo
4
Initial acquisition target is displayed only when receiving TTM sentence from RADAR.
5
6.3.3 Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols 6
Symbol Definition Remarks 7
This symbol is displayed when received data is
Sleeping target valid. The direction of the triangle's vertex 8
indicates the target's heading or course.
When CTW/STW of the target cannot be
9
received, the symbol is displayed in a broken
f Target in pause state
line. 10
The heading direction is displayed with a solid 11
line, and the course vector is displayed with a
Activated target
dotted line. The line perpendicular to the
heading direction indicates the direction to
12
which the course is to be changed. This line
AIS12
may not be displayed. 13
When CTW/STW of the target cannot be
received, the symbol is displayed in a broken
14
Activated target
line.
AIS12 15
16
The outlines of ships are displayed scaled
Outline display
down. 17
AIS12
18
Numeric displayed When the numeric data is displayed, the target 19
target symbol is enclosed in a square.
AIS12
20
The alarm sounds.
21
The alarm message (CPA/TCPA) turns red
Dangerous target
and blinks. 22
AIS12 The symbol is enlarged and displayed in red.

When CTW/STW of the target cannot be

23
AIS12 Danger target received, the symbol is displayed in a broken
line.
24
The alarm sounds. 25
The alarm message (Lost) turns orange and
Lost target blinks.
The symbol is displayed by overlaying red x
26
AIS122
51659
marks.
27
264

6-7 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 Symbol Definition Remarks

Sleeping AIS-SART
Displayed by the same color as AIS symbol.
target

AIS12 Activated AIS-SART

Displayed target No. nearby the symbol.
target

Numerical display When the numeric data is displayed, the target

AIS-SART target symbol is enclosed in a square.
AIS12

Displayed if AIS-SART data is not received for

Lost AIS-SART target
6 minutes.
AIS12

Physical AIS AtoN The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed

target (Racon) next to the symbol.

Physical AIS AtoN The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed

target (Emergency
wreck mark) next to the symbol.

Physical AIS AtoN The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed

target (North cardinal
mark) next to the symbol.

Physical AIS AtoN The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed

target (East cardinal
mark) next to the symbol.

Physical AIS AtoN The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed

target (South cardinal
mark) next to the symbol.

Physical AIS AtoN The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed

target (West cardinal
mark) next to the symbol.

Physical AIS AtoN The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed

target (Port hand
mark) next to the symbol.

Physical AIS AtoN The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed

target (Starboard hand
mark) next to the symbol.

Physical AIS AtoN The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed

target (Isolated
danger) next to the symbol.

Physical AIS AtoN The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed

target (Safe water) next to the symbol.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-8

 1
Symbol Definition Remarks
2
Physical AIS AtoN The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
target (Special mark) next to the symbol.
3
4
Physical AIS AtoN
target The symbol and target No./AtoN name (xxx)
nearby the symbol are indicated in yellow.
5
(Off position)
6
Physical AIS AtoN
target
The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
next to the symbol.
7
(On position)
8
Physical AIS AtoN
target When the numeric data is displayed, the 9
target symbol is enclosed in a square.
(Numerical display) 10
Physical AIS AtoN The alarm sounds. 11
target The alarm message (Lost) turns orange and
(Lost display)
blinks. The symbol is displayed by overlaying 12
red x marks.

Physical AIS AtoN "Unlit" is displayed in yellow at the top of the

13
target (Flood light
abnormality)
symbol. The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is
displayed nearby the symbol.
14
Physical AIS AtoN
"Racon err" is displayed in yellow at the top of
15
target
(radar beacon
the symbol. The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is
displayed nearby the symbol.
16
abnormality)
17
Virtual AIS AtoN target
The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
(Emergency wreck
mark) next to the symbol. 18
19
Virtual AIS AtoN target The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
(North cardinal mark) next to the symbol. 20
21
Virtual AIS AtoN target
The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
(East cardinal mark)
next to the symbol. 22
23
Virtual AIS AtoN target The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
(South cardinal mark) next to the symbol.
24
25
Virtual AIS AtoN target The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
(West cardinal mark) next to the symbol.
26
27

6-9 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 Symbol Definition Remarks

Virtual AIS AtoN target The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
(Port hand mark) next to the symbol.

Virtual AIS AtoN target

The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
(Starboard hand
next to the symbol.
mark)

Virtual AIS AtoN target The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
(Isolated danger) next to the symbol.

Virtual AIS AtoN target The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
(Safe water) next to the symbol.

Virtual AIS AtoN target The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is displayed
(Special mark) next to the symbol.

Virtual AIS AtoN target When the numeric data is displayed, the
(Numerical display) target symbol is enclosed in a square.

The alarm sounds.

Virtual AIS AtoN target The alarm message (Lost) turns orange and
(Lost display) blinks. The symbol is displayed by overlaying
red x marks.

Virtual AIS AtoN target "Missing" is displayed in yellow at the top of

(Intended location of the symbol. The target No./AtoN name (xxx) is
missing AtoN) displayed nearby the symbol.

AIS SAR aircraft Displayed by the same color as AIS symbol.

Numerical display AIS When the numeric data is displayed, the

SAR aircraft target symbol is enclosed in a square.

The alarm sounds.

The alarm message (Lost) turns orange and
Lost AIS SAR aircraft
blinks. The symbol is displayed by overlaying
red x marks.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-10

 1
Symbol Definition Remarks
2
AIS SAR ship Displayed by the same color as AIS symbol. 3
4
Numerical display AIS When the numeric data is displayed, the target 5
SAR ship symbol is enclosed in a square.
6
The alarm sounds. 7
Lost numerical display The alarm message (Lost) turns orange and
AIS SAR ship blinks. The symbol is displayed by overlaying
red x marks.
8
9
AIS coastal base
station
Displayed by the same color as AIS symbol.
10
11
Numerical display AIS When the numeric data is displayed, the target 12
coastal base station symbol is enclosed in a square.
13
The alarm sounds.
Lost AIS coastal base
The alarm message (Lost) turns orange and 14
blinks.
station
The symbol is displayed by overlaying red x 15
marks.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-11 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.3.4 About AIS AtoN (Aids to Navigation)
AIS AtoN is a system that displaying aid to navigation like a lighthouse, light buoy or unreal aid to
navigation on the display unit on ships using AIS receiver.
There are following two kinds of AIS AtoN.

AIS AtoN type Function Operation example

Physical AIS Installs the AIS on real aid to In low visibility, receiving the Physical AIS
AtoN navigation, and displays its location AtoN symbols facilitates identification of
on the display unit on ships. the light location and light buoy.
Virtual AIS AtoN Displays virtual aid to navigation on In the sea area where installation of the
the display unit on ships according light buoy is difficult, the Virtual AIS AtoN
to the signals transmitted from the symbols are displayed as virtual light
AIS station on the land. buoys that are used as targets for getting
to the destination.
This system can also be used as the aid
substituted for the aid to navigation
damaged by natural disasters.

6.3.5 About AIS-SART Information

The AIS-SART function enables information about the location of life raft or lifeboat on abandoning ship
to be displayed on the screen. The location will show the position of potential survivors.
For the details, refer to "7.6 Display of AIS-SART".

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-12

 1
6.3.6 About Display Priority of AIS Targets
2
*1
Up to 500 targets can be displayed in total of activated and sleeping AIS targets. Up to 500 activated
AIS targets can be displayed in the total.
3
When 95% of the maximum display count is exceed, “AIS 95% Capacity” alert ocuurs.When the
4
imum display count is exceed, “AIS maximum capacity” alert occurs.
*1
When there is an AIS target of 500 or more, the display is made according to the following priority 5
order.
6
High priority
1. Numeric displayed target 7
2. Target of which CPA/TCPA is lower than the set value
(Target as a dangerous ship for which an alarm has been generated) 8
3. Target in automatic activation zone
4. Activated AIS target
9
Low priority
5. Target inside AIS filter 10
6. Target outside AIS filter
11
*1: The maximum number of AIS targets displayed can be changed to the option of 1000 targets.
12
If the number of targets at the same priority level exceeds the allowable maximum, they are displayed
in the following priority order:
13
High priority
1. Association target
2. Activated AIS target
14
Low priority 3. Sleeping AIS target 15
16
Memo
Maximum display number is sum of Class A AIS and Class B AIS. 17
Class A: The AIS that must be installed in the large ships specified in the SOLAS Convention.
Class B: The AIS for which medium and small sized vessels and fishing vessels are targeted. 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-13 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.3.7 Switching between Ground Vector and Water
Vector
The vector of an AIS target is to be displayed with a vector over ground or over water by switching the
stabilization mode. The type of the currently displayed vector can be confirmed by viewing the setting
of the stable mode.
When [GND] is selected for the stabilization mode: Ground vector
When [Sea] is displayed for the stabilization mode: Water vector
When the vector of an AIS target is displayed with a vector over water, the system has converted the
AIS target's vector over ground to the vector over water according to the data received from the AIS
and the own ship's information.

6.3.8 Association Target Symbols

Only a few targets transferred from the radar will be designated as associated targets and following
radar conventions the symbol for AIS Priority will be the default symbol.

Symbol display for high-priority TT targets Symbol display for high-priority AIS targets

Association targets Association targets

If the operator wished to change to Tracked Target priority symbol follow the these instructions.

1 Right-click on the tracked target with association displayed.

The context menu appears.

2 Click on [Property] in the context menu.

The [TT Target INFO] or [AIS Target INFO] dialog appears.

3 Select [AIS] or [TT] from the [Priority] combo box.

[AIS]: The AIS target is displayed on a higher priority basis.

[TT]: The TT target is displayed on a higher priority basis.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-14

 1
6.4 Preparation 2
3
6.4.1 Setting the Cursor Mode to AUTO Mode
4
If the cursor mode is set to the AUTO mode, various TT/AIS functions can be executed quickly.

1 Click on the [AUTO] (cursor mode selection) button on the left toolbar.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
The cursor mode changes to the AUTO mode.
15
16
The [AUTO] mode performs operation in accordance with the object at the cursor position when
clicked. 17
For the details, refer to "3.13 Cursor AUTO Mode".
18
19
6.4.2 Setting Vector
20
A vector to represent a target's predicted position can be presented in the True vector or Relative
vector mode. In each mode, a Vector Length can be freely changed for a time interval of 1 to 120 21
minutes.
22
23
6.4.2.1 Vector modes
24
Different vector modes can be used as described below according to the purpose.
To perceive the true state of the target: True Vector 25
To perceive the closest approach point of the target: Relative Vector
26
27

6-15 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

True vector mode
In the true vector mode, the directions of vectors indicate the true courses of targets and the Vector
Lengths indicate the values which are proportional to their speeds.
In the true vector mode, the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and easily
monitored.
Vectors of own ship are displayed as shown below.

Note
In true vector mode, CPA ring cannot be displayed.

HL

Own ship's
vector True vector

The relative vector is not displayed.

Example of True Vector Mode

Relative Vector Mode

The relative vector does not represent the true motion of the target, but its relative relation with own
ship. A target with its relative vector directed to own ship (passing through the CPA limit ring) will be a
dangerous target.
In the Relative Vector mode, it can be seen at a glance where the CPA limit of the dangerous target is.

CPA ring The true vector is not displayed.

Relative vector

Example of Relative Vector Mode

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-16

 1
6.4.2.2 Setting vector mode
2
1 Click on the trail true/relative selector button in the other ship information window.
3
4
Trail true/relative selector button
5
6
7
Each click switches track display mode between [T] and [R].
8
6.4.2.3 Vector Length (Vector Time) 9
The Vector Length of a target is proportional to its speed, and the vector time can be switched in a
10
range of 1 to 120 minutes.
The following figure shows an example in which the Vector Length is set to 6 min, and the tip of the 11
vector represents the target's position expected to reach 6 minutes later.
12
HL 13
14
15
Current position 16
Future predicted
position
(6 min later in this
17
example)
18
Example of Vector Length
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-17 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.4.2.4 Setting the Vector Length
The Vector Length is set in min in the range from 1 min to 120 min.

1 Click on the Vector Length input box in the other ship information window.

Vector Length input box

2 Enter the Vector Length.

6.4.3 Setting collision decision criteria

Collision decision criteria are set based on CPA and TCPA.
For an outline of CPA and TCPA, refer to "6.2.3 Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance."

Note
Set the optimum values of collision decision conditions, with consideration for vessel type, water
area, weather and oceanographic conditions.
For the relations between those conditions and alarms, refer to "6.7 Alert Display".

6.4.3.1 Setting CPA limit

1 Click on the CPA limit value input box in the other ship information window.
Set the CPA limit in the unit of 0.1 NM within the range from 0.1 NM to 9.9 NM.

CPA limit value input box

2 Enter the CPA limit.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-18

 1
6.4.3.2 Setting TCPA limit
2
1 Click on the TCPA limit value input box in the other ship information window.
Set the TCPA limit in the unit of 1 min within the range from 1 min to 99 min. 3
4
5
TCPA limit value input box
6
7
2 Enter the TCPA limit. 8
For the details on how to set up alerts based on the collision determination condition, refer to
9
"17.2 Collision Avoidance Alert Generation Conditions".
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-19 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.4.4 Showing the CPA ring (RADAR only)
The CPA ring is rendered as a red circle with the own ship centered and the CPA limit set distance used
as the radius.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on [View] - [Option] - [Target].

The [Target] dialog is displayed.

3 Select [CPA Ring (Only Relative mode)].

[CPA Ring (Only Relative mode)]

The CPA ring is shown.

Note:
When True is specified for the vector mode, [CPA Ring (Only Relative mode)] cannot be selected.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-20

 1
6.5 Setting and Operating Target Tracking 2
The Target Tracking function automatically tracks the acquired targets and records and displays the
course and speed of the targets as vector. Alerts can also be output based on the set collision decision
3
criteria (CPA and TCPA). 4
Note 5
At power off and during preparation for transmission, tracking data records are deleted.
6
6.5.1 Acquiring target 7
The methods for acquiring targets include Auto Acquisition (automatic acquisition) mode and ACQ 8
MANUAL (manual acquisition) mode.
Both modes can also be used concurrently. 9
10
6.5.1.1 Automatic acquisition (automatic acquisition) mode
11
By setting up and enabling the automatic acquisition/activation zone (AZ), targets intruding into the AZ
can automatically be acquired/tracked and also issue a new target warning. 12
Note 13
If manual acquisition is made in a state in which the number of targets being tracked has reached
the maximum number of targets, the target with the lowest danger level among the targets that
14
have been captured thus far automatically is erased successively. 15
When all the targets that are tracked are for manual acquisition and the number has reached the
maximum number of targets, no further acquisition is allowed. 16
Take the following steps to enable automatic acquisition/activation zone (AZ). 17
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 18
The menu is displayed.
19
2 Click [Alert] - [New Target Alarm] on the menu.
The [New Target Alarm] dialog is displayed. 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-21 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 3 Check [Use AZ1] (automatic acquisition zone 1) or [Use AZ2] (automatic acquisition
zone 2).
Automatic acquisition/activation zone (AZ) includes AZ1 and AZ2.
To enable AZ1, check [Use AZ1].
To enable AZ2, check [Use AZ2].

Memo
For the details of [New Target Alarm] dialog box, refer to "17.3 New Target Alarm Generation
Conditions".

To automatic acquisition/activation zone (AZ):

Clear the check of [Use AZ1] or [Use AZ2].

The AZ can also be enabled/disabled with the [AZ] key on the keyboard operation unit.
For the details of function assignment to the [AZ] key, refer to "18.21 Setting Key Assignment".

6.5.1.2 ACQ MANUAL (manual acquisition) mode

Note
The manual acquisition mode does not function in the following states.

State Action to Take

The number of tracked targets has reached the Erase unnecessary targets.
maximum count.

The radar antenna is in the standby state. Wait until the radar antenna becomes ready.

A PROC (Interrupt) warning is being generated. Clear the warning.

A Gyro (I/F)/Gyro (Data)/Heading (Data) warning is being

generated.

The tracked target is located 32 NM away from own ship. The manual acquisition mode cannot be
used.
The tracked target is located less than 0.1 NM from own
ship.

To acquire the tracked target in the manual acquisition mode

1 Set the cursor mode to the AUTO mode.

2 Place the cursor on the target to be acquired and then click on.
The target is acquired and the initial acquisition symbol is displayed.
The vector is displayed within 1 minute.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-22

 1
Target manually acquired.
The initial acquisition symbol is displayed.
2
3
Target that has passed for 1 min. 4
The acquisition symbol and vector are displayed.
5
Memo 6
If only the manual acquisition mode will be used without using auto acquisition/activation together,
disable the AZ.
7
8
6.5.1.3 Using manual acquisition and auto acquisition together 9
By using manual acquisition with AZ enabled, auto acquisition and manual acquisition can be used
10
together. They may be used if a target to which particular attention should be given is manually
acquired and other targets are automatically acquired. 11
6.5.2 Setting up the automatic 12
acquisition/activation zone (AZ) 13
Auto acquisition/activation zone has the shape of sector set up according to the angle and distance as 14
shown in the following figure.
15
AZ1 AZ2
End angle 16
17
Start angle 18
19
20
Start distance
21
End distance
22
23
Example of auto acquisition/activation zone (AZ)
24
Auto acquisition/activation zone (AZ) is set up using the following three methods.
(1) Use the [New Target Warning] dialog in the [Alert] menu. 25
(2) Use the cursor.
26
(3) Use the EBL/VRM dial.
27
Memo
Automatic activation only works for AIS targets inputted from AIS receiver.

6-23 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.5.2.1 Using [New Target Warning] dialog box in the [Alert] menu
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click [Alert] - [New Target Alarm] on the menu.

The [New Target Alarm] dialog is displayed.

3 To set up AZ1, select the [Use AZ1] check box. To set up AZ2, select the [Use AZ2]
check box.

4 To set up [Use AZ1], click on the [1] tab. To set up [Use AZ2], click on the [2] tab.
Their respective setting items are displayed.

5 Enter the start angle, end angle, start distance and end distance of AZ.

Start angle
End angle
Start distance
End distance

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-24

 1
6.5.2.2 Using the cursor
2
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed. 3
2 Click [Alert] - [New Target Alarm] on the menu. 4
The [New Target Alarm] dialog is displayed.
5
3 Select AZ ([Use AZ1] or [Use AZ2]) to be set.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
4 Click at the start angle position.
The start angle is set. 15
5 Move the cursor and click at the end angle position. 16
The line connecting the start angle and end angle appears.
17
6 Move the cursor and click at the start distance position.
An arc appears at the start distance position. 18
7 Move the cursor and click at the end distance position. 19
Auto acquisition/activation zone (AZ) with the shape of sector enclosed by start angle, end
angle, start distance and end distance is created. 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-25 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.5.2.3 Using the EBL/VRM dial for the setting
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click [Alert] - [New Target Alarm] on the menu.

The [New Target Alarm] dialog is displayed.

3 Select AZ ([Use AZ1] or [Use AZ2]) to be set.

4 Click on the [Make AZ1] button or [Make AZ2] button.

The cursor enters the AZ creation mode.

5 Turn the EBL dial to set [Start Angle].

6 Turn the VRM dial to set [Start Distance]

Start angle

Start distance

7 Press the EBL dial and the VRM dial.

8 Turn the EBL dial to set [End Angle].

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-26

 1
9 Turn the VRM dial to set [End Distance].
2
3
Eng angle
4
5
6
End distance
7
8
9
10
10 Press the EBL dial.
11
6.5.3 Tracked target information display 12
13
Note
When a target or own ship changes its course, or when a new target is acquired, its vector may not 14
reach a given level of accuracy until 3 minutes or more has passed after such course change or
target acquisition.
15
Even if 3 minutes or more has passed, the vector may include an error depending upon the 16
tracking conditions.
17
18
1 Set the cursor mode to the AUTO mode.

2 Click on the target of tracking whose numerical value is to be displayed.

19
Numeric data for the specified target is displayed in the information monitoring window. 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-27 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 The symbol display is changed to " ". The target data will remain on the radar display until
the target is lost and its vector disappears, or until another target is designated.
If a target with the mark " " is designated, only its true bearing and range appear until its
vector appears.

Cancellation of numeric data display

1 Set the cursor mode to the AUTO mode.

2 Place the cursor on the tracked target to cancel numeric value display and then click
on.
The numeric value disappears.

Details on tracked target information

Item Explanation
TT ID ID No. of tracked target being displayed
BRG True bearing
Range Distance
CTW (Course Through the Course
Water stabilization mode)/
COG (Course Over the
Ground stabilization mode)
STW (Speed Through the Speed
Water stabilization mode) /
SOG (Speed Over the
Ground stabilization mode)
CPA Closest approach distance
TCPA Time up to closest approach distance
BCR Bow crossing distance
BCT Bow crossing time

6.5.4 Erasing unwanted tracked targets

If the vectors and symbols of the unwanted tracked targets remain displayed, the radar screen may
become difficult to view. In such a case, unwanted tracked targets can be erased from the radar screen
using the following method.

To erase one target

1 Place the cursor on the tracked target to be cancelled and then right-click.
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Cancel TT] on the context menu.

The vector symbol of the tracked target disappears and only the radar image remains.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-28

 1
To erase multiple targets
2
1 Place the cursor on the tracked target to be cancelled and then right-click.
The context menu is displayed. 3
2 Click on the [Cancel TT mode] on the Context menu. 4
The cursor changes to the selection cursor.
5
3 Place the cursor on another target to be cancelled and then click on.

4 Repeat the operation in step 3.

6
The vector symbols of the clicked tracked targets disappear and only the radar image remains. 7
8
To erase all targets

1 Place the cursor on the tracked target to be cancelled and then right-click.
9
The context menu is displayed. 10
2 Click on the [Cancel all TT mode] on the Context menu.
11
The vector symbols of all the tracked targets disappear and only the radar image remains.
12
Note
If all targets are cancelled, the tracking of all targets will stop; thus, automatic acquisition or 13
manual acquisition must be performed newly. Unless necessary, do not cancel all targets.
14
15
6.5.5 Displaying Target ID No.
16
A target ID number is a value displayed beside the acquisition symbol when a target is acquired.
A target ID number 1 to 100 is automatically assigned to each target in acquisition order. Once a target 17
ID number is assigned, it identifies the target until the target is lost or the target acquisition is canceled.
18
Memo
19
The ID number is always displayed for only targets with which numeric data is displayed.
20
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 21
The menu is displayed.
22
2 Click on [View] - [Options] - [Target].
The [Target] dialog is displayed.
23
24
25
26
27

6-29 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 3 Select the method for displaying ID No. from the [TT Target ID] list.

［TT Target ID］

[On]: Displays target ID numbers.

[Off]: Hides target ID numbers.
[TT Track]: Displays ID numbers of only targets set for track of other ships.
[Ship's Name]: When the ship’s name has been input in the [TT Target INFO] (property of
tracked target) dialog box, that ship name is displayed. If the ship’s name has
not been input, the identification number is displayed.

Memo
If there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confusing, set Target Number Display
to off to view the radar display easily.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-30

 1
6.5.6 Editing tracked target properties
2
The tracked target property such as tracked target ID name can be arbitrarily edited for individual
tracked targets acquired.
3
The [TT Target INFO] dialog is used for editing.
4
5
Tracked target ID appears.
6
Tracked target ID name is set.
For the details, refer to "6.5.6.1 Adding Tracked Target ID Name".
7
8
The track color of tracked target is set.
For the details, refer to "6.5.6.2 Setting track color of tracked target". 9
10
The target for which ground is fixed is set to a reference target.
For the details, refer to "6.5.7 Setting target for which ground is fixed
to a reference target"
11
When a TT target and AIS target are determined to be the same targets, the TT target or AIS target to be 12
displayed on a priority basis can be set.
For the details, refer to "6.3.8 Association Target Symbols" 13
14
6.5.6.1 Adding Tracked Target ID Name
15
An ID name can be added to the tracked target acquired.
16
1 Right-click the cursor on the tracked target.
The context menu is displayed. 17
2 Click on [Property] on the context menu. 18
The [TT Target INFO] dialog box appears
19
20
[Target ID] display
21
[Name] input box 22
[Edit Template] button 23
24
25
26
27

6-31 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 3 Click on the [Name] input box or  .
The input method varies with the selected item.

Input box : Enter a new name.

When selected, the ship name ([Name]) entry window opens.
Enter a ship name of up to 15 characters.
: The names registered as templates are displayed in a list.
Select a name from the list.

To register ship names as templates

1 Click on the [Edit Template] button in the [TT Target INFO] dialog box.
The [Edit Template] dialog box appears.

Input text box

[Register] button

Template list

[Delete] button

2 Enter the ship name to be registered as a template in the input text box.

3 Click on the [Register] button.

The entered ship name is registered in the template list.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, and register necessary ship names.

To cancel unwanted ship name registration

1 On the template list in the [Edit Template] dialog box, check the checkbox of the ship
name whose registration to be canceled.

2 Click on the [Delete] button.

The checked ship name is deleted from the template list.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-32

 1
6.5.6.2 Setting track color of tracked target
2
The track color of tracked target is set.
3
1 Right-click on the cursor at the tracked target.

2 Click on the [Property] on the context menu.

4
The [TT Target INFO] dialog box appears. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
3 Select track color from the [Track Color] list. 14
The selection items are as follows.
Off, No.1-Color, No.2-Color, No.3-Color, No.4-Color, No.5-Color, No.6-Color, No.7-Color, 15
No.8-Color, No.9-Color, No.10-Color, No.11 to 20-Color
* In "Color," the track color name set by clicking [View] - [Options] - [Target Track] - [Plot]
16
appears. For the details, refer to "16.2.8 Setting up the Display of Other Ship's Track"
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-33 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.5.7 Setting target for which ground is fixed to a
reference target
By tracking the target for which ground is fixed and setting it to a reference target, the speed of the own
ship can be obtained and displayed.

Note
• The reference target function is to be used if the own ship's speed cannot be displayed
normally due to trouble such as a speed sensor malfunction. Do not use the reference target
function except in emergencies.
• If the speed or course of the own ship is changed or a new reference target is set, the
displayed speed may take 3 minutes or more to reach the specified speed after the
speed/course change or the setting.
Even after 3 minutes or more has passed, the speed may differ from the specified speed
depending on the tracking condition.
• If a large radar echo such as a land target is set as a reference target, the vectors of the
speed and other tracking targets will not be displayed correctly and may cause an accident.
• If a sailing ship is set as a reference target, the vectors of the speed and other tracking targets
will not be displayed correctly and may cause an accident.
• If the reference target is lost or the Target Tracking function is stopped, the ship speed against
the ground will be GPS. (Only if the GPS is equipped.).
• If the reference target is lost or the Target Tracking function is stopped, that will make a major
impact on the accuracy of the target tracking and the own ship speed.
• The reference targets are only used for the calculation of true speed.
• Do not use own speed based on reference target tracking for relative speed and CPA/TCPA
calculation of AIS targets because the response of own speed is slower than actual own
ship's speed change and it may cause a big error on the collision judgement of AIS targets.

1 Acquire the ground-fixed target.

2 Click the right button on the acquired target.

A context menu is displayed.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-34

3 Click on [Property] in the context menu. 1
The [TT Target INFO] dialog is opened.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[Reference Target]
check box 9
10
4 To set the target to a reference target, check [Reference Target].
To not set the target to a reference target, uncheck [Reference Target].
11
5 Select [TGT] from the COG/SOG source combo box in the own ship information at the 12
top right corner of the screen.
13
The ship speed is automatically calculated from the reference target and is displayed as the
COG/SOG speed. 14
When a reference target is set, the symbol display changes to “ R ”.
15
Note
16
Only one target can be set as a reference target.
When a new reference target is set, the previous reference target is cancelled. 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-35 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.5.8 Operation Test for Target Tracking

Simulation is a function for determining if the target tracking function is working

correctly or not. Accordingly, this function should be used only to check for the target
tracking function operation.
In particular, if this mode is used during navigation, a pseudo target will appear on the
radar screen and cannot be easily identified from the real target. This may cause such
an accident as collision. Do not use this mode during the navigation.

The following operation test and checking are performed to check the operation of target tracking as
required. The [TT Test] dialog is used for operation.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Settings] - [TT Test] on the menu.

The [TT Test] (Test for Target Tracking) dialog is displayed.

The operation of target detection circuit is checked.

For the details, refer to "6.5.8.1 [Test Video".

A pseudo-target is generated on the radar screen to check that

target tracking operates normally.
For the details, refer to "6.5.8.2 [TT Simulator] (Target tracking
simulator)".

The gate size for acquiring and tracking targets are displayed.
For the details, refer to "6.5.8.3 [Gate Display]".

The status of Target Tracking function is displayed.

For the details, refer to "6.5.8.4 [Status] display".

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-36

 1
6.5.8.1 [Test Video]
2
Test Video is used to check whether the video signals under target acquisition and tracking are input to
and processed in the target detection circuit normally. 3
Normally, it is sufficient to just check that the VDIN of the Test Video is displayed.
4
Note
5
Test Video may not be displayed for a target which is not yet acquired or tracked. Test Video may
not be displayed either if the [GAIN] dial or [SEA] dial is not properly adjusted. 6
7
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 8
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Settings] - [TT Test] on the menu.

9
The [TT Test] (Test for Target Tracking) dialog is displayed. 10
3 Select test video to be displayed from the [Test Video] combo box. 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The selected test video is displayed in the rearward of the radar image. 22
If any target displayed clearly in the normal radar display is not displayed in the Test Video mode, the
23
target detection circuit of the Target Tracking unit may have a trouble. 24
To cancel test video 25
1 Select [Off] from the [Test Video] combo box. 26
Test Video display turns off.
27

6-37 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.5.8.2 [TT Simulator] (Target tracking simulator)
Pseudo-targets are generated in certain known positions to check whether the target tracking units are
operating normally. Since the pseudo-targets move depending on known parameters, the values for
these pseudo-targets can be compared with the known value if the pseudo-targets are acquired and
tracked, and displayed. Thus, it can be checked if the system is operating normally.

1 Click on the Standby/Transmit selector button for Radar system information to place
the radar in the standby state.
The button indication changes to [Standby].

Standby/Transmit selector button

2 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

3 Click on the [Settings] - [TT Test] on the menu.

The [TT Test] (Test for Target Tracking) dialog is displayed.

4 Select simulator scenario from the [TT Simulator] combo box.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-38

 1
List of target tracking simulator/scenario
Scenario Target No. Motion Moving start point 2
(true motion)
Speed [kn]
o
Course [ ] Range [NM]
o
Bearing [ ] 3
Scenario1 1 28.3 45 9.5 270
4
2 22.4 27 1.12 333
3 15.3 293 9.25 45 5
Scenario2 1 30 135 8 23
2 20 270 5 135
6
Scenario3 1 45 180 5 23 7
2 0 - 3 340
3 30 0 8 180 8
Scenario4 1 0 0 2.02 31
2 70 225 7.01 37
9
Scenario5 1 20 45 4.47 288 10
2 30 45 5.1 304
3 40 45 6.71 288 11
4 0 - 7.07 307
12
5 60 200 12 352
6 20 225 11 315 13
7 40 190 14.4 349
8 - - 8 318
14
9 - - 9 318
15
10 - - 10 318
Scenario6 1 5 96 5 0 16
2 105 225 6 45
17
Note
18
• When the simulator is operating, set 0 as the heading bearing
19
5 Click on the Standby/Transmit selector button to place the radar in the transmission
20
state.
The button indication changes to [Transmit]. 21
The simulator turns on, the pseudo-target is generated, and the letter "X" appears on the lower
side of the radar screen and near the pseudo-target to indicate that simulation mode is being 22
executed.
23
To cancel simulation 24
1 Click on the Standby/Transmit selector button to place the radar in the standby state. 25
The button indication changes to [Standby] to enter transmission preparation state.
26
2 Select [Off] from the [TT Simulator] combo box in the [TT Test] dialog.
TT Simulator display turns off. 27

6-39 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.5.8.3 [Gate Display]
The gate displays an area monitoring a target using the TT function. This equipment allows the gate
size to change automatically according to target range and size. The gate size can be checked using
the following function.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Settings] - [TT Test] on the menu.

The [TT Test] (Test for Target Tracking) dialog is displayed.

3 Select the [Gate Display] checkbox.

When [Gate Display] is selected, the gate is displayed.

When [Gate Display] is cleared, the gate is not displayed.

4 Set the cursor mode to the AUTO mode.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-40

 1
5 Click on the target of tracking whose numerical value is to be displayed.
2
Numeric data for the specified target is displayed in the information monitoring window.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The numeric value for the target is displayed, and the gate is displayed in green around the
10
target tracking symbol. 11
Memo 12
The Target Tracking can display the gate of two targets simultaneously.
13
14
Vector
Tracked
target 15
symbol Gate (displayed in green)
16
Echo
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-41 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.5.8.4 [Status] display
The status of the TT function is displayed.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Settings] - [TT/AIS] - [TT Test] on the menu.

The [TT Test] (Test for Target Tracking) dialog is displayed.

3 Check the display of [Status].

[Vector Constant] : Vector response

[VD Level Mode (Manual)] : Using quantization level on manual acquisition
[VD Level (Manual)] : Quantization level on manual acquisition
[Video Level (Auto)] : Quantization level on automatic acquisition
[Gate Size] : Size of gate used for tracking
[Tracking] : Number of targets currently acquired

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-42

 1
6.6 Setting and Operating AIS 2
6.6.1 Enabling AIS Function 3
Note 4
• When the AIS function is set to Off, the AIS display function is turned off and AIS symbols are
no longer displayed. 5
• Once AIS function is set to Off, even If a dangerous target exists, the function is not
automatically switched to On.
6
7
1 Click on the [AIS] button for other ship information on the upper right of PPI.
8
9
10
11
12
The button indication becomes ON and the AIS function becomes enabled.
13
ON indication:
14
The received AIS information is displayed on the screen.
15
16
6.6.2 Activating AIS targets (Activate AIS)
17
Activates an AIS target, and displays the target's vector and make a collision decision.
18
6.6.2.1 Manual activation 19
Activates an AIS target in manual mode to display the vector and heading line. 20
1 Set the cursor mode to the AUTO mode. 21
2 Place the cursor on the sleeping AIS symbol to be activated and then click on. 22
The selected AIS target is activated.
23
24
25
26
27

6-43 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.6.2.2 Automatic activation
Activate an AIS target in automatic mode to display the vector and heading line.
When the automatic activation function is used, AIS targets are automatically activated when they go
into the automatic activation zone. The automatic activation zone is identical to the automatic
acquisition zone (AZ) used for target tracking. For the zone setting, refer to "6.5.1.1 Automatic
acquisition ".

Note
When the AIS target's symbol is activated but the vector is not displayed, the following are
probable causes of the trouble:
• COG/SOG is not input yet from the GPS.
• The selected speed sensor is malfunctioning.

Memo
The bearing or range in the acquisition/activation zone shall be based on the position of the radar
antenna.
If there are more AIS targets than the allowable maximum, they are deactivated from the
low-priority (Refer to "6.3 Displaying Symbols").

6.6.3 Deactivating AIS targets

Deactivates an AIS target and clear the display of the vector and heading line.

[Deactivating one AIS target]

1 Right-click on the AIS target to be deactivated.

The setting items for cursor modes are displayed.

2 Click on the [Deactivate] on the Context menu.

The selected AIS target is deactivated.

[Deactivating multiple AIS targets]

1 Right-click on the AIS target.

The setting items for cursor modes are displayed.

2 Click on the [Deactivate mode] on the Context menu.

The cursor changes to the selection cursor.

3 Click on the AIS target to be deactivated.

The selected AIS target is deactivated.

Note
This operation is available only for an activated AIS target.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-44

 1
6.6.4 Displaying AIS information
2
1 Set the cursor mode to the AUTO mode.
3
2 Place the cursor on the AIS target to display the activated AIS target information and
then click on. 4
The information of the selected AIS target is displayed.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Note 13
When the numeric data of a target is displayed but the mark " " is not on the radar display,
the target is outside the display. 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-45 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

Canceling AIS target information display

1 Set the cursor mode to the AUTO mode.

2 Move the cursor to and click on the activated AIS target whose AIS target information
is to be cancelled.
The information display of the selected AIS target is canceled.

Details on AIS target information

Two AIS target information display modes are available, a standard mode, and an extended mode, and
the items that are displayed vary depending on the mode.
Use the AIS Standard/Extended selector button for switching between the standard mode and the
extended mode.
For verifying more detailed information of the AIS target, refer to "2.3.1.4 AID Detail INFO".

When the AIS Standard/Extended

selector button is clicked to change

display to , extended mode is

entered.

When the button is clicked to change

display to , standard mode is

entered.

The display contents vary depending on the types of AIS targets.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-46

 1
[Normal AIS target]
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Item Explanation
13
AIS ID ID No. of AIS target
Name Ship name of AIS target 14
Call Sign Call sign of AIS target
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
15
COG or CTW COG: Course Over the Ground
16
CTW: Course Through Water
* In ground mode, COG is displayed. In water mode, CTW is displayed. 17
* Operates in fixed ground mode on the ECDIS screen.
SOG or STW SOG: Speed Over the Ground
18
STW: Speed Through Water
19
*If the SOG or STW column is Over, the speed of other system is 102.2 kn or
more. 20
* In extended mode, the display area for two simple modes is used.
* Operates in fixed ground mode on the ECDIS screen. 21
CPA Closest approach distance
22
TCPA Time up to closest approach distance
BRG True direction 23
* In standard mode, this item is not displayed.
Range Distance
24
* In standard mode, this item is not displayed.
25
Heading Heading
* In standard mode, this item is not displayed. 26
27

6-47 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 Item Explanation
ROT Rate of turn
* In standard mode, this item is not displayed.
* The display range of ROT is 0.00°/min to 697.50°/min. In the case of Over, the
value will be greater. In the case of ±5/30s, it indicates that ±127 is received.
At this time, only turning direction indicated on the turn indicator is reliable.
The turn indicator is displayed as a straight line normal to the heading direction
on the AIS symbol.
(Refer to "6.3 Displaying Symbols.")
POSN Latitude/longitude
* In standard mode, this item is not displayed.
>10m or <10m >10m: Low positioning accuracy
<10m: High positioning accuracy
* In standard mode, this item is not displayed.
Destination Destination
* In standard mode, this item is not displayed.
Navigation The status is displayed by number.
Status For the details, refer to "Navigation Status" table.
* In standard mode, this item is not displayed.

Memo
In the extended mode, a display area equivalent to two standard mode areas is used.

Navigation Status

Status
0: Under Way Using Engine
1: at Anchor
2: Not Under Command
3: Restricted Maneuverability
4: Constrained by Her Draught
5: Moored
6: Aground
7: Engaged in Fishing
8: Under Way Sailing
9: Reserved for HSC
10: Reserved for WIG
11-14: Reserved
15: Not Defined

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-48

 1
[AIS SARTTarget]
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
There is neither the Call Sign nor Destination item. The display of some items of Navigation Status is
different. Otherwise, the display contents are the same as those of usual AIS target.
11
12
Navigation Status

Display
13
0 ~ 13: Same display as for the usual ship 14
14: AIS-SART ACTIVE(14)
15: AIS-SART TEST(15)
15
16
Memo 17
Switching between standard and extended modes is not provided.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-49 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

[AIS AtoN Target]

Item Description
AIS ID AIS target ID
Name Ship name of AIS target
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity code
BRG True bearing
Range Range
POSN Latitude/longitude
>10m or <10m >10m: Position fixing accuracy low
<10m: Position fixing accuracy high
Type Displays the AtoN type.
Fort he details, refer to the “Type” table.
* Not displayed in standard mode.
Virtual Flag Real AtoN: Real AtoN
Virtual AtoN: Virtual AtoN (does not exist)
* Not displayed in standard mode.
Assigned Mode Autonomous and continuous: Operating in autonomous/continuous
mode
Assigned: Operating in assignment mode
* Not displayed in standard mode.
EPFS Displays the EPFS type.
For the details, refer to the “EPFS” table.
* Not displayed in standard mode.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-50

 1
Type

Display
2
0: Not Available 3
1: Reference point
2: RACON
4
3: Fixed structure off shore 5
4: Spare
5: Light,without sectors 6
6: Light,with sectors
7: Leading Light Front
7
8: Leading Light Rear 8
9: Beacon,Cardinal N
10: Beacon,Cardinal E 9
11: Beacon,Cardinal S
12: Beacon,Cardinal W
10
13: Beacon,Port hand 11
14: Beacon,Starboard hand
15: Beacon,Preferred Channel Port hand 12
16: Beacon,Preferred Channel Starboard hand
13
17: Beacon,Isolated danger
18: Beacon,Safe water 14
19: Beacon,Special mark
20: Cardinal Mark N
15
21: Cardinal Mark E 16
22: Cardinal Mark S
23: Cardinal Mark W 17
24: Port hand Mark
25: Starboard hand Mark
18
26: Preferred Channel Port hand 19
27: Preferred Channel Starboard hand
28: Isolated danger 20
29: Safe Water
21
30: Special Mark
31: Light Vessel /LANBY/Rigs 22
23
24
25
26
27

6-51 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 EPSF

Display
0: Undefined
1: GPS
2: GLONASS
3: combined GPS/GLONASS
4: LORAN-C
5: Chayka
6: INS
7: surveyed
8: Galileo
15: internal GNSS
9-14: not used

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-52

 1
6.6.5 Displaying Target ID No.
2
When an AIS target is activated, a target ID number is displayed next to the AIS target symbol.
A target ID number 1 to 1000 is assigned to each target in the order of receiving targets by MFD. Once
3
a target ID number is assigned, it identifies the AIS target until the AIS target is lost.
4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
5
2 Click on the [View] - [Options] - [Target] on the menu. 6
The [Target] dialog is displayed.
7
3 Select the method for displaying ID No. from the [AIS Target ID] combo box.
8
9
10
11
12
13
[AIS Target ID]
14
15
[On] : Displays target ID numbers.
16
[Off] : Hides target ID numbers. 17
[AIS Track] : Displays ID numbers of only targets set for track of other ships.
[Ship's Name] : Displays the ship's name. 18
19
Memo
• ID number or ship's name is always displayed for only targets with which numeric value is 20
displayed.
21
• If there are many AIS targets and their symbol display is confusing, set Target Number
Display to off to view the radar display easily. 22
23
24
25
26
27

6-53 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.6.6 Checking and setting AIS target property
The AIS target property such as ID name can be checked for individual acquired AIS targets.
The track color of AIS target can also be set.

The [AIS Target INFO] dialog is used for editing.

AIS target ID appears.

AIS target ID name appears.

The track color of AIS target is set.

For the details, refer to "6.6.6.1 Setting track color of AIS target".

When a TT target and AIS target are determined to be the same

targets, the TT target or AIS target to be displayed on a priority basis
can be set.
For the details, refer to "6.3.8 Association Target Symbols".

6.6.6.1 Setting track color of AIS target

The track color of AIS target is set.

1 Right-click on the AIS target.

The context menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Property] on the context menu.

The [AIS Target INFO] dialog box appears.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-54

 1
3 Select the track color from the [Track No.] combo box.
The selection items are as follows. 2
Off, No.1-Color, No.2-Color, No.3-Color, No.4-Color, No.5-Color, No.6-Color, No.7-Color,
No.8-Color, No.9-Color, No.10-Color, No.11 to 20-Color
3
* In "Color," the track color name set by clicking [View] - [Options] - [Target Track] - [Plot] is 4
displayed. For the details, refer to "16.2.8 Setting up the Display of Other Ship's Track".
5
6
6.6.7 Conditions for deciding AIS target to be lost
About an AIS target lost
7
When the data of a target cannot be received for a specified time, the target is decided to be lost and 8
the target data is deleted. As shown in the table below, the time until target data is deleted varies
depending on the class of received data and the target status. 9
Note
10
• Since the lost time and that of the AIS indicator are different, this equipment may display lost 11
information earlier than the AIS display depending on the target status (speed, navigation
status, etc.). 12
Conditions for Deciding Target to be Lost
13
Time until data is lost 14
Non-SOLAS ship
Target status SOLAS ship (Class B) 15
(Class A) CS (Carrier
Sense)
SO (Self
Organizing)
16
Vessel below 3 kn (Class A) or 2 kn (Class B) and
it is now at anchor or on the berth
18 min 18 min 17
Vessel of 3 kn or more and it is now at anchor or
60 sec 18 min
18
on the berth
Vessel of 0 to 14 kn (Class B: 2 to 14 knots) 60 sec 180 sec 19
Vessel of 0 to 14 kn and it is now changing the
course
60 sec 180 sec 20
Vessel of 14 to 23 knots 36 sec 180 sec 90 sec
Vessel of 14 to 23 kn and it is now changing the
21
36 sec 180 sec 90 sec
course
22
Vessel of 23 kn or more 30 sec 180 sec 30 sec
Vessel of 23 kn or more and it is now changing the
30 sec 180 sec 30 sec
23
course
AtoN (Aids to navigation) 18 min 18 min 24
SART 6 min 6 min
AIS-AtoN 6 min 6 min
25
AIS SAR aircraft 60 sec 60 sec 26
AIS coastal base station 60 sec 60 sec
27

6-55 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 Note
• When the [AIS] button in the target ship information window is turned off, the symbol is
canceled.

6.7 Alert Display

Target tracking and AIS system have the following alerts.

Message Description
AIS Active 95% Capacity The number of activated AIS targets reached 95% of tolerance.
AIS 95% Capacity The number of AIS targets reached 95% of tolerance.
CPA/TCPA(AIS) CPA/TCPA warning (AIS)
Lost(AIS) The AIS target was lost.
AIS maximum capacity The number of AIS targets reached the maximum number of
targets displayed.
New Target(AIS) The AIS target was acquired and activated.
Not Allowed(TT Out of Range) Out of TT acquisition range
Trial Under the trial process. Occurs instead of a danger target alarm
when the predicted route of the tracking target intersects with the
CPA/TCPA limit range
TT(95% Capacity) The number of TT targets reached 95% of tolerance.
TT(CPA/TCPA) CPA/TCPA warning (TT)
TT(Lost) Acquired TT was lost.
TT(Maximum capacity) The number of TT targets reached the maximum number of
targets.
TT(New Target) TT was acquired.
TT(Out of Range ) TT went out of 32NM.
TT(Reference Lost) The TT reference target was lost.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-56

 1
An alert is displayed in the alert notification area (upper right of the screen).
2
Alert notification
area
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
6.7.1 Danger target alarm (CPA/TCPA)
13
14
15
Since these alarms may include some errors depending on the target tracking 16
conditions, the navigation officer himself should make the final decision for ship
17
operations such as collision avoidance.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the alarm may cause accidents 18
such as collisions.
19
In this system, targets are categorized into two types: tracked targets and dangerous targets
20
depending on the danger level. The danger level can easily be recognized on the display at a glance. 21
So, it is easily possible for the ship operator to judge which target is to be cautious about.
22
The danger target symbol of the tracked target will be displayed until either the tracking is stopped or
the conditions no longer apply.
23
24
25
26
27

6-57 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

The types of target and alarm are shown below.

Dangerous Target Alarm

Symbol on Alert
Status Alarm sound Conditions
display characters

• CPA > CPA Limit

Tracked • 0 > TCPA
12
target • TCPA > TCPA Limit
(Off) (Off)
Activated The symbol is displayed
AIS target when one or more of the
AIS12
above conditions are met.

• CPACPA Limit
• 0TCPA
12 Beep sound TCPA Limit
Dangerous CPA/ (beep-beep-beep)
target TCPA Alarm An alarm is issued when all
acknowledgeable the conditions are met.
AIS12 The sleeping AIS targets will
be activated.
Red blinking
CPA Limit and TCPA Limit: Setting Values

6.7.2 Alarm for new target acquired in automatic

acquisition guard zone (New target)

In setting an automatic acquisition guard zone, it is necessary to adjust the

gain, sea clutter suppression and rain/snow clutter suppression to ensure that
target echoes are displayed in the optimum conditions.

No automatic acquisition guard zone alarms will be issued for targets

undetected by the radar, and this may cause accidents such as collisions.

The automatic acquisition function sets a zone in a range and issues an alarm when a new target
(which is not yet acquired) goes into this zone.
For the setting of an automatic acquisition guard zone, refer to "6.5.1 Acquiring target".

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-58

 1
Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Guard Zone
2
Symbol on Alert
Status
display characters
Alarm sound Conditions 3
New target in
automatic New
Beep sound
(beep-beep)
The alarm is issued when a
new target is acquired in the
4
acquisition
guard zone
12 Target Alarm
acknowledgeable
automatic acquisition guard
zone.
5
Red Blinking
6
Note
When an already acquired target goes into automatic acquisition guard zone, the alarm for the 7
new target acquired in automatic acquisition guard zone does not sound.
8
9
6.7.3 Lost target notification (Lost)
10
Note
If the gain, sea clutter suppression, rain/snow clutter suppression are not adjusted adequately, the 11
lost target notification may be easily generated. So, such adjustments should be very carefully.
12
When it is impossible to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target, or the data of AIS target
13
cannot received for a specified time, the [Lost] notification will be issued. The typical causes for alarm 14
are shown below:
• The target echo is very weak. 15
• The target is hidden by a shore or a large ship and its echo is not received.
• The target echo is blurred by sea clutter or rain/snow clutter.
16
If a target under tracking goes into a range over 32 NM and can no longer be tracked, it is canceled
17
without a lost target notification being issued.
18
Lost Target Notification
19
Symbol on Alert
Status
display characters
Alarm sound Conditions 20
21
12 22
Beep sound
The notification will sound
Lost target Lost
(beep-beep)
once when a lost target 23
notification symbol is displayed.
acknowledgeable 24
AIS12 25
Red Blinking
26
27

6-59 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.7.4 Target Tracking function alarm (TT Data)
If some failure occurs in input signals or the processor circuits, an alarm will be issued. If an alarm is
issued in the Target Tracking function, [TT(Data)] is displayed in the alarm indication and nothing is
displayed in the indication of the target tracking information. Its cause is inferred that the Target
Tracking function is malfunctioned. In that case, please consult with our branch office, branch shop,
sales office, or our distributor in your district to repair it.

Target Tracking function Alarm

Alert characters Alarm sound Condition

Beep sound If the Target Tracking function has some abnormal
TT (Data)
(pipi) condition, this alarm issues.

6.7.5 Gyro set notification (Set Gyro)

The GYRO I/F in this system receives signals from a gyro. Even if the power is turned off, the system
will follow up the gyro. However, the system stops the follow-up operation when the power of the
master gyro is turned off or when any trouble occurs to the line. When the power of the master gyro is
recovered, the [Set Gyro] notification will be issued.
When this notification is issued, set the true bearing value of the gyro. For the details, refer to “5.4.13
True bearing”.

Gyro Set Notification

Alert characters Alarm sound Conditions

The signals from the gyro are stopped, but the gyro is
Set Gyro Beep sound (pi-)
recovered.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-60

 1
6.8 Track Function 2
6.8.1 Setting the Past position 3
1 Select the track display interval time from the past position interval selector combo
4
box for other ship information at the upper right of PPI.
The past position is set. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
[Off] : Tracks are not displayed.
[Numeric] : Tracks are displayed at intervals of the specified value. 14
15
The past position function can display up to ten past positions of a target under tracking. The past
position display interval can be set to specified time intervals of 0.5, 1, 2, or 4 minutes, or specified 16
range intervals of 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, or 1 NM.
17
When [Off] is displayed, the track display function is turned off.
The track mode operates in conjunction with the vector mode, and a true or relative track is displayed.
18
In relative vector mode, the relative tracks of the target are displayed. 19
In true vector mode, true tracks that are calculated from the relative bearing, range, own ship's course,
and speed are displayed. 20
Note
21
When the target is acquired, past position of traced target is start plot. When the AIS target is 22
displayed, past position of AIS target is start plot. If the past position plotted time or range is short,
the indicated past position duration may not have achieved the specified time or range. 23
24
6.8.2 Setting the other ship's tracks 25
This function makes settings for the tracks of tracked targets and AIS targets. 26
This equipment can display the tracks of up to 20 target ships.
27

6-61 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.8.2.1 Setting track color
For the details on how to set the track color of tracked target, refer to "6.5.6.2 Setting track color of
tracked target"
For the details on how to set the track color of AIS target, refer to "6.6.6.1 Setting track color of AIS
target"

6.8.2.2 Turning on/off other ship's track function

For the details, refer to "18.11 Setting the Target Track Function to ON/OFF ".

Note
Note that when this function is turned off, all the other ship's track functions are turned off. In this
case, the track data of other ships is not saved, so they cannot be traced later.

6.8.2.3 Setting other ship's track colors

You can set either one track color for all targets under tracking, or individual colors for the ships of track
numbers from 1st to 10th. The same color is used to display the 11th to 20th ships.
For the details, refer to "16.2.8 Setting up the Display of Other Ship's Track".

Note
If the other ship's track function (Target Track Function) is turned off, the track data of other ships
is not saved.

6.8.2.4 Turning on/off other ship's track display

The target track display function can be turned on/off. Choices for track display are displaying/hiding
the tracks of all ships and Individual (displaying the tracks of individual ships).
For the details, refer to "16.2.8 Setting up the Display of Other Ship's Track".

Note
Even when Target Track Display is turned off, the track data of other ships is saved if Track display
Interval is set.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-62

 1
6.8.2.5 Setting up the display interval of other ship’s track
2
A display interval of other ship’s track can be set.
For the details, refer to "16.2.8 Setting up the Display of Other Ship's Track". 3
Note
4
This function is not available when the Target Track Function is turned off.
5
6.8.2.6 Clearing other ship's track 6
The other ship's track can be cleared by setting a color or a track number.
7
For the details, refer to "16.2.8 Setting up the Display of Other Ship's Track".
8
6.8.2.7 Saving and loading other ship's track data
9
Other ship's track data can be saved on HDD and load from the HDD.
10
(Data can be saved to HDD until the data volume becomes full.) 11
For the details, refer to "3.20.2 File management".
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-63 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.9 Entering Own Ship's AIS Voyage Data
Set the own ship's AIS voyage data.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on [TT/AIS] - [AIS Voyage Data] on the menu.

The [AIS Voyage Data] dialog box appears.

In the [AIS Voyage Data] dialog box, information collected from AIS is displayed.

3 Enter information manually if not being displayed, or change the information being
displayed.

Item Setting
Destination Enter the destination in the [Destination] input box (maximum 20 characters),
or display the history list and click on the destination to enter.
ETA (UTC) Click on the calendar icon to display the date picker, and enter the
expected date (and time) of arrival by clicking.
NAV Status Select the [Navigation Status] from the combo box.
For the details of Navigation Status, refer to "6.6.4 Displaying AIS
information".
Draft Enter the draft in the [Draft] input box in the range between 0 and 25.5 m.
The draft can be entered in increments of 0.1 m. If the draft is more than 25.5
m, enter 25.5 m.
Cargo Select the cargo category from the combo box.
category
Persons Enter the number of persons on board in the [Persons on-board] input box in
on-board the range between 0 and 8191. If the number of persons on board is more
than 8191 persons, enter 8191.

4 Click on the [Send] button to save the input information.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-64

 1
6.10 Editing and Sending AIS Messages 2
AIS messages can be edited and sent.
3
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed. 4
2 Click on [TT/AIS] - [Edit and Send AIS Message] on the menu. 5
The [Edit and Send AIS Message] dialog box appears.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Message input area
13
14
15
16
3 Specify whether a message will be sent by specifying an MMSI code or distributing a
17
broadcast message.
For the details, refer to "To send a message by specifying an MMSI code:" and "To distribute a 18
broadcast message:".
19
4 Display the [Message Category] list and select the type of the message to send.

To send a safety related message: Click on [Safety Message].

20
To send a routine message: Click on [Routine Message]. 21
5 Type a message in the message input area. 22
To automatically enter own ship's latitude/longitude/UTC:
Click on the [LL&Time] (latitude/longitude/time) button.
23
To copy an existing message: Click on the [View Tray] button to display the contents of 24
the AIS Message Tray. Select the message to copy to
display it, and then copy it. The message can be copied 25
from the beginning up to the maximum number of
26
characters.
27

6-65 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 Note
The maximum number of characters that can be input changes depending on the transmission
method and the message type.
• Sending a message by specifying the MMSI code
- Safety message: Up to 156 characters
- Routine message: Up to 151 characters
• Distributing a broadcast message
- Safety message: Up to 161 characters
- Routine message: Up to 156 characters

6 Click on the [Send] button to send the message.

The message transmission confirmation dialog box appears.

When sending a message by specifying an MMSI code:

When distributing a broadcast message:

7 Click on the [OK] button to send the message.

To cancel the transmission of the message, click on the [Cancel] button.
The following dialog box appears while sending a message.

The transmission of the message currently in progress can be stopped by clicking the [Cancel]
button.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-66

 1
The following dialog box appears when the transmission of a message completes.
2
3
4
5
6
8 Click on the [OK] button to close the dialog box.

9 To save an MMSI code and a typed message in the case of MMSI transmission, click on
7
the [Save] button. 8
10 Click on the [x] button to close the dialog box.
9
To send a message by specifying an MMSI code:
10
1 Click on the [Addressed MMSI] (specified MMSI code) button. 11
2 Type an MMSI code (9 digits) in the [MMSI] input box. 12
The name of the ship having the entered MMSI code is displayed in the [Name] box.
The identification number is displayed in the [Target ID] box.
13
3 Type a message in the message input area.
14
In the case of a safety related message: Maximum 156 characters
15
In the case of a routine message: Maximum 151 characters
16
To distribute a broadcast message: 17
1 Click on the [Broadcast] button.
18
2 Type a message in the message input area.
In the case of a safety related message: Maximum 161 characters
19
In the case of a routine message: Maximum 156 characters 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-67 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.11 AIS Message Tray
The received, sent and saved AIS messages are displayed in AIS Message Tray in a list form.

Memo
The information reference window such as AIS message tray can be switched to standard window
display or extended window display.
In this example, extended window display is used.
For the details of switching between standard window display and extended window display, refer
to "2.3.2.1 Switching between a standard window and an extended window".

6.11.1 Displaying the AIS message tray

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on [TT/AIS] - [AIS Message Tray] on the menu.

The "Information Reference" window appears.

3 Click on the [AIS MSG Tray] button.

The AIS Message Tray is displayed.

Memo
The AIS message tray can also be displayed by clicking on the [View Tray] button in the [Edit and
Send AIS Message] dialog.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-68

 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Message list 13
Up to 50 most recent messages are displayed in the message list, from the newest date first. When the 14
51st message is registered, the message having the oldest date will automatically be deleted.
By clicking any item of the title columns, messages can be sorted in ascending or descending order. 15
When a message is clicked in the message list, the detailed information of that message will be
displayed in the right area of the list.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-69 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.11.2 Switching message display

To display transmitted messages:

Click on the [TX Tray] (Transmitted Tray) button.

To display saved messages:

Click on the [Saved Tray] button.

To display received messages:

Click on the [RX Tray] (Received Tray) button.
Unread messages are displayed in boldface.

To filter messages by specifying the transmission method:

To display only messages sent/received by specifying an MMSI code:
Click on the [Addressed] (address specification)
button.

To display only messages distributed through broadcasting: Click on the [Broadcast] button.

When messages are not filtered by the transmission method: Click on the [All] (display all) button.

To filter messages by specifying category:

To display only safety related messages: Click on the [Safety] (safety related) button.
To display only routine messages: Click on the [Routine] button.

When messages are not filtered by category: Click on the [All] (display all) button.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-70

 1
6.11.3 Sending a message in the message tray after
2
editing
3
1 Click the message to copy in the message list.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2 Click on the [Edit] or [Select] button. 16
When the AIS Message Tray is displayed by opening the AIS Message Tray submenu: 17
Click the [Edit] button.
The [Edit and Send AIS Message] dialog box appears, and the AIS message will be copied to 18
the [Edit and Send AIS Message] dialog box. When a message is sent by specifying an MMSI
code, the MMSI code will also be copied:
19
When the AIS Message Tray was displayed by clicking the [View Tray] button in the [Edit 20
and Send AIS Message] dialog box: Click the [Select] button.
The AIS message will be copied to the [Edit and Send AIS Message] dialog box. The MMSI
21
code is not copied by this method.
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-71 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.12 Highlighting TT/AIS Symbols
TT/AIS symbols can be searched by specifying criteria and highlight them.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on [TT/AIS] - [Highlighting] on the menu.

The [Highlighting] dialog box appears.

MMSI MID
Code input
box
Registry of
ship display

[TT/AIS] tab [AIS] tab

3 To include all search criterions as highlight targets, select the [Highlighting by the
following search criteria] checkbox.
To exclude all search criterions from highlight targets, clear the [Highlighting by the following
search criteria] checkbox.

4 If the [Highlighting by the following search criteria] checkbox is selected in step 3

above, clear the checkboxes of the search criterion to be excluded from highlighting.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-72

 1
5 Of the checked search items, specify the search criteria for highlighting.
[Transit direction]: Select the transit direction from the combo box. 2
N Sailing North
3
NE Sailing North East 4
E Sailing East
SE Sailing South East 5
S Sailing South
SW Sailing South West
6
W Sailing West 7
NW Sailing North West
Same way Same way 8
Opposite way Opposite way
9
Item Setting 10
TCPA Specify the minimum and maximum values in the range between
1 to 99 min.
11
CPA Specify the minimum and maximum values in the range between 12
0.1 to 9.9 NM.
SOG Specify the minimum and maximum values in the range between 13
0.0 to 1022.2 kn.
Unknown Ship As a result of conducting association processing using the
14
TT/AIS function, targets that were not identified will be 15
categorized as unknown ships.
Length Specify the minimum and maximum values in the range between 16
1.0 to 1022.0 m.
Type of ship Open the list and click on the type of the ship to be highlighted.
17
Cargo category Open the list and click on the cargo category to be highlighted. 18
Registry of ship Specify the MMSI MID Code in the range between 200 and 800.
The registry of ship corresponding to the entered code is 19
displayed.
Navigation Status Open the list and select the navigation status to be highlighted.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-73 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.13 Trial Maneuvering
Note
• Trial maneuvering is to simulate own ship's course and speed in the conditions that the
course and speed of a target ship are unchanged as they are. The situation is different from
any actual ship maneuvering, so set values with large margins to CPA Limit and TCPA Limit.
• During trial, the CPA/TCPA (TT) alarm cannot be approved. To approve the alarm, terminate
the trial.

6.13.1 Outline of Trial Maneuvering

The trial maneuvering is the function of simulating own ship's course and speed for collision avoidance
when a dangerous target appears. When the own ship's course and speed are entered in manual
mode, the trial maneuvering function checks if pre-acquired or pre-activated targets are dangerous.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-74

 1
Trial maneuvering in the true vector mode
If the own ship's vector mode is the true vector mode, the own ship's vector is calculated according to 2
the own ship's trial speed and trial course as well as the own ship's dynamic characteristic, and the
result is displayed as the own ship's expected course. The following figures show an example of
3
veering to the left: the dangerous target at front right has changed to a safe target as a result of trial 4
maneuver.
The tracked target information indicates the current CPA and TCPA values regardless of the result of 5
simulation.
6
NORMAL 7
HL 8
9
Own ship's vector 10
Dangerous target 11
12
13
14
TRIAL 15
HL 16
17
Route
18
Change of symbol 19
as a result of trial

T
maneuver 20
21
22
Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode
23
24
25
26
27

6-75 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

Trial maneuvering in the relative vector mode
If the own ship's vector mode is the relative vector mode, an expected relative course of the target is
displayed in relation to the own ship's expected course when in the true vector mode. The following
figures show an example of a dangerous target changing to a safe target. The target vector will cross
the CPA ring and will thus be a dangerous target. By trial maneuver of ship avoidance simulation
(under the same condition as the true vector in the previous section), the relative vector (expected
course) of the target changes to a safe target as shown in the lower figure.

NORMAL

HL

Dangerous target

CPA Ring

TRIAL
CPA Ring

HL

Change of symbol
as a result of trial

T
T
maneuver

Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode

The above figure shows that the relative vector of the target has changed as shown in the Figure as a
result of simulation (course and speed) in the previous section, so that the symbol color is changed into
"White", a safe target.
Irrespective of the simulation results, the current CPA and TCPA values are shown in the tracked target
information just like when the true vector mode is active.
The course change of own ship is displayed as a dotted-line.
Better information is provided by using the trial relative vector mode when sea stabilization mode is
active.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-76

 1
6.13.2 Performing a trial maneuver
2
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
3
2 Click on [TT/AIS] - [Trial Maneuver] on the menu. 4
The [Trial Maneuver] dialog box appears.
5
6
7
8
9
10
Time countdown display
11
12
13
3 Select the [Trial Function] checkbox. 14
The trial function is turned on.
15
When Trial Function is set to On, the character "T" blinks at the bottom of the own ship display 16
field in the radar display and means a trial maneuver.
17
4 Enter a setting value in each of the [Course] and [Speed] input boxes.

Memo
18
[Course] can be set up by turning the [EBL] dial and [Speed] by turning the [VRM] dial.
19
5 Set other characteristics. 20
[Vector Time]: Vector time (1 to 120 min)
[Time to Maneuver]: Time until trial maneuvering is started (0 to 30 min)
21
[Own Ship's Dynamic Trait]: 22
When this item is clicked, the dialog is displayed to set own ship's dynamic trait.
For the details, refer to "18.8 Setting own ship's dynamic trait". 23
For the settings of [Own Ship's Dynamic Trait], refer to "18.5.2 Setting own ship's dynamic trait".
24
The dangerous target symbol is displayed in red and the safe target symbol is displayed in 25
white.
The color of the safe target symbol can be changed with [Target Symbol] of [Settings] - 26
[General] - [Color and Brightness]. For the details, refer to "18.19 Setting Colors and
Brightness".
27

6-77 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

Vector Time is valid only when Trial Function is set to On. If it is Off, the vector time before trial
maneuvering is displayed.
Time until the start of trial maneuvering is counted down directly after the input.
The acceleration and deceleration are influenced depending on the relationship between the current
speed and the input speed for trial maneuvering.
If 0.0 kn/min is set for [Acceleration] when the speed for trial maneuvering is faster than the current
speed, or for [Deceleration] when the speed for trial maneuvering is slower than the current speed, the
system performs simulation on the assumption that the speed is changed directly after the time set for
[Time to Maneuver].

To finish trial operation:

1 Clear the [Trial Function] checkbox.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-78

 1
6.14 Displaying the TT/AIS Target List 2
The information of targets being monitored with the TT and AIS functions can be displayed in a list on
the information monitoring window.
3
4
6.14.1 Displaying TT/AIS List 5
Take the following steps to display the TT list and AIS list. 6
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 7
The menu is displayed.
8
2 Click on [TT/AIS] - [TT/AIS List] on the menu.
The "TT/AIS" list is displayed in the information monitoring window. 9
10
• In RADAR, the [TT List] button is displayed. Clicking on the button displays TT
information. 11
• In ECDIS, the [TT1 List] and [TT2 List] buttons are displayed. Clicking on these
buttons display TT1 and TT2 information. 12
• Clicking on the [AIS List] button displays AIS information.

When [BRG/RNG] is clicked, the Bearing and Range of the target from the
13
own ship are displayed as the other ship's position in the row of the list.
When [Lat/Lon] is clicked, Lat and Lon (latitude/longitude) is displayed as 14
the other ship's position in the row of the list.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-79 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.14.1.1 Switching between a standard window and an extended
window
The TT/AIS list can be switched to a standard window or an extended window.
To switch to an extended window, click on the List extension button.
To switch to a standard window, click on the List Standard button.

List extension List

button standard
button

[Example of Extended window]

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-80

 1
[Example of standard window]
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Scroll bar

By dragging the scroll bar, the overlapped section can be displayed.

14
15
Memo
A standard window is displayed at the initial display. 16
When the RADAR transmission status is Transmit in RADAR mode, the extended window cannot
be displayed.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-81 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.14.2 TT List

Display Example

Item Description
ID ID No. of tracked target
CPA Closest approach distance
TCPA Time up to closest approach distance
BCR Bow crossing distance
BCT Bow crossing time
COG or CTW COG: Course Over the Ground
CTW: Course Through Water
*In ground mode, COG is displayed. In water mode, CTW is displayed.
*Operates in fixed ground mode on the ECDIS screen.
SOG or STW SOG: Speed Over the Ground
STW: Speed Through Water
*In ground mode, SOG is displayed. In water mode, STW is displayed.
*Operates in fixed ground mode on the ECDIS screen.
BRG True direction
RNG Distance
Lat Latitude
Lon Longitude
Status Status
Initial ACQ: Initial acquisition in progress
Tracking: Acquisition in progress
Lost: Lost status
Danger: Dangerous ship

Memo
When the TT list is displayed initially, the items are sorted in the order of TCPA. When the
sequence is changed, the items are displayed in the last sort sequence.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-82

 1
6.14.3 AIS List
2
When [CTW/STW/Name/Call Sign/MMSI/Source] is clicked, CTW, STW, Name, Call Sign, 3
MMSI, and Source are displayed in the rows of list.
When [BCR/BCT/BRG/RNG/HDG/POSN/Status] is clicked, BCR, BCT, Bearing, Range, 4
Heading, Lat, Lon, and Status are displayed in the row of list.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Display Example 15
Item Description
16
ID ID No. of AIS 17
CPA Closest approach distance
TCPA Time up to closest approach distance 18
COG: Course Over the Ground
COG or CTW
CTW: Course Through Water 19
*In ground mode, COG is displayed. In water mode, CTW is displayed.
*Operates in fixed ground mode on the ECDIS screen. 20
SOG or STW SOG: Speed Over the Ground
STW: Speed Through Water 21
*In ground mode, SOG is displayed. In water mode, STW is displayed.
*Operates in fixed ground mode on the ECDIS screen. 22
Name Ship name
Call Sign Call sign
23
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity 24
Source AIS information source
- Direct 25
- Repeated
- VTS
26
BCR Bow crossing distance 27
BCT Bow crossing time

6-83 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 Item Description
BRG True direction
RNG Distance
HDG Heading
Lat Latitude
Lon Longitude
Status Status
Sleeping: Sleeping in progress
Active: Activation in progress
Lost: Lost status
Danger: Dangerous ship
[Show AIS Detail] When one item is selected from the list and this button is clicked, AIS detail
button information is displayed in the information monitoring window.
For the details, refer to "2.3.1.4 AIS Detail INFO".

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-84

 1
6.15 Confirming Own Ship's AIS 2
Information 3
Take the following steps to display own ship's AIS information.
4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed. 5
2 Click on [TT/AIS] - [Own Ship AIS Data] on the menu. 6
The "Information Reference" (information reference window) is displayed.
7
3 Click on the [Own Ship AIS Data] button.
Own ship's AIS information is displayed in the information reference window. 8
Ship-specific static information Dynamic information 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Static information that may change during each navigation
21
Memo 22
The Information Reference can be switched to standard window display or extended window
display. 23
In the above example, the extended window is used.
For the details of switching between the standard window and the extended window, refer to
24
"2.3.2.1 Switching between a standard window and an extended window". 25
26
27

6-85 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

6.16 Displaying the Last Lost AIS Target
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on [TT/AIS] - [Last Lost AIS Data] on the menu.

The "Information Reference" (information reference window) is displayed.

3 Click on the [Last Lost AIS Target] button.

The last lost information about AIS target is displayed in the reference monitoring window.

Ship-specific static information Dynamic information

Static information that may change during each navigation

Last Lost AIS Target (last lost information about AIS target)

Displayed information Explanation

Name Displays the ship name of an AIS target.
Call Sign Displays a call sign.
MMSI Displays a nine-digit identification number for a ship/ground station
equipped with a DSC communication device.
IMO No. Displays the 9-digit IMO number.
Length Displays the length of an AIS target.
Beam Displays the beam of an AIS target.
Destination Displays the destination of an AIS target.
ETA or UTC Displays the expected arrival time of an AIS target.

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-86

 1
Displayed information Explanation
Navigation Status Displays the navigation conditions of an AIS target. 2
0: Under Way Using Engine
1: At Anchor
3
2: Not Under Command 4
3: Restricted Maneuverability
4: Constrained by Her Draft 5
5: Moored
6: Aground
6
7: Engaged in Fishing 7
8: Under Way Sailing
9: Reserved for High Speed Craft 8
10: Reserved for Wing In Ground
11: Reserved
9
15: Not Defined 10
Draft Displays the draft of an AIS target.
Type of Ship Displays the ship type of an AIS target. 11
30: Fishing Vessel
31: Towing Vessel
12
32: Towing Vessel>200MB->25M (Towing and length of the tow exceeds 13
200m or breadth exceeds 25m)
33: Dredge or Underwater OPE (Engaged in dredging or underwater 14
operation)
34: Vessel-Diving OPE (Engaged in diving operation)
15
35: Vessel-Military OPE (Engaged in military operation) 16
36: Sailing Vessel
37: Pleasure Craft 17
50: Pilot Vessel
51: Search and Rescue Vessels
18
52: Tugs
19
53: Port Tenders
54: With Anti-Pollution Equip(Vessels with anti-pollution facilities or 20
equipment)
55: Law Enforcement Vessels 21
58: Medical Transports
22
59: Resolution No18:MOB-83(Ships according to Resolution
No18(Mob-83)) 23
2X: WIG(Wing-in-Ground Effect Craft)
4X: High Speed Craft 24
6X: Passenger Ships
7X: Cargo Ships
25
8X: Tanker 26
9X: Other Type of Ship
27

6-87 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

 Displayed information Explanation
Cargo Category When the setting of the type of a ship is
2X, 4X, 6X, 7X, 8X or 9X, the digit shown at the end of the code
represents the cargo/condition.
X1 Category X(DG/HP/MP)
X2 Category Y(DG/HP/MP)
X3 Category Z(DG/HP/MP)
X4 Category OS(DG/HP/MP)
X9 No Additional Information
X0 All Ships of This Type
Bearing Displays the bearing of an AIS target.
Range Displays the distance to an AIS target.
COG or CTW Displays the course of an AIS target. Displayed as "COG" in the course
over the ground mode and "CTW" in the course through the water mode.
SOG or STW Displays the ship speed of an AIS target. Displayed as "SOG" in the
speed over the ground mode and "STW" in the speed through the water
mode.
Heading Displays the heading of an AIS target.
ROT Displays the turning speed of an AIS target.
Position Displays the position of an AIS target.
Position Accuracy When the position-fix accuracy of an AIS target is low, [>10m] is
displayed.
When the position-fix accuracy of an AIS target is high, [<10m] is
displayed.
Position Sensor Displays the type of the position sensor used by an AIS target.
0: Not Defined
1: GPS
2: GLONASS
3: Combined GPS/GLONASS
4: Loran-C
5: Chayka
6: Integrated Navigation System
7: Surveyed
8: Galileo
15: Internal GNSS
Source AIS information source
- Direct
- Repeated
- VTS

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-88

 1
Memo
The Information Reference can be switched to standard window display or extended window 2
display.
In the above example, the extended window is used.
3
For the details of switching between the standard window and the extended window, refer to 4
"2.3.2.1 Switching between a standard window and an extended window".
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

6-89 Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS

Section 6 Target Tracking and AIS 6-90
 1
Section 7 True and False Echoes on 2
Display 3
The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide his best aid in maneuvering
4
the ship. 5
For this purpose, the operator has to observe the radar displays after fully understanding the
advantages and disadvantages that the radar has. 6
For better interpretation of radar display, it is important to gain more experiences by operating the radar
equipment in fair weathers and comparing the target ships watched with the naked eyes and their
7
echoes on the radar display. 8
The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in open seas, to check
buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port, to measure own ship’s position in the coastal 9
waters relative to the bearings and ranges of the shore or islands using a chart, and to monitor the
position and movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar display.
10
Various types of radar display are explained below.
11
12
7.1 Radar Wave with the Horizon 13
Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved surface of the earth. The 14
propagation varies with the property of the air layer through which the radar beam propagates. In the
normal propagation, the distance (D) of the radar wave to the horizon is approximately 10% longer 15
than the distance to the optical horizon. The distance (D) is given by the following formula:
16
D = 2.23 (NM)
h1: Height (m) of radar antenna above sea level 17
h2: Height (m) of a target above sea level
18
The following figure illustrates a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that
is limited by the curve of the earth surface in the normal propagation. 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Radar Wave with the Horizon 27
付録
7-1 Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display
 D (NM)

Height of Radar Antenna Detection Range Height of Target

Maximum Radar Range

When the height of own ship’s radar antenna is 10 m for instance,

(1) A target that can be detected at the radar range of 64 NM on the radar display is required to have
a height of 660 m or more.
(2) If the height of a target is 10 m, the radar range has to be approx. 15 NM.
However, the maximum radar range at which a target can be detected on the radar display
depends upon the size of the target and the weather conditions, that is, the radar range may
increase or decrease depending upon those conditions.

Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display 7-2

 1
7.2 Intensity Reflected from the Target 2
The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size of the target but
3
also on its material and shape. The echo intensity from a higher and larger target is not always higher
in general. 4
In particular, the echo from a coast line is affected by the geographic conditions of the coast. If the
coast has a very gentle slope, the echo from a mountain of the inland like the figure below appears on 5
the radar display. Therefore, the distance to the coast line should be measured carefully.
6
Mountain displayed
7
HL
on the radar display
8
9
10
11
12
13
Sea shore line not displayed
on the radar display. 14
Sea Shore Line Not Displayed on the Radar Display 15
16
The next table shows the relation between the target detection range and the radar reflection 17
cross-sectional area (RCS) with regard to the type and the height of the target in a situation in which
the weather is good, the sea state is calm and the radio wave propagation is normal. As revealed by 18
this table, even on the same sea shore line, detection range greatly differs depending on the height of
19
the target from the surface of the sea. Furthermore, because the target detection range is greatly
influenced by the shape and material of the target and environmental conditions, such as the sea state, 20
weather, and radio wave propagation, caution should be taken when detecting range of target.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
7-3 Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display
 Relation between Type and Height of Target and Detection Range and RCS

Height from Detection range (NM) RCS (m²)

Type of target sea surface
(m) X band S band X band S band

Sea shore line 60 20 20 50,000 50,000

Sea shore line 6 8 8 5,000 5,000

Sea shore line 3 6 6 2,500 2,500

SOLAS target ship

10 11 11 50,000 30,000
(>5000GT)

SOLAS target ship

5 8 8 1,800 1,000
(>500GT)

Small boat with IMO

standard compatible radar 4 5.0 3.7 7.5 0.5
reflector

Marine buoy with corner

3.5 4.9 3.6 10 1
reflector

Standard marine buoy 3.5 4.6 3.0 5 0.5

10-meter small boat without

2 3.4 3.0 2.5 1.4
radar reflector

Waterway location beacon 1 2.0 1.0 1 0.1

Note
Detection range shown in the above table may greatly decrease depending on the shape of the
target, sea state, weather and radio wave propagation conditions.

Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display 7-4

 1
7.3 Sea Clutter and Rain/Snow Clutter 2
In addition to the echo required for observing ships and land, radar video image also includes
3
undesirable echo, such as reflection from waves on the sea surface and reflection from rain and snow.
Reflection from the sea surface is called "sea clutter," and reflection from rain and snow is called "rain 4
and snow clutter," and those spurious waves must be eliminated by the clutter rejection function
([Signal Process]-[Video Noise Rejection] in the Menu. (Refer to "18.3 Performing basic adjustments 5
on the radar".)
6
7
7.3.1 Sea clutter 8
Sea clutter appears as an image radiating outwardly from the center of the radar display and changing
depending on the size and the shape of waves. Generally, as waves become larger, image level of the
9
sea clutter is intensified and the clutter far away is also displayed. In this case, it is difficult to
10
distinguish sea clutter from a small boat whose reflection intensity is weak. Accordingly, it is necessary
to properly adjust the sea clutter rejection function. 11
The following tables show the relation between the sea state (SS) showing the size of waves
generated by wind and the radar's detection probability. 12
13
Sea State and Probability of Target Detection
RCS SS1 to 2 SS2 to 3 SS3 to 4 SS4 to 5 14
0.1 m2 V V-M M-NV
15
0.5 m2 V V V-M M-NV

1 m2 V V V V-M
16
S band radar (probability to detect a target at a range of 0.4 NM)
17
18
RCS SS1 to 2 SS2 to 3 SS3 to 4 SS4 to 5

1m2 V-M M-NV

19
5 m2 V V-M M-NV 20
10 m2 V V V V-M
21
X band radar (probability to detect a target at a range of 0.7 NM)
22
V:
M:
Detection probability of 80 %
Detection probability of 50 %
23
NV: Detection probability of less than 50 % 24
25
26
27
付録
7-5 Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display
As shown in the following table, the number of SS increases as the wind speed becomes high and the
waves become large. The tables in the previous page show that detection probability decreases from V
(80 %) to NV (less than 50 %) as the number of SS increases. Therefore, even if the sea state is calm
and a target clearly appears on the radar display, when the sea state becomes rough, target detection
probability decreases resulting in difficulty of target detection by the radar.

Relation between Douglas Sea State and Average Wind Speed and Significant Wave Height

Sea state Average wind speed (kn) Significant wave height (m)

0 <4 <0.2

1 5-7 0.6

2 7-11 0.9

3 12-16 1.2

4 17-19 2.0

5 20-25 3.0

6 26-33 4.0

Significant wave height: an average of top N/3 higher waves when the number of waves detected
within a constant time duration is N

For example, in the case of a standard marine buoy, RCS of X band radar is 5 m2 as shown in the
Table “Relation between Type and Height of Target and Detection Range and RCS” on Page 7-4.
When observing such a target in the sea state (SS3) in which significant wave height exceeds 1.2
meters, detection probability is M-NV, as shown in the Table on page 7-5, which indicates 50 % or less.

7.3.2 Rain and snow clutter

Rain and snow clutter is a video image that appears in a location where rain or snow is falling. The
image changes according to the amount of rain (or the amount of snowfall). As precipitation increases,
the image of rain and snow clutter becomes intensified on the radar display, and in the case of
localized heavy rain, an image similar to the image indicating land is displayed in some cases.
Furthermore, because radio waves tend to attenuate due to rain and snow, the ability to detect a target
in the rain and snow clutter or a target beyond the rain and snow clutter may decrease. The amount of
attenuation depends on the transmission frequency, antenna beam width, and the pulse length. The
following 2 graphs show examples in which detection range is reduced due to the influence of
precipitation. Because of this, a target, which clearly appeared up to 10 NM by an X band radar (pulse
length of 0.8 µs) when it was not raining, may become dimly visible up to 5 NM when the amount of
rain becomes 4 mm/hr. Furthermore, when comparing the X band radar with the S band radar, target
detection range decreases less when an S band radar is used, which means it is influenced less by
precipitation.

Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display 7-6

 1
16
2
3
Precipitation of 16 mm/hr Pulse length 0.05 µs
14
Precipitation of 4 mm/hr Pulse length 0.05 µs

4
Precipitation of 16 mm/hr Pulse length 0.8 µs
Detection range while it is raining (NM)

12 Precipitation of 4 mm/hr Pulse length 0.8 µs

10
5
6
8

7
6
8
9
4

2
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
11
Detection range while it is not raining (NM) 12
Decreased Target Detection Range by S Band Radar due to Precipitation
13
14
16

Precipitation of 16 mm/hr Pulse length 0.05 µs

15
14
Precipitation of 4 mm/hr Pulse length 0.05 µs

Precipitation of 16 mm/hr Pulse length 0.8 µs

16
Detection range while it is raining (NM)

12
17
Precipitation of 4 mm/hr Pulse length 0.8 µs

10
18
8 19
6 20
4
21
22
2

23
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
24
Detection range while it is not raining (NM)
Decreased Target Detection Range by X Band Radar due to Precipitation 25
26
Note
27
Under rain, the targets that enter within sea clutter may be more difficult to detect.
付録
7-7 Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display
7.3.3 Coping with sea clutter and rain/snow clutter
When the weather is bad and the ocean is rough, the use of an S band radar is effective because the
radar is not influenced by sea clutter so much and attenuation due to rain drops is small. When an X
band radar is used, reducing the pulse length will reduce the influence by undesired signal, and also
the undesired signal rejection function effectively works; therefore, the use of short pulse is effective
when the weather is bad. The effect of undesired signal control can be enhanced further by setting the
various items on the [RADAR process] dialog box that is displayed by clicking the RADAR signal
processing setting button.
By using the observation scene selection function that is described above, a suitable setting value can
be retrieved according to various conditions such as weather (in the case of storm it is recommended
to set a value for Storm or Rain).
For the description of the observation scene button, refer to "5.3.7 Adjusting to optimal images
(Selection of observation scenes)". While these settings are effective, targets, particularly, those that
move at high speed may not be recognized visually.

Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display 7-8

 1
7.4 False Echoes 2
The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist actually. These false
3
echoes appear by the following causes that are well known:
4
7.4.1 Shadow 5
When the radar antenna is installed near a funnel or mast, the echo of a target that exists in the
6
direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display because the radar beam is reflected
7
on the funnel or mast. Whether there are some false echoes due to shadows can be checked
monitoring the sea clutter, in which there may be a part of weak or no returns. Such shadows appear 8
always in the same directions, which the operator should have in mind in radar operation.
9
10
7.4.2 Side lobe effect
11
A broken-line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the radar beam on the
radar display. This type of false echo can easily be discriminated when a target echo appears isolated. 12
13
HL
14
15
16
17
18
19
False Echoes 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
7-9 Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display
When a radar antenna for the solid-state radar is connected, a false echo may occur in the range
direction of the target image. This false echo normally means a range side lobe, which is generated as
a result of pulse compression processing when a large target such as a vessel is at a short distance.

False echo
HL

False
echo

Range Side Lobe

7.4.3 False echo by secondary reflection

When a target exists near own ship, two echoes from the single target may appear on the radar
display.
One of those echoes is the direct echo from the target and the other is the secondary reflection from a
mast or funnel that stands in the same direction as shown in the following Figure.

Direct microwave Actual target

Radar
antenna
False echo from
Funnel funnel

Secondary reflection of
microwave

Example of false echo by secondary reflection

Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display 7-10

 1
7.4.4 False echo by multiple reflection
2
When there is a large structure or ship with a high vertical surface near own ship as shown in the
following Figure, multiple refection may appear on the radar display. These echoes appear in the same
3
intervals, of which the nearest echo is the true echo of the target.
4
5
6
7
8
9
False Eco by Multiple Reflection
10
11
7.4.5 Second time echoes 12
The maximum radar detection range depends upon the height of the radar antenna and the height of a
target as described in the section "7.1 Radar Wave with the Horizon". If a so-called "duct" occurs on
13
the sea surface due to a certain weather condition, however, the radar beam may propagate to an 14
abnormally long distance, at which a target may be detected by the radar.
For instance, assuming that the transmitter pulse length is MP3 (on the repetition frequency of 1400 15
Hz), the primary pulse is reflected about 58 NM or more away from a target and received during the
next pulse repetition time. In this case, a target image appears as a false echo (second time echo) at a
16
position that is about 58 NM less than the actual range on the radar screen. 17
If the false echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display, the true range of the target is 5 + 58 = 63 NM.
On the transmitter pulse length is SP1 (on the repetition frequency of 2250 Hz), a false echo may 18
appear at a position that is about 36 NM less than the actual range.
This type of false echo can be discriminated by checking the change of the target range by switching
19
the transmitted pulse length (the repetition frequency).
20
False echoes can be suppressed by setting [Economy] to [TXRX] - [TXRX] - [PRF] on the Settings
menu or setting ON in [TXRX] - [TXRX] - [Stagger Trigger]. (For the details, refer to "18.6 Setting up 21
Radar Antennas".)
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
7-11 Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display
7.4.6 Radar interference
When another radar equipment using the same frequency band is near own ship, a radar interference
pattern may appear on the radar display. This interference pattern consists of a number of spots which
appear in various forms. In many cases, these spots do not always appear at the same places, so that
they can be discriminated from the target echoes.

If radar equipment causing an interference pattern and this equipment are of the same model, their
transmitting repetition frequency is nearly the same. As a result, interference patterns may be
displayed concentrically.
In this case, since the interference patterns cannot be rejected by using only the interference rejection
function, fine-tune the transmitting repetition frequency. (Refer to "18.6 Setting up Radar Antennas")
By applying different transmitting repetition frequencies, the interference rejection effect can be
improved.

Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display 7-12

 1
7.5 Radar Transponder (SART) Screen 2
Display 3
SART is life-saving equipment that was approved by GMDSS and is used for detecting positions of
survivors who suffer from distress accidents. SART, which operates under the frequency band of 9GHz,
4
receives a radar wave of 9GHz that is launched from the radar of the rescue boat or plane and 5
generates a series of response signals to notify the accident position to the searchers.
Set the equipment to the following in order to receive SART signals. Use the settings for SART 6
reception for detecting beacons and target enhancers also.
7
1 Set the range scale to [6 NM] or [12 NM] by using the Range Scale button on the
8
RADAR screen. 9
2 Set to ON the settings of [Echo]-[Signal Process]-[SART] in the Settings menu (Select
the check box.).
10
11
Note
The SART setting check boxes are not displayed at connection of a solid-state radar antenna. 12
13
The SART display mode is set to ON. In this case, the following items in the Settings menu are
automatically changed to the values as indicated in the table below. 14
For the settings of SART, refer to “18.3 Setting Radar Signal Processing”
15
Setting item Setting value
16
Sea (Sea clutter control) In MAN (manual) mode, the value is changed to 0 (minimum
Rain (rain/snow clutter control)
value) and in AUTO (automatic) mode, the mode is changed to
MAN and the value is changed to 0 (minimum value).
17
Manual Tune (Tuning) Off (Set tuning to Off to weaken clutter display)
18
IR (Interference removal) Off
Echo Process (Image processing) Process Off 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
7-13 Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display
 Land

SART signal (displayed as

sequence of 12 spots)

Other
ship
Position of search boat

Note
• When the SART display mode is set to ON to detect SART signals, small targets around own
ship may no longer be displayed on the radar screen. Therefore, implement sufficient
monitoring for the periphery of own ship to prevent collision and grounding. When multiple
radars are installed, use one 9GHz-band radar for detection of SART signals and use other
radars as normal radars for collision prevention, monitoring of targets in periphery of own ship,
prevention of grounding, and checking of own ship’s position.
• After termination of SART signal detection, set the SART display mode to OFF (Uncheck the
check boxes of [Echo]-[Signal Process]-[SART] in the Settings menu). The radar is reset to the
normal navigation mode.

Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display 7-14

 1
7.6 Display of AIS-SART 2
3
AIS-SART is a device to display data relating to the position of the ship in distress on the AIS display
unit of the ship station and coast radio station which install the AIS. 4
This device can be applied instead of Radar Transponder (SART).
When connecting this device with the AIS, AIS-SART symbols can be also displayed on the radar 5
screen.
6
7
7.6.1 Radar screen display example
8
If receiving AIS-SART signals from its device, an AIS-SART symbol is displayed on the radar screen.
9
10
11
12
Land
13
14
15
16
17
AIS-SART
Other ship symbol 18
19
20
21
22
Example of AIS-SART Symbol Display
23
*For the details of AIS-SART symbols, refer to "6.3.3 Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols". 24
25
26
27
付録
7-15 Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display
7.6.2 Numeric data display example
When the AIS-SART symbol is clicked on while it is displayed, AIS-SART numeric data is displayed in
the Target Info on the information monitoring window.

Example of AIS-SART Numeric Data Display

The following are displayed in Navigation Status area according to operating conditions:
• Normal operation: AIS-SART ACTIVE (14)
• Trial operation: AIS-SART TEST (15)

If displaying "AIS-SART TEST (15)", it indicates that the AIS-SART operation test is performing.

Section 7 True and False Echoes on Display 7-16

 1
Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 2
3
8.1 General Flowchart
A general flowchart of sailing using the ECDIS is shown.
4
5
Start ECDIS (Power On)
6
Click on “Route
Select ECDIS from the Task menu Task menu
Planning Route 7
Monitoring (ECDIS)”.
8
9
10
11
ECDIS screen display 12
Adjustments 13
• Screen brightness
• Brightness of the operation unit 14
• Sound volume
• Radar video, etc. 15
16
Are route planning,
user map preparation and
chart import/update
17
Required
required?
18
Not required
19
• Select [Route] Route Planning Refer to the following sections:
• Select [To WPT] • Table editing • Section 9 Route Planning
• Section 14 Creating a User
20
• Graphical editing
Map/ Updating a Chart
Route monitoring User chart editing • 13.14 Maintaining a Chart 21
• Alert monitoring (Arrival,
Route, etc.)
Chart Maintenance
22
- Import/update
23
Refer to "8.1.1
"Work Flowchart
While Sailing"
24
25
End route monitoring
26
Shut down the ECDIS (power off) 27

8-1 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.1.1 Work Flowchart While Sailing
Sailing start

Display the "Route

Monitoring" dialog box Click [Route Monitoring] on the menu.

Select [Route]

Select the route to be used. (Initially, UNLOAD is being displayed.)

Select a waypoint Select a waypoint from [To WPT].

Navigate own ship along the route.
Move own ship to the
waypoint

Own ship's symbol

TO WPT

Route monitoring When the ship arrives at the WPT, an

("Arrived at WPT" alert is "Arrived at WPT" alert is activated and the
activated when arrived at next WPT is updated.
the WPT.)
After confirming the alert, click on the
[ALERT ACK] (alert acknowledgment)
button and stop the alert.
The “End of Track” alert is issued just
Just before the arrival at
the final destination (“End before the arrival of the ship at the final
Of Track” alert is issued) destination.
After confirming the content of the alert,
click on the [ALERT ACK] button and stop
the alert.

Select “UNLOAD” from

“Route” and finish route
monitoring.

End of sailing

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-2

 1
8.2 Starting and Preparing the ECDIS 2
8.2.1 Powering on and starting 3
The ECDIS is powered on according to the following procedure.
4
5
6
7
Do not leave a disk in the DVD drive.
This may result in a drive problem. 8
9
In the case of turning on the power under the condition of low temperature,
do pre-heat more than 30 minutes. 10
The equipment may not be operated normally. And accidents may 11
result.
12
13
1 Press the Power ON button on the operation unit.
The Power button illuminates. After a while, the Task menu is displayed. 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-3 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.2.2 Starting the ECDIS
8.2.2.1 Starting the ECDIS from the Task Menu
When the ECDIS is started, the Task menu appears on the screen.
Start the ECDIS from the Task Menu.

1 Click on the [Route Planning Route Monitoring (ECDIS)] button on the Task menu.

The ECDIS screen is displayed.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-4

 1
8.2.2.2 Starting ECDIS from a non-ECDIS task screen
2
Click on [ECDIS], a task switching button at the top right corner of the screen. 3
4
5
ECDIS
6
The task is switched to ECDIS.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-5 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.2.3 Entering an ARCS PIN Number (ARCS Only)
When ARCS charts have been imported, the ARCS PIN code input dialog box appears when the
ECDIS is started.
Since ARCS is restricted by the ARCS PIN number, ARCS is not displayed unless the correct ARCS
PIN number is input.
To use ARCS charts, be sure to perform the following operation.

1 Input a PIN number in [ARCS PIN] of the [ARCS PIN] dialog box

2 Click on the [OK] button.

When the [X] button is clicked on, ECDIS starts without displaying ARCS.

Note
ARCS is not displayed when the contract has expired even if the correct ARCS PIN number is
input.

Memo
It is necessary to enter an ARCS PIN code only when the ECDIS screen will be displayed for the
first time.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-6

 1
8.3 Moving the Chart 2
Charts can be moved by the following methods.
• Moving by the [Home] button
3
• Moving by the cross-hair cursor 4
• Moving by the hand cursor
• Switching display from the [My Port List] dialog box 5
• Displaying by entering a position
6
7
8.3.1 Moving the chart with the [HOME] button
8
Display can be moved to a position where the heading direction of own ship can be observed in a
panoramic view. Use this feature if own ship is lost from charts. 9
10
1 Click on the [Home] button in Chart Information Area.
11
12
13
Display moves to a position
14
where the heading direction of
own ship can be observed in a
15
panoramic view.
Own ship
16
symbol
17
Screen Display of Home Position
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-7 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.3.2 Moving the chart with the cross-hair cursor
When the cross-hair cursor is moved to an arbitrary position on the chart and then clicked, the chart
can be moved. The chart moving position varies with the setting of the motion mode.
For information about the motion mode, refer to "8.6 Selecting Motion/Bearing Mode".

[When the motion mode is set to true motion]

The position of the cross-hair cursor becomes the center of the screen.

Cross-hair cursor intersecting point Moving to the Center of the Screen

[When the motion mode is set to relative motion]

The position of the cross-hair cursor becomes own ship's display position.

Moving the position of own ship’s display

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-8

 1
8.3.3 Moving the chart with the hand cursor
2
The chart can be moved by grabbing it with the hand cursor.
3
1 Move the cursor to the position where you want to grab the chart. 4
2 When the trackball is turned while the button is pressed, the cursor changes to a hand 5
cursor and the chart moves.
6
7
8
Hand cursor
9
10
11
Memo
If own ship sails outside of the screen, the motion mode will automatically be set to Free (free
12
motion). 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-9 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.3.4 Switching a chart to be displayed by [My Port
List]
If port names are registered in My Port List in the [My Port List] dialog box, chart display can be
switched to the one having the latitude and longitude of a registered port at the center of the chart.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Chart] - [My Port List] on the menu.

The [My Port List] dialog box appears.

Port list

[Jump] button

For how to register and delete ports, refer to "8.7 Registering and Displaying My Port List".

3 Click on a port in the list to select it.

4 Click on the [Jump] button.

The chart is displayed having the latitude and longitude of the selected port at the center of the
chart.

Example: Location registered as

a port

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-10

 1
8.3.5 Displaying the chart by entering the position
2
By entering a position, the chart of a desired position can be displayed.
3
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 4
The menu is displayed.
5
2 Click on [Chart] - [Off Center by Entering Position] on the menu.
The [Off Center by Entering Position] dialog box appears. 6
7
[Jump to the following position]
8
button
9
Latitude and longitude input
boxes
10
11
The latitude and longitude of the center of the current screen is displayed in the latitude and 12
longitude input boxes.
13
3 Click the latitude and longitude input boxes. 14
4 Enter the latitude and longitude of the chart you want to display with the software 15
keyboard.
16
Memo 17
The maximum latitude input range is 85 ° 00.000 (polar range restriction).
18
19
5 Click on the [Jump to the Following Position] button.
The chart is displayed having the entered latitude and longitude at the center of the chart. 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-11 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.4 Zooming In/Out the Chart
The chart can be enlarged and reduced by the following methods.

Item Related sections

Enlarging a selected area 8.4.1 Enlarging a Selected Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)
Enlarging/reducing with the [ZOOM 8.4.2.1 Enlarging/reducing with the [ZOOM
IN]/[ZOOM OUT] key on the operation unit IN]/[ZOOM OUT] key on the trackball operation unit
(S-57/C-MAP only)
Enlarging/reducing with the zoom slider 8.4.2.2 Enlarging/reducing with the zoom slider
(S-57/C-MAP only) (S-57/C-MAP only)
Enlarging/reducing with the Large/Small 8.4.2.3 Enlarging/reducing with the [Large]/[Small]
buttons (RNC only) buttons (RNC only)

8.4.1 Enlarging a Selected Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)

A selected area can be enlarged to the full chart screen size.

1 Click on the [Zoom Area] button.

[Zoom Area] button

The cross-hair cursor changes to a zoom cursor.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-12

 1
2 Using the trackball, move the cursor to "A" located at the upper left of the range you 2
want to enlarge, and then click.
3
3 Using the trackball, move the cursor to "B" located at the lower right of the range you
want to enlarge, and then click. 4
The enlarging range is enclosed with a rubber band and then that range is enlarged to the full
screen size. 5
Once enlarged, the zoom cursor changes back to the cross-hair cursor.
6
7
8
9
10
Selected area
11
12
Memo 13
Switching charts
• Generally, multiple charts with different scales are provided for the same area; charts having 14
matching scale values are selected/displayed by enlargement or reduction.
• When a displayable scale range is assigned to an original scale of a chart and the original scale
15
is beyond this range, the chart will not be displayed unless there are other displayable charts.
16
• This equipment is installed with a world map background chart as the reference chart and the
chart is always displayed in the background. 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-13 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.4.2 Enlarging/reducing a chart with the Zoom
function
8.4.2.1 Enlarging/reducing with the [ZOOM IN]/[ZOOM OUT] key
on the trackball operation unit (S-57/C-MAP only)
1 Each time the [ZOOM IN] key is pressed, the chart is enlarged according to the range
or scale that has been set up.
Each time the [ZOOM OUT] key is pressed, the chart is reduced according to the range
or scale that has been set up.

[ZOOM IN]/[ZOOM OUT] key

For the details of switching between range and scale, refer to "8.4.3 Switching between scale
and range (S-57/C-MAP only)".

8.4.2.2 Enlarging/reducing with the zoom slider (S-57/C-MAP

only)
1 When the slider handle is clicked upward, display is enlarged. When it is clicked
downward, display is reduced.
Each time the [In] (zoom in) button is clicked on, the chart is enlarged according to the
range or scale that has been set up.
Each time the [Out] (zoom out) button is clicked on, the chart is reduced according to
the range or scale that has been set up.

[In] button

Slider

[Out] button

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-14

 1
For more information about switching between range and scale, refer to "8.4.3 Switching
between scale and range (S-57/C-MAP only)". 2
Memo
3
Over Scale parmanentIndication 4
When the ship enters a different chart, an over-scale activated if the displayed chart is more
than double in size than the original data. The vertical lines as seen in the figure below will be 5
displayed on the "chart" to notify lower chart accuracy and clarity. The vertical lines will not be
displayed if the size has been made larger (double or more) through proper operation.
6
An “Over Scale” parmanentIndication is displayed in the alert display area. 7
8
9
10
11
Notification line at Over Scale 12
Case in which an Over Scale parmanentIndication is not displayed (1) 13
When a single cell is displayed in full screen with the scale exceeding double the compilation scale, the
Over Scale warning line is not displayed. However, an “Over Scale” parmanentIndication is displayed. 14
Compilation Scale
GB4X0000＝1/52,000、M_CSCL＝1/45,000
When the display area comprises a single 15
compilation scale, AP (OVSC01) drawing is
GB5Xnnnn＝1/25,000
not performed. 16
GB4X0000

M_CSCL 17
（A)

Display example of the display area

18
GB5X01NW GB5X01NE
(within the screen frame)
19
（A)
Display scale
20
（B) 1/10,000
21
GB5X01SW
GB5X01SE
GB5X
02SE （B) 22
Display scale
1/10,000
23
24
25
26
27

8-15 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

Case in which an Over Scale parmanentIndication is not displayed (2)
When multiple cells exist within the screen frame in the scale exceeding double the compilation scale,
an Over Scale warning line is not displayed in cells other than the cell of the minimum scale.
Warning display is performed and an “Over Scale” parmanentIndication is displayed.

Compilation Scale
GB4X0000＝1/52,000、M_CSCL＝1/45,000 When the display area comprises multiple
GB5Xnnnn＝1/25,000 compilation scales, the scales other than the
minimum scale are not used for AP
GB4X0000
(OVSC01) drawing.
M_CSCL

Display example of the display area

（A)
(within the screen frame)

GB5X01NW GB5X01NE
（A)
Display scale
1/10,000
GB5X01SW
（B)
GB5X01SE
GB5X
02SE （B)
Display scale
1/10,000

8.4.2.3 Enlarging/reducing with the [Large]/[Small] buttons (RNC

only)
1 Each time the [Large] button is clicked on, the chart is enlarged by one scale level
(larger scale charts).
Each time the [Small] button is clicked on, the chart is reduced by one scale level
(smaller scale charts).

[Large] button

[Small] button

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-16

 1
8.4.3 Switching between scale and range
2
(S-57/C-MAP only)
3
The current scale or range is displayed on the Scale/Range button in Chart Information Area.
4
5
Scale Display Range Display
6
7
The settings of scale and range as well as their switching method are as follows.
8
1 Click on the Scale/Range button. 9
The scale and range settings menu appears.
10
Scale/Range button 11
12
Scale values
Range values
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
2 Select a scale or range value from the menu.
21
The chart is displayed having the selected scale or range. 22
Memo 23
For range display, the half of the screen width becomes the specified range when displayed.
For a multi screen (refer to “8.10 Multi View Display and Wide Range View Window Display of 24
Charts”), the half the display screen View1/View2 becomes the specified range when displayed.
25
26
27

8-17 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.5 Changing the Object Category
(S-57/C-MAP Only)
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information available for display in the chart is subdivided
into three object groups; Base (Base display), STD (Standard Display), and All (All display). You can
change the object category using the display panel.

Base (Base Display)

A group of important objects that cannot be deleted from the charts (coastline and safety contour lines)

STD (Standard: Standard display)

A group of objects less important than base display (fixed and floating objects for monitoring)

All (All display)

All objects

Custom (Custom)
Refer to "8.5.2 Customizing object display"

Memo
About display in the chart
Display in the chart can be considered as the composite of various layers. For example, STD
(Standard: Standard display) is the composite of object layers for Base (Base display) and object
layers for STD (Standard: Standard display).
In addition to the object layers of the S-57/C-MAP charts themselves, own ship, user charts, event
marks, EBL/VRM, radar images, etc. can be combined and then displayed.

You will see all layers being selected.

Event marks, etc.

Layer

Layer Objects of "All (All display)"

Layer Objects of "STD (Standard: Standard display)"

Layer Objects of "Base (Base standard)"

Note
The initial chart screen status is "STD (Standard: Standard display)". For safe sailing, use the
"STD (Standard: Standard display)" or "All (All display)", not the "Base (Base display)".

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-18

 1
8.5.1 Switching object display
2
1 Click on one of the buttons of the Chart Information Area display category.
3
4
5
Information displayed on the chart changes.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
"Base (Base display)" Example 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
"STD (Standard: Standard display)" Example 22
23
24
25
26
27

8-19 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

 "All (All display)" Example

Note
The display will be in gray without displaying a chart when a corresponding chart does not exist in
the display area, when a chart exists with only a part of data, or when the display scale does not
match the chart scale. In this case, change the scale to check for a chart can be displayed.

8.5.2 Customizing object display

When the [Custom] button of the Chart Information Area is clicked on, the object corresponding to the
setting in the [Chart Display] dialog is displayed.
Any of the objects that are displayed on the [Chart Display] dialog can be set.

1 Click on the [Custom] menu display button.

[Custom] button

The display changes as follows.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-20

 1
2 Click on the [Chart display setting] button. 2
[Chart Diaplay] dialog is displayed.
The edit pane is divided into three dialogs. 3
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button.
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3 Set the object to be displayed. 16
For the setting of the [Chart Display] dialog, refer to "16.2.11 Setting up the Display of ECDIS
Chart". 17
Memo
18
The [Chart Display] dialog can also be displayed by selecting [View] - [Options] - [Chart Display] on
19
the menu.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-21 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.6 Selecting Motion/Bearing Mode
Using the Motion/Bearing Mode combo box in Chart Information Area, set up the motion mode and the
bearing mode on own ship's chart. The mode that can be selected varies with the chart type.

S-57/C-MAP Ed.3 Charts

Motion mode button Bearing mode button

[Selectable combinations in the motion mode and the bearing mode]

Bearing mode
N UP H UP C UP WPT UP
Motion mode
TM    
RM    
Free    

ARCS Charts

Motion mode button

*The bearing of the ARCS chart is fixed to N UP.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-22

 1
8.6.1 Setting motion mode
2
Set a motion mode with the Motion Mode combo box in Chart Information Area.
3
1 Click on the Motion Mode combo box.
4
2 Select a motion mode.
5
Setting item Description Display image
[TM] True Motion Mode
6
• Land and other fixed objects are fixed
Fixed 7
on the display and only own ship
moves on the display. When own ship Heading line 8
reaches the predetermined limit, the
chart is automatically shifted so that
Own ship 9
own ship always remains on the 10
screen.
[RM] Relative Motion Mode 11
• Own ship is fixed at the center of the
screen and the fixed objects such as
Moves
relatively 12
Heading line
land move relatively.
13
Fixed on ship position
14
15
[Free] Free
• You can freely move the chart on the 16
Fixed
display regardless of the own ship’s
Heading line
17
direction. As the own ship goes, it
disappears from the screen.
Own ship
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-23 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

Mode change by the operation:
In the following cases, the motion/bearing mode will be automatically changed from the current mode
to another one.
• From [TM] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen by scrolling the chart.
- When an area outside of the own ship range was displayed by loading charts or clicking the
[Jump] button in the [My Port List] dialog box.
• From [RM] mode to [Free] mode:
- When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen by scrolling the chart.
- When an area outside of the own ship range was displayed by loading charts or clicking the
[Jump] button in the [My Port List] dialog box.
• From [Free] mode to [TM] mode:
- When the [Home] button was clicked on,
the rotation in the Free mode is retained after changing to the TM mode.

Note
H UP, WPT UP, C UP are valid only the chart scale is not lower than 1/5,000,000.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-24

 1
8.6.2 Setting Bearing mode (S-57/C-MAP only)
2
Set a bearing mode with the Bearing Mode button in Chart Information Area.
3
1 Click on the Bearing Mode combo box.
4
2 Select a bearing mode.

Setting item Description Display image

5
[N UP] North up 6
• The chart is always displayed
towards true north. Fixed objects do 7
Heading line
not flicker and are easily identified on
the chart, and the true bearing of the
8
objects can readily be read out. Own ship
9
10
[H UP] Head up
The chart is displayed by orienting the 11
Heading line
ship's heading upward. Cannot be
selected under TM (true motion).
12
Own ship 13
14
[C UP] Course up 15
• At the setting of Course Up, the ship’s
heading (HDG) is fixed and displayed Heading line
16
immediately above the screen.
17
Own ship
18
19
[WPT UP] Way point up Target WPT
• The chart rotates automatically so 20
that the screen is always oriented
upward until the target WPT.
21
22
Heading line
Own ship 23
24
25
26
27

8-25 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

 Setting item Description Display image
[C UP Course UP by angle setting
(Angle • When this item is selected, the [C UP
Setting)] (Angle Setting)] dialog box appears. Heading line
The course angle that was set on the
dialog is displayed right above the
Own ship
chart and fixed.

- Input the angle of the ship’s heading

in the [Angle] input box of the [C UP
(Angle Setting)] dialog box.
- The angle can be input
(increase/decrease) by operating
the angle input slider.
- After completing the setting, click on
the [X] button.

Display changes according to the selected bearing mode.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-26

 1
8.7 Registering and Displaying My Port 2
List 3
8.7.1 Registering to My Port List 4
You can register any position on the chart to the "My Port List" dialog box. After registration, you can
directly access to that position by selecting a port name from the My Port List.
5
1 Set the location to be registered.
6
S-57/C-MAP
7
Since the center position and the display scale of the screen that is currently displayed are
registered in the port name list, move the location to be registered to the center of the screen in 8
advance.
To display another position, shift the chart area (refer to "8.3 Moving the Chart") or zoom in 9
to/out from the chart. (Refer to "8.4 Zooming In/Out the Chart".
10
ARCS
Since the center position and the display scale of the screen that is currently displayed are 11
registered in the port name list, move the location to be registered to the center of the screen in
advance. 12
To display another position, display the chart according to the procedures provided below.
• 8.9.1 Selecting charts from all
13
• 8.9.2 Changing active panels (ARCS only) 14
2 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
15
The menu is displayed.

3 Click [Chart] - [My Port List] on the menu.

16
The [My Port List] dialog box appears. 17
In the [My Port List] dialog, the Name, LAT (latitude), LON (longitude), and display Scale (scale)
of the port that is currently registered are displayed. 18
19
20
21
My port list
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-27 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

 4 Enter the registration name of the port in the [My Port List] (port name) input box.

5 Click on the [Save] button.

The coordinates (latitude and longitude) of the center of the chart display and the display scale
according to the registration name designated in the step 4 are registered in the list as the port.

8.7.2 Deleting a port

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click [Chart] - [My Port List] on the menu.

The [My Port List] dialog box appears.

3 Click on the port to be deleted from the My Port List.

The port is selected.

4 Click on the [Delete] button.

The selected port is deleted from the My Port List.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-28

 1
8.8 Selecting a S-57 chart 2
Because the chart of own ship's position is automatically called up after power on, generally route
monitoring can be performed instantly.
3
If you want to display charts other than the chart automatically called up, select a chart from those that 4
are displayed by selecting [Chart] - [Select S-57 Chart] on the menu.
5
For the details, refer to "13.2 Displaying/Searching an S-57 Chart [Select S-57 Chart] ".
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-29 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.9 Selecting an ARCS chart
This section describes chart selection and the functions on the display, which are available on the
ARCS chart.

8.9.1 Selecting charts from all

You can select desired charts from all the charts stored in this system.

1 Click on the [Select] button in Chart Information Area.

Chart selection button

The [Select Chart] dialog box appears.

[OK] button

2 Select the desired chart in the list by clicking it and then click on the [OK] button.
The selected chart is displayed on the screen.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-30

 1
8.9.2 Changing active panels (ARCS only)
2
The active panel on the chart can be changed.
3
1 Right-click on the chart
The context menu is displayed. 4
2 On the Context menu, click on the [Change Active Panel]. 5
The selectable active panel painted in blue is displayed.
6
3 Click on in the blue panel. The corresponding chart is then displayed.
7
8
9
10
11
Blue square
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Selected chart
24
25
26
27

8-31 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.9.3 Changing a low resolution chart (ARCS only)
1 Right-click on the chart
The context menu is displayed.

2 On the Context menu, click on the [Load Low Resolution].

The low resolution chart is displayed on the screen.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-32

 1
8.9.4 Changing a high resolution chart (ARCS only)
2
1 Right-click on the chart
The context menu is displayed. 3
2 On the Context menu, click on the [High Resolution Area]. 4
The cursor changes to the zoom cursor and an orange frame appears on the chart.
5
3 Move the cursor to the area to be expanded (the frame moves together with the cursor)
and click the mouse button. 6
The high-resolution chart in the area within the frame is displayed on the screen.
7
Orange frame
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
High resolution chart

8-33 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.9.5 Displaying the note and diagram (ARCS only)
You can display the note and diagram list defined by the current chart.

1 Right-click on the chart

The context menu is displayed.

2 On the Context menu, click on the [Note and Diagram].

The [Note and Diagram] dialog box appears.

3 Click on the item you want to display. The note or diagram on the corresponding chart
is displayed.
Clicking the [X] buttons, the dialog box is closed and the chart display returns to the
original display position.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-34

 1
8.10 Multi View Display and Wide Range 2
View Window Display of Charts 3
The multi view display function divides the chart window into two windows and displays the same chart
4
or different charts separately in these two windows.
5
Note 6
ARCS and C-MAP Ed.3 cannot display charts of other models simultaneously.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Example of Multi Window Display (Top-Bottom)
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Example of Multi Window Display (Picture in Picture) 26
27

8-35 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.10.1 Display of multi view
8.10.1.1 Displaying multi view
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Select [View] - [Multi View Mode] on the menu.

The [Multi View Mode] dialog box appears.

View
modes

3 Click on a multi view mode to select it.

The selected multi view mode takes effect.

View1

View2

Top-Bottom

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-36

 1
2
3
4
View1 View2 5
6
7
8
Right-Left
9
10
View2 11
12
13
View1
14
15
16
17
Picture in picture
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-37 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.10.1.2 Multi view operation procedure

[Operation When Manipulating Multi View]

• The same view is displayed in View1 and View2.
• Except for the items that can be set up separately in View2, View1 and View2 are displayed by
linking.
• Rubber bands during create or edit operation (such as Route Planning) can only be displayed in
active view.
• EBL/VRM and EBL maneuvers are shared between View1 and View2 and the same contents are
displayed (however, the contents may differ depending on the setting of the measurement
reference point.).

Note
The bearing mode of View2 operates by interlocking with the bearing mode of View1.

[Specifying an area to be displayed in View2]

In View1, you can specify an area you want to display in View2.

1 Click on the [Select Area from View1 for View2] button in the [Multi View Mode] dialog.

The button is displayed in reverse video.

2 Move the cursor to View1.

The cursor changes to the range selection cursor.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-38

 1
3 Drag the cursor and specify an area you want to display in View2. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
4 Click on.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The specified range is displayed in View2.
The [Select Area from View1 for View2] button is displayed in normal video. 22
23
24
25
26
27

8-39 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

[Selecting a View]
Various operations can be performed in the selected view.

1 Click on the view you want to make active.

The clicked view becomes the active view.

Which view is active can be checked in active information display.

When View1 is active

When View2 is active

Active information display area

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-40

 1
[Moving the Boundary Line of View]
When the view mode is either Top-Bottom or Right-Left, the boundary line of view can be moved. 2
1 To move the boundary line of view, click on the boundary line. 3
2 When the cursor changes to the arrow shape shown below, move the boundary by 4
dragging the cursor to the arrow directions.
5
6
[Moving View2] 7
When the view mode is Picture in picture, the position of View2 can be moved. 8
1 Click on the title bar of View2
9
2 When the cursor changes to the arrow shape shown below, move View2 by dragging
the cursor to the arrow directions.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-41 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.11 Verifying Object Information (Pick
Report Function)
Each of the objects on the chart has its own attributes (e.g. lighthouse, buoy, depth contour, land and
river).
For example, if an object is a lighthouse, attributes such as lighting color and frequency can be read
out. If the object is depth contour, the water depth can be read out.

Attribute information of these objects can be read and verified by using the pick report function.
The pick report displays the following information.
• S-57 chart
• C-MAP chart
• ARCS chart
• AIO
• Manual update

8.11.1 Pick Report of the S-57 chart

8.11.1.1 Displaying a Pick Report of the S-57 chart
1 Click the right button on the chart.

A pick mark and the context menu are displayed.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-42

 1
2 Click on [Cursor Pick] on the context menu.
2
3
4
5
6
[Pick Report] dialog box appears.
7
8
Display switching tab
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Display switching tab
This tab switches the information that is displayed. When the [Object] (object information) tab is clicked 20
on, object information is displayed. When the [Chart Legend] tab is clicked on, chart information is
displayed. When the [Update Log] tab is clicked on, chart update history is displayed. 21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-43 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.11.1.2 Verifying Object Information
When the [Object] tab on the display switching tab is clicked on, object information is displayed.

Object List area

［Display administrative information］

Object information area

Object list area

The object within the pick cursor and its geometry are displayed in the object information area.
When an object is selected in the object list area, the selected object is displayed on the map in
highlight mode in the case of the S-57 chart.

[Display administrative information]

When this item is selected, the attributes of the administrative information and the contents are
displayed.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-44

 1
Object information area
Information (attributes) of the object that was selected from the object list is displayed. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
[Attribute] [Value] (Attribute value) 12
(Attribute name)
Additional information file 13
14
15
[Attribute]
(Attribute name)
[Value] (Attribute value) 16
[View Table] button
17
18
Displaying an additional information file
19
The additional information file on the object that was selected from the object list is displayed in [Value] 20
in hyperlink format.
Additional information files include text files (extension.TXT) and image files (extension.TIF). 21
22
Example: Image file
23
24
25
26
27

8-45 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

When Hyperlink is clicked on, the additional information file is displayed in a separate dialog box.

[View Table] button

When the [View Table] button of [Value] is clicked on, the data is displayed in a separate dialog box in
the format that is specified as the attribute.

Tidal stream - panel values Tide - value of harmonic constituents

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-46

 1
Accuracy information and symbol addition information of an object
When the [Other INFO] tab is clicked on, the accuracy information and the symbol addition information 2
of the object are displayed in the object information area.
3
4
5
6
7
8
［Other INFO］ tab 9
［Information］ combo box
10
11
12
13
14
Each information item can be selected and displayed by using the [Information] combo box.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Coordinate display of an Unknown object 24
When an Unknown object is selected from the object selection list on the pick report screen, a text box
25
is displayed indicating the coordinate of one representative point of Unknown objects.
26
27

8-47 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

Pick report collection object display
The collection object that is linked to the object that is selected from Picked objects is displayed.
Three collection object types are available: Aggregation, Association, and Stacked on/Stacked under.
When the [Collection] button is clicked on, a Collection objects list is displayed.
When [Back] button is clicked on after the list is displayed, the Picked Object list is displayed.

［Collection］ button

Collection objects list area

［Back］ button

When no collection object is linked to the selected object, the Collection button is displayed as
Disabled.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-48

 1
8.11.1.3 Verifying Chart Information
When the [Chart Legend] tab of the display switching tab is clicked on, chart information is displayed. 2
3
4
[Name] (Chart name)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
[Name] (Chart name) 14
When there are multiple charts on the selected chart position and a chart is selected from the list, the
information of the chart is displayed. When [All] is selected from the list, information on all the charts is
15
displayed.
16
Display of Zone Of Confidence 17
If Data Quality Indicator of the chart information is depth data, hyper link selection is displayed on the
list. If hyper link is selected, the Zone of Confidence dialog is displayed. 18
[Zone Of Confidence] hyper link
19
3
20
4
5
6
7
21
8
9
10 22
11
12
13
14 23
15
16
17
18 24
19
20
21
22 25
23
24
25
26 26
27
28
29 27
30
31
32

8-49 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.11.1.4 Verifying Chart Update History
When the [Update Log] tab of the display switching tab is clicked on, chart update history is displayed.

Separator of chart update

history

If the chart update history consists of multiple pages and cannot be displayed on one page of the
screen, drag the scroll bar to display the rest.

Scroll bar

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-50

 1
8.11.2 Pick report of the C-MAP chart 2
For C-MAP, T & P can be selected instead of AIO with the Object Groups filter on the Object tab.
The following contents are displayed from the [Update Log] (chart update history) tab.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-51 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.11.3 Pick report of the ARCS chart
The display method is the same as that of S-57.
In the case of ARCS, only the chart information area is displayed.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-52

 1
8.12 Marking the Position of Own Ship 2
with an Event Mark 3
While sailing, you can mark the position of own ship on the chart with an event mark.
4
1 Click on the [Event] button in Chart Information Area. 5
6
7
An event mark is marked to the position of own ship and the [Property] dialog box of event 8
marks appears.
9
10
11
Event mark
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
The display position, ID, and date and time of creation of the event mark are displayed in the 23
[Property] dialog box.
Enter any desired comment in the [Comment] input box. 24
[Deleting the Event Mark]
25
The event mark can be deleted by either of the following methods. 26
• Right-click on the event mark and click on [Delete this object] on the Context menu that appears.
• Click on the event mark when in the Delete mode. 27

8-53 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.13 Displaying Radar Images on a Chart
by Overlaying
Radar images can be displayed by overlaying on the chart.

Note
• To perform overlay display of radar images, the radar function must be installed and radar
images must be received from the radar system.
• If the radar system displays a short-range image and a long-range image on the ECDIS at the
same time, the radar image on the ECDIS may be distorted.
• While the radar image is displayed, the display range can be changed in 11 steps
(0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1.5/3/6/12/24/48/96 NM).
• In the case of ARCS charts, the display range varies with the chart to be displayed. If a range
over 120 NM is selected, radar image display automatically turns off.
• The screen display color will automatically change to [Day3] when RADAR Overlay is turned
on. (When the screen display color is Dusk/Night, automatic switching does not occur.)
• When Multi View is used, radar images canot be displayed on View2.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-54

 1
8.13.1 Turning On/Off overlay display
2
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed. 3
2 Select [View] - [Options] - [RADAR] on the menu. 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3 Select the [RADAR Overlay] check box. 17
Radar overlay display is set to On.
18
4 Select a radar system to be used from the pull-down menu.
19
Memo
• When multiple radar systems are available, click the [RADAR Overlay] combo box and then 20
select the radar image to be used from the pull-down menu that appears. (Radar images can
21
be selected from the maximum of 8 systems, [RADAR1] to [RADAR8].)
• Even if the connection between this equipment and the radar system is not set or the 22
connection setting is cancelled, reconnection is set automatically. As a result, the overlay
display of the radar image is continued. 23
24
25
26
27

8-55 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

[Transparency Setting of Echo/Trails]
Transparency can be set up by clicking the [Transparency of Echo/Trails] slider handle to right and left.

Opacity Transparency

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-56

 1
8.13.2 Turning On/Off range ring display
2
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed. 3
2 Select [View] - [Options] - [Tools] on the menu. 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3 To show range rings, select [Range Rings].
17
To hide range rings, clear it. 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-57 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.13.3 Turning On/Off bearing scale
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Select [View] - [Options] - [Tools] on the menu.

3 To show a bearing scale, check [Bearing Scale].

To hide a bearing scale, clear it.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-58

 1
8.13.4 Radar image adjustment
2
Radar images can be adjusted using the [RAIN], [SEA] and [GAIN] dials on the keyboard operation
unit. 3
4
5
6
[RAIN] dial: Suppressing rain and snow clutter
7
The [RAIN] dial suppresses clutter caused by rain and snow. Turning the [RAIN] dial to the right
enhances the contours of targets that are hidden in images of rain and snow. Take care not to 8
over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets. This dial also reduces sea clutter. So,
using both the [RAIN] and [SEA] dials is more effective. Normally, keep this dial turned as far as 9
possible to the left.
10
[SEA] dial: Suppressing sea clutter 11
The [SEA] dial lowers the gain at a short range to reduce sea clutter. Turning the [SEA] dial to the right
increases the effect of suppressing sea clutter. Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you 12
may miss small targets like buoys and small boats.
13
[GAIN] dial: Adjusting sensitivity 14
The [GAIN] dial adjusts the gain of RADAR echo. Turning the [GAIN] dial to the right increases the gain
and widens the range in which RADAR echo can be observed. 15
Take care not to over-adjust this dial, as reception noise on screen increases. This worsens the
contrast and makes it more difficult to tell the difference between targets and RADAR echo.
16
Alternatively, turning the [GAIN] dial to the left to view at a short range or screens containing closely 17
packed targets, decreases the gain making targets easier to view. Take care not to over-adjust this dial.
Otherwise, you may miss small targets. 18
Memo
19
If the keyboard operation unit is not available, the radar image can be adjusted using [Rain], [Sea]
20
or [Gain] slider in the setting dialog of [Settings]- [Signal Process (Basic)] on the menu.
The [Signal Process (Basic)] setting dialog can also be displayed by operating the [RAIN], [SEA], 21
or [GAIN] dials on the keyboard operation unit.
When one of the dials is held down (for 2 seconds or more) at operation termination, the setting 22
dialog is closed.
23
For the details of the [Signal Process(Basic)] setting dialog, refer to "18.2 Basic setting of radar
signal processing". 24
25
26
27

8-59 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.14 Setting a true bearing
When a gyro signal is input by using GYRO I/F, sometimes the true bearing value indicated by the
master gyro and the true bearing value indicated by this equipment do not match.
In this case, set the true bearing value of this equipment to the value of the master gyro by using the
following procedure.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Settings] - [General] on the menu.

The [General] dialog is displayed.

3 Click on the [GYRO Setting] input box.

4 Enter the master gyro value through the software keyboard.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-60

 1
8.15 Setting an own ship’s speed 2
8.15.1 Switching an own ship’s speed sensor 3
1 Click on the STW Source combo box of the own ship’s information
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
2 Select a sensor source in the [STW] combo box. Any of the following sensor sources
can be selected.
12
MAN
13
Logx ("x" indicates the equipment number)
When [Menu] is selected, the [Sensor Selection/Status] dialog is displayed. 14
When [MAN] (Manual) is selected, a speed through water can be input in the [Sensor
Selection/Status] dialog. 15
16
• When using 1-axis log, heading speed component can be detected, but
17
transverse speed component cannot be detected. Then leeway effect
(component drifted by wind) cannot be detected. 18
• When using 2-axes log, its accuracy in shallow waters may be deteriorated, and 19
its speed in deep sea areas may be unable to be detected.
20
• When using a GPS, COG accuracy is less than ±3° at speed: from 1kn to 17kn,
and is less than ±1° at speed: more than 17kn. 21
22
23
24
25
26
27

8-61 Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option)

8.15.2 Entering the ship’s heading/own ship’s speed
manually
When the device (example: LOG) that is connected to this equipment fails to function, the target
tracking device and true motion display can be used by entering the ship’s heading/own ship’s speed
manually by using the following procedure.

1 Select [Menu] from the corresponding combo box.

The [Sensor Selection/Status] dialog box appears.

2 To enter the ship’s heading manually, select [Manual] from the [Heading] combo box.
To enter the ship’s own speed manually, select [Manual] from the [STW] combo box.

3 Click on the input combo box.

4 Enter numeric values through the software keyboard.

Section 8 Functions of the ECDIS (Option) 8-62

 1
Section 9 Route Planning 2
3
4
5
Edit the navigation route according to the world geodetic system (WGS-84). 6
If you use the navigation route edited by a geodetic system other than the world
geodetic system, an accident may occur.
7
8
The Route Planning function creates and edits a route of a ship in advance. A route comprises WPTs
(waypoints) from the starting point to the arrival point and the straight lines (legs) that connect the
9
WPTs. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Route Planning Example
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-1 Section 9 Route Planning

9.1 Overview of the Route Planning
Function
Table editing function
This function enables creation of a route in table format by using the [Route Planning] dialog box.
A route is created by entering each WPT into the WPT list.
For the details of route planning with table editing, refer to "9.6 Planning a Route by Using Table
Editing".

Graphic editing function

This function enables creating a route on a chart.
A route plan is created by adding a WPT on a chart.
For the details of route planning with graphic editing, refer to "9.7 Planning a New Route by Graphic
Editing".

Route planning safety checking function

This function checks the safety of the planned route.
For the details, refer to "9.9.1 Checking a route based on the safety standards".

Route planning limit checking function

This function checks whether the planned route does not violate the pre-defined limit.
For the details, refer to "9.9.2 Checking a route based on the limits".

Navigation calculating function

This function supports the calculation of distance and bearing that are required for navigation.
For the details, refer to "9.10 Navigation Calculation Function".

Import/Export function
This function imports/exports a route file.
For the details, refer to "9.11 Importing/Exporting a Route File".

Note
- When a route is created exceeding the limit value, an error message is displayed and Route
planning operation stops.
- If the distance between WPTs exceeds 150° in longitude, the route cannot be created.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-2

 1
9.2 Setting Route Display 2
Before creating a route, set route display (display/hide of the route information to be displayed on the
3
screen) at route setting.
4
Arrival radius 5
Arrival circle
6
Port side (red
line) and width 7
of port side
8
Leg
9
10
11
12
WPT: Waypoint Ship's speed Starboard side (green
and distance line) and width of 13
starboard side
14
Use the following two dialogs for the setting. 15
16
9.2.1 Setting [Route] after selecting [View] - 17
[Options] on the menu
18
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
19
2 Click on the [View] - [Options] - [Route] on the menu. 20
The "Route" setting screen is displayed.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-3 Section 9 Route Planning

 [1]

[2]

[3]

[1] [Show ETA]

By selecting the [ETA] check box, the display of the ETA (estimated time of arrival to WPT) becomes
effective at route monitoring.
When [UTC] from [Format] is clicked, UTC is displayed and when [LMT] is clicked, LMT is displayed.

Not selecting the [ETA] check box

Selecting the [Show ETA] check box, and clicking [UTC] as the arrival time display format

Selecting the [Show ETA] check box, and clicking [LMT] as the arrival time display format

Section 9 Route Planning 9-4

 1
[2] [Cross Track Limit Line]
When this item is selected, a cross track limit line is displayed. 2
When this item is selected, the line color can be set.
When [IALA-A] is clicked on, the starboard side is displayed in green and the port side is displayed in
3
red. 4
When [IALA-B] is clicked on, the starboard side is displayed in red and the port side is displayed in
green. 5
[3] [Show WPT Name](Show comment)
6
When this item is selected, a comment is displayed near the WPT. 7
When this item is selected, the character size of the comment can be set.
When [Standard] is clicked on, the comment is displayed in the standard character size. 8
When [Small] is clicked on, the comment is displayed in the character size smaller than the standard
size.
9
10
9.2.2 Setting [Settings] - [Route] on the menu 11
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 12
The menu is displayed.
13
2 Click on the [Settings] - [Route] on the menu.
The [Route] dialog is displayed.
14
15
16
17
[1]
18
19
20
[2]
21
[3]
22
[4]
23
[5]
24
[1] [Default] (Factory settings) 25
Set factory settings of the route display that is created at route planning.
[XTD (PORT)]:
26
Set a port side cross track limit. 27
[XTD (STBD)]:
Set a starboard side cross track limit.

9-5 Section 9 Route Planning

[Arrival radius]:
Set an arrival radius of WPT.

[Speed]:
Set a planned ship’s speed.

[Sail]:
Select sailing mode.
• When [RL] is selected, the mode is set to Rhumb Line.

Display Example

• When [GC] is selected, the mode is set to Great Circle.

Display Example

[Turning Radius]:
Set a turning radius.
[Time zone] combo box:
Set a time zone.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-6

 1
[2] [Distance calculation mode]
Set a method for calculating a distance between WPTs. 2
When [Straight] is selected, a distance between WPTs is calculated with a straight line
3
WPT 3
4
5
WPT 1 WPT 2
6
When [with Turn] is selected, a distance between WPTs is calculated based on the expected route.
7
WPT 3
8
9
WPT 1 WPT 2
10
[3] [Monitoring]
Set a route monitoring method. 11
When [Wheel-over line] (steering line) is selected, monitoring is performed by using Wheel-over line
(WOL) along each WPT.
12
13
14
Wheel over line
15
16
17
18
19
20
When [Arrival circle] is selected, monitoring is performed by using the arrival circle along each WPT.
21
22
Arrival circle
23
24
25
26
27

9-7 Section 9 Route Planning

[4] [MAX Latitude]
Set maximum latitude.
A WPT can no longer be entered in a latitude higher than the latitude that has been set up.

If sailing is [GC], it is possible to create a route by automatically adding WPTs so as not to exceed the
maximum latitude in the case of a route in which part of the leg passes a latitude higher than the
maximum latitude.

If the maximum latitude is 60 or higher, a route can be created even if the GC leg exceeds 60.

60N

If the GC leg exceeds 60 when the maximum latitude is 60, WPTs are automatically added and the
route is adjusted so as not to exceed 60°.
WPTs (W001 and W002) in this example are added so as not to
exceed the maximum latitude (60).
The segment between W001 and W002 becomes an RL leg.

60N

Note:
• A route cannot be created with a leg of 150 or higher in the longitudinal direction.
• Create a user map at latitude 84° or lower.

[5] [Minimum Leg Length for Limit Check] combo box

Select a multiplier for determining the "minimum leg length" that is used for limit check from 1, 2, 4, 6,
or 8.
Calculation expression: Minimum leg length = (Hull length) x multiplier

Section 9 Route Planning 9-8

 1
9.3 Starting and Ending the [Route 2
Planning] Dialog Box 3
Plan a route on the [Route Planning] dialog box. The procedures for starting and ending the [Route
Planning] dialog box are as follows.
4
5
9.3.1 Starting the [Route Planning] dialog box 6
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 7
The top menu is displayed.
8
2 Click on the [Route Planning] button on the top menu.
The [Route Planning] dialog box appears on the screen. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Display Example 19
20
The width of the dialog box varies according to the screen size.
21
9.3.2 Ending the [Route Planning] dialog box 22
1 Click on the [X] button on the dialog box. 23
24
25
26
27

9-9 Section 9 Route Planning

9.4 Name and Function of Each Section of
the [Route Planning] dialog Box
The [Route Planning] dialog box comprises as below.

Title bar
Route
planning
bar

Route
planning
tab

Name Function
Title bar Displays the menu title, "Route Planning".
Route Planning bar Route planning tools are assigned (Refer to "9.4.1 Route Planning bar".).
Route planning tab Displays the file name and route data of the route file that is being created
(Refer to "9.4.2 Route planning tab".).

9.4.1 Route Planning bar

The Route Planning bar comprises the following tools.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

[1] [New] button

When this button is clicked on, a new route planning tab is added to the dialog box, enabling creation
of a new route file.

Note
Up to four route files can be opened concurrently. If four files have already been opened, the [New]
button is disabled. To create a new route file, close one or more of the files that are opened and
click on the [New] button.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-10

 1
[2] [Open…] button
When this button is clicked on, the [File Operations] (Open a file) dialog box appears and a required file 2
can be selected and opened from the route list of the files that have been saved.
3
Note 4
Up to four route files can be opened concurrently. If four files have already been opened, the
[Open] button is disabled. To open from the saving list, close one or more of the files that are 5
opened and click on the [Open] button.
6
[3] [Save] button 7
When the [Save] button is clicked on, the route file is saved.
For the details, refer to "9.5 Saving a Route". 8
9
[4] Route planning menu button
When this button is clicked on, the route planning menu is displayed. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The following operations can be performed by using the route planning menu.
17
Menu button name Function Related section 18
[New] Creates a new route file. 9.6.2 Creating a new route file by
table editing
19
9.7.2 Creating a new route file by 20
graphic editing
[File operation…] Displays the [File operation] dialog 9.6.4 Editing a route by table editing 21
box.
22
[Save] (overwrite save) Saves a route file by overwriting. 9.5 Saving a Route
[Save as…] Saves a route file by naming the 9.5 Saving a Route 23
file.
[Import] Displays the [Import] dialog box. 9.11.1 Importing a route file 24
[Import](GPS Shared) Displays the [Import(GPS Instruction Manual <Function 2>,
25
(import from GPS) Shared)] dialog box. 1.6 Importing the Route File That Is
Received from GPS 26
[Export] Displays the [Export] dialog box. 9.11.2 Exporting a route file
Send to GPS Displays the [Send to GPS] dialog. Instruction Manual <Function 2>, 27
(Export for GPS) 1.6.1 Transmitting a route file to GPS

9-11 Section 9 Route Planning

 Menu button name Function Related section
[Setting…] Displays the [Route] dialog box for 9.2.2 Setting [Settings] - [Route] on
setting initial values of the route at the menu
route planning.

[5] [Edit] button

When this button is clicked on, the Edit menu is displayed.

The following operations can be performed by using the Edit menu.

Menu button name Function Related section

[Use EBL/VRM] When this item is selected by clicking on the item, the 9.7.2.1 Creating a
EBL/VRM mode that enables creation of a route by route by using
using EBL and VRM becomes available. When the item EBL/VRM
is clicked on again, the check mark is cleared and
EBL/VRM mode is cancelled.
[Use Assistant circle] When this item is selected by clicking on the item, the 9.7.2.2 Creating a
Use Assistant circle mode that enables creation of a route by using the
route by using an assistant circle (supplementary line) assistant circle
becomes available. When the item is clicked on again, function
the check mark is cleared and the Use Assistance circle
mode is cancelled.
[WPT Reverse When this item is selected by clicking on the item, the -
Order] order of the WPT that is currently selected can be
reversed.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-12

 1
[6] Display area switching button
Chart display can be changed to the display area/scale suitable for the editing. 2
Previous Display WPT-WPT
3
4
5
6
Display centered WPT Display entire route
7
Center of WPT 8
Between WPTs 9
10
11
12
Button name Function
13
[Previous] Switches the chart display to the display area/scale before the chart
display was switched. 14
[Display centered WPT] Displays the WPT that is currently being edited at the center of the chart.
[Display WPT-WPT] Displays on the chart the WPT that is currently being edited and the
15
previous WPT. 16
[Display entire route] Displays the entire route that is being edited on the chart.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-13 Section 9 Route Planning

[7] Multi view switching button
A method of splitting a chart can be selected.

Single View Top Bottom View

Right Left View Floating View

Button name Function Display image

[Single View] Displays a chart on a single screen.

[Right Left View] Displays a chart by splitting it into 2

screens of left and right.

[Top Bottom View] Displays a chart by splitting it into top and

bottom.

[Picture in Picture] Displays a dialog box of another chart

(Dialog view) inside of the chart screen.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-14

 1
[8] [Display full] (Full screen display) button
A chart can be displayed in full screen mode by clicking on this button that clears the operation section 2
and display section other than the [Route Planning] dialog box. When this button is clicked on again,
the operation section and the display section are re-displayed.
3
4
5
6
7
Usual display Full screen display 8
9
[9] [Show Route Check…] (Route check screen display) button
When this button is clicked on, the [Check Route] dialog appears. 10
When an error is detected, the error count is displayed with a badge.
11
Error count
12
13
For the details of the [Check Route] dialog, refer to "9.9 Checking Route Data".
14
9.4.2 Route planning tab 15
When a route file is opened, a route plan tab comprising a file name display section and route data is 16
displayed. Up to four route planning tabs can be displayed concurrently.
17
File name display section 18
The file names that are currently opened are displayed in the tabs. When the display of the file name is
clicked on, the route file can be switched.
19
20
21
"*" is attached to the top of the name of the file you are editing. 22
A badge is displayed on the name of the file that is being monitored or under automatic sailing.
23
24
Monitoring badge Automatic sailing badge 25
When the [X] button on the file name display section is clicked on, the tab is closed. If an attempt is 26
made to close the tab that has not been saved, a save confirmation message dialog box appears.
27

9-15 Section 9 Route Planning

To close the tab by saving the route file by overwriting, click on the [Yes] button. When not saving the
route file by overwriting, click on the [No] button. When the [X] button is clicked on, the file returns to
the state prior to the clicking on the [X] button on the file name display section.

Route data
WPTs that form the route and the WPT data are displayed in a list.

[1] [2] [3] [4]

Route Data

[1] [Insert] button

A new WPT is inserted in the selected WPT.

[2] [Delete] button

The selected WPT is deleted.

[3] [Comment] field

The comment of the route file is displayed.

[4] WPT list

Data of each WPT is displayed.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-16

 1
9.5 Saving a Route 2
1 Click on the [Save] button on the Route Planning bar.
3
4
5
Or select the [Save] button that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning menu button
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
At creation of a new route, a [Save as Route File] dialog box appears.
13
Perform Steps 2 to 4 in the [Save as Route File] dialog.
When the existing route file is saved, the [Save as Route File] dialog box does not appear since 14
the file is overwritten.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
2 Enter [Name] and a comment in [Comment] as required.
23
Note
Although up to 64 characters are allowed for a route name, only 8 characters are output when the 24
information is transmitted to another equipment as the route information (RTE sentence).
25
Memo
26
When all the files that have been saved are opened, all the file names may not necessarily be
displayed. Files can be distinguished easily by entering comments. 27

9-17 Section 9 Route Planning

 3 Click on the [Save] button.
The file is saved.

4 The file name that is displayed on the Route Planning tab changes to the name that is
specified in the [Name] box.
For the details of the Route Planning tab, refer to "9.4.2 Route planning tab".

When a route of the same file name already exists

1 When file saving operation is performed, a dialog box message appears confirming
whether the file is to be overwritten.

2 When overwriting the file, save the file by clicking on the [Yes] button. When not
overwriting the file, close the dialog box by clicking on the [No] button and change the
file name on the [Save as Route File] dialog box.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-18

 1
Memo
• The following message is displayed when an attempt is made to overwrite a protected file. 2
3
4
5
To cancel the save operation, close the dialog box by clicking on the [OK] button or the [X] 6
button. When saving the file by changing the file name, click on the [Save as...] button. The
dialog box is closed and the [Save as Route File] dialog box appears. 7
• The following message is displayed when an attempt is made to overwrite the route file that is 8
currently being monitored.
9
10
11
12
To cancel the save operation, click on the [No] button or [X] button. To continue the monitoring
of the updated route by saving the route file by overwriting, click on the [Yes] button. When 13
saving the file by changing the file name, click on the [Save as...] button. The dialog box is
closed and the [Save as Route File] dialog box appears.
14
• The following message is displayed when an attempt is made to overwrite the file of the route 15
under automatic sailing.
16
17
18
19
To cancel the save operation, close the dialog box by clicking on the [OK] button or the [X]
button. When saving the file by changing the file name, click on the [Save as…] button. The
20
dialog box is closed and the [Save as Route File] dialog box appears. 21
The monitored route does not change by the save operation. Automatic sailing continues based
on the pre-saved route. 22
23
24
25
26
27

9-19 Section 9 Route Planning

 Note
When editing the file of the route being monitored, if the limit check detects a turning radius
error ("The straight route can not be created."), The following popup will be displayed when
saving.

To cancel the save operation, close the dialog box by clicking on the [OK] button or the [X]
button. When saving the file by changing the file name, click on the [Save as...] button. The
dialog box is closed and the [Save as Route File] dialog box appears.

Saving a route file by naming the file

Click on [Save as...] of the route planning menu button on the Route Planning bar.
When the [Save as Route File] dialog box appears, save the file by entering a new file name.

Setting a route file to a Read Only mode (disabling editing)

Check Read only for the file that is to be set to [Read only] (disabling editing) mode. To cancel Read
Only (disabling editing) specification, clear the check.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-20

 1
9.6 Planning a Route by Using Table 2
Editing 3
4
5
Edit the navigation route according to the world geodetic system (WGS-84). 6
If you use the navigation route edited by a geodetic system other than the world
geodetic system, an accident may occur.
7
8
9.6.1 Table editing operation flow 9
10
9.6.1.1 Creating a new route file
11
1 Start [Route Planning]. 12
Reference: "9.3.1 Starting the [Route Planning] dialog box"
13
14
Create a new route file.
2 Reference: "9.6.2 Creating a new route file by table editing"
15
16
17
Set WPTs from WPT0 to WPT of the final destination.
3 Reference: "9.6.2 Creating a new route file by table editing" 18
19
20
Save the route.
4 Reference: "9.5 Saving a Route" 21
22
23
End [Route Planning].
5 Reference: "9.3.2 Ending the [Route Planning] dialog box" 24
25
26
27

9-21 Section 9 Route Planning

9.6.1.2 Editing a route

Steps 1 and 2
Start [Route Planning].
1 Reference: "9.3.1 Starting the [Route Planning] dialog box"
are not required
when editing the
route that is
currently
displayed.

Open the route file to be edited.

2 Reference: "9.6.4 Editing a route by table editing"

Edit the route file.

3 Reference: "9.6.4 Editing a route by table editing"

Save the route.

4 Reference: "9.5 Saving a Route"

End [Route Planning].

5 Reference: "9.3.2 Ending the [Route Planning] dialog box"

Section 9 Route Planning 9-22

 1
9.6.2 Creating a new route file by table editing
2
1 Click on the [New] button on the Route Planning bar
3
4
5
Or select the [New] button that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning menu button.
6
7
8
9
10
11
A new tab is added.
12
13
14
15
16
17
2 Enter the latitude and the longitude of WPT0 (waypoint 0)
18
Enter the latitude by clicking on [LAT] of [Position].
Enter the longitude by clicking on [LON] of [Position]. 19
Use the software keyboard for entering the latitude and longitude.
20
21
22
Range of the values
that can be entered 23
24
25
26
Latitude software keyboard Longitude software keyboard
27

9-23 Section 9 Route Planning

 Memo
The maximum latitude input range of Position is 85 ° 00.000 (polar range restriction).

3 Set the following items as required.

*Some items are for display only and cannot be set.

Item Description
[Name] Set a name of WPT.
[Leg BWW] This is the bearing from the previous WPT and is not set in
WPT0. The specifiable range is from 0.0° to 359.9°.
Editing is disabled when [GC] is selected in [Sail].
[Leg Distance] This is the distance from the previous WPT and is not set in
WPT0. The specifiable range is from 0.0 to 9999.9 NM.
Editing is disabled when [GC] is selected in [Sail].
[Sail] [RL] or [GC] can be selected from the list.
[XTD PORT] (Port side cross Set a port side cross track limit. The specifiable range is from
track limit) 0.01 to 9.99 NM.
[XTD STBD] (Starboard side Set a starboard side cross track limit. The specifiable range is
cross track limit) from 0.01 to 9.99 NM.
[Arrival Radius] Sets the arrival radius. (0.01 to 9.99 NM)
[Turning Radius] (Turning Sets the turning radius. (0.00 to 9.99 NM)
radius)
[Planned Speed] (Planned Sets the planned ship’s speed. (1.0 to 99.9kn)
speed)
[ROT] ROT is automatically calculated from the planned speed and
turning radius.
[ETA] ETA is automatically calculated from the position of WPT,
planned speed, and time zone.
[Time Zone] The time difference of the time of arrival can be input within
the range from -13.30 to +13.30.
[TWOL] TTG can be automatically calculated from the position of WPT
and planned speed.
※[Setting]-[Route]-[Monitoring]-[Arrivalcircle] selected:[TTG]
[Total Distance] This is the total distance between WPT0 and the final WPT.

Memo
The values that are set by selecting [Settings] – [Route] on the menu is reflected in [Sail],
[XTD PORT], [XTD STBD], [Arrival radius], [Turning Radius], [Planned Speed], and [Time
Zone]. For the details, refer to "18.12 Setting parameter values for automatic sailing ".

Section 9 Route Planning 9-24

 1
4 Add the next WPT by clicking on the next WPT No. or the [Insert] button after entering
2
the latitude and longitude.
3
4
5
6
7
WPT1 is added.
8
9
5 Set the item as indicated in Step 3. 10
6 Enter data up to the last WPT with the same procedure.
The route based on the input data is displayed each time.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
7 After completing the creation, save the route file. 22
For the saving procedure, refer to "9.5 Saving a Route".
23
24
25
26
27

9-25 Section 9 Route Planning

9.6.3 Deleting WPT data
1 Select WPT data to be deleted and click on the [Delete] button.

9.6.4 Editing a route by table editing

Memo
Steps 1 and 2 are not required when editing the route that is currently displayed.

1 Click on the [Open] button on the Route Planning bar

Or select the [File operation…] button that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning menu
button.

The [File operation…] dialog box appears.

2 Select the route file to be edited and click on the [Open] button.

Memo
If [Read only] is selected, the file overwrite function is disabled. To overwrite the existing
file, clear the item before opening the file.

The route file is displayed on the [Route Planning] dialog box.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-26

 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
For the details of the Route Planning tab, refer to "9.4.2 Route planning tab". 9
10
3 Select WPT No. of WPT to be changed and click the right mouse button.
The context menu is displayed. 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
WPT0 is selected The last WPT is selected
WPT0 is selected and WPT is
other than the last WPT 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-27 Section 9 Route Planning

 A route can be edited by selecting the "Edit" mode from the context menu.
The procedures for editing are as follows.

Menu button Function Related section

name
Insert WPT Adds WPT. 9.6.4.1 Route Planning bar
Delete WPT Deletes WPT. 9.6.4.2 Deleting WPT
Divide leg... Displays a leg division dialog box. 9.6.4.3 Dividing a leg
Divides the leg in the dialog box.
Set default Reflects the initial value of the route plan -
setting in the specified WPT.
Copy route Copies the entire route. 9.6.4.4 Copying the entire
route
Paste route Pastes the copied course to the last WPT 9.6.4.5 Pasting the copied
of the course. route
Insert other Displays the insertion dialog of some other 9.6.4.6 Inserting the other
route route. route
Inserts some other dialog in the route that
is being edited on the dialog.
Add WPT Inserts the WPT of the same value as the 9.6.4.7 Insert the same
last WPT. WPT as the last WPT

4 After completing the editing, click on the [Save] button on the Route Planning bar.

Or select the [Save] button that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning menu button

For the details of save operation, refer to "9.5 Saving a Route ".

Section 9 Route Planning 9-28

 1
9.6.4.1 Inserting WPT
2
Insert the WPT of the same value as the selected WPT.

1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. of the WPT to be inserted.
3
The context menu is displayed. 4
2 Click on [Insert WPT] of the context menu.
5
WPT is inserted following the selected WPT.
6
9.6.4.2 Deleting WPT 7
Delete the selected WPT.
8
1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. of the WPT to be deleted.
The context menu is displayed.
9
2 Click on [Delete WPT] on the context menu. 10
The selected WPT is deleted.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-29 Section 9 Route Planning

9.6.4.3 Dividing a leg
A leg can be divided by setting a longitude or a nautical mile.

1 Click the right button on the WPT No. to be divided.

The context menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Divide leg...] of the context menu.

The [Divide Route] dialog box appears.

3 Enter a division interval.

[Every (LON)] (Longitude division)
1) Click on "Every(LON)".
2) Enter a longitude interval for division.

[Every(NM)] (Nautical mile division)

1) Click on "Every(NM)".
2) Enter a nautical mile interval for division.

4 Click on the [OK] button.

The leg that is selected in Step 1 is divided in the unit that is specified in Step 3.

Note
When the total number of WPTs exceeds the maximum value of 511 as a result of leg division, leg
division is executed within the range of 511 in the entire route.

9.6.4.4 Copying the entire route

Copy the entire route that is selected.

1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. other than the last WPT.
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Copy route] on the context menu.

The entire route is copied.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-30

 1
9.6.4.5 Pasting the copied route
2
The route that was copied to the last WEP of the route is pasted.

1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. of the WPT on which the route is to be
3
pasted. 4
The context menu is displayed.
5
2 Click on [Paste route] in the context menu.
The routes are pasted (inserted) 6
Note 7
After pasting the copied route, when a route planning error occurs as a result of recalculation of
the BWW, Distance, Total Distance, ROT, TWOL, and ETA, an error message is displayed and the
8
route will not be pasted. 9
Memo
10
The same operation is performed also when the next No. button of the last WPT is clicked. 11
12
9.6.4.6 Inserting the other route
13
Insert the route of some other file in the route that is being edited.

1 Click the right mouse button on WPT No.

14
A context menu is displayed. 15
2 Click on [Insert other route] in the context menu. 16
The [Insert other route] dialog box appears.
17
18
19
20
21
3 Select a route file to be inserted from the [Select Route] combo box.

4 Click on the [OK] button.

22
The route file is inserted. 23
Note
If the range can be inserted is exceeded, an error message is displayed and the route will not be
24
inserted. 25
26
27

9-31 Section 9 Route Planning

9.6.4.7 Insert the same WPT as the last WPT
Insert the same WPT as the last WPT following the last WPT.

1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. of the last WPT.
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Add WPT] on the context menu.

WPT is added following the last WPT.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-32

 1
9.7 Planning a New Route by Graphic 2
Editing 3
4
5
Edit the navigation route according to the world geodetic system (WGS-84). 6
If you use the navigation route edited by a geodetic system other than the world 7
geodetic system, an accident may occur.
8
9.7.1 Graphic editing operation flow 9
10
9.7.1.1 Creating a new route file
11
Start [Route Planning].
12
1 Reference: "9.3.1 Starting the [Route Planning] dialog box"
13
14
Create a new route file. 15
2 Reference: "9.7.1.1 Creating a new route file".
16
17
3 Set WPTs from WPT0 to the WPT of the final destination on the chart 18
For the details, refer to the flowchart provided in "9.7.1.2 Editing a route file".
19
20
Save a route. 21
4 Reference: "9.5 Saving a Route"
22
23
5 End [Route Planning]. 24
Reference: "9.3.2 Ending the [Route Planning] dialog box"
25
26
27

9-33 Section 9 Route Planning

9.7.1.2 Editing a route file

Start [Route Planning]. When editing the route

1 Reference: "9.3.1 Starting the [Route Planning] dialog box"
that is currently
displayed, steps 1 and 2
are not required.

Open the route file to be edited.

2 Reference: "9.7.3 Editing a route by graphic editing"

Edit the route file.

3 Reference: "9.7.3 Editing a route by graphic editing"

Save the route.

4 Reference: "9.5 Saving a Route"

End [Route Planning].

5 Reference: "9.3.2 Ending the [Route Planning] dialog box"

Section 9 Route Planning 9-34

 1
9.7.2 Creating a new route file by graphic editing
2
1 Click on the [New] button on the Route Planning bar.
3
4
5
Or select the [New] button on the menu that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning 6
menu button.
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 Placing the cursor on the WPT0 position.
13
The latitude and the longitude of the WPT are displayed near the cursor.
14
15
16
17
18
19
3 Click the mouse button. 20
WPT0 is added.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-35 Section 9 Route Planning

 4 Move the cursor.

WPT0 Rubber band

5 Click the mouse button.

WPT1 is added at the cursor position.

WPT1

6 Add as many WPTs as required in the same way.

7 After creating the last WPT, double-click the left button or click the right button.
The Route planning is terminated.

Note
In the case of ARCS, when a WPT is specified at a position other than the active chart and
another panel exists at the position, the panel display is switched automatically.

8 Save the route file that was created.

For the details of how to save the file, refer to "9.5 Saving a Route".

Section 9 Route Planning 9-36

 1
9.7.2.1 Creating a route by using EBL/VRM
2
1 Click on [Use EBL/VRM] on the [Edit] button to select it.
3
4
5
The cursor changes to EBL/VRM.
6
2 Move the cursor to the position used as the mark (example: headland) and click on the 7
position.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-37 Section 9 Route Planning

 3 Move the cursor and determine the WPT position while checking the bearing from the
position used as the mark.

The latitude/longitude is displayed next to the cursor.

4 Click the mouse button.

WPT0 is created.

5 Add as many WPTs as required in the same way.

Memo
When EBL/VRM is not used for creation of the next WPT, clear the item by clicking on [Use
EBL/VRM].

Section 9 Route Planning 9-38

 1
6 After creating the last WPT, double click the left button or click the right button.
2
The Route planning is terminated.
3
9.7.2.2 Creating a route by using the assistant circle function 4
A route can be created by using an assistant circle (supplementary line).
The assistant circle function adds WPT at the position where the mark such as headland and the leg
5
intersects at right angles. 6
When the position that is used as the mark is determined and the cursor is moved to the position, WPT
is added at the position where the leg and the position intersect at right angles. 7
1 Select the [Use Assistant circle] check box of the [Edit] button. 8
9
10
11
12
2 Move the cursor to any position and click the left button.
WPT0 is created. 13
14
3 Move the cursor to the position as the mark (example, headland) and click the button.
15
16
Supplementary line 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-39 Section 9 Route Planning

 4 Move the cursor and click the button while checking the leg bearing.

Assistant circle

Supplementary line

WPT1 is created at the intersecting point of the assistant circle and the supplementary line.

Memo
The direction of the leg varies according to the positional relationship of the cursor.

When the cursor is on the right side of the When the cursor is on the left side of the
position of WPT and the position used as the position of WPT and the position used as the
mark, the leg will be on the lower side. mark, the leg will be on the upper side.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-40

 1
5 Add as many WPTs as required in the same way. 2
Memo
When Use Assistant circle is not used for creation of the next WPT, clear the item by
3
clicking on [Use Assistant circle]. 4
6 After creating the last WPT, double click the left button or click the right button. 5
The Route planning is terminated.
6
7
9.7.3 Editing a route by graphic editing 8
1 Click on the [Open] button on the Route Planning bar.
9
10
11
Or select the [File operation...] button that is displayed by clicking on the Route Planning menu
button. 12
13
14
15
16
17
The [File operation...] dialog box appears. 18
2 Select the route file to be edited and click on the [Open] button. 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Memo
26
If [Read only] is selected, the file overwrite function is disabled. To overwrite the existing
file, clear the item before opening the file. 27

9-41 Section 9 Route Planning

 3 Edit the route with graphic editing.
Refer to the following for the editing methods.

Editing operations that are allowed by clicking on WPT or a leg of the route.

Editing function Related section

Inserting WPT between WPTs 9.7.3.1 Inserting a WPT between WPTs
Moving WPT 9.7.3.2 Moving a WPT
Changing XTD (cross track limit) 9.7.3.3 Changing XTD (cross track limit)

Operations that are allowed on the context menu that is displayed by clicking the right
mouse button on WPT or a leg of the route

WPT0 or the last WPT is selected WPT other than WPT0 and the last WPT is selected

A leg is selected XTD is selected

Section 9 Route Planning 9-42

 1
Menu Function Related section
Add WPT Adds WPT. 9.7.3.4 Adding WPT on the context 2
menu
3
Move WPT Moves WPT. 9.7.3.5 Moving WPT on the context
menu 4
Delete WPT Deletes WPT. 9.7.3.6 Deleting WPT on the context
menu 5
Copy this route Copies the entire route. 9.7.3.7 Copying and pasting a route
6
Paste this route Pastes the copied route on to on the context menu
another route file. 7
Rotate this route Rotates the route. 9.7.3.8 Rotating a route on the
context menu 8
Move this route Moves the route. 9.7.3.9 Moving a route on the context
9
menu
Insert other Inserts another dialog into the route 9.7.3.10 Inserting other route on the 10
route that is being edited. context menu
Insert WPT Inserts WPT between WPTs. 9.7.3.11 Inserting WPT between 11
WPTs on the context menu
12
Divide leg... Displays a leg division dialog. 9.7.3.12 Dividing a leg on the context
Divides the leg in the dialog. menu 13
Change XTD Changes the XTD (cross track limit). 9.7.3.13 Changing XTD (cross track
limit) on the context menu
14
15
4 After completing editing, save the route file.
For the details of how to save the file, refer to "9.5 Saving a Route". 16
9.7.3.1 Inserting a WPT between WPTs 17
1 Click the left button on the leg between the WPTs in which a WPT is to be inserted. 18
The leg is set to a selected state.
19
20
21
22
23
24
Click 25
26
27

9-43 Section 9 Route Planning

 2 Determine the WPT insertion position by moving the cursor.
A rubber band is displayed.

3 Click the mouse button.

A WPT is added.

WPT that was added

Cancelling the operation

The addition operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 3.

9.7.3.2 Moving a WPT

1 Click on the WPT to be moved.

The WPT is set to a selected state.

Click.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-44

 1
2 Move the WPT to any position. 2
A rubber band covering from the WPTs at the front and back to the cursor is displayed.
*In the case of WPT0 or the last WPT, a rubber band is displayed from one side. 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3 Click the mouse button.
The move is determined.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Cancelling the operation
The move operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 3. 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-45 Section 9 Route Planning

9.7.3.3 Changing XTD (cross track limit)

1 Click on the XTD.

The cursor is changed to the XTD change mode.

2 Move the cursor and change the XTD.

Use the information (XTD distance) that is displayed near the cursor and the line that is linked to
the cursor as the guideline.

Note
The line cannot be moved exceeding the limit of XTD (5.00 NM).

3 Click the mouse button.

The width of the XTD is changed.

Cancelling the operation

The change operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 3.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-46

 1
9.7.3.4 Adding WPT on the context menu
2
Add a WPT to WPT0 or the last WPT.

1 Click the right mouse button on WPT0 or the last WPT.

3
The context menu is displayed. 4
2 Click [Add WPT] on the context menu.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
The cursor changes to the WPT addition mode.
13
3 Move the cursor on the position of the WPT to be added.
14
15
16
17
18
4 Click the mouse button.
19
20
21
22
23
24
WPT that was added

WPT is added. 25
Note 26
In the case of ARCS, when WPT is specified at a position other than the active chart and
another panel exists at the positon, the panel display changes automatically. 27

9-47 Section 9 Route Planning

Cancelling the operation
The addition operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4.

9.7.3.5 Moving WPT on the context menu

1 Click the right button on the WPT to be moved.

The context menu is displayed.

2 Click the [Move WPT] on the context menu.

The cursor mode changes to the WPT move mode.

3 Move the cursor to the required position.

4 Click the mouse button.

WPT that was moved.

Cancelling the operation

The addition operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-48

 1
9.7.3.6 Deleting WPT on the context menu
2
1 Click the right button on the WPT to be deleted.
The context menu is displayed. 3
2 Click [Delete WPT] on the context menu. 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The WPT is deleted.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-49 Section 9 Route Planning

9.7.3.7 Copying and pasting a route on the context menu
A route can be copied and pasted on to another route file.

1 Click the right button on a WPT of the route to be copied.

The context menu is displayed.

2 Select [Copy this route] on the context menu.

Selected
route

Route file that

is currently
being selected

The route is copied.

3 Open the route file of the paste destination by switching the tab.

4 Select the route to be pasted and click the right button.

Route file at the

paste destination

5 Click on [Paste this route] in the context menu.

The copied route is pasted to the selected route.

Pasted route

Section 9 Route Planning 9-50

 1
Note
At pasting, BWW, Distance, Total Distance, ROT, TWOL, and ETA are recalculated. When a Route 2
planning error occurs as a result, an error message is displayed and insertion and pasting are not
performed. For the error messages that are displayed, refer to "9.12 Error Messages that are
3
Displayed when a Route is Created". 4
5
9.7.3.8 Rotating a route on the context menu
6
1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT No. that is used as the reference of rotation.
The context menu is displayed. 7
2 Click [Rotate this route] on the context menu. 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3 Rotate the route.
16
17
The route rotates
based on the
18
selected WPT
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-51 Section 9 Route Planning

 4 Click the mouse button.

Cancelling the operation

The addition operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4.

9.7.3.9 Moving a route on the context menu

1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT of any of the routes to be moved.
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click [Move this route] on the context menu.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-52

 1
3 Move the route.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 After positioning the route, click the mouse button.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Cancelling the operation
The addition operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4.
16
17
9.7.3.10 Inserting other route on the context menu
Insert the route of another file into the last WPT of the route.
18
1 Click the right mouse button on WPT No. 19
The context menu is displayed.
20
2 Click on [Insert other route] in the context menu.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
The [Insert other route] dialog is displayed.

9-53 Section 9 Route Planning

 3 Click on the route file to be inserted from the [Select Route] combo box.

4 Click on the [OK] button.

The route file is inserted.

Inserted route

Note
When the range exceeded the insertion allowed range, an error message is displayed and the
route will not be inserted.

9.7.3.11 Inserting WPT between WPTs on the context menu

1 Click the right mouse button on the leg between the WPTs within which WPT is to be
inserted.
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click [Insert WPT] on the context menu.

The cursor mode changes to the WPT insertion mode.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-54

 1
3 Move the cursor to the position in which WPT is to be inserted. 2
3
4
5
6
7
4 Click the mouse button. 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
WPT is inserted.
15
Cancelling the operation
The insertion operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4. 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-55 Section 9 Route Planning

9.7.3.12 Dividing a leg on the context menu

1 Click the right mouse button on the leg of the route to be divided.
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click [Divide leg...] on the context menu.

The [Divide Route] dialog box appears.

3 Input a division interval.

[Every(LON)] (longitude division)
1) Click on "Every(LON)".
2) Enter a longitude division interval.

[Every(NM)] (nautical mile division)

1) Click on "Every(NM)".
2) Enter a nautical mile division interval.

4 Click on the [OK] button.

The leg that was selected in Step 1 is divided in the unit specified in Step 3.

Note
When the total number of WPTs exceeds the maximum value of 511 as a result of leg division, leg
division is executed within the range that does not exceed 511 in the entire course.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-56

 1
9.7.3.13 Changing XTD (cross track limit) on the context menu
2
1 Click the right mouse button on XTD.
The context menu is displayed. 3
2 Click [Change XTD] on the context menu. 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3 Change the width of XTL by moving the cursor.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-57 Section 9 Route Planning

 4 Click the mouse button.

The XTL width is changed.

Cancelling the operation

The operation can be cancelled by clicking the right button instead of clicking at Step 4.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-58

 1
9.8 Creating an Alternate Route 2
3
An alternate route can be created during sailing by referencing the route that is displayed on the
screen. The alternate route can be saved by overwriting during monitoring or by assigning a new 4
name.
5
The following two charts indicate the original route and the changed alternate route. As shown below,
6
an alternate route is created while the original route is displayed during creation of an alternate route.
In the example below, the following WPTs are changed. 7
• W001 Position (shift)
• W002 (Insertion. As a result, the following WPT number is incremented by 1.) 8
• W006 (One WPT is added to the last WPT.)
9
Memo 10
The original route is displayed in red to distinguish it from the alternate route.
11
Original route
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-59 Section 9 Route Planning

Original route and alternate route

Alternate route W006: Add to the last WPT

W001: Shift W002: Insertion

Section 9 Route Planning 9-60

 1
9.8.1 Creating an alternate route
2
1 Click the right mouse button on the WPT or leg of the route that is being monitored.
The context menu is displayed.
3
2 Click on [Monitoring WPT xxx] or [Monitoring LEG xxx] of the context menu. 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
The context menu is displayed.
15
3 Click on [Edit this route] of the context menu.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
The [Route Planning] dialog is displayed.
26
27

9-61 Section 9 Route Planning

 4 For table editing, edit the route by using the same procedure as that from Step 3 of
“9.6.4 Editing a route by table editing”.

5 For graphic editing, click the right mouse button on the WPT or leg of the route that is
being monitored.
The context menu is displayed.

6 Click on [Planning WPT] or [Planning LEG] of the context menu.

The context menu for editing WPT or leg is displayed.

7 Edit the route by using the same procedure as from Step 3 of “9.7.3 Editing a route by
using graphic editing”.

9.8.2 Saving an alternate route

9.8.2.1 Overwriting without changing the file name

1 Click on the [Save] button.

A confirmation dialog is displayed.

2 Click on the [YES] button.

The alternate route is displayed and used instead of the original route.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-62

 1
Note
In this case, the route name that is currently monitored remains unchanged. The original route file 2
no longer exists since it is overwritten.
3
9.8.2.2 Saving the file by naming 4
1 Click on the [Save as] button on the route plan menu of the route plan bar. 5
The [Save as Route File] dialog is displayed.
6
2 Enter a new file name and click on the [Save] button.
The alternate route is displayed and used instead of the original route. 7
Note
8
In this case, the route name that is being monitored is changed to the file name that was entered.
9
The original route file remains.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-63 Section 9 Route Planning

9.9 Checking Route Data
Route data is constantly checked based on the safety standards and limits.
These items are checked on the [Check Route] dialog box.
The [Check Route] dialog box appears by clicking on the [Show Route Check] button on the Route
Planning bar.

9.9.1 Checking a route based on the safety

standards
The result of safety check is displayed on the [Safety check] tab.
Cause

Count badge
Re-check button
Check box Approval status (Result)
WPT

[Disregard] button
[Jump] button [Reset] button
[Safety contour] box

When safety errors are detected, the number of errors is displayed on the count badge. When the error
count exceeds 999, "More" is displayed instead of the count.
The list of Cause and Result of the errors that were detected is displayed for each WPT prior to and
following the error occurrence point. The following causes are displayed.

Cause
SpeConAre(Traffic separation zone)
SpeConAre(Traffic crossing)
SpeConAre(Traffic roundabout)
SpeConAre(Traffic precautionary)
SpeConAre(Two way traffic)
SpeConAre(Deeper water route)

Section 9 Route Planning 9-64

 1
Cause
SpeConAre(Recommended traffic lane) 2
SpeConAre(Inshore traffic zone)
3
SpeConAre(Fairway)
SpeConAre(Restricted area) 4
SpeConAre(Caution area)
SpeConAre(Offshore production area)
5
SpeConAre(Military practice area) 6
SpeConAre(Seaplane landing area)
SpeConAre(Submarine transit area) 7
SpeConAre(Canal)
SpeConAre(Fishing ground)
8
SpeConAre(Fishing prohibited) 9
SpeConAre(Pipeline area)
SpeConAre(Cable area) 10
SpeConAre(Anchorage area)
11
SpeConAre(Anchorage prohibited)
SpeConAre(Dumping ground) 12
SpeConAre(Cargo transshipment area)
SpeConAre(Incineration area)
13
SpeConAre(Specially protected area) 14
SpeConAre(Safety contour)
SpeConAre(Coast line) 15
SpeConAre(Obstruction)
SpeConAre(Under water rock)
16
SpeConAre(Wreck) 17
SpeConAre(Spoil ground)
SpeConAre(Sensitive sea area) 18
SpeConAre(Archipelagic sea lane)
SpeConAre(Marine farm/aquaculture)
19
AtoN 20
Vertical Clearance
Hazard 21
Caution Object
22
Warning object
Alarm Object 23
Sounding
PSSA (Particularly Sensitive Sea Area)
24
Areas to be avoided 25
memo 26
When the S63 chart and the C - MAP chart are used in combination with the safety check
function, the S63 chart takes precedence.
27

9-65 Section 9 Route Planning

Updating an error list
By clicking on the Re-check button, the latest error information is displayed by rechecking the
information.

Sorting error display

By clicking on any of the items on the title line, error display can be sorted based on the item. A sort
mark ( or ) is displayed on the title of the selected item.
Whenever an item is clicked on, the error display is sorted based on the ascending ( ) or the
descending ( ) order.

Selecting an error to be processed

Select the check box of the error to be processed. To select all the errors, select the check box on the
title line.
When the [Jump] button is clicked on, control jumps to the occurrence point of the error that was
selected on the error list.

Ignoring an error
Click on the [Disregard] button. To restore the error that was once ignored, click on the [Reset] button.

Checking an error target on the list

When an error is detected, the WPT under which the error occurred is highlighted in red.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-66

 1
Checking an error target on the route
When an error is detected, the [Safety contour Alert] object in the Alert List is displayed in red and 2
[Navigational Hazard Alert] and [Area Alert] are highlighted in yellow.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
When error display is clicked on the error list, the error target are highlighted. 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-67 Section 9 Route Planning

9.9.2 Checking a route based on the limits
The result of limit check is displayed on the [Limit Check] tab.
Count badge

Re-check
WPT Cause

Limit parameters

When limit errors are detected, the error count is displayed on the count badge. When the error count
exceeds 999, "More" is displayed instead of the count.
The cause of the error that was detected is displayed for each of WPTs prior to and following the error
occurrence point.
The following causes are displayed.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-68

 1
Cause
The planned radius is beyond the MAX turning radius. 2
The planned radius is under the MIN turning radius.
The course angle of leg is beyond the maximum.
3
The planned speed is beyond the MAX planned speed. 4
The planned speed is under the MIN planned speed.
The planned ROT is beyond the MAX ROT. 5
The planned ROT is under the MIN ROT.
6
The leg length is shorter the MIN Leg length.
The straight route cannot be created. 7
8
Updating error display
By clicking on the re-check button, the latest error information is displayed by rechecking the 9
information.
10
Sorting error display 11
By clicking on any of the items on the title line, error display can be sorted based on the item. A sort
mark ( or ) is displayed on the title of the selected item.
12
Whenever an item is clicked on, the error display is sorted based on the ascending ( ) or the 13
descending ( ) order.
14
Verifying an error target on the list
15
When an error is detected, WPT of the error target is highlighted in yellow. 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-69 Section 9 Route Planning

9.10 Navigation Calculation Function
This section describes the function that supports the distance and bearing calculation that are required
for navigation.

9.10.1 ROT (Rate of Turn)

ROT is automatically calculated from the planned ship’s speed and the turn radius and displayed on
[ROT].

9.10.2 ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival)

ETA is automatically calculated from the WPT position, planned ship’s speed, and time zone and is
displayed on [ETA].
When ETA includes a date other than the current date, Viewing Does Not Include Current Date is
displayed in Permanent Information because displaying of a date-dependent object is executed.

Detailed wording which each ETA's range is displayed within one day, each one or more is different.

When the ETA rage is one day or less

Section 9 Route Planning 9-70

 1
When the ETA range is greater than one day
2
3
4
5
6
7
* For the date-dependent objects, refer to the following.
Section 13 – 13.5 Displaying a Date-dependent Object – Displaying an indication in duration 8
specification.
9
9.10.3 TWOL (Time to Go) 10
TTG is automatically calculated from the WPT position and planned ship’s speed and displayed on 11
[TWOL].
A display format can be selected from the list that is displayed by clicking on the TWOL title. 12
[Days hh:mm]
13
01Days 23:59 14
[hhhh:mm]
15
9999:59 16
17
Memo 18
In the navigation calculation function, each value is calculated using CCRP as a reference point.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-71 Section 9 Route Planning

9.11 Importing/Exporting a Route File
By using the [Import] or [Export] dialog box, the route file that was created can be imported/exported.
The dialog box can be displayed as follows.

1 Click on the Route Planning menu button.

2 Select [Import] or [Export] from the list that is displayed.

The "Import" or [Export] dialog box appears.

9.11.1 Importing a route file

1 Specify the "Drive", the "Folder", the "File name", and the "File Type" that stores the
file to be imported.

2 Click on the [OK] button.

The route file that is selected can be imported.
Press the [X] button to cancel the importing of a file.

Note
The file type of the file to be imported can be selected in the [File Type] combo box.The file types
that can be imported are as follows.

.rtn: Displays a route file (normal).

This file is used for ECDIS (JAN-701B/901B) and Chart Radar (JMA-900B)
.rta: Displays a route file (TCS route).
This file is used for ECDIS (JAN-701B/901B) and Chart Radar (JMA-900B)
.rtm: Displays a route file used in this equipment.
.csv: Displayes a route file in CSV format.
*(Wildcard): Displays all the files that can be imported.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-72

 1
9.11.2 Exporting a route file
2
1 Specify the "Drive", the "Folder", the "File name", and the "File Type" that stores the
file to be exported.
3
2 Click on the [OK] button. 4
The route file that is currently opened is exported.
Press the [X] button to cancel the exporting of a file.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

9-73 Section 9 Route Planning

9.12 Error Messages that are Displayed
when a Route is Created
When a route is created, the following error messages may be displayed, disabling execution of the
specified operation.

Error message Status

The total number of WPTs exceeded the upper limit

(511).

The leg length exceeded the maximum value (longitude

150).

The latitude exceeded the latitude upper limit.

Section 9 Route Planning 9-74

 1
Section 10 Route Monitoring 2
3
10.1 Route Monitoring 4
The route monitoring function enables monitoring of the position of own ship, heading, and ship speed,
and calculation of an expected time of arrival using the route created in route planning.
5
6
Memo
For moitoring a route, it is necessary to create a route file or copy a route file in route planning in 7
advance.
For the details of route planning, refer to "Section 9 Route Planning".
8
9
10.1.1 Starting route monitoring 10
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
11
The menu is displayed.
12
2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu.
The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears.
13
14
15
[File operation] dialog box display button
16
17
18
19
20
21
3 Select a required route file.
[Selecting from the [Route] combo box] 22
1) Click on the [Route] combo box.
23
2) Select a required route.
24
[Selecting from a route file list]
1) Click on the [File operation] dialog box display button. 25
2) Select a required file from the list of the [File operation] dialog box.
About the [File operation] dialog box, refer to "10.2 Selecting and Deleting Route Files"
26
3) Click on the [Open] button. 27

10-1 Section 10 Route Monitoring

 Limit check at the start of route route monitoring
The limit check is automatically executed at the start of route monitoring.
At this time, if a turning radius error ("The straight route cannot be created.") is detected, return
the route to unload and the following popup will be displayed.

Automatic safety checking after loading a route

When a route file is loaded, safety checking is executed automatically.
When an error is detected, the [Safety Contour Alert] object is displayed in red and [Navigational
Hazard Alert] and [Area Alert] are highlighted in yellow.

4 Select a WPT to which the ship is to travel. A WPT can be selected automatically or
manually.
[Automatic selection]
The nearest WPT from the own ship’s position is selected automatically.
1) Open the next WPT list by clicking on the [To WPT] combo box.
2) Select [AUTO Select].

[Manual selection]
Select a WPT manually.
1) Open the next WPT list by clicking on the [To WPT] combo box.
2) Click on a required WPT.

10.1.2 Ending route monitoring

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu.

The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears.

3 Click on the [Route] combo box.

4 Click on [UNLOAD].

Section 10 Route Monitoring 10-2

 1
10.2 Selecting and Deleting Route Files 2
Selection of the route to be displayed and deletion of obsolete route files are enabled on the [File
3
operation] dialog box.
Use the following procedure to open the [File operation] dialog box. 4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 5
The menu is displayed.
6
2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu.
The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears. 7
3 Click on the [File operation] dialog box display button. 8
The [File operation] dialog box appears.
9
Selection File name Comment File creation date 10
check
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10.2.1 Selecting a route to be displayed 20
1 Select the selection check box of the route file to be displayed.
When [Name] is clicked on, is displayed. Whenever is clicked on, the file display
21
sequence changes to the ascending/descending sequence based on the names.
22
Likewise, when you click on [Comment] and [Data (UTC)], it switches in ascending / descending
sequence. 23
2 Click on the [Open] button. 24
25
26
27

10-3 Section 10 Route Monitoring

10.2.2 Deleting a route file
1 Click the selection check of the route file to be deleted.

2 Click on the [Delete] button.

A message dialog box is displayed as to whether the deletion is to be executed.

3 When executing deletion, click on the [Yes] button. To cancel deletion, click on the
[No] button.

Note
The file of the route that is currently monitored or the route that is used for automatic sailing
cannot be deleted.
The following message dialog box appears.

Close the dialog box by clicking on the [OK] button.

Section 10 Route Monitoring 10-4

 1
10.3 [Voyage Information] (Voyage 2
Monitoring Information) Dialog Box 3
The [Voyage Information] (voyage monitoring information) dialog box is used to monitor voyage
statuses.
4
In addition to voyage monitoring, execution of course change and termination of automatic navigation 5
can also be performed.
Use the following procedure to open the [Voyage Information] dialog box. 6
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 7
The menu is displayed.
8
2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu.
The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears. 9
3 Click on the [Voyage Information] button. 10
The [Voyage Information] dialog box appears.
11
12
[1]
13
14
[2]
15
16
[3] 17
[4]
18
[5]
19
20
21
22
23
[1] Route name display
24
A file name of the route that is being monitored is displayed.
25
26
27

10-5 Section 10 Route Monitoring

 [2] To WPT information
The To WPT information that was selected in the [Route Monitoring] dialog box is displayed.

[a]
[b]
[c]
[d]
[e]

[f] [g] [h]

[a] [To WPT] (To WPT number)

Displays a To WPT number.

[b)] [BWW] (Angle of own ship - To WPT)

Displays a bearing between the WPTs (To WPT bearing from the previous To WPT).

[c] [DWOL] (Distance of own ship - To WPT)

Displays the distance between own ship and To WPT.

[d] [TWOL] (Expected traveling time)

Displays an expected traveling time to reach the position indicated by To WPT.

[e] [ETA] (Expected time of arrival)

Displays the expected time of arrival at the position indicated by To WPT.

[f] Cross track direction

Displays a cross track direction of the own ship.
When the own ship is cross-tracked on the right side, [STBD] is displayed and when the own
ship is cross-tracked on the left side, [PORT] is displayed.

[g] Cross track distance

Displays a cross track distance of the own ship.

[h] Cross track distance unit switching button

Switches the display unit of a cross track distance. Whenever the button is clicked on, the
unit is switched to "m" or "NM".

Section 10 Route Monitoring 10-6

 1
[3] Next WPT information
2
[a]
[b] 3
4
[a] [Next WPT] (Next WPT number)
Displays a Next WPT number. 5
[b] [Next Course] (Leg bearing of Next WPT) 6
Displays a leg bearing of the Next WPT.
7
[4] Automatic sailing information
This section displays the status of Auto Pilot that is installed.
8
Note 9
If the Auto Pilot device is not installed, information is not displayed.
10
[a]
11
[b] [c]
12
[a] Automatic sailing status
Displays an automatic sailing status.
13
Display Status 14
No display A/P (Auto Pilot) non-connection setting or automatic sailing alert is
occurring
15
Track Control The A/P steering mode is set to Track Control. 16
Heading Control The A/P steering mode is set to Heading Control.
Manual The A/P steering mode is set to Manual.
17
Override Ship avoiding operation in progress 18
Memo 19
The display contents vary depending on the auto pilot that is installed. For the details,
20
refer to the Auto Pilot Instruction Manual.
21
[b] Control mode
Displays a control mode of automatic sailing.
22
Display Status 23
No display Automatic sailing inactive 24
KEEP Automatic sailing/maintaining the course
25
TURN Automatic sailing/turning (TCS category C)
26
27

10-7 Section 10 Route Monitoring

 [c] Turning mode
Displays a turning mode of automatic sailing.

Display Status
No display Automatic sailing inactive

MAN Manual course change mode

AUTO Automatic turning mode

(5) Switching tab

When this tab is clicked on, the contents of the following dialog are switched.

[Clicking on the [Autosail] tab]

The dialog is switched to [Autosail] (automatic ailing) dialog.

[a]

[b]

(a) Course to steer

Displays the course to steer to be transmitted to auto pilot.

(b) [Track Control Stop] (stop automatic sailing) button

To stop automatic sailing, click on this button.
The following message dialog is displayed.

When the [OK] button is clicked on, automatic sailing terminates.

Memo
When a message dialog box indicating the switching of the Auto Pilot mode to the
Manual mode is displayed, switch the Auto Pilot steering mode to the Manual mode.

Section 10 Route Monitoring 10-8

 1
[Clicking on the [S-JOY] tab]
The dialog is switched to [S-JOY] dialog and information on S-JOY is displayed. 2
3
4
[a] [b]
5
6
7
8
(a) Steering right
9
Displays the steering right of S-JOY.
When the steering right is available, the circle is filled. 10
(b) Mode
11
Displays the S-JOY mode. 12
The contents that are displayed in the dialog vary as follows.
13
S-JOY mode Contents that are displayed in the dialog
14
Track ACT Rudder

Heading Set HDG、Rudder Limit、ACT Rudder

15
Radius Set HDG、Set Radius、ACT Radius、ACT Rudder 16
Planned Turn Set HDG、Set Radius、ACT Radius、ACT Rudder
17
Rudder Set Rudder、ACT Rudder、ROT
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

10-9 Section 10 Route Monitoring

 [Clicking on the [Total] tab]
The dialog is switched to the [Total] dialog.

[a]

[b]

(a) [Total Distance (from WPT0)]

Displays the total distance from WPT0 to own ship.

(b) [Final ETA]

Displays the expected time of arrival to the final WPT that is calculated based on the current
ship’s speed.

Section 10 Route Monitoring 10-10

 1
10.4 [Voyage Calculation] Dialog Box 2
The [Voyage calculation] dialog box is used to calculate the expected WPT arrival time, the time
3
required, and required ship speed
It is also possible to calculate a distance between two points such as between WPTs, from the own 4
ship’s position to WPT, or any position on the route to WPT.
Use the following procedure to open the [Voyage calculation] dialog box. 5
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 6
The menu is displayed.
7
2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu.
The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears. 8
3 Click on the [Voyage calculation] button. 9
The [Voyage calculation] dialog box appears.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

10-11 Section 10 Route Monitoring

When the [Schedule] (schedule calculation) button is clicked on, a schedule calculation dialog is
displayed.
When the [Distance] (distance calculation) button is clicked on, a distance calculation dialog is
displayed.

[1]

[2]

[1]
[3]
[4]

[2]
[5]

[3]

[Schedule] Dialog [Distance] Dialog

[Schedule] Dialog
[1] [Destined WPT] combo box
Select a destined WPT.

[2] [Distance] (Distance up to the destined WPT)

Displays a distance from the own ship’s position to the selected WPT.
※[Setting]-[Route]-[Monitoring]-[Arrival circle] selected:[Distance]

[3] [TWOL] (Expected traveling time)

Displays a traveling time required based on the position from the current SOG value to the destined
WPT.
※[Setting]-[Route]-[Monitoring]-[Arrivalcircle] selected:[TTG]

[4] [ETA] (Expeced time of arrival)

Displays a time at arrival of the destined WPT from the current SOG value.

[5] [Calculation] (Calculation)

Selects a calculation method and enters the values.

Section 10 Route Monitoring 10-12

 1
[Distance] Dialog
[1] [From] 2
Selects a starting point calculation method and enters the values.
3
[2] [To] 4
Selects an ending point calculation method and enters the values.
5
[3] [Distance (Result)] (Distance calculation result)
Displays distance from the starting point and ending point that were obtained from the setting.
6
7
10.4.1 Calculating a schedule 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1 Click on the [Schedule] button.
22
2 Click on the [Destined WPT] combo box.
23
3 Click on the WPT number whose schedule is to be calculated.
The measured distance from the own ship to the selected WPT, the estimated required time 24
calculated based on the SOG (Speed Over the Ground), and the estimated time of arrival are
25
displayed.
26
27

10-13 Section 10 Route Monitoring

 4 Select a calculation method and enter a value.
When [Average Speed] (calculated ship’s speed), [TTG] (calculated traveling time), or [ETA]
(calculated time of arrival) is selected and a value is entered, the calculation result of the ship’s
speed, expected traveling time, and expected time of arrival are displayed. These three items
are displayed by linking.

[Average Speed]: Enter a ship’s speed.

[TWOL]: Enter a calculated traveling time.
※[Setting]-[Route]-[Monitoring]-[Arrivalcircle] selected:[TTG]
[ETA]: Enter a calculated time of arrival by using a calendar/time picker.

10.4.2 Calculating a distance

1 Click on the [Distance] button.

Section 10 Route Monitoring 10-14

 1
2 Select starting point calculation method and enter a value. 2
Set a starting point for distance calculation by selecting [WPT] (selection of starting WPT), [Pick
on the route] (selecting any position on the starting route), or [Ship’s position] (selection of the 3
own ship’s position).
4
[WPT]: Click on a WPT used as the starting point from the combo box.
5
[Pick on the route]: Any position on the routes set in the starting WPT and the end WPT is 6
used as the starting point.
When the [Edit] (editing any position) button is clicked, the color of the 7
selectable route changes to green. When any position is clicked, that
8
position becomes the starting point.
9
[Ship’s position]: The own ship’s position is used as the starting point.
Click on the WPT to be passed through from the [Via WPT] combo box. 10
3 Select an ending point calculation method and enter a value. 11
Set an ending point for distance calculation by selecting [WPT] (selection of ending WPT) or
[Pick on the route] (selecting any position on the ending route).
12
13
[WPT]: Click on a WPT used as the ending point from the combo box.
14
[Pick on the route]: Any position on the routes set in the starting WPT and the end WPT is
used as the end point.
15
When the [Edit] (editing any position) button is clicked, the color of the
16
selectable route changes to green. When any position is clicked, that
position becomes the end point. 17
18
Memo
When the [Edit] button is clicked on, the following message dialog box appears. 19
20
21
22
23
Position selection can be cancelled by clicking on the [Cancel] button.
24
25
Memo 26
For schedule and distance calculation, each value is calculated using CCRP as a reference point.
27

10-15 Section 10 Route Monitoring

10.4.3 Example of distance calculation
Calculating with [WPT]

Selected
segment

Route distance between selected WPTs

Selecting [Pick on the route] (Selecting any starting point on the route) as the starting point:

Set any position on the route as

the starting point

Selected
segment

Route distance between selected WPTs

Section 10 Route Monitoring 10-16

 1
Selecting [Ship’s position] (Selecting the own ship’s starting position):
2
3
Own ship's
position 4
5
6
7
WPT Selected
segment 8
9
10
11
12
13
Route distance between selected WPTs
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

10-17 Section 10 Route Monitoring

10.5 Comparing the Data between the
Planned Route and the Actual Route
The [Pair of data] dialog box enables comparison of data between the planned route and the actual
route.
Use the following procedure as below to open the [Pair of data] dialog box.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Route Monitoring] button on the menu.

The [Route Monitoring] dialog box appears.

3 Click on the [Pair of data] button.

The [Pair of data] dialog box appears.

[1] [5]

[6]
[2]
[7]
[3]

[8]
[4]

Planned data is displayed in [Plan] (route plan) and the actual route data is displayed in
[Actual] (actual route) in the dialog.

[1] Planned course

Displays a planned course.

[2] Planned ship's speed

Displays a planned ship’s speed.

[3] Planned turn radius

Displays a planned turn radius.

[4] Planned ETA

Displays a planned expected time of arrival.

[5] Actual ship’s heading

Displays an actual ship’s heading.

Section 10 Route Monitoring 10-18

 1
[6] Actual speed
Displays an actual ship’s speed. 2
[7] Actual turn radius
3
Displays an actual turn radius. 4
[8] Actual ETA 5
Displays an expected time of arrival (ETA) that is calculated from the actual ship’s speed.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

10-19 Section 10 Route Monitoring

10.6 Verifying Detail Information of WPT
Detail information of each WPT on the route can be verified.
Use the following procedure to display the detail information of WPT.

1 Right-click on [WPT].
The context menu is displayed.

2 Click on the WPT to be verified from the context menu.

The context menu is displayed.

3 Click on [Readout WPT information...].

The detail information dialog of the WPT is displayed.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]
[9]

[1] WPT number

Displays a WPT number.

[2] [Position] (WPT position)

Displays the latitude/longitude of WPT.

[3] [Name] (WPT name)

Displays a WPT name.

Section 10 Route Monitoring 10-20

 1
[4] [DIST] (Distance between own ship and WPT)
Displays a distance from the own ship’s position to WPT.
2
3
[5] [BRG] (Bearing between own ship and WPT)
Displays a bearing from the own ship to WPT. 4
[6] [TTG] (Expected time required to reach WTP) 5
Displays a time required to reach WPT based on the own ship’s speed (SOG) and the
6
distance.
7
[7] [ETA] (Expected time of arrival at WPT)
Displays an expected time of arrival at WPT based on the own ship’s speed (SOG) and the 8
distance.
9
[8] [Plan ETA] (Expected time of arrival at WPT) 10
Displays an expected time of arrival based on route planning.
11
[9] [Turning Radius] (Turn radius)
Displays a WPT turning radius.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

10-21 Section 10 Route Monitoring

Section 10 Route Monitoring 10-22
 1
Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging 2
Anchor 3
Anchor Watch is a function that sets a circular or polygonal dragging anchor monitoring area around
4
the own ship and realizes safe voyage by generating an anchor alert when a part of the outline of the 5
own ship exceeded the monitoring area.
6
7
Dangerous based on the judgment
Generates a dragging anchor monitoring
alert 8
Radius of monitoring
9
circle
Center of
monitoring circle 10
Safe based on the judgment 11
12
13
14
15
Dangerous based on the judgment 16
Generates a dragging anchor
monitoring alert 17
18
Polygonal area
Safe based on the judgment
19
20
21
Dragging Anchor Monitoring Area 22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
11-1 Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor
11.1 Setting a Dragging Anchor
Monitoring Area
This section describes the setting of a dragging anchor monitoring area.
The setting varies depending on whether the shape of the dragging anchor area is a circle or a
polygon.

11.1.1 Setting a dragging anchor monitoring circle

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Anchor Watch] button on the menu.

The [Anchor Watch] dialog box appears.

3 Select [Circle] from the [Mode] (dragging anchor monitoring mode selection) combo
box.

Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 11-2

 1
4 Select the initial position of the center position of the dragging anchor monitoring 2
circle from the [Watch] button.
Change the initial position of the center position of the dragging anchor monitoring circle to 3
the anchor position. The value of [Anchor 1] [Anchor 2] can be set in [Service] - [Installation] -
[System Configuration] - [CCRP].
4
When you press the [Anchor 1] and [Anchor 2] buttons, coordinates are displayed at 5
[Anchor Position] (center of the dragging anchor monitoring circle).
6
5 Enter the size of the dragging anchor monitoring area.
[Radius] (Radius of the dragging anchor monitoring circle) 7
Input range
10 to 1500 m
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
11-3 Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor
11.1.2 Setting a dragging anchor monitoring
polygon
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Anchor Watch] button on the menu.

The [Anchor Watch] dialog box appears.

3 Select [Polygon] from the [Mode] (dragging anchor monitoring mode selection) combo
box.

4 Click on the [New] button.

The data of the [Point] (vertex) list is cleared.

5 Place the cursor on the chart.

6 Click to determine the vertex position. Create three or more vertices to create a
polygon.
By inputting position coordinates (longitude and latitude) of the vertex position of the polygon in
the [Point] list, the vertex position can be changed.
When a polygon is created, the number of vertices is displayed in [(Total:)]. Up to 360 vertices
can be set.

Creation example:

Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 11-4

 Click (vertex 2) 1
Click (vertex 1)
2
3
4
5
Click the right mouse button or
double-click on the ending point 6
7
11.2 Starting and Ending Dragging 8
Anchor Monitoring 9
11.2.1 Starting dragging anchor monitoring 10
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 11
The menu is displayed.
12
2 Click on the [Anchor Watch] button on the menu.
The [Anchor Watch] dialog box appears. 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
11-5 Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor
 The preview of dragging anchor monitoring area that was set is displayed (broken line).

When the dialog is displayed, the anchor position is placed at the center of the circle.

3 Set dragging anchor monitoring to ON by clicking on the [Monitoring Anchor] button.

Dragging anchor monitoring starts based on the setting.

The dragging anchor monitoring area on the chart is changed to a solid line.

When own ship exits from the dragging anchor monitoring area, the "Dragging anchor" warning
is displayed.

Memo
"Dragging anchor" warning escalates to "Dragging anchor" alarm 2 minutes after own ship exits
from the dragging anchor monitoring area.

11.2.2 Ending dragging anchor monitoring

Set the button display to [OFF] by clicking on the [Monitoring Anchor] button.
Alternatively, use the following procedure.

1 Click the dragging anchor monitoring circle.

A context menu is displayed.

2 Click [Finish Monitoring Anchor] on the context menu.

The [Monitoring Anchor] button display is changed to [OFF] and the display of the dragging
anchor monitoring area on the chart is changed to the broken line display.

Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 11-6

 1
11.3 Editing/Deleting a Dragging Anchor 2
Monitoring Area on the Chart 3
The size and shape of the anchor monitoring area can be changed or deleted on the chart.
These operations are also available on the context menu.
4
5
These operations can be performed either before or after starting dragging anchor monitoring.
6
7
11.3.1 Changing a size of a dragging anchor
monitoring circle on the chart 8
1 Click on the dragging anchor monitoring circle. 9
A square enclosing the dragging anchor monitoring circle is displayed.
10
11
12
13
14
2 Click on any of the vertices of the square enclosing the dragging anchor monitoring
circle.
15
The cursor changes to the arrow cursor. 16
17
18
19
20
3 Move the cursor until the dragging anchor monitoring circle becomes a required size
21
and click the mouse button.
22
23
24
25
26
27
The size of the dragging anchor monitoring cicle is changed. 付録
11-7 Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor
11.3.2 Changing a size of a dragging anchor
monitoring circle on the context menu
Change of a dragging anchor monitoring circle can also be executed from the context menu.

1 Click on the dragging anchor monitoring circle.

A square enclosing the dragging anchor monitoring circle is displayed.

2 Click on any of the vertexes of the square enclosing the dragging anchor monitoring
circle.
A context menu is displayed.

3 Click on [Change radius] on the context menu.

The cursor is set to the Arrow cursor.

4 Move the cursor until the dragging anchor monitoring circle becomes a required size
and click the mouse button.
The size of the dragging anchor monitoring circle is changed.

11.3.3 Changing a shape of a dragging anchor

monitoring polygon on the chart
Changing a vertex

1 Click on the vertex of the dragging anchor monitoring polygon to be changed.

The cursor is set to the Edit cursor.

Edit

2 Move the cursor to the required vertex position of the dragging anchor monitoring
polygon and click the mouse button.

Edit

The position of the vertex is changed.

Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 11-8

 1
Adding a vertex
2
1 Click the mouse button on the position where a vertex to be added.
The cursor is set to the Edit cursor. 3
4
5
Edit

6
7
2 Move the cursor to the position where a vertex is to be set and click the mouse button.
8
9
10
Edit
11
A new vertex is added. 12
13
14
11.3.4 Changing a shape of a dragging anchor
monitoring polygon on the context menu 15
The following operation can be performed on the context menu that is displayed by clicking the right
16
mouse button on the dragging anchor monitoring polygon.
17
[Clicking the right mouse button on the line
other than vertices of the dragging anchor
[Clicking the right mouse button on a vertex of
a dragging anchor monitoring polygon]
18
monitoring polygon]
19
20
21
22
Each function is as follows.
23
[Insert vertex] (Addition of a vertex)
Adds a vertex at the position where the mouse button is clicked on. 24
[Delete vetex] (Deletion of a vertex)
Deletes the selected vertex. 25
[Delete this object] (Deletion of an object)
26
Deletes a selected dragging anchor monitoring polygon.
27
付録
11-9 Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor
 Note
When deletion of a dragging anchor monitoring polygon is attempted during execution of dragging
anchor monitoring, the following message dialog box is displayed.

To execute deletion, click on the [Yes] button. The monitoring area is deleted and dragging anchor
monitoring is terminated.

Section 11 Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 11-10

 1
Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option) 2
3
4
5
When automatic sailing is performed, the operator must confirm the 6
safety of the route and the safety at crossing of a safety contour line.
Otherwise, an accident may occur. 7
8
When Auto Pilot is connected to this equipment, it is possible to calculate the course to steer from the
planned route and the own ship’s position and guide the ship automatically according to the planned 9
route by outputting the course to steer to Auto Pilot.
10
Note 11
• The ECDIS screen cannot be terminated during automatic sailing.
• When MAG (Magnetic Compass) is selected as the sensor source of Heading (ship’s heading), 12
automatic sailing cannot be started.
13
Memo 14
For the details of the principle and setting of automatic sailing, refer to "18.13 Setting Automatic
Sailing Parameter Values". 15
For the details of the Auto Pilot operation, refer to the Auto Pilot Instruction Manual.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
12-1 Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option)
12.1 Flow of Starting Automatic Sailing
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Auto Sail] - [Start] on the menu.

The automatic sailing starting wizard ([Auto Sail] dialog box) appears.

Procedure
tabs

[Route] combo box

New route planning link

3 Click a planned route file to be used from the [Route] combo box of Procedure tab 1.

4 After checking a route, click on the [Next] button.

Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option) 12-2

 1
The dialog of Procedure tab 2 is displayed.
2
3
4
[TO-WPT] combo box
5
6
7
8
9
10
5 Click on the waypoint from which Auto Sail is to start from the [TO-WPT] (waypoint) 11
combo box.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
12-3 Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option)
 6 Start automatic sailing by clicking on the [Start] button.

During route monitoring

During route monitoring, the name of the planned route that is currently used is displayed in the [Route]
combo box.

To use another planned route for automatic sailing, re-select a planned route.

Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option) 12-4

 1
Occurrence of an error
The following message dialog box appears.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
When the above error occurs, automatic sailing cannot be started. 13
Cancel the alert by closing the dialog box by clicking on the [X] (Close) button.
For the details of the alerts that are displayed during automatic sailing, refer to "12.6 Alerts at
14
Automatic Sailing". 15
Creating a new route
16
1 Click on the [Click here to plan a new route] link.
17
The [Route Planning] dialog box appears. 18
For the details, refer to "12.2.2 Creating a new route".
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
12-5 Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option)
12.2 Selecting a Route
12.2.1 Using the existing planned route
1 To use the existing planned track for automatic sailing, select the planned route file to
be used from the [Route] combo box.
Checking of the selected route starts.

If there is no problem in the route, a route safety confirmation message is displayed and the
[Next] button is enabled.

[Next] button

Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option) 12-6

 1
Detecting an error
When an error is detected as a result of checking the route, an error message is displayed.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Change the route file or modify the selected route.
12
Use the following procedure for modifying a route. 13
1 Click on the [Click here to confirm and modify the route] (confirmation and
14
modification of route) link.
The [Route Planning] dialog box is opened. 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
When an error occurred in the planned route, a badge indicating the number of errors is 22
displayed on the [Show Route Check…] (route checking screen display) button.
23
24
25
26
27
付録
12-7 Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option)
 2 Click on the [Show Route Check…] button.
The [Check Route] dialog box that displays the result of the route checking appears.

Safety check tab Limit check tab

Error count badge Re-check button

[Disregard] button

3 Modify the route, save the file by overwriting, and close the [Route Planning] dialog
box.
The route safety confirmation message is displayed.
For the details of the route planning operation, refer to "Section 9 Route Planning"

12.2.2 Creating a new route

A new planned route to be used for automatic sailing can be created.

1 Click on the [Click here to plan a new route] link.

The [Route Planning] dialog box is opened.

Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option) 12-8

 1
2 Create and save a new planned route and close the [Route Planning] dialog box. 2
3
4
5
6
7
Route editing tab 8
9
For the details of "Route Planning", refer to "Section 9b Route Planning".
10
3 Use the newly created planned route by referring to "12.2.1 Using the existing planned
11
route".
12
When the four route files have been opened 13
If four route files are already opened, no new edit tab can be opened unless the route edit tab that is
already open is deleted once. 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
12-9 Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option)
12.3 Selecting a Waypoint at which
Automatic Sailing Starts
Select a WPT (waypoint) at which automatic sailing starts.

1 Click on Procedure tab 2.

When selecting Procedure tab 1, click on the [Next] button.

When the [Back] button is clicked on, control returns to the route selection screen, enabling
re-selection of a route.

2 Click on the waypoint at which automatic sailing starts from the [TO-WPT] combo box.

Note
When the [Auto Sail] dialog box is activated during route monitoring, WPT that has been
passed through cannot be selected.

Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option) 12-10

 1
Creation of the temporary route to the selected WPT starts.
When the temporary route is created, a completion message and the [Start] button are 2
displayed.
3
4
5
6
7
8
[Start] button 9
10
11
12
When a temporary route cannot be created, the following error message is displayed. 13
Error message Cause Measures
Cannot create the temporary route The temporary route Approximate the ship’s
14
because the course is inappropriate. could not be created due heading to the planned 15
Turn the course toward the planned to the inappropriate route.
course. course. 16
Cannot create the temporary route Since XTD is too large, Approximate own ship to
because the XTD exceed XTD MAX. the temporary route the planned route.
17
Move own ship toward the planned could not be created. 18
route.
Cannot create the temporary route Since own ship may Re-select TO-WPT. 19
because own ship may pass through pass through the WOL,
the WOL. Select the TO-Waypoint the temporary route
20
again. could not be created. 21
Cannot create the temporary route Since own ship may Re-select TO-WPT.
because own ship may pass through pass through the 22
the planned route leg. Select the planned route leg, the
TO-Waypoint again. temporary route could
23
not be created. 24
Memo 25
Even if the predicted route creation starting condition processing fails, the predicted route is
drawn.
26
27
付録
12-11 Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option)
12.4 Starting Automatic Sailing

If your ship has reached a veering circle during the automatic

navigation, make sure that the safety check and veering operation are
made by the ship operator himself.
If veering operation is not made, regression bearing will be maintained
without veering. This may cause an accident.

Input the ship’s parameter accurately according to the specification of

the ship.
Otherwise, accidents may result.

Do not neglect confirmation of the position and the bearing of own ship
during sailing regardless of whether automatic sailing is set to ON or
OFF.
Otherwise, an accident may occur.

1 Click on the [Start] button of Procedure tab 2.

[Start] button

Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option) 12-12

 1
The [Auto Sail] dialog box is closed and the Autopilot steering mode switching message is
displayed. Switch the Autopilot steering mode to the NAVI mode. 2
3
4
5
6
7
The selected planned route is displayed on the chart and the [Voyage Information] dialog is
displayed. 8
9
When the [Route Planning] dialog box is opened during automatic sailing, the [Auto Sailing]
(during automatic sailing) indicator is displayed on the tab of the planned route that is currently 10
used.
11
12
13
14
15
16
[Auto Sailing] indicator
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
12-13 Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option)
12.5 Stopping Automatic Sailing
1 Click on the [Autosail] tab of the [Voyage Information] dialog and click on the [Track
Control Stop] button.

[Autosail] tab

[Track Control Stop] button

The automatic sailing stopping confirmation dialog box appears.

2 Click on the [OK] button.

Automatic sailing stops.
By the auto pilot that is installed, the auto pilot steering mode switching confirmation dialog is
displayed or the mode is automatically changed to another steering mode.
For the details, refer to the Auto Pilot Instruction Manual.

Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option) 12-14

 1
12.6 Alerts at Automatic Sailing 2
The following sailing monitoring alerts may occur during automatic sailing.
3
Type Occurring condition Automatic sailing Countermeasure 4
Course The difference between
the ship’s heading and
Can be continued -
5
difference(heading
the leg bearing during
deviates from sailing exceeded the limit 6
track course) value.
Cross Track
7
Own ship exceeded the Can be continued -
(Dev EX) set route width.
8
Heading(Sensor An error occurred in the Stops Switch the steering mode of
Failure) gyro compass. AUTO PILOT to AUTO or 9
HAND. Otherwise, the
current rudder angle is 10
retained for AUTO PILOT
(for details, refer to the
AUTO PILOT instruction
11
manual).
12
POSN1(Sensor An error occurred in the Performs dead Switch the steering mode of
Failure) primary position. reckoning for 10 AUTO PILOT to AUTO or 13
minutes and stops HAND. Otherwise, the
automatic sailing. current course is retained for
AUTO PILOT (for details,
14
Speed(Sensor An error occurred in the Stops after refer to the AUTO PILOT
Failure) ship speed through water performing instruction manual). 15
sensor. automatic sailing
for 10 minutes. 16
Position Monitor The system position Can be continued -
jumped exceeding the 17
limit value.

ACCA 30 seconds before Can be continued -

18
reaching WOL
19
End Of Track 1 to 5 minutes before the Stops automatic After passing the final
arrival at the destination sailing after destination, switch the 20
when sailing the final leg. passing the final steering mode of AUTO
destination. PILOT to AUTO or HAND.
Otherwise, the current
21
course is retained for AUTO
PILOT (for details, refer to 22
the AUTO PILOT instruction
manual). 23
Low Speed The ship speed through
water dropped below the
Can be continued - 24
set value.
25
26
27
付録
12-15 Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option)
 Type Occurring condition Automatic sailing Countermeasure

Autopilot(Unavaila A communication error Stops Switch the steering mode of

ble) occurred between AUTO PILOT to AUTO or
Autopilot and ECDIS HAND. Otherwise, the
current course is retained
Autopilot(Communi for AUTO PILOT (for details,
cation Failed, Main refer to the AUTO PILOT
LAN) instruction manual).

An Autopilot failure Switch the steering mode of

occurred. AUTO PILOT to AUTO or
HAND. Otherwise, the
current rudder angle is
retained for AUTO PILOT
(for details, refer to the
AUTO PILOT instruction
manual).

Track Control After 10 minutes of DR Performs dead Switch the steering mode of
Stopped sailing following the reckoning for 10 AUTO PILOT to AUTO or
HAND. Otherwise, the
occurrence of POSN1 minutes and stops current course is retained
(Sensor Failure) automatic sailing. for AUTO PILOT (for details,
Speed (Sensor Failure) Stops after refer to the AUTO PILOT
instruction manual).
occurred. performing
automatic sailing
for 10 minutes.
Heading (Sensor Failure) Stops Switch the steering mode of
occurred. AUTO PILOT to AUTO or
HAND. Otherwise, the
current rudder angle is
retained for AUTO PILOT
(for details, refer to the
AUTO PILOT instruction
manual).

A communication error Stops

occurred between
Switch the steering mode of
Autopilot and ECDIS,
AUTO PILOT to AUTO or
causing the following HAND. Otherwise, the
errors: current course is retained
Autopilot(Unavailable), for AUTO PILOT (for details,

Autopilot(Communicati refer to the AUTO PILOT

instruction manual).
on Failed, Main LAN)

Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option) 12-16

 1
Type Occurring condition Automatic sailing Countermeasure
2
Track Control An autopilot failure Stops Switch the steering mode of
Stopped occurred causing the
AUTO PILOT to AUTO or
HAND. Otherwise, the
3
following errors: current rudder angle is
retained for AUTO PILOT
4
Autopilot(Unavailable),
(for details, refer to the
Autopilot AUTO PILOT instruction 5
manual).
(Communication 6
Failed, Main LAN).

ACCA(Back-up An ACC alarm Can be continued -

7
Navigator Call) unconfirmed state
continued for 30 8
seconds.
9
End Of Track An End of Track alarm Stops automatic Switch the steering mode of
(Back-up
Navigator Call)
unconfirmed state
continued for 30
sailing after
passing the final
AUTO PILOT to AUTO or
HAND. Otherwise, the
10
seconds. destination. current course is retained for
AUTO PILOT (for details, 11
refer to the AUTO PILOT
instruction manual). 12
Track Control
Stopped(Back-up
A Track Control Stopped
alarm unconfirmed state
Stops Varies depending on the
occurrence condition.
13
Navigator Call) continued for 30
seconds.
Refer to the description of
Track Control Stopped.
14
Heading(Sensor A Heading (Sensor Stops Switch the steering mode of 15
Failure, Back-up Failure) alarm AUTO PILOT to AUTO or
Navigator Call) unconfirmed state HAND. Otherwise, the 16
continued for 30 current rudder angle is
seconds. retained for AUTO PILOT
(for details, refer to the
17
AUTO PILOT instruction
manual). 18
POSN1(Sensor A POSN1 (Sensor Performs dead Switch the steering mode of 19
Failure, Back-up Failure) alarm reckoning for 10 AUTO PILOT to AUTO or
Navigator Call) unconfirmed state
continued for 30
minutes and stops
automatic sailing.
HAND. Otherwise, the
current course is retained for
20
seconds. AUTO PILOT (for details,
refer to the AUTO PILOT 21
Speed(Sensor Speed (Sensor Failure) Stops after instruction manual).
Failure, Back-up alarm unconfirmed state performing 22
Navigator Call) continued for 30 automatic sailing
seconds. for 10 minutes.
23
24
25
26
27
付録
12-17 Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option)
 Type Occurring condition Automatic sailing Countermeasure
Position was The position of GPS was Stop Change the auto pilot
outside of outside of the expected steering mode to Manual.
expected area area even after the time
even after time limit.
limit.
Track Control
stopped.
Change autopilot
steering mode to
the Manual.

Section 12 Automatic Sailing (Option) 12-18

 1
Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 2
Use the [Chart] menu for chart operations. 3
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 4
The menu is displayed
5
2 Click on the [Chart] button on the menu.
6
7
8
9
The submenu is displayed.
10
11
12
It is possible using the page switching buttons to switch to the first page and the second page of
13
the submenu screen. 14
Click each button of the submenu screen to display the relevant function dialog. 15
Button name Function Related section Target 16
First page
Manual Update Updates a chart 13.1 Updating a Chart Manually ECDIS, 17
manually CHART
18
RADAR
My Port List Operates a port 8.7 My Port List ECDIS 19
name list
Update Review Selects an S-57 chart 13.2 Displaying/Searching an 20
S-57 Chart [Select S-57 Chart]
21
Off Center by Moves the display 13.3 Displaying a Chart by
Entering Position center Inputting a Position 22
Accept S-57 Accepts the updated 13.4
Updates S-57 chart Confirming/Accepting/Rejecting 23
an S-57 Updated Chart
24
Date-dependent Displays a 13.5 Displaying a
View date-dependent Date-dependent Object 25
object
Graphical Index Displays a chart 13.6 Displaying a Chart 26
boundary Boundary
27
Chart Abbreviation Chart abbreviation 13.9 Displaying a Chart ECDIS,
Abbreviation List CHART 付録
13-1 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
 RADAR

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-2

 1
Button name Function Related section
Second page 2
T & P (ARCS) Enables verification of 13.7 Confirming Temporary/Preliminary
3
temporary/preliminary Information of an ARCS Chart
information of the ARCS 4
chart
Datum Offset Offsets ARCS chart data 13.8 Adjusting an ARCS Chart Position 5
(ARCS)
6
Datum Transforms any position 13.8.2 Transforming a geodetic datum of
Transformation of the ARCS chart and an ARCS chart to WGS-84 7
(ARCS) geodetic datum of the
own ship’s position to 8
those of the WGS-84
ENC Update Status Displays the Latest 13.10 Displaying an ENC Update Status
9
Report report of SENC within Report 10
the system.
Check Applied Displays update data of 13.11 Displaying update data of the 11
C-MAP Updates the C-MAP chart. C-MAP chart
12
Show C-MAP Displays C-MAP license 13.12 Displaying license information of
Licence Information information. C-MAP 13
ECDIS Chart 1 Displays ECDIS Chart 1 13.13 Displaying ECDIS Chart 1 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
13-3 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.1 Updating a Chart Manually
The chart can be updated manually by selecting [Chart] - [Manual Update] (chart manual update) on
the menu.
For the details of manual update of a chart, refer to "14.3 Updating a Chart Manually (ECDIS Screen
Only)".

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-4

 1
13.2 Displaying/Searching an S-57 Chart 2
[Select S-57 Chart] 3
13.2.1 Displaying a chart 4
Select S-57 Chart enables selection and display of any chart.
5
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed
6
2 Click on the [Chart] - [Select S-57 Chart] on the menu.
7
The [Select Chart] dialog box appears.
8
9
10
11
S-57 chart list
12
13
14
15
16
An S-57 chart list contains chart names (Name), original scales (Scale), Updating numbers (Up
No.), issuing dates (Issue date), last update dates (Last Update), update acceptance statuses 17
(Accepted, Yes: Accepted/No: Not accepted) and Rejected (update rejection status, Yes:
Rejected/No: Not rejected)).
18
3 Click on the line of the chart to be displayed from the S-57 chart list. 19
The chart is selected.
20
4 Click on the [OK] button.
The selected chart is displayed on the screen.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
13-5 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.2.2 Search a chart
13.2.2.1 Searching the position that is clicked on by the cursor
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed

2 Click on the [Chart] - [Select S-57 Chart] on the menu.

The [Select Chart] dialog box appears.

3 Move the cursor to the position to be searched and click the mouse button.
The chart that is set at the position specified by clicking the mouse button is displayed in the
S-57 chart list.

Click.

Clearing search results

Click on the [Reset Picked Chart] (chart selection reset) button.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-6

 1
13.2.2.2 Searching by using a chart name
2
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed 3
2 Click on the [Chart] - [Select S-57 Chart] on the menu. 4
The [Select Chart] dialog box appears.
5
3 Enter a chart name in the search box
6
Search box 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
The chart is displayed.
14
Clearing search results 15
Clear by using the [DEL] key on the software keyboard.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
13-7 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.3 Displaying a Chart by Inputting a
Position
By inputting a position, the chart of the position that was input can be displayed.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed

2 Click on the [Chart] - [Off Center by Entering Position] on the menu.

The [Off Center by Entering Position] dialog box appears.

Latitude/longitude input box

3 Enter a position of the chart to be displayed in the latitude/longitude input box.

4 Click on the [Jump to the Following Position] button.

The chart of the specified position is displayed.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-8

 1
13.4 Confirming/Accepting/Rejecting an 2
S-57 Updated Chart 3
The update contents of an S-57 updated chart can be confirmed.
By accepting an updated chart, the updated chart can be integrated into the original chart.
4
5
Note
Check that the display category of the chart is [Standard] or [All]. 6
When the display category is set to [Base], the updated chart may not be displayed.
7
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 8
The menu is displayed.
9
2 Click on the [Chart] - [Update Review] on the menu.
The [Update Review] dialog box appears. 10
11
12
13
14
Chart
selection
S-57 updated
chart list
15
check box
16
17
18
19
20
3 To confirm the update contents of the updated chart, select the check box of the chart
and click on the [Show] (display) button.
21
The selected updated chart is displayed. The updated chart is displayed on the original chart in 22
red.
23
24
25
26
27
付録
13-9 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
 4 Click on the [Accept] button to accept the updated chart.
The updated chart is integrated into the original chart.

Click on the [Show] button: Click on the [Accept] button:

A highlight marker is displayed The object is accepted and only
on the object to be updated. the updated object is displayed.

For the details of the highlight indication, refer to 13.14 Displaying differences at chart update.

5 To reset the updated chart to the pre-update state, select two or more target charts
from the list and click on the [Reject] button.
When the [Reject] button is clicked on, the automatic update of the chart is rejected and the
chart is reset to the pre-update state.
After the Reject operation, a rejection marker is displayed on the target object.
For the details of the rejection indication, refer to 13.14 Displaying differences at chart update.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-10

 1
13.5 Displaying a Date-dependent Object 2
A chart object of the specified date and time can be displayed.
3
For instance, it is possible to display a date-dependent chart such as displaying a chart at the arrival
time of the arrival schedule at the navigation planning. 4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 5
The menu is displayed
6
2 Click on the [Chart] - [Date-dependent View] on the menu.
The [Date-dependent View] dialog box appears. 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
3 Set the [Enable Date-dependent View] check box to ON.

If the screen is closed while the check box is set to OFF, the date-dependent object is
15
not displayed. 16
4 Set the [UTC] (Universal Time Coordinated) button or [LMT] (Local Mean Time) button 17
to On by clicking on the button.

5 Enter a date (within the range from 1980-01-01 to 2099-12-31) and a time in the [Start
18
display date and time] input box. 19
6 Enter a date (within the range from 1980-01-01 to 2099-12-31) and a time in the [End 20
display date and time] input box.

7 When [LMT] is set to On in Step 4, enter a time difference in [Time Zone] box within the
21
range from -13:30 to +13:30. 22
The object displayed on the chart is updated when information is input in any of the steps from
Step 5 to Step 7. 23
8 Close the [Date-dependent View] dialog box. 24
25
26
27
付録
13-11 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
Displaying the Permanent Information in duration specification
When the duration specification of the object is different from the current date while a date-dependent
object is displayed, Viewing Does Not Include Current Date is displayed in Permanent Information.
When the duration specification matches the current date, this message is not displayed since no
warning is necessary.

In the specified date and time, (UTC) is displayed for (LMT) under UTC and the Time Zone is not
specified.
For duration specification for a route plan by ETA, the duration is always displayed under UTC.
When a route plan is displayed, the Date-dependent View screen is closed and Date-dependent View
on the menu is set to Disable. (This is because the priority is given to the duration specification for a
route plan by ETA.)

Note
While displaying a route in a route plan, Viewing Does Not Include Current Date is displayed in
Permanent Information if the specified duration is different from the current date.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-12

 1
13.6 Displaying a Chart Boundary 2
The boundary of the chart on the position on which the button was clicked is displayed.
3
13.6.1 Setting a boundary to be displayed on the 4
chart 5
A chart boundary can be displayed. 6
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
7
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Chart] - [Graphical Index] on the menu.

8
The [Graphical Index] dialog box appears. 9
10
Overview chart
11
General chart 12
Coastal chart
13
Approach chart
14
Harbour chart

Berthing chart 15
16
17
Active indicator
18
19
3 Select the chart whose boundary is to be displayed among the [Chart Boundary] check
boxes. 20
4 To display the chart name in addition to the boundary, select [Show Chart Name]. 21
5 To display ordinary chart information in addition to the boundary, select [Show ENC
22
Data] (displaying chart information).
When this item is not selected, the background chart is displayed. 23
Memo 24
While C-MAP is displayed, [Show ENC Data] is not displayed.
25
Active indicator ( ) 26
Although the operation of each check box is enabled while the active indicator is displayed, a chart
boundary line is not displayed.
27
When the active indicator is hidden, a boundary line is displayed. 付録
13-13 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.6.2 Displaying chart information
When the chart is clicked on while the [Graphical Index] dialog box is displayed, the chart information
on the location that was clicked on is displayed in "Edition and date of chart".

Memo
“Edition and date of chart” is not displayed while the active indicator is displayed in the [Graphical
Index] dialog box even if the chart is clicked on.

Information of the chart of the location that was clicked on

Click

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-14

 1
13.7 Confirming Temporary/Preliminary 2
Information of an ARCS Chart 3
Temporary/preliminary information (T&P: Temporary and Preliminary Notices) of an ARCS chart can be
confirmed.
4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
5
The menu is displayed.
6
2 Click on the [Chart] - [T & P] on the menu.
The [T & P] dialog box appears.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
3 Click on the number whose contents are to be confirmed on the [Number] list. 14
The temporary/preliminary information of the chart of the specified number is displayed on the
right side.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The list can be sorted by clicking on any item of the title column.
22
Note 23
Temporary/preliminary information is included in the ARCS chart itself. Since the information may
not be included depending on the chart, the information may not be displayed. 24
25
26
27
付録
13-15 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.8 Adjusting an ARCS Chart Position
Note
Adjust the offet only when the geodetic datum of the chart is a local geodetic datum and the
display position is not adjusted correctly.

13.8.1 Offsetting an ARCS chart

Move the chart by entering offset values (latitude and longitude) or using the cursor.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Chart] - [Datum Offset] (geodetic offset) on the menu.

The [Datum Offset] (geodetic offset) dialog box appears.

When the previous setting values are displayed in the [Off set] box, the values can be cleared
by clicking on the [Clear Offset] button.

To set offset of a chart, use the cursor or enter offset values.

Offsetting a chart with the cursor

1 Click on the [Offset by Cursor] button.

The button display changes to On and the offset function is enabled.

2 Set the cursor to the reference point and click the mouse button.
To clear the offset values, set the button to Off by clicking on the [Offset by Cursor] button.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-16

 1
3 Place the cursor on the offset position and click the mouse button.
2
The reference point moves to the offset position.
A check mark ( ) is displayed on the [Offset] display (start of offset). 3
4
5
Orange line 6
Cursor
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Offset amount 14
15
16
Offsetting a chart by entering an offset value
17
1 Enter offset values (latitude/longitude) in the [Offset] box.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
The chart is offset. 25
Memo 26
The maximum latitude input range is 85 ° 00.000 (Maximum range of latitude that can
be operated during ECDIS mode).
27
付録
13-17 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.8.2 Transforming a geodetic datum of an ARCS
chart to WGS-84
A geodetic datum of an ARCS chart can be transformed to WGS-84 based on any position and the own
ship’s position.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Chart] - [Datum Transformation] (geodetic datum transformation) on the

menu.
The [Datum Transformation] (geodetic datum transformation) dialog box appears.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-18

 1
Note
2
Chart display position in the
WGS84 geodetic datum 3
Chart display position in 4
the local geodetic datum
5
6
7
X and Y: Offset amount to WGS84
8
When X and Y are included in the chart information, the system automatically offsets the
9
amount to WGS84 and displays the result. In this case, a check mark is attached to Offset of
"Datum Offset" and "Chart Shift to WGS84" is displayed in the alert notification area. 10
As shown above, even if the offset amount is determined in the [Datum Transformation] dialog
box for the chart that is displayed under WGS-84 and the [OK] button is clicked on, this function 11
is disabled and the message, "The Datum is already WGS-84", is displayed.
12
13
14
3 Select a geodetic system from the [From] combo box of [Geodetic Datum].
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Memo 26
For the geodetic datum that is displayed in the [From] combo box, refer to "D.3 Geodetic datum
abbreviations". However, "No Use" in No.9, No.10, No.48 and No.49 is not displayed. 27
付録
13-19 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
 4 Enter a latitude and a longitude in the [Position] input boxes of [Reference Position].

When the [Ship Position] button is clicked on, the latitude and the longitude of the own ship’s
position is displayed in the [Position] input boxes.
When the [by Cursor] button is clicked on, the cursor changes to the offset cursor. When the
mouse button is clicked on the chart, the latitude and longitude of the point on which the mouse
button was clicked is displayed in the input boxes.

Information after transformation is displayed on [Chart Shift].

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-20

 1
The position shifted after geodetic datum transformation is displayed in [Reference Position].
The offset amount after geodetic datum transformation is displayed in [Shifted Position]. 2
3
5 Click on the [OK] button.
The transformation is determined.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
13-21 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.9 Displaying a Chart Abbreviation List
A list describing chart abbreviations can be displayed.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Chart] - [Chart Abbreviation] on the menu.

The [Chart Abbreviation] dialog box appears.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-22

 1
13.10 Displaying an ENC Update Status 2
Report 3
This function displays a latest report of S-57 and C-MAP within the system.
4
This function also displays a latest report of S-57 and C-MAP relating to the specified route.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left tool bar.

5
2 Click on [Chart］－［ENC update status report］ on the menu.
6
The [ENC update status report] dialog is displayed. 7
【S-57】 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
【C-MAP】
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Set the [Route filter] check box to ON and select a route on the [Select Route] combo box.
25
The update report relating to the selected route (Route filtered ENC update status report） is displayed , 26
the list items that are displayed by each tab increase, and the contents change.
In C - MAP, selecting database in the [C - MAP Database] combo box, you can display only the 27
information of the selected database.
付録
13-23 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
The details of the items that are displayed by each tab are shown below.
Contents displayed by the Information tab
No. Item Operation/Condition Input range/Default value

1. Ship's [Operation] [Display range]

Name Displays the name of own ship that was entered by Up to 20 characters

selecting Service->Installation->Ship's Parameter-> (Same as for Ship General->Ship's

Ship General->Ship's Name. Name)

2. MMSI [Operation] [Display range]

Displays MMSI of own ship, which is the same as Up to 9 characters

that displayed by selecting TT/AIS->Own Ship AIS (Same as for TT/AIS->Own Ship AIS

Data->MMSI. Data->MMSI)

[Default value]

Blank space

3. Enc [Operation] [Display range]

update Displays a media time stamp in the following format. YYYY-MM-DD

reference Latest date that was retrieved from the MMM DD,YYYY

date S-63SERIAL.ENC file. DD MMM,YYYY

The display style complies with the style that was

selected on the Date/Time screen.

It will be blank when selecting All in the C-MAP

Database combo box.

4. Date of [Operation] [Display range]

report Displays the year, month, and day when the ENC YYYY-MM-DD

update status report screen is displayed. MMM DD,YYYY

The display style complies with the style that was DD MMM,YYYY
selected on the Date/Time screen.

5. Content [Operation]

Displays the following character string.

• ENC update status report:

Full SENC contents

• Route filtered ENC update status report:

Filtered for route plan.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-24

 1
No. Item Operation/Condition Input range/Default value

6. Start WPT [Operation]

2
Name Displays the following character string. 3
• Route filtered ENC update status report:
<Start WPT name> 4
*When no name is set, [WPT<WPT number>] is 5
displayed.

[Condition]
6
• ENC update status report: 7
No item is displayed.

7. End WPT [Operation] 8

Name Displays the following character string.
9
• Route filtered ENC update status report:
<End WPT name> 10
*When no name is set, [WPT<WPT number>] is
11
displayed.

[Condition] 12
• ENC update status report:
No item is displayed.
13
8. Start WPT [Operation] 14
Positon Displays the following character string.
15
・Route filtered ENC update status report:

<Latitude>, <Longitude> 16
*Latitude and longitude of the start WPT
17
Example: 57°46.5636’S, 11°58.0000’E

[Condition] 18
・ENC update status report:
19
No item is displayed.

9. End WPT [Operation] 20

Positon Displays the following character string.
21
・Route filtered ENC update status report

<Latitude>, <Longitude> 22
*Latitude and longitude of the end WPT
23
Example: 54°20.0147’S , 10°09.3458’E

[Condition] 24
・ENC update status report:
25
No item is displayed.
26
27
付録
13-25 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
Contents displayed by the Summary tab
No. Item Operation/Condition Input range/Default value

1. Total [Operation]

Displays the total number of cells.

2. Up To Date [Operation]

<Number of Up to date cells>/<Total number>

Up to date: Latest update data that is displayed in the

latest PRODUCTS.TXT. When the data exceeded four

weeks old, Not Up to Date is displayed.

3. Not Up To Date [Operation]

<Number of Not Up to Date cells>/<Total number>

Not up to date: Not the latest update data that is

indicated in the latest PRODUCTS.TXT. Alternatively,

the ENC Update Reference Date is the date four weeks

prior to the date of the Date of Report.

4. Withdrawn [Operation]

<Number of Withdrawn cells>/<Total number>

Withdrawn: Cells that have been withdrawn （does not

exist in PRODUCTS.TXT） or have been cancelled.

5. Unknown [Operation]

<Number of Unknown cells>/<Total number>

Unknown: PRODUCTS.TXT is PARTIAL and cell

information is not available.

Contents displayed by the Status report tab

No. Item Operation/Condition

1. Data Server combo box [Operation]

Select a country code. (Example: GP, JP, or so on)

The list length of the combo box is variable.

[Condition]

Display is disabled when there are no options.

In case of C-MAP, it is always invalid display.

2. Cell Name [Operation]

Displays the cell name.

3. Edition [Operation]

Displays the edition of the cell.

For the edition of the cell that has not been imported, the edition of the

PRODUCTS.TXT is used.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-26

 1
No. Item Operation/Condition

4. Update [Operation]
2
Displays the update number. 3
For the update number of the cell that has not been imported, the number of

the PRODUCTS.TXT is used. (Latest Update Number)

4
5. Issue Date [Operation] 5
Displays the cell issue date.

For the issue date of the cell that has not been imported, the date of
6
PRODUCTS.TXT is used. (Issue Date Latest Update) 7
The display style complies with the style that was selected on the Date/Time

screen.
8
6. Expiry Date [Operation] 9
• Route filtered ENC update status report:
Displays the expiry date.
10
The display style complies with the style that was selected on the Date/Time 11
screen.

[Condition]
12
• ENC update status report: 13
No item is displayed.

7. Status [Operation] 14
Displays one of the following statuses. 15
• Up to date
• Not up to date 16
• Withdrawn
• Unknown ※S-57 only display
17
8. Action [Operation] 18
• Route filtered ENC update status report:
Displays one of the following actions. 19
• Renew: The permit will expire in less than 30 days. 20
• To be ordered: Although the cell range that is indicated in
PRODUCTS.TXT intersects with the route, there is no permit. (S-57 21
only display)
• No action: The permit is effective for 30 days or longer.
22
• To be removed: A cell is not found from the FULL PRODUCTS.TXT or it
23
has been cancelled.
• To be installed: Although the cell range that is indicated in 24
PRODUCTS.TXT intersects with the route and the permit is available, it
has not been imported. (S-57 only display)
25
[Condition]
26
• ENC update status report:
No item is displayed. 27
付録
13-27 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.11 Displaying update data of the C-MAP
chart
Update data of the C-MAP chart can be displayed.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the Left Tool Bar.

A menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Chart]-[Check Applied C-MAP Updates] (C-MAP update confirmation) on the

menu.
The [Check Applied C-MAP Updates] (C-MAP update confirmation) dialog is displayed.

Chart
selection C-MAP chart list
check box

Reject button or
active indicator

[Show] button

The C-MAP chart list includes Chart (chart name), Original Scale, Up No. (update number), and Issue
date.

Memo
The C-MAP chart list is not displayed while the active indicator is displayed. Only the moving of the
[Check Applied C-MAP Updates] dialog and Close operation are enabled. When the C-MAP chart list
is displayed, the active indicator is hidden and the Reject button is displayed.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-28

 1
3 Click on the row of the chart to be displayed from the C-MAP chart list. 2
The chart is selected.
3
4 Click on the [Show] button. 4
The selected chart is displayed at the center of the screen and a red line is displayed at the cell
boundary. 5
The updated object is displayed in highlight mode.
6
5 To reset the updated chart to the pre-update state, select two or more target charts
7
from the list and click on the [Reject] button. 8
When the [Reject] button is clicked on, the automatic update of the chart is rejected and the
chart is reset to the pre-update state. 9
10
6 Close the [Check Applied C-MAP Updates] dialog.
The red line at the cell boundary is cleared and the highlighted display of the updated object 11
also terminates.
12
The following objects can not be rejected with C-MAP. 13
・Depth area
・Dredged area 14
・Floating dock
・Hulk
15
・Land area 16
・Pontoon
・Unsurveyed area 17
18
Note 19
The [Check Applied C-MAP Updates] dialog is displayed only when only one check is ON in
C-MAP Ed 3 Database of [View-Option] - [Chart Common]. 20
Otherwise, this dialog is not displayed.
21
When multiple checks are ON for C-MAP Ed3 Database in [View-Option] - [Chart Common], clicking 22
[Menu] - [Chart] - [Check Applied C-MAP Updates] opens the popup shown below and [Chart
Common] dialog.
23
24
25
26
27
付録
13-29 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.12 Displaying license information of
C-MAP
C-MAP license information can be displayed on a popup window of the RADAR and ECDIS screens.

13.12.1 Setting license information display to ON

1 Click on the [Menu] button of the Left Tool Bar.
A menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Chart]-[Show C-MAP License Information] (C-MAP license information

display) on the menu.
A license information display turned on and a popup window indicating C-MAP license
information of C-MAP is displayed.
For the details, refer to “13.12.2 C-MAP license information”.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-30

 1
13.12.2 C-MAP license information 2
3
13.12.2.1 License information display timing
When license information display is set to ON, the C-MAP license status is checked at the following 4
timing and related information is displayed on a popup window of the RADAR or ECDIS screen.
5
Timing Operation 6
[Chart]-[Show C-MAP License • Always a popup window is displayed.
Information] are selected on the • The static license is displayed. 7
menu. • The dynamic license is displayed if it has been
activated.
8
The RADAR/ECDIS task is • When Chart Type of [View1] or [Vew2] is set to 9
started. C-MAP3 on the [View Options] dialog that is displayed
by selecting [View]-[Options]-[Chart View] on the 10
menu, a popup window is displayed if the condition is
satisfied.
11
• Although the static license is displayed, it is not 12
displayed if there is ample time until the expiration of
the static license. 13
• The dynamic license is displayed if it has been
activated.
14
The date of the UTC time is • When Chart Type of [View1] or [Vew2] is set to 15
changed while the C-MAP3 on the [View Options] dialog that is displayed
RADAR/ECDIS task is active. by selecting [View]-[Options]-[Chart View] on the 16
menu, a popup window is displayed if the condition is
satisfied.
17
• Although the static license is displayed, it is not
18
displayed if there is ample time until the expiration of
the static license. 19
• The dynamic license is displayed if it has been
activated. 20
The Chart Type setting of • When Chart Type is changed to C-MAP3 from any
21
[View1] or [View2] is changed in other types, a popup window is displayed when the
the [View Options] dialog by condition is satisfied. 22
selecting [View]-[Options]-[Chart • Although the static license is displayed, it is not
View] in the menu displayed if there is ample time until the expiration of 23
the static license.
24
• The dynamic license is not displayed.
25
26
27
付録
13-31 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
How to read the popup display
See below for an example of a popup window that indicates C-MAP license information and how to
read the information.

[6]

[1]
[2]
[3]

[4]

[5]

[1] License format

Static Licensing: Static license

Dynamic Licensing: Dynamic license

[2] Database name

[3] License information

Refer to “13.12.2.2 License information”.

[4] Reporting expiration date

[5] Remaining number of credits

[6] [×](Close) button

Click on this button to close the popup window.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-32

 1
13.12.2.2 License information
The following information is displayed in a popup window of the C-MAP license information.
2
3
License status Information that is displayed
The dynamic license has The period of next reporting chart usage to Jeppesen Marine is 4
been activated. [Reporting expiration date].
Please update charts for reporting chart usage before the period.
5
The remaining credit is [Remaining number of credits]. 6
The dynamic license The period of next reporting chart usage to Jeppesen Marine has
usage reporting has expired. 7
expired. You cannot access to new charts and non-reported charts.
Please update charts for reporting chart usage.
8
The remaining credit is [Remaining number of credits]. 9
There is ample time until One or more licences will expire at [Date].
the expiration of the static 10
license.
The static license will One or more licences will expire at [Date].
11
expire within less than 2 Please contact your Jeppesen Marine agent for a licence 12
months. renewal.
The static license has One or more licences expired. 13
expired. Please contact your Jeppesen Marine agent for a licence
renewal.
14
The license has not been No licence installed. 15
imported.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
13-33 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.13 Displaying ECDIS Chart 1
ECDIS Chart 1 can be displayed on the ECDIS screen.
By displaying ECDIS Chart 1, you can check whether new symbols introduced in
IHO S-52 Presentation Library version 4.0 can be displayed.
As a matter of specification, Chart 1 must be installed in all ECDIS.

13.13.1 Import ECDIS Chart 1

Import Chart data of ECDIS Chart 1 from [Chart Maintenance] of the task menu.

The storage locations of chart data of S-57 and C-MAP are as follows.

【S-57】
"D:¥MFD¥system¥ECDIS_Chart_1"

【C-MAP】
"D:¥MFD¥system¥C-MAP_Chart_1"

For the chart import procedure, refer to a separate manual, "Additional Instruction Manual for
Introducing Chart".

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-34

 1
13.13.2 Confirm display of ECDIS Chart 1 2
1 Click MENU-[Chart]-[ECDIS Chart 1] to display the [ECDIS Chart 1] dialog.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
2 Click each button to display Chart 1.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
13-35 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
Memo
If ECDIS Chart 1 is not imported, a message prompting the import of the chart will be displayed when
clicking the button.

【S-57】

【C-MAP】

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-36

 1
13.14 Displaying differences at chart 2
update 3
4
13.14.1 Displaying differences at S-57 chart update
5
When the S-57 chart is updated, only the latest object of the last Update No. is displayed in highlight
mode. 6
Until the update is approved, the target object is displayed with a highlight marker.
When the update is approved, the highlighted display is cancelled.
7
8
The following table shows the drawing patterns of pre-approval and post-approval for each update
content. 9
Update content Pre-approval drawing pattern
Post-approval
10
drawing pattern
Addition • When highlighted display of update is set to ON, Only the added 11
an addition marker is displayed for the object to be object is drawn.
added. 12
• When highlighted display of update is set to OFF,
13
only the object to be added is drawn.
Deletion • When highlighted display of update is set to ON, a Deleted objects are 14
deletion marker is displayed for the object prior to not drawn.
deletion. 15
• When highlighted display of update is set to OFF,
16
the target object is not darwn.
Change • When highlighted display of update is set to ON, a Only the object after 17
deletion marker is displayed for the pre-update the change is
object and an addition marker is displayed for the drawn. 18
post-update object.
19
• When highlighted display of update is set to OFF,
only the post-update object is drawn. 20
Addition marker Deletion marker
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
13-37 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.14.2 Displaying differences at C-MAP chart
update
When the C-MAP chart is updated, only the updated object of the last Update No. is displayed in
highlight mode.
Since update approval operation is not available for the C-MAP chart, the update object of the last
Update No. is displayed in the usual color immediately after the update.
However, when the [Check Applied C-MAP Updates] dialog is displayed, a highlighted display mark is
displayed overlaying the updated object only for the cell that is selected on the screen.

The following table shows the drawing patterns at the usual state and the drawing patterns of the chart
that is selected in the [Check Applied C-MAP Updates] dialog for each update content.
Drawing patterns at usual Drawing patterns of the chart that is
Update content
state selected in [Check Applied C-MAP Updates]
Addition Only the added object is The added object is drawn and highlighted
drawn. display is overlaid on the object.
Deletion The deleted object is not The deleted object is not drawn and only
drawn. highlighted display is drawn at the position
of the object.
Change Only the changed object is The changed object is drawn and
drawn. highlighted display is drawn over the object.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-38

 1
13.15 Chart pick report 2
For the S-57 chart, when an object is clicked on, the pick cursor is displayed on the clicked position 3
and the [Pick Report] dialog is displayed.
4
Memo
The pick cursor is a square frame that is displayed at the spot where the chart information is read
5
and the information on the chart object that exists in the frame is displayed in the [Pick Report]
6
dialog.
7
When the object is a symbol or a spot depth, the object itself is not displayed in highlight mode.
8
For a C-MAP chart, a pick cursor is not displayed. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
13-39 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
13.16 Maintaining a Chart
Use the Chart Maintenance menu for management of chart data.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.
In the case of ECDIS:
Change over to the second page using the page switching button.

2 Click on the [Chart Maintenance] button on the menu.

RADAR

ECDIS

The [Chart Maintenance] dialog box appears.

Three icons are assigned in the [Chart Maintenance] dialog box. Only the Check Status icon
can be clicked.
Click on the Check Status icon when checking the status of the chart.

Note
"Import/Update Licence file" and "Import/Update charts" can also be operated by clicking
from the [Chart Maintenance] dialog box started in the task menu.

Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-40

 1
Icon Operation
Import/Update Licence file Imports/updates the license file for importing a chart. 2
Import/Update charts Imports/updates chart data.
3
Check Status Checks chart status.
4
For the operation of the Chart Maintenance menu, refer to a separate manual, "Additional
5
Instruction Manual for Introducing Chart".
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
13-41 Section 13 Operating a Chart (option)
Section 13 Operating a Chart (option) 13-42
 1
Section 14 Creating a User Map/ 2
Updating a Chart 3
Manually 4
5
This section describes the procedures for creating a user map and updating a chart manually.
6
User map
A user specific map can be created by drawing various objects (symbol, line, area, and text) that are
7
not displayed on the existing chart. The created user map can also be updated by editing.
8
A user map can be displayed by overlapping on a chart. A user map can be created by merging two
user maps. 9
The following diagrams show how to use user maps.
10
Display example 1 Display example 2 Display example 3
11
Multiple user maps
User map 2
User map 1 User map 2 can be displayed
concurrently
12
User map 1
Chart Chart
Chart 13
14
15
Example: User maps 1 and 2 are merged and displayed on a chart by overlaying.
16
User map 1 User map 2
17
18
19
Merge user User map 3
maps 1 and 2. 20
21
Display user map 3 on
22
the chart by overlaying.
User map 3 Chart 23
24
25
26
27

14-1 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

Manual Update (ECDIS screen only)
A chart can be updated manually by creating objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts) on the
specifying chart.
In the manually updated chart, objects are linked to the chart itself, unlike user maps. Therefore,
although the manually updated objects can be hidden, they cannot be deleted easily.
For the details of hiding objects, refer to "14.4.1 Deleting or hiding an object" and 14.9.1 Deleting or
hiding an object (S-57/S-63).

Note
Depending on the setting of Category (Base / STD / All / Custom), the added object may be
hidden.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-2

 1
14.1 Creating/Editing a User Map 2
Use the following procedure to create/edit a user map.
3
1 Displaying the "User Map" menu. 4
Reference: "14.1.1 Display the "User Map" menu.”
5
6
Displaying the "File Operation" submenu.
2 Reference: "14.1.2 Display the File Operation submenu.”
7
8
9
Registering a new user map file.
3 Reference: "14.1.3 Creating a new user map".
10
11
Invoking an existing user map file.
3 Reference: "14.1.4 Editing the existing user map". 12
13
14
Creating/editing a user map by using map creation tools.
4 Reference: "14.2 Using Map Creation Tools (User Map Creation/Editing)". 15
16
17
Creating an object Moving an object
Reference: "14.5 Creating an Object. Reference: "14.2.10 Moving an object". 18
Deleting an object Managing/editing an object 19
Reference: "14.6 Collective Deletion Reference: "14.7 Managing/Editing
20
of Objects [Delete by Type/Color]". Objects [Mark Line/List]".
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-3 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.1.1 Display the "User Map" menu.
When creating/editing a user map, use the "User Map" menu.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [User Map] button on the menu.

The submenu is displayed.

The User Map menu comprises the following submenus.

Submenu Function
File Operation • Managing user map files (new creation, loading, copying, deletion,
import/export, geodetic conversion)
• Displaying/editing a user map
• Merging user map files
Refer to "14.1.6 Operating a user map file".
Delete by Type/Color Deleting objects collectively
Refer to "14.6 Collective Deletion of Objects [Delete by Type/Color]".
Mark Line/List Managing/editing objects
Refer to "14.7 Managing/Editing Objects [Mark Line/List]".

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-4

 1
14.1.2 Display the File Operation submenu
2
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
3
2 Click on the [User Map] button on the menu. 4
3 Click on the [File Operation] button on the submenu. 5
The [File Operation] dialog box appears.
6
14.1.2.1 [File Operation] dialog box 7
Manage the file at user map creation and display and edit the user map on the [File Operation] dialog 8
box.
9
File operation button [Merge Display Files] button [Geodetic] button
10
11
12
File list 13
14
Operation
guide
No. of objects
displayed 15
[Edit User Map] button 16
17
The user map files that are currently saved are displayed in the file list.
The number of objects that are displayed is indicated at the bottom right corner of the dialog. 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-5 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

File list
Up to 500 user map files (.uchm) can be registered in a file list. The following information is displayed
for the user map files that are currently saved.

Item Information
[Name] Indicates the name of the user map file (up to 64 characters).
The name can be changed by clicking on the name in the list.
[Count] Indicates the total number of objects that are registered in the user map file.
[Comment] Indicates the comment on the user map file (up to 64 characters).
The comment can be changed by clicking on the comment in the list.
[Date] Last update date of the user map file
[Geodetic] Displays the geodetic datum of the user map file.
To change the geodetic datum, refer to "14.1.6.6 Performing geodetic datum conversion".
[Display] The [Display] check box is checked for the user map file that is displayed.
For the method of using the [Display] check box, refer to "14.1.5 Displaying a user map".
[Editing] The [Editing] button is set to ON for the user map file that is being created or edited.
For the method of using the [Editing] button, refer to "14.1.4 Editing the existing user map".

File operation buttons

Button name Function
[New] Creates a new user map file.
For the details, refer to "14.1.3 Creating a new user map".
[Delete] Deletes a user map file.
For the details, refer to "14.1.6.1 Deleting a user map file".
[Copy] Copies a user map file
For the details, refer to "14.1.6.2 Copying a user map file".
[Import] Imports a user map file from an external medium.
For the details, refer to "14.1.6.3 Importing a user map file".
[Export] Exports the user map that was created to an external medium.
For the details, refer to "14.1.6.4 Exporting a user map file".

[Merge Display Files] button

This button merges the selected user map files.
For the details, refer to "14.1.6.5 Merging multiple user map files".

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-6

 1
[Geodetic] button
This button selects the geodetic datum of the user map file. 2
For the details, refer to "14.1.6.6 Performing geodetic datum conversion".
3
[Edit User Map] button 4
This button edits the existing user map file.
5
For the details, refer to "14.1.4 Editing the existing user map".
6
14.1.3 Creating a new user map 7
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
8
The menu is displayed. 9
2 Click on the [User Map] button on the menu.
10
3 Click on the [File Operation] button on the submenu.
The [File Operation] operation dialog box appears.
11
[New] button 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
[Edit User Map] button
19
4 Click on the [New] button.
20
The new user map file is registered in the file list.
The file name can be changed by clicking on the file name that is displayed in the [Name] 21
column in the file list.
22
5 Click on the [Edit User Map] button in the [File Operation] dialog box.
The map creation tool is displayed. 23
Create or edit the user map by using the map creation tool. (Refer to "14.2 Using Map Creation
Tools (User Map Creation/Editing)").
24
25
26
27

14-7 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.1.4 Editing the existing user map
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [User Map] button on the menu.

3 Click on the [File Operation] button on the submenu.

The [File Operation] operation dialog box appears.

File list

[Editing] button [Edit User Map] button

4 Click on the [Editing] button of the user map file to be edited in the file list on the [File
Operation] dialog.
The user map file to be edited is displayed.

5 Click on the [Edit User Map] button on the [File Operation] dialog box.
The map creation tools (drawing toolbar and the user map information bar) are displayed and
the cursor changes from the cross-hair cursor to the mark cursor.
Edit the user map by using the map creation tools. (Refer to "14.2 Using Map Creation Tools
(User Map Creation/Editing)").

14.1.4.1 Editing the user map that is currently displayed

1 Display a user map. (Refer to "14.1.5 Displaying a user map").

2 Click on the Write tool button on the left toolbar.

The map creation tools (drawing toolbar and the user map information bar) are displayed and
the cursor changes from the cross-hair cursor to the mark cursor.

3 Edit the user map by using the map creation tools. (Refer to "14.2 Using Map Creation
Tools (User Map Creation/Editing)").

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-8

 1
4 To edit another user map, click on the [File Operation] dialog display button on the
user map information bar. (Refer to "14.2 Using Map Creation Tools (User Map 2
Creation/Editing)").
The [File Operation] dialog box appears.
3
File list 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
[Editing] button [Edit User Map] button
11
5 Click on the [Editing] button of the user map file to be edited in the file list on the [File
12
Operation] dialog box.
13
The selected user map is displayed.
14
14.1.5 Displaying a user map 15
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
16
The menu is displayed. 17
2 Click on the [User Map] button on the menu.
18
3 Click on the [File Operation] button on the submenu.
The [File Operation] dialog box appears.
19
File list 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
[Display] check box
27

14-9 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 4 Select the [Display] check box of the user map file to be displayed in the file list on the
[File Operation] dialog box.
The selected user map is displayed.

14.1.6 Operating a user map file

Manage the file at user map creation, merge user maps, or select a geodetic datum on the [File
Operation] dialog box.

14.1.6.1 Deleting a user map file

1 Click on the user map file to be deleted in the file list.
The user map file is selected.

2 Click on the [Delete] button.

The selected user map file is deleted.

14.1.6.2 Copying a user map file

1 Click on the file to be copied in the file list.
The user map file is selected.

2 Click on the [Copy] button.

The selected user map file is copied.
The copied file is named under "Copy of (copy source file name)".

Note
If the file name exceeds 64 characters including "Copy of", the file cannot be copied.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-10

 1
14.1.6.3 Importing a user map file
2
1 Click on the [Import] button.
A file selection window is displayed. 3
2 Select and import a user map file that is saved in the external medium on the file 4
selection window.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Note 12
When sufficient free storage space is not available in the import destination, a message dialog box
is displayed.
13
Change the import destination or import a file after securing sufficient free space.
14
15
14.1.6.4 Exporting a user map file
16
1 Click on the file to be exported from the file list.
17
2 Click on the [Export] button.
A file selection window is displayed. 18
3 Specify an export destination and export the selected file. 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-11 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 When the export destination contains a file of the same name, a message dialog box is
displayed, prompting the verification of whether the existing file is to be overwritten.
When exporting the file by overwriting the existing one, click on the [OK] button.

Note
When sufficient free storage space is not available in the export destination, a message dialog box
is displayed.
Change the export destination or import a file after securing sufficient free space.

14.1.6.5 Merging multiple user map files

1 Select the [Display] check boxes of the files to be merged in the file list.
The user map files to be merged are displayed.

2 Click on the [Merge Display Files] button.

A user map file is created by merging the user maps that are being displayed. The user map file
is named under "Merged User Map Filexxx" (xxx: serial number starting from 001).

User Map User Map

"USER-01" "USER-02"

Two user maps can be merged

into one user map.

User Map

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-12

 1
14.1.6.6 Performing geodetic datum conversion
2
It is possible to use the preset datum or convert the datum by entering an offset value.
3
1 Click on the user map file whose geodetic datum is to be converted on the file list.
The user map file is selected. 4
2 Click on the [Geodetic] button. 5
The [Geodetic Conversion] dialog appears.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
3 To use the preset geodetic datum, click on the [Select Geodetic] button and click on
15
the geodetic datum on the list. 16
When entering an offset value, click on the [Enter Offset] button and enter a numeric
value. 17
Note 18
When [No Use] is selected on the [Select Geodetic] list, geodetic datum conversion is not
performed. 19
20
4 Click on the [OK] button. 21
Geodetic datum conversion is executed based on the setting in Step 3.
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-13 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.2 Using Map Creation Tools (User Map
Creation/Editing)
Use the map creation tools to create/edit a user map or update a chart manually.
The following tools can be used for user map creation.

Drawing toolbar
Object property
dialog box

User map information bar

Note
The map creation tool configuration and functions vary depending on whether a chart is edited
manually or a user map is created.
For the details, refer to "14.4 How to Use the Map Creation Tools ".

14.2.1 User map information bar

The user map information bar is located at the bottom right corner of the screen and displays the user
map name that is currently being created/edited.
The [File Operation] dialog box can be displayed by clicking on the [File Operation] dialog box display
button.

Name of user map currently edited

[File Operation] dialog box

display button

14.2.1.1 Displaying a user map information bar

1 Select [User Map] - [File Operation] on the menu.

2 Click on the [Edit User Map] button on the [File Operation] dialog box that is displayed.

The user map information bar can also be displayed by clicking on the write tool button on the left
toolbar.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-14

 1
14.2.2 Drawing toolbar
2
Display a drawing toolbar by clicking on the drawing tool button on the left toolbar.
3
4
Drawing tool button
5
6
7
[Type] button [Type] button 8
[Color] button [Line] button
9
[Fill] button

[EBL/VRM] button [EBL/VRM] button

10
[Enter POSN] button [Enter POSN] button 11
Drawing toolbar when Drawing toolbar when area 12
symbol/text is selected is selected
13
[Type] button
14
[Line] button
15
[EBL/VRM] button 16
[Enter POSN] button
17
Drawing toolbar when line
is selected. 18
When creating a user chart, the writing tool button is displayed in blue
19
indicating selection.
20
Note
At user map creation, the azimuth mode is fixed to the [N UP] mode. 21
22
The drawing toolbar comprises the following tool buttons. The buttons that are assigned vary according
to the object type (Symbol/Line/Area/Text) that is currently selected. 23
24
25
26
27

14-15 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 Tool button Function
[Type] button Displays an icon list. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type".).
[Color] button Select the color of the symbol/text. (Refer to "14.2.4 Selecting a
(Symbol/text selection) color of an object".).
[Line] button Enables selection of a color of the line that forms the object. (Refer
to "14.2.4 Selecting a color of an object".).
[Fill] button (at area selection Enables selection of a color of the area that forms the object.
only) (Refer to "14.2.4 Selecting a color of an object".).
[EBL/VRM] button Switches the cursor mode of the user map creation function to the
EBL/VRM mode. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an object in the
EBL/VRM mode".).
[Enter POSN] ([Enter Position] Displays the [Enter Position] dialog (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an
dialog display) button object by specifying latitude and longitude".).

14.2.3 Selecting an object type

By displaying an icon list, the type of the Mariner's Mark/Line object or the user map object ([Symbol],
[Line], [Area], and [Text]) can be selected.

1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

An icon list is displayed.

2 Select a type of the object by clicking on the icon in the icon list.
The icon list can be switched to thumbnail display or list display by clicking on the thumbnail/list
display switching button.

Mariner's Mark/Line menu Thumbnail/list display switching button

Icon list

User map menu

Icon list (thumbnail display) Icon list (list display)

For the icons that can be selected from the icon list, refer to "Appendix D.5 Icon Button List for
User Map".

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-16

 1
14.2.3.1 Using a user map object
2
Select a type of the object (symbol/line/area/text) to be displayed in the icon list by clicking on a user
map menu button. 3
The following objects are displayed.
4
Button Icons displayed
[Symbol] button Circle 5
Triangle
Square 6
Diamond
Multiple Mark 7
Caution Symbol
Warning symbol
8
Alarm Symbol
[Line] button Simple line(solid line)
9
Simple line(dotted line) 10
Simple line(dashed line)
Circle(solid line) 11
Circle(dotted line)
Circle(dashed line) 12
Ellipse(solid line)
Ellipse(dotted line) 13
Ellipse(dashed line)
Arc(solid line) 14
Arc(dotted line)
Arc(dashed line) 15
Caution Line
Warning line 16
Alarm Line
Arrow(Start To End/Small) 17
Arrow(Start To End/Medium)
Arrow(Start To End/Large) 18
Arrow(End To Start/Small)
Arrow(End To Start/Medium)
19
Arrow(End To Start/Large)
Arrow(Both Direct/Small)
20
Arrow(Both Direct/Medium)
Arrow(Both Direct/Large)
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-17 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 Button Icons displayed
[Area] button Polygon(solid line)
Polygon(dotted line)
Polygon(dashed line)
Circle(solid line)
Circle(dotted line)
Circle(dashed line)
Ellipse(solid line)
Ellipse(dotted line)
Ellipse(dashed line)
Fan(solid line)
Fan(dotted line)
Fan(dashed line)
Caution Detection(solid line)
Caution Detection(dotted line)
Caution Detection(dashed line)
Warning Detection (solid line)
Warning Detection (dotted line)
Warning Detection (dashed line)
Alarm Detection(solid line)
Alarm Detection(dotted line)
Alarm Detection(dashed line)
[Text] button Text

14.2.4 Selecting a color of an object

1 When selecting a color of the symbol/text object on the drawing toolbar, click on the
[Color] button.
To select a line color of an area object, click on the [Line] button.
To select a color for filling an area object, click on the [Fill] button.

2 Select and click on the required color on the list that is displayed. The following 10
colors are available.
• White/Black
(The color changes to White/Black under the following conditions.
RADAR screen: Always White
ECDIS screen: Day1/Day2: Black, Day3/Dusk/Night: White)
• Gray
• Amber
• Magenta
• Blue
• Cyan
• Green
• Yellow
• Orange
• Dark Red

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-18

 1
14.2.5 Creating an object in the EBL/VRM mode
2
1 Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.
The user map creation function mode is switched from the cursor mode to the EBL/VRM mode.
3
When the mode is switched to the EBL/VRM mode, the cursor changes to the following state.
4
5
6
7
8
9
EBL/VRM base point cursor
10
The EBL/VRM mode is switched to cursor mode when the right mouse button is clicked on the
chart or the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar is clicked on 11
12
14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying latitude and 13
longitude 14
Using the [Enter Position] dialog box, it is possible to create an object at the specified latitude and
longitude.
15
16
Displaying the [Enter Position] dialog box
17
1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
18
Note
An object cannot be created with the cursor mode and EBL/VRM mode while this dialog 19
box is displayed.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
[Enter Position] dialog box
27

14-19 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.2.6.1 Creating an object of symbol/circle/ellipse/arc/arrow/text
Enter latitude and longitude values of the object in the [Position] box and click on the [Enter] button.

Memo
The maximum latitude input range of Position is 85 ° 00.000 (polar range restriction).

The [Bearing] box, [Distance] box, and the [New] button are disabled.

14.2.6.2 Creating an object of simple line/polygon/highlight

Use the following procedure to create an object with vertices such as a simple line, polygon, and
highlight.

1 Enter latitude and longitude values of a vertex of the object in the [Position] box and
click on the [Enter] button.
The position of one of the vertices of the object is determined.
The [Bearing] box and the [Distance] box are enabled.

2 Enter latitude and longitude values of the next vertex in the [Position] box.
Alternatively, in the [Bearing] box and the [Distance] box, enter the bearing and
distance from the previous vertex that was determined.

3 Click on the [Enter] button.

4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3.

A simple line can be determined by two or more vertices and a polygon/highlight can be
determined by three or more vertices.

5 To create a next object continuously, click on the [New] button.

14.2.7 Deleting an object

1 Click on the eraser tool button on the left toolbar.
The cursor changes to the eraser cursor.

2 Place the cursor on the eraser cursor and click the mouse button.
When the right button is clicked on any position with the eraser cursor, the cursor mode is reset
to the cross-hairs cursor.
Objects of the same shape or color can be deleted collectively. For the details, refer to "14.6
Collective Deletion of Objects [Delete by Type/Color]".

When the left mouse button is clicked on the target object in eraser mode, an operation
according to the object is performed.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-20

 1
14.2.8 Object property dialog box
2
An object property dialog box displays the properties of the object that is currently selected.
Parameter settings of the object can be verified/changed.
3
4
5
Parameter setting area
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Object property dialog box Object property dialog box
(Selecting Circle) (Selecting Simple Line) 14
15
14.2.8.1 Selecting an object 16
1 Click on the object to be selected with the cross-hairs cursor.
17
The object is selected and the object property dialog box appears.

Click. 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-21 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.2.8.2 Setting a comment
In the object property dialog box, a comment for the object can be entered. When the [Show Comment]
check box is selected, a comment can be displayed on the user map.

[Comment] text box

[Show Comment] check box

1 Enter a comment in the [Comment] box (up to 64 characters).

2 To display the comment that is input on the user map, select the [Show Comment]
check box.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-22

 1
14.2.9 Changing an object display scale range 2
An object display scale range (1:1 to 1:100,000,000) can be changed on the object property dialog box.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
[Display Scale] setting section
11
12
13
1 Select a minimum scale on the [MIN scale] combo box.
14
2 Select a maximum scale on the [MAX scale] combo box.
15
16
14.2.10 Moving an object
17
To move an object, use the context menu that is displayed by clicking the right button on the object.

1 When the object to be moved is in the selected state, unselect the object.
18
To unselect the object, click on a section without display or another object. 19
20
21
22
2 Click the right button on the object.
The object is selected and the context menu is displayed. 23
24
Right-click

Edit 25
26
27

14-23 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 3 Click on [Move this object].

4 Click on the position to which the object is to be moved.

The selected object moves to the position on which the button was clicked.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-24

 1
14.3 Updating a Chart Manually (ARCS) 2
(ECDIS Screen Only) 3
Use the following procedure to update a chart.
4
Display the [Chart] - [Manual Update] menu.
1 Reference: "14.3.1 Displaying the Manual Update submenu"
5
6
7
Select a chart to be updated.
2 Reference: "14.3.2 Selecting a chart to be updated" 8
9
Update the chart manually by using the map creation tools.
10
3 Reference: "14.3.3 Updating a chart manually" 11
"14.4 How to Use the Map Creation Tools (for Manual Update)"
12
13
Create an object. Select display/hide for the object. 14
Reference: "14.5 Creating an Object" Reference: "14.3.5 Selecting display/hide
for the object" 15
Manage/edit an object.
Reference: "14.7 Managing/Editing Move an object.
16
Objects [Mark Line/List]" Reference: "14.2.10 Moving an object"
17
18
19
End manual updating or start route planning.
4 Reference: "Section 9 Route Planning"
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-25 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.3.1 Displaying the Manual Update submenu

By selecting [Menu] - [Chart] - [Manual Update], the selected chart can be updated manually.

Restrictions
Multi-screen display is disabled at manual update of a chart. Even if multi-screen display is attempted
prior to the commencement of manual update, the mode is switched to Single View if manual update is
commenced.

Note
Since a dialog box requesting a Notice to Mariners issuing date is displayed when the updated
chart is saved, enter the issuing date.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [Chart] button on the menu.

3 Click on the [Manual Update] button on the submenu.

The "Manual Update" toolbar is displayed.

"Manual Update" toolbar

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-26

 1
14.3.2 Selecting a chart to be updated
2
1 Click on the [Select Chart] button on the Manual Update toolbar.
The [Select Chart] dialog box appears.
3
4
Active indicator (C-MAP only)
Search box 5
6
7
Chart list
8
9
[Reset Picked Chart] button 10
11
[OK] button
[Preview] check box (ARCS only) 12
[Select Chart] dialog box 13
14
2 Select a chart file to be updated manually on the [Select Chart] dialog box.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
3 Click on the [OK] button in the [Select Chart] dialog box. 23
A chart is selected.
24
25
26
27

14-27 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.3.2.1 Searching the position that is clicked on with the cursor
1 Move the cursor to the position where manual update is to be performed and click the
button.
ARCS:
All the charts that are overlaid on the position that was clicked on are displayed in the chart list.
C-MAP:
The chart that is drawn at the position that is selected by clicking is displayed in the chart list.

Memo
To clear the search result, click on the [Reset picked chart] (chart selection reset) button on the
[Select Chart] dialog box.

14.3.2.2 Searching a chart with the chart name

1 Enter a chart name in the search box on the [Select Chart] dialog box.
The applicable chart is displayed.

Memo
To clear the search result, clear the input in the search box.

14.3.2.3 Displaying the chart screen that is selected from the list
When the target of manual update is an ARCS chart, the chart file to be updated can be displayed on
the screen for verification before starting the update.
When the [Preview] check box is checked, the chart that is selected in the list is displayed at the center
of the screen.
When the check box is unchecked, the display is cleared.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-28

 1
14.3.3 Updating a chart manually
2
1 By using map creation tools, create/edit an object on a chart. (Refer to "14.2 Using
Map Creation Tools (User Map Creation/Editing)").
3
2 Delete an object or change the properties as required. (Refer to "14.5 Creating an 4
Object ").
5
3 Click on the [Save] button.
The [Geodetic Conversion] dialog box appears.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
4 Select a datum from the list, or select [Enter Offset] and enter the offset value.
14
5 Click on the [OK] button.

6 The [Notice to Mariners] dialog box appears.

15
16
17
[lssue date] input box
18
[OK] button
19
7 Enter a notice to mariners issuing date in the [Issue date] input box on [Notice to
20
Mariners] dialog by using a software keyboard. 21
8 Click on the [OK] button in the [Notice to Mariners] dialog box.
The manually updated object is saved in the chart.
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-29 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.3.4 Displaying the selected chart only

Memo
For the C-MAP chart or the ARCS chart, the [FIX] button cannot be set to ON.

14.3.5 Displaying the object/redisplaying the hidden

object
In the case of ARCS, to display all the objects that were created by chart manual update, select the
[Display All Object] check box on the Manual Update toolbar.
To redisplay the hidden objects, select the [Display Hidden Objects] check box on the Manual Update
toolbar.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-30

 1
14.4 How to Use the Map Creation Tools 2
(At Manual Update of ARCS) 3
At chart manual update also, use the same map creation tools in the same way as that of user map
4
creation. (Refer to "14.2 Using Map Creation Tools (User Map Creation/Editing)"). However, there 5
are the following differences in the map creation tools
• The user map information bar is not displayed. 6
• The object that is saved cannot be deleted by the eraser tool (can be hidden).
• A Mariner's Mark/Line drawing object cannot be selected with the drawing tool.
7
• More icon types can be selected in the drawing tool. 8
When the chart is updated manually, "Update" is displayed on the Write tool button. 9
Note 10
At chart manual update, the bearing reference mode is fixed to [N UP] mode.
11
12
14.4.1 Deleting or hiding an object
13
1 Click on the eraser tool button.
The cursor changes to the eraser cursor. 14
15
16
2 Place the eraser cursor on the object and click the button. 17
At manual update, only pre-saved objects can be deleted by the eraser tool.
18
If the saved object is clicked on with the eraser tool, the object is hidden. All the property screens of the 19
object that has been set to hide are displayed as disable and cannot be edited.
The object that is created and saved by manual update can be redisplayed unless deleted even if it is 20
hidden.
If the chart that uses the hidden object is updated, the expiration date of the object is set (90 days from
21
the date on which the object is created).
22
The object will be deleted after the expiration date.
23
Also, the object property dialog box setting can be changed by using the Mark/Line List submenu.
For the details, refer to "14.7.4 Displaying a manual update list (ECDIS screen only)". 24
25
26
27

14-31 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.4.2 Selecting an object type
1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.
An icon list is displayed.

2 Select an object type by clicking on the icon on the icon list.

At manual update, the following icon list is displayed.

Category display

Icon list

Icon list at manual update

The [Mariner's Mark/Line] button is not displayed on the icon list at manual update.
For the details of icons that can be selected from the icon list, refer to "Appendix D.6 Icon Button List
for Manual Update".

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-32

 1
14.5 Creating an Object(At Manual Update 2
of ARCS) 3
This section describes the procedures for changing the parameters of the object after creating the
4
object on the user map or chart during manual update.
5
Note
After automatic sailing, the mark/line may be shifted depending on how the cursor is placed on the 6
target at the input.
To prevent the shift, place the cursor on the front edge of the target.
7
8
• Input method that does not cause shift (place the cursor on the front edge of the target)
9
SHM
10
Target
11
Cursor
12
13
14
15
Own ship's
position
16
• Input method that causes shift (place the cursor on the center of the target) 17
SHM 18
Target
19
Cursor 20
21
22
23
Own ship's
position 24
25
26
27

14-33 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.5.1 Creating a symbol object (Symbol)
A symbol or Alerts symbol can be created by specifying the creation position with the cursor.

1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

An icon list is opened.
Select a symbol or an icon of Alerts symbol. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type").

2 Click on the position on which the symbol is to be created with the cursor.

The symbol is displayed on the position on which the button is clicked and the parameters of the
symbol that was created are displayed on the object property dialog box.

Mark

Latitude and longitude of the

symbol creation position

3 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

4 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 and 3.

14.5.1.1 Creating an object by specifying the latitude and longitude

1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying
latitude and longitude).

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-34

 1
2 Enter the latitude and longitude of the position on which an object is to be created and 2
click on the [Enter] button.
An object is created on the specified latitude and longitude and the property information is 3
reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box").
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
3 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
15
4 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 and 3.
16
At user map creation, the symbol size can be changed by selecting [Option] - [User Map] on the View
menu. 17
For the details, refer to "16.2.4 Setting up the Display of User Map".
18
19
14.5.1.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation
20
1 Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an 21
object in the EBL/VRM mode").
22
2 Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker.
The EBL/VRM marker is displayed. 23
3 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position on which the object is to be created and 24
click the button.
An object is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property
25
information is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property 26
dialog box").
27
4 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

5 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 4.

14-35 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually
14.5.2 Creating a simple line and Alerts line (Line
object)
A simple line and Alerts line are created by using one vertex as an object. Alerts line is a line object
that is detected as the warning target (danger line) of own ship.

Note
The color of Alerts line cannot be changed.

1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

An icon list is opened.
Select an icon of a simple line or Alerts line. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type").

2 Click on the starting point with the cursor.

A vertex is created and the property information of the vertex is displayed on the object property
dialog box.

3 Move the cursor to the next vertex.

The latitude and longitude of the cursor are displayed near the cursor.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-36

 1
4 Click on the position on which the 2
nd
vertex is to be created.
nd
2
A vertex is created and the parameters of the 2 vertex are displayed on the object property
dialog box. 3
4
The property screen is updated
5
nd
after the 2 position is added.
6
7
[Type] becomes the

Releasing Addition of 2
nd
point
medium point. 8
the starting
point The number of 9
selection vertices becomes 2.
state
Editing of the line color 10
and width is enabled.

The coordinates of the

11
nd
2 point are entered.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-37 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 5 Determine the line by double-click on the button or click the right button.

Mark Mark
Lat 35°00.000'N
Lon 140°00.000'E

Double-click
Determined with the line up to
the last vertex that was set

After determining of drawing,

the last vertex changes to the
end point.

6 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

7 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 6.

Memo
The property screen for the vertex that was created can be edited in AUTO mode.
For the details of AUTO mode, refer to "3.13 Cursor AUTO Mode".

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-38

 1
14.5.2.1 Creating a vertex by entering the position
2
1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears. 3
2 Enter the latitude and longitude of the vertex of the object in the [Position] box and 4
click on the [Enter] button.
The position of the vertex of the object is determined. 5
The [Bearing] box and the [Distance] box are enabled.
6
3 Enter the values of the latitude and the longitude of the next vertex in the [Position]
box. Alternatively, enter the bearing from the vertex that was determined immediately
7
previously in the [Bearing] box and the [Distance] input box. 8
4 Click on the [Enter] button.
9
5 Determine the positions of 2 or more vertices by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
10
6 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
11
7 To create an object in another position continuously, click on the [New] button of the
[Enter Position] dialog and repeat Steps from 2 to 6. 12
13
14.5.2.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation
14
1 Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an 15
object in the EBL/VRM mode").
16
2 Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker.
The EBL/VRM marker is displayed. 17
3 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the starting point and click the button. 18
A vertex is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the information is
reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box").
19
20
21
22
Starting point
23
24
25
26
27

14-39 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 4 Click on the position of the reference point.
nd
The EBL/VRM marker that determines the 2 point is displayed.

5 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the 2

nd
vertex and click the button.
A vertex is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the information is
reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box").

nd
2 vertex

The EBL/VRM marker is reset to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor.

6 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

7 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 6.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-40

 1
14.5.3 Creating a circle, ellipse, and an arc (Line
2
object)
3
A circle, an ellipse, and arc can be drawn with the cursor by specifying the center.

1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

4
An icon list is opened. 5
2 Select an icon of a circle, an ellipse, or an arc.
6
(Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type").

3 Click on the position for the center with the cursor.

7
The center is created and the property information on the vertex is displayed on the object 8
property dialog box.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-41 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 4 Draw a circle, an ellipse, or an arc.

Display of
radius

Display of
radius

Display of
radius

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-42

 1
At creation of an arc, the starting angle and the ending angle of the arc to be created are the
previous values or the initial values (starting angle: 0°, ending angle: 90°). To change the
2
starting angle and the ending angle, change the values in [Start Angle] and [End Angle] on the
3
object property dialog box.
4
Mark
Radius 10.0NM
5
Mark
Mark 6
7
Click on the position
for the center 8
After determination, the arc is selected and
9
the cursor moves to the center setting
mode of the next arc. 10
11
5 Determine the object by clicking the button again.

6 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

12
7 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 3 to 6. 13
14
14.5.3.1 Creating an object by specifying a position for the center 15
and size of the object
16
1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying 17
latitude and longitude").
18
2 Enter the coordinate of the center of the circle, ellipse, or arc and click on the [Enter]
button of the [Enter Position] dialog box. 19
The center is created at the position of the specified coordinate and the property information is
20
reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box").

3 Set the parameters in the object property dialog box as indicated below.
21
 Circle: Enter a value of [Radius]. 22
 Ellipse: Enter values of [Horizontal] and [Vertical].
 Arc: Enter values of [Radius], [Start Angle], and [End Angle]. 23
4 To create an object on another position continuously as required, repeat Steps 2 and 24
3.
25
26
27

14-43 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.5.4 Creating a polygon and Alerts area (Area
object)
Create a polygon using all the vertices (3 or more) as one object. Alerts area is an area object that is
detected as a warning target (danger area).
A polygon and Alerts area can be created in the same way as for simple line and Alerts line

1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

An icon list is opened.
Select an icon of a polygon or Alerts area. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type").

2 Click on the starting point position with the cursor.

The starting point is created and the property information of vertex 1 is displayed on the object
property dialog box.

The latitude and

longitude of the
starting point
(vertex 1) are
displayed.

3 Move the cursor to the next vertex.

The latitude and longitude of the cursor are displayed near the cursor.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-44

 1
4 Click on the position on which the 2
nd
vertex is to be created.
nd
2
A vertex is created and the latitude and the longitude of the 2 vertex are displayed on the
object property dialog box 3
Mark 4
5
6
7
Resetting the starting Add the 2
nd
point Editing of the line 8
point selection state color and width is
enabled. 9
The number of 10
vertices
becomes 2. 11
The coordinates
12
nd
of the 2 point
are entered.

13
14
15
16
5 rd
Click on the position on which the 3 vertex is to be created.
A triangle is created by connecting the three vertices. A preview screen is displayed, enabling
17
the checking of the fill statuses of the polygon and t Alerts area. 18
19
20
The preview of the result of filling the area is displayed. 21
rd
The latitude and longitude of the 3 vertex are displayed on the object property dialog box. 22
23
24
25
26
27

14-45 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 The editing of the line color, line width, fill color, and transparency
is enabled.

The number of vertices becomes 3.

rd
The coordinates of the 3 vertex are entered.

6 To add another vertex continuously, click on the position on which the vertex is to be
created.

th
When the 4 vertex is determined, the preview display
is updated.

When not adding any further vertices, determine the polygon or Alerts area by double-clicking
the button or clicking the right button.

7 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

8 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 7.

14.5.4.1 Creating a vertex by entering the position

1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears.

2 Enter the latitude and longitude of the vertex of the object in the [Position] box and
click on the [Enter] button.
The position of one vertex of the object is determined.
The [Bearing] box and the [Distance] box are enabled.

3 Enter the values of the latitude and the longitude of the next vertex in the [Position]
box. Alternatively, enter the bearing from the vertex that was determined immediately
previously in the [Bearing] box and the [Distance] input box.

4 Click on the [Enter] button.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-46

 1
5 Determine 3 or more vertices by repeating Steps 2 to 4. 2
6 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
3
7 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 6.
4
14.5.4.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation 5
1 Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar. 6
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an
object in the EBL/VRM mode").
7
2 Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker. 8
The EBL/VRM marker is displayed.
9
3 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the starting position and click the mouse button.
A vertex is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the parameter
10
information is reflected on the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
11
dialog box").
12
13
14
Starting point 15
4 Click on the position of the reference point.
16
The EBL/VRM marker that determines the 2
nd
vertex is displayed. 17
18
19
20
21
22
5 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the 2
nd
vertex position and click the button.
A vertex is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property information 23
is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box").
24
25
2
nd
vertex
26
The EBL/VRM marker is reset to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. 27

14-47 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 6 rd
Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position of the 3 vertex and click the button.
A triangle is created by connecting the three vertices. The preview screen is displayed, enabling
the checking of the fill state of the polygon and Alerts area.

Preview of the area fill result is displayed.

7 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

8 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 1 to 7.

Note
If you create an area with a single stroke in counterclockwise direction, the area may not be
detected.
When creating an area with a single stroke, please make it in clockwise direction.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-48

 1
14.5.5 Creating circle, ellipse, and fan areas (Area 2
object) 3
Circle, ellipse, and fan areas can be created in the same way as for creating a circle, an ellipse, or an 4
arc of the Line object.
5
1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.
An icon list is opened. 6
2 Select an icon of circle, ellipse, or arc. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type") 7
3 Click on the position to be the center with the cursor. 8
A center is created and the vertex property information is displayed on the object property
dialog box. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-49 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 4 Draw a circle, an ellipse, and an arc.

Display of
radius

Display of
radius

Display of
radius

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-50

 1
At creation of an arc, the starting angle and the ending angle of the arc to be created are the
previous values or the initial values (starting angle: 0°, ending angle: 90°). To change the 2
starting angle and the ending angle, change the values in [Start Angle] and [End Angle] on the
object property dialog box. 3
4
5
6
Click the center 7
position
8
After determination, the arc is selected and the cursor
moves to the center setting mode for the next arc. 9
10
5 Determine the object by clicking the button again. 11
6 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box. 12
7 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 3 to 6. 13
14.5.5.1 Creating an object by specifying the center position and
14
the object size 15
1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
16
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying
latitude and longitude"). 17
2 Enter the coordinates of the center of the circle, ellipse, or arc and click on the [Enter] 18
button on the [Enter Position] dialog box.
A center point is created on the position of the specified coordinates and the property 19
information is reflected in the object property dialog box (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog
box").
20
3 Set the following parameters on the object property dialog box. 21
- Circle: Enter a value of [Radius].
22
- Ellipse: Enter values of [Horizontal] and [Vertical].
- Arc: Enter values of [Radius], [Start Angle], and [End Angle]. 23
4 To create an object on another position continuously as required, repeat Steps 2 and 24
3.
25
26
27

14-51 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.5.6 Creating a text (Text object)
Any character information can be displayed on the user map.

1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

An icon list is opened.
Select a text (Txt) icon. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type").

2 With the cursor, click on the position on which an object is to be created.

A text box is created at the position on which the button was clicked and a text is displayed.

The parameters of the text that was created are displayed on the object property dialog box.

Select a character color from the list.

Select a character size from the list.

Enter the coordinates of the text display position.

Enter the angle from the 12 O'clock bearing when angling the text.

Enter a text (up to 64 characters).

To use a template, select a template from the list by clicking the
button.

3 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

For the text input method, refer to "14.5.6.3 Editing a text", for the template usage method, refer
to "14.5.6.4 Editing a template", and for the text angling method, refer to "14.5.6.5 Changing a
text angle".

4 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 and 3.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-52

 1
14.5.6.1 Creating a text by specifying the latitude and longitude
2
1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying 3
latitude and longitude").
4
2 Enter the latitude and longitude of the object to be created and click on the [Enter]
button. 5
An object is created on the specified latitude and longitude and the property information is
reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box").
6
3 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
7
For the text input method, refer to "14.5.6.3 Editing a text", for the template usage method, refer 8
to "14.5.6.4 Editing a template", and for the text angling method, refer to "14.5.6.5 Changing a
text angle". 9
4 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat steps 2 and 3. 10
11
14.5.6.2 Creating a text with EBL/VRM operation
1 Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.
12
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an 13
object in the EBL/VRM mode").
14
2 Click on the position of the reference point position of the EBL/VRM marker.
The EBL/VRM marker is displayed. 15
3 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position on which an object is to be created and 16
click the button.
An object is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property 17
information is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
dialog box").
18
4 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
19
For the text input method, refer to "14.5.6.3 Editing a text", for the template usage method, refer
20
to "14.5.6.4 Editing a template", and for the text angling method, refer to "14.5.6.5 Changing a
text angle". 21
22
5 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 4.
23
24
25
26
27

14-53 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.5.6.3 Editing a text
1 Click on the [Text] input box
A character input full keyboard is displayed.

2 Create a text.
For the method of using the character input full keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Name and function of
each section of the keyboard".

3 Close the character input full keyboard by clicking on the [Enter] key.

4 To change a character color, select a required character color from the [Color] combo
box.

5 To change a character size, select a required character size from the [Font size]
combo box.

14.5.6.4 Editing a template

By registering a frequently used text as a template, the template can be used at text creation.

1 Click on the [Edit Template] button.

The [Template] dialog box appears.

Text input area

[Register] button

Template List

[Delete] button

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-54

 1
2 Click on a text input area. 2
A character input full keyboard is displayed.
3
4
5
6
7
3 Create a text. 8
For the method of using the character input full keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Name and function of
each section of the keyboard".
9
4 Close the character input full keyboard by clicking on the [Enter] key. 10
5 Click on the [Register] button. 11
6 Close the [Template] dialog and click on [] on the right side of the text input area of 12
the object properties dialog.
[Template List] is displayed. 13
7 Select any template. 14
8 To delete unnecessary templates, select unnecessary templates in the [Template List] 15
and click on the [Delete] button.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-55 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.5.6.5 Changing a text angle
Under the factory setting, a text is oriented horizontally. The text can be angled or inverted according to
the text creation position.

1 Click on the [Angle] input box.

A numeric value input keyboard is displayed.

2 Enter an angle.
Specify an angle in clockwise based on the direction of the 12 O'clock as 0°. Under the factory
setting, the angle is set to 90° (horizontal).
For the method of using the numeric value input keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Name and function
of each section of the keyboard".

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-56

 1
14.5.7 Creating an arrow (Line object)
2
An arrow can be displayed on the user map or chart.
3
1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.
An icon list is displayed. 4
2 Select the arrow icon. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type") 5
3 Click on the starting position with the cursor. 6
A starting point is created and the property information of the starting point is displayed on the
object property dialog box. 7
Mark 8
9
10
11
Starting
point
12
13
14
Latitude and longitude of starting point
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Note 23
The color, line type, and line width of a starting point cannot be changed.
24
25
26
27

14-57 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 4 Click on the position of the ending point with the cursor.
An ending point is created and the property information of the ending point is displayed on the
object property dialog box.

Mark

Ending
point

Latitude and longitude

of ending point

5 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

6 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps to 3 to 5.

14.5.7.1 Creating an object by specifying the starting point/ending

point position coordinates
1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying
latitude and longitude").

2 Enter the coordinates of the starting point and click on the [Enter] button.
A starting point of the arrow is created on the position of the specified coordinates and the
property information is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object
property dialog box").

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-58

 1
3 Enter the coordinates of the ending point and click on the [Enter] button. 2
An ending point of the arrow is created on the position of the specified coordinates and the
property information is reflected in the object property dialog box. 3
4 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 1 to 3. 4
5
14.5.7.2 Drawing an object with EBL/VRM operation 6
1 Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an
7
object in the EBL/VRM mode"). 8
2 Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker.
9
The EBL/VRM marker is displayed.

3 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position of the starting point and click the button.
10
4 Click on the reference position of the EBL/VRM marker.
11
A starting point is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property 12
information is displayed on the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
dialog box"). 13
14
15
16
Starting point
17
5 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position of the ending point and click the button. 18
An ending point is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property
information is displayed on the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property 19
dialog box").
20
Click
Ending point
21
22
23
24
6 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 5.
25
26
27

14-59 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.5.8 Creating Mariner's Mark/Line drawing objects
(ECDIS screen only)
At user map creation, the following Mariner's Mark/Line drawing objects can be created.
• Information Mark
• Clearing Line
• Tidal Stream mark
• Highlight mark

1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

An icon list is displayed.

2 Click on the [Mariner's Mark/Line] button on the icon list.

Mariner's Mark/Line drawing objects are displayed on the icon list.

3 Select an object to be created and specify a creation position.

14.5.8.1 Information mark

An information mark can be created on any position of the chart. An information mark is used for
comments and so on.

i
Information
Mark

1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

An icon list is opened.
Select the icon of information mark. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type").

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-60

 1
2 Click on the position on which the information mark is to be created with the cursor.
2
3
The information mark is displayed on the position on which the button was clicked and the 4
parameters of the information mark are displayed on the object property dialog box.
5
i
6
Latitude and longitude of the
7
information mark creation position
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
16
4 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 and 3.
17
Creating an object by specifying the latitude and longitude 18
1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar. 19
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying
latitude and longitude"). 20
2 Enter the latitude and longitude of the position on which an object is to be created and 21
click on the [Enter] button.
An object is created on the position of the specified latitude and longitude and the property 22
information is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
23
dialog box").

3 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

24
4 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 and 3. 25
26
27

14-61 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation

1 Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.

The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an
object in the EBL/VRM mode").

2 Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker.

The EBL/VRM marker is displayed.

3 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position on which an object is to be created and
click the button.
An object is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property
information reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog
box").

4 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

5 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 4.

14.5.8.2 Clearing line

A clearing line can be created on a chart. It is possible to select an angle and either Not Less Than
(NLT) or Not More Than (NMT) for a clearing line on the object property dialog box.

Angle of the clearing line (either NLT or NMT can be selected)

Clearing line

1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

Open the icon list and select an icon of clearing line. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object
type").

2 Click on the position of a starting point with the cursor.

A starting point is created and the property information of the clearing line is displayed on the
object property dialog box.

Mark

Starting
point

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-62

 1
3 Click on the position of the ending point with the cursor. 2
An ending point is created and the property information in the object property dialog box is
updated. 3
Mark 4
5
6
7
Ending
8
point
9
10
Latitude and longitude of the starting point
11
12
Select Not Less Than (NLT)/Not More Than
(NMT). 13
Specify the length of the clearing line. 14
15
16
17
18
4 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
19
• Specifying an angle of a clearing line: Display a numeric value input keyboard by clicking 20
on the [Bearing] input box and enter an angle (0 to 359°).
• Specifying a length of a clearing line: Display a numeric value input keyboard by clicking 21
on the [Display length] input box and enter a length (0 to 999.99).
• Selecting Not Less Than (NLT)/Not More Than (NMT): Set Not Less Than (NLT) or Not
22
More Than (NMT) to On by clicking on the button. 23
When Not Less Than (NLT) is selected, "NLTxx" is displayed for the clearing line, indicating
that the line must not be below "xx". When Not More Than (NMT) is selected, "NMT xx" is 24
displayed for the clearing line, indicating that the line must not exceed "xx".
For the method of using the numeric value input keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Name and function
25
of each section of the keyboard". 26
5 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 4.
27

14-63 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

Creating position coordinates of the starting point

1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.

The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying
latitude and longitude").

2 Enter the coordinates of a starting point and click on the [Enter] button.

3 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 1 and 2.

Drawing an object with EBL/VRM operation

1 Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.

The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an
object in the EBL/VRM mode").

2 Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker.

The EBL/VRM marker is displayed.

3 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the starting point position and click the button.
A starting point is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property
information is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
dialog box").

Starting point

4 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the ending point position and click the button.
An ending point is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property
information is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
dialog box").

Click
Ending point

5 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 4.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-64

 1
14.5.8.3 Tidal Stream mark
A current drift and a bearing can be input for a tidal stream mark. Edit the current drift (Drift) and the
2
bearing (Set) after creating a tidal stream mark on the object property dialog box. 3
Actual Predicted
4
5
6
7
1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.
8
An icon list is opened.
Select the icon of a tidal stream mark. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type"). 9
2 Click on the position on which a tidal drift mark is to be created with the cursor. 10
11
12
A tidal stream mark is displayed on the position on which the button was clicked and the
parameters of the tidal channel mark that was created are displayed on the object property 13
dialog box.
14
15
16
Latitude and longitude of the starting point
17
Select Actual/Predicted.
Specify a bearing.
18
Specify a current drift.
19
Specify date/time. 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-65 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 3 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
• Specifying a bearing: Display a numeric value input keyboard by clicking on the [Set] input
box and enter a bearing (0 to 359°).
• Specifying a current drift: Display a numeric value input keyboard by clicking on the [Drift]
input box and enter a current drift (0 to 99.9).
• Selecting Actual/Predicted: Select the check box of either Actual or Predicted.
When Actual is selected, a tidal stream mark of a solid line is displayed. When Predicted is
selected, a tidal mark of a broken line is displayed.
• Specifying date/time: Display a calendar + time picker by clicking on the calendar button
and enter a date and a time in the [Time(UTC)] input box.
For the method of using a numeric value input keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Name and function of
each section of the keyboard" and for the method of using a calendar + time picker, refer to
"3.17 Setting a Date and a Time [Calendar Operation)".

4 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 and 3.

Moving a tidal stream mark

1 Click the right mouse button on the tidal stream mark that is set.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Move this object].

3 Click on the required destination position.

Creating an object by specifying the latitude and longitude

1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.

The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying
latitude and longitude").

2 Enter the latitude and longitude of the position on which an object is to be created and
click on the [Enter] button.
An object is created on the position of the specified latitude and longitude and the property
information is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
dialog box").

3 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

4 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 and 3.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-66

Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation 1
1 Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar. 2
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an
object in the EBL/VRM mode").
3
2 Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker.
4
The EBL/VRM marker is displayed.
5
3 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position on which an object is to be created and
click the button.
6
An object is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property 7
information reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog
box"). 8
4 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box. 9
5 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 4. 10
11
14.5.8.4 Highlighted display
Highlighted display can be set by creating an area of a polygon on a chart. Use highlighted display for
12
attaching a comment on the chart or so on. 13
14
15
16
17
Highlighted 18
display
19
1 Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.
20
An icon list is opened.
Select an icon of highlighted display. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type"). 21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-67 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 2 Click on the position of a starting point with the cursor.
A starting point is created and the property information of vertex 1 is displayed on the object
property dialog box.

The latitude and longitude of the starting point (vertex

1) is displayed.

3 Move the cursor to the next vertex.

The latitude and longitude of the cursor are displayed near the cursor.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-68

 1
4 Click on the position on which the 2
nd
vertex is to be created. 2
nd
A vertex is created and the latitude and longitude of the 2 vertex are displayed on the object
property dialog box. 3
Mark 4
5
6
7
Resetting the Add the 2
nd
vertex The number of 8
selection of the vertices
starting point
becomes 2. 9
The coordinates
nd
of the 2 vertex 10
are entered.
11
12
13
14
15
16
5 rd
Click on the position on which the 3 vertex is to be created.
A triangle is created by connecting three vertices. The preview screen is displayed, enabling to
17
check the object fill status. 18
19
20
The preview of the result of filling the object is displayed.
21
rd
The latitude and longitude of the 3 vertex are displayed on the object property dialog box.
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-69 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 The number of
vertices becomes 3.

The coordinates of
rd
the 3 vertex are
entered.

6 To add another vertex continuously, click on the position on which the vertex is to be
created.

th
When the 4 vertex is determined, the preview display is
updated.

When not adding another vertex, determine the object by double-clicking or clicking the right
button on the object.

7 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

8 To create an object on another position continuously, click on the [New] button in the
[Enter Position] dialog and repeat Steps from 2 to 7.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-70

 1
Creating a vertex by entering the position
2
1 Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears. 3
2 Enter the values of latitude and longitude of the vertex of the object in the [Position] 4
box and click on the [Enter] button.
The position of one vertex of the object is determined. 5
The [Bearing] box and the [Distance] box are enabled.
6
3 Enter the values of latitude and longitude of the next vertex of the object in the
[Position] box. Alternatively, enter the bearing from the vertex that was determined
7
immediately previously in the [Bearing] box and the [Distance] input box.
8
4 Click on the [Enter] button.
9
5 Determine the positions of 3 or more vertices by repeating Steps 2 to 4.
10
6 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
11
7 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 6.
12
Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation 13
1 Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.
14
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an
object in the EBL/VRM mode"). 15
2 Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker. 16
The EBL/VRM marker is displayed.
17
3 Placing the EBL/VRM marker on the position of the starting point and click the button.
A vertex is created on the position on which the button was clicked, and the property 18
information is displayed on the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
dialog box"). 19
20
21
22
Starting point
23
24
25
26
27

14-71 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 4 Click on the reference point.
nd
The EBL/VRM marker is displayed to determine the 2 vertex.

5 Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position of the 2

nd
vertex and click the button.
A vertex is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property information
is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box".)

nd
2 vertex

The EBL/VRM marker is reset to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor.

6 rd
Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position of the 3 vertex and click the button.
A triangle is created by connecting the three vertices. A preview screen is displayed, enabling
the checking of the fill status of the polygon and Alerts area.

The preview of the result of filling the area is displayed.

7 Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

8 To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 1 to 7.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-72

 1
14.6 Collective Deletion of Objects [Delete 2
by Type/Color] 3
Objects of the same shape and color can be deleted collectively by "Delete by Type/Color".
4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 5
The menu is displayed.
6
2 Click on the [User Map] button on the menu.

3 Click on the [Delete by Type/Color] on the submenu.

7
The [Delete by Type/Color] dialog box appears. 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
[Delete by Type/Color] dialog box
15
4 Elect the common parameters for the objects to be deleted from the lists of the [Type]
combo box and the [Color] box. 16
When [All] is selected, all the objects are deleted.
17
5 Click the [OK] button.
18
Note
• If the color that is specified in the [Color] box matches any of the point color, line color and area
19
color of the object, the object is targeted for deletion. 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-73 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.7 Managing/Editing Objects [Mark
Line/List]
User maps and Mariner’s Mark/Line objects can be managed/edited through [Mark/Line List].

14.7.1 Displaying the [Mark/Line List] dialog box

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [User Map] button on the menu.

3 Click on the [Mark/Line List] on the submenu.

The [Mark/Line List] dialog box appears.

Category button Tab display Operation button Object list Page switching section
section

[Mark/Line List] dialog box (Display example of [User Map] tab)

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-74

 1
14.7.2 Displaying a user map list
2
The [User Map] tab displays a list of the user maps that are currently displayed.
The display of each category can be switched by clicking on the [Symbol] button/[Line] button/[Area]
3
button/[Text] button.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
[User Map] tab (example at selection of [Symbol])
13
The tabs in the [Mark/Line List] dialog box consist of the following.
• [User Map] tab
14
- Symbol 15
- Line
- Area 16
- Text
• [Mariner's Mark/Line] tab (only the ECDIS screen and at creation of user map only)
17
- Event Mark
18
- Information Mark
- Tidal Stream 19
- Highlight (highlighted display)
- Clearing Line
20
(Refer to "14.7.3
21
Displaying a Mariner's Mark/Line List (ECDIS screen only)"). 22
• [Manual Update] tab (ECDIS screen only)
- Symbol 23
- Line
24
- Area
- Text 25
26
14.7.2.1 Displaying an object on a chart
27
Click on the [Jump] button on the row of the object to be displayed on the chart.

14-75 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.7.2.2 Deleting an object
Select the row of the object to be deleted and click on the [Delete] button.

Note
As soon as the [Delete] button is clicked on, the object is deleted. Re-check whether the object can
be deleted before clicking on the [Delete] button.

14.7.3 Displaying a Mariner's Mark/Line List (ECDIS

screen only)
A Mariner's Mark/Line can be displayed by using the [Mariner's Mark/Line] tab.
Display of each category can be switched by clicking on the [Event Mark] button/[Information
Mark]button/[Tidal Stream] button/[Highlight] button/[Clearing Line] button.

[Mariner's Mark/Line] tab (example at selection of [Information Mark]

14.7.3.1 Displaying an object on a chart

Click on the [Jump] button on the row of the object to be displayed on the chart.

14.7.3.2 Deleting an object

Select a line of the object to be deleted and click on the [Delete] button.

Note
As soon as the [Delete] button is clicked on, the object is deleted. Re-check whether the object can
be deleted before clicking on the [Delete] button.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-76

 1
14.7.3.3 Deleting objects collectively from an object list
2
1 Click on the [All Delete] button.
A message dialog box for confirming deletion appears. 3
4
5
6
2 To execute deletion, click on the [OK] button. To cancel deletion, click on the [X]
7
button. 8
9
14.7.4 Displaying a manual update list (ECDIS 10
screen only)
11
This screen displays ARCS/C-MAP only.
12
A manual update list can be displayed by using the [Manual Update] tab.
13
Display of each category can be switched by clicking on the [Symbol] button/[Line] button/[Area]
button/[Text] button. 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
[Manual Update] tab (Selecting [Symbol] example)
23
24
25
26
27

14-77 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.7.4.1 Displaying an object on a chart
1 Click on the [Jump] button on the row of the object to be displayed on the chart.

14.7.4.2 Hiding an object

1 Select a line of the object to be hidden and click on the [Hide] button.
The [Status] of the object to be hidden changes from [Normal] to [Hidden].

When the chart that uses the object that is set to Hide is updated, the expiration date (90 days after the
date when the object is created) of the object is displayed as [Expiration Date].
When the expiration date is reached, the object is deleted.

14.7.4.3 Redisplaying an object

Select a line of the object that has been set to Hide and click on the [Restore] button.
The [Status] of the object that is re-displayed changes from [Hidden] to [Normal].
The date of [Expiration Date] of the object is deleted.

14.7.4.4 Specifying a chart type

Only the list of manual update relating to the charts of the specified type is displayed.

1 Select a chart type in the [Chart Type] combo box.

Select*1 one of [C-MAP3] and [ARCS].

*1 Only the types of the selectable charts as Chart Type can be selected in the [View-Options]
dialog box that is displayed by selecting [View]-[Options]-[Chart View] in the menu.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-78

 1
14.8 Updating a Chart Manually 2
(S-57/S-63/C-MAP) 3
Use the following procedure to update a chart.
4
Display the [Chart] - [Manual Update] menu.
1 Reference: "14.8.1 Displaying the Manual Update submenu"
5
6
7
Select a chart to be updated.
2 Reference: "14.8.2 Selecting a chart to be updated" 8
9
Update the chart manually by using the map creation tools.
10
3 Reference: "14.8.3 Updating a chart manually" 11
"14.9 How to Use the Map Creation Tools "
12
13
14
Create an object. Select display/hide for the object.
Reference: "14.10 Creating an Object
Reference: "14.3.5 Displaying the
object/redisplaying the hidden object"
15
（S-57/S-63/C-MAP）"
16
Move an object.
17
Reference: "14.2.10 Moving an object"
18
19
End manual updating or start route planning.
20
4 Reference: "Section 9 Route Planning"
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-79 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.8.1 Displaying the Manual Update submenu
By selecting [Menu] - [Chart] - [Manual Update], the selected chart can be updated manually.

Restrictions
Multi-screen display is disabled at manual update of a chart. Even if multi-screen display is attempted
prior to the commencement of manual update, the mode is switched to Single View if manual update is
commenced.

Note:
(1) In edit mode, the duration-dependent attribute is disabled temporarily. The objects that are hidden
at the current time may be displayed.
(2) Up to 100 objects can be edited from the start of editing to the saving of the editing by pressing the
Save button.
(3) Charts to be edited can be saved 50 times until they are updated.
(4) When a chart to be edited is updated, all the manual updates up to then are hidden. The review is
also disabled. The editing history can be checked by Update log of each chart.

Note:
(1) While the manual update tool bar is active, the Chart Symbol setting is switched from “Simplified”
to “Paper Chart” forcibly. When “Simplified” is selected before the Manual Update tool bar is
displayed, the setting is reset to the original state after termination of the tool bar.
(2) When the cursor is in AUTO mode, a manual update object can be edited only when the manual
update tool bar is displayed and when the Manual Update tool bar is hidden, only the property
screen display can be executed.

1. Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2. Click on the [Chart] button on the menu.

3. Click on the [Manual Update] button on the submenu.

The "Manual Update" toolbar is displayed.

Comment
Review Load

"Manual Update" toolbar

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-80

The following operations are available while the Manual Update tool bar is displayed. 1
Editing item Operation
2
Manual update editing Addition/editing of a manual update object 3
ENC object editing Editing of the object on the chart
Attribute editing Editing attributes 4
Remove function Hiding an object (explicit save operation is necessary)
Delete function Attaching a deletion symbol (explicit save operation is
5
necessary)
6
Review function Update history review function
Editing on the property Editing on the property screen 7
screen
8
Note: 9
For C-MAP, the Manual Update object is displayed only when only one check is ON in C-MAP 10
Ed 3 Database of [View-Option] - [Chart Common]. 11
Otherwise, the Manual Update object is not displayed. 12
13
When multiple checks are ON for C-MAP Ed3 Database in [View-Option] - [Chart Common], clicking
14
[Menu] - [Chart] - [Manual Update] opens the popup shown below and [Chart Common] dialog.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-81 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.8.2 Selecting a chart to be updated
1. Click on the [Select Chart] button on the Manual Update toolbar.
The [Select Chart] dialog box appears.

Search box

Chart list

[Reset Picked Chart] button

[OK] button
[Preview] check box (ARCS only)

[Select Chart] dialog box

2. Select a chart file to be updated manually on the [Select Chart] dialog box.

3. Click on the [OK] button in the [Select Chart] dialog box.

A chart is selected.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-82

 1
14.8.2.1 Displaying a chart list for the C-MAP chart
When a C-MAP chart is to be updated manually, the following charts are displayed in the chart list.
2
Only the databases of C-MAP Ed.3 Database that are selected in the [View-Options] dialog that is
3
displayed by selecting [View]-[Options]-[Chart Common] in the menu are displayed in the list.
When no database is selected in the [View-Options] dialog that is displayed by selecting 4
[View]-[Options]-[Chart Common] in the menu and a search condition is specified, all the C-MAP charts
are displayed in the list. 5
When a chart is clicked on, only the chart that is displayed in View is displayed in the list.
6
7
14.8.2.2 Searching the position that is clicked on with the cursor
8
1. Move the cursor to the position where manual update is to be performed and click the
button. 9
The chart that is drawn at the position that is selected by clicking is displayed in the chart list.
10
Memo 11
To clear the search result, click on the [Reset picked chart] (chart selection reset) button on the
[Select Chart] dialog box. For C-MAP, all the charts in the database are displayed in the chart list. 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-83 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.8.2.3 Searching a chart with the chart name
1. Enter a chart name in the search box on the [Select Chart] dialog box.
The applicable chart is displayed.

Memo
To clear the search result, clear the input in the search box.

14.8.2.4 Absence/expiration of the C-MAP chart license

When C-MAP is targeted for manual update and the C-MAP that is selected from the chart list does not
have any license or the license has expired, the chart is not selected and the following dialog is
displayed.

[] (Close) button

[OK] button

Close the dialog by clicking on the [OK] button or the [] button and select another chart.

14.8.3 Updating a chart manually

1. Create/edit an object on the chart by using map creation tools.

(Refer to 14.9 How Use a Map Creation Tool (at Manual Update).)

2. Delete an object or change the properties as required.

(Refer to 14.10 Creating an Object.)

3. Click the [Save] button.

The manually updated object is saved in the chart.

14.8.4 Displaying selected chart only

1. Select a chart to be displayed according the procedure that is described in “12.8.2
Selecting a chart to be updated”.

2. Set the [FIX] (fixing the chart) on the Manual Update tool bar to ON.

ON OFF

Memo
For the C-MAP chart or the ARCS chart, the [FIX] button cannot be set to ON.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-84

 1
14.8.5 Entering an editor of the manual update 2
Memo
3
The editor of the manual update can be recorded. 4
When the entry is saved, the text that has been entered in the Comment column is recorded in the
editing history.
5
6
7
8
9
10
Save the contents and display
the editing history by clicking
11
on the Load button. 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-85 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.9 How to Use the Map Creation Tools
（at Manual Update of
S-57/S-63/C-MAP）
At chart manual update also, use the same map creation tools in the same way as that of user map
creation. (Refer to "14.2 Using Map Creation Tools (User Map Creation/Editing)".) However, there
are the following differences in the map creation tools
• The user map information bar is not displayed.
• The object that is saved cannot be deleted by the eraser tool (can be hidden).
• A Mariner's Mark/Line drawing object cannot be selected with the drawing tool.
• More icon types can be selected in the drawing tool.

When the chart is updated manually, "Update" is displayed on the Write tool button.

Note
At chart manual update, the bearing reference mode is fixed to [N UP] mode.

14.9.1 Deleting or hiding an object

1. Click on the eraser tool button.
The cursor changes to the eraser cursor.

2. Place the eraser cursor on the object and click the button.

At manual update, only pre-saved objects can be deleted by the eraser tool.
If the saved object is clicked on with the eraser tool, the object is hidden. All the property screens of the
object that has been set to hide are displayed as disable and cannot be edited.
The object that is created and saved by manual update can be redisplayed unless deleted even if it is
hidden.
If the chart that uses the hidden object is updated, the expiration date of the object is set (90 days from
the date on which the object is c).
The object will be deleted after the expiration date.

For the details, refer to “14.10.12 Object Delete function” and “14.10.13 Object Remove function”.
Operations in eraser tool mode
Mode Target Contents
Manual Update tool Object that has been saved Remove the object
bar is displayed Object that has not been saved Cancel the object addition (erase).
Manual Update tool Object that has been saved No operation
bar is hidden

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-86

 1
Note
The object that has been removed or deleted is excluded from the warning detection target.
2
3
14.9.2 Selecting an object type 4
1. Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.
5
An icon list dialog is displayed.
6
2. Select an object type by clicking on the icon on the icon list.
At manual update, the following icon list is displayed.
7
8
9
Category display

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Icon list
17
Icon list at manual update
18
The [Mariner's Mark/Line] button is not displayed on the icon list at manual update. 19
For the details of icons that can be selected from the icon list, refer to "Appendix C.6 Icon Button List
for Manual Update (S-57)". 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-87 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.10 Creating an Object
（S-57/S-63/C-MAP）

This section describes the procedures for changing the parameters of the object after creating the
object on the user map or chart during manual update.

Note
After automatic sailing, the mark/line may be shifted depending on how the cursor is placed on the
target at the input.
To prevent the shift, place the cursor on the front edge of the target.

・ Input method that does not cause shift (place the cursor on the front edge of the target)

SHM

Target

Cursor

Own ship's
position

・ Input method that causes shift (place the cursor on the center of the target)

SHM

Target

Cursor

Own ship's
position

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-88

 1
Note
Unlike the property screen at user map editing, the manual upadate property screen does not have
2
the Comment and Display Scale input columns. 3
14.10.1 Creating a symbol object (Symbol) 4
A symbol or Alerts symbol can be created by specifying the creation position with the cursor.
5
1. Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar. 6
An icon list is opened.
Select a symbol or an icon of Alerts symbol. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type".)
7
2. Click on the position on which the symbol is to be created with the cursor.
8
9
10
The symbol is displayed on the position on which the button is clicked and the parameters of the 11
symbol that was created are displayed on the object property dialog box.
12
Mark
13
14
"Edit
15
Latitude and longitude of the
Attribute" 16
symbol creation position button
17
18
19
20
21
Non-ENC object ENC object
22
Note
For an ENC object, the screen can be switched to the attribute editing screen by using the [Edit
23
Attribute] button. 24
For the details, refer to “14.10.9 Editing attributes of an object”.
25
3. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box. 26
4. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 and 3. 27

14-89 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.10.1.1 Creating an object by specifying the latitude and longitude
1. Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying
latitude and longitude).

2. Enter the latitude and longitude of the position on which an object is to be created and
click on the [Enter] button.
An object is created on the specified latitude and longitude and the property information is
reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box".)

3. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

4. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 and 3.

14.10.1.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation

1. Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an
object in the EBL/VRM mode".)

2. Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker.

The EBL/VRM marker is displayed.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-90

 1
3. Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position on which the object is to be created and 2
click the button.
An object is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property 3
information is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
dialog box".)
4
4. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box. 5
5. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 4. 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-91 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.10.2 Creating a simple line and Alerts line (Line
object)
A simple line and Alerts line are created by using one vertex as an object. Alerts line is a line object
that is detected as the warning target (danger line) of own ship.

Note
The color of Alerts line cannot be changed.

1. Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

An icon list is opened.
Select an icon of a simple line or Alerts line. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type".)

2. Click on the starting point with the cursor.

A vertex is created and the property information of the vertex is displayed on the object property
dialog box.

"Edit Attribute" button

Note
For an ENC object, the screen can be switched to the attribute editing screen by using the [Edit
Attribute] button.
For the details, refer to “14.10.9 Editing attributes of an object”.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-92

 1
3. Move the cursor to the next vertex. 2
The latitude and longitude of the cursor are displayed near the cursor.
3
4
5
6
7
4. Click on the position on which the 2
nd
vertex is to be created. 8
nd
A vertex is created and the parameters of the 2 vertex are displayed on the object property
dialog box.
9
10
11
The property screen is updated
nd
after the 2 position is added.
12
13
[Type] becomes the

nd
medium point. 14
Releasing Addition of 2 point
the starting
point The number of 15
selection vertices becomes 2.
state
Editing of the line color
16
and width is enabled.
17
The coordinates of the
nd
2 point are entered. 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-93 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 5. Determine the line by double-click on the button or click the right button.

Mark Mark
Lat 35°00.000'N
Lon 140°00.000'E

Double-click
Determined with the line up to
the last vertex that was set

After determining of drawing,

the last vertex changes to the
end point.

6. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

7. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 6.

Memo
The property screen for the vertex that was created can be edited in AUTO mode.
For the details of AUTO mode, refer to "3.13 Cursor AUTO Mode".

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-94

 1
14.10.2.1 Creating a vertex by entering the position
2
1. Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears. 3
2. Enter the latitude and longitude of the vertex of the object in the [Position] box and 4
click on the [Enter] button.
The position of the vertex of the object is determined. 5
The [Bearing] box and the [Distance] box are enabled.
6
3. Enter the values of the latitude and the longitude of the next vertex in the [Position]
box. Alternatively, enter the bearing from the vertex that was determined immediately 7
previously in the [Bearing] box and the [Distance] input box.
8
4. Click on the [Enter] button.

5. Determine the positions of 3 or more vertices by repeating Steps 2 and 3.

9
6. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box. 10
7. To create an object in another position continuously, click on the [New] button of the 11
[Enter Position] dialog and repeat Steps from 2 to 6.
12
14.10.2.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation 13
1. Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar. 14
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an
object in the EBL/VRM mode".) 15
2. Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker. 16
The EBL/VRM marker is displayed.

3. Place the EBL/VRM marker on the starting point and click the button.
17
A vertex is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the information is 18
reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box".)
19
20
21
Starting point 22
4. Click on the position of the reference point.
23
The EBL/VRM marker that determines the 2
nd
point is displayed. 24
25
26
27

14-95 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 5. Place the EBL/VRM marker on the 2
nd
vertex and click the button.
A vertex is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the information is
reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box".)

nd
2 vertex

The EBL/VRM marker is reset to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor.

6. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

7. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 6.

14.10.3 Creating a circle, ellipse, and an arc (Line

object)
A circle, an ellipse, and arc can be drawn with the cursor by specifying the center.

1. Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

An icon list is opened.

2. Select an icon of a circle, an ellipse, or an arc.

(Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type".)

3. Click on the position for the center with the cursor.

The center is created and the property information on the vertex is displayed on the object
property dialog box.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-96

 1
4. Draw a circle, an ellipse, or an arc.
2
Display of
radius 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Display of 11
radius
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Display of
radius
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-97 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 At creation of an arc, the starting angle and the ending angle of the arc to be created are the
previous values or the initial values (starting angle: 0°, ending angle: 90°). To change the
starting angle and the ending angle, change the values in [Start Angle] and [End Angle] on the
object property dialog box.

Mark
Radius 10.0NM

Mark
Mark

Click on the position

for the center

After determination, the arc is selected and

the cursor moves to the center setting
mode of the next arc.

5. Determine the object by clicking the button again.

6. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

7. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 3 to 6.

14.10.3.1 Creating an object by specifying a position for the center

and size of the object
1. Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears. (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying
latitude and longitude".)

2. Enter the coordinate of the center of the circle, ellipse, or arc and click on the [Enter]
button of the [Enter Position] dialog box.
The center is created at the position of the specified coordinate and the property information is
reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box".)

3. Set the parameters in the object property dialog box as indicated below.
 Circle: Enter a value of [Radius].
 Ellipse: Enter values of [Horizontal] and [Vertical].
 Arc: Enter values of [Radius], [Start Angle], and [End Angle].

4. To create an object on another position continuously as required, repeat Steps 2 and

3.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-98

 1
14.10.4 Creating a polygon and Alerts area (Area 2
object)
3
Create a polygon using all the vertices (3 or more) as one object. Alerts area is an area object that is
detected as a warning target (danger area). 4
A polygon and Alerts area can be created in the same way as for simple line and Alerts line

1. Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

5
An icon list is opened.
Select an icon of a polygon or Alerts area. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type".)
6
2. Click on the starting point position with the cursor. 7
The starting point is created and the property information of vertex 1 is displayed on the object
property dialog box. 8
9
10
11
The latitude and
longitude of the 12
starting point
(vertex 1) are
displayed.
13
14
"Edit Attribute" button
15
16
17
18
19
Note
For an ENC object, the screen can be switched to the attribute editing screen by using the [Edit 20
Attribute] button.
For the details, refer to “ 14.10.9 Editing attributes of an object”.
21
22
3. Move the cursor to the next vertex.
23
The latitude and longitude of the cursor are displayed near the cursor.
24
25
26
27

14-99 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 4. Click on the position on which the 2
nd
vertex is to be created.
nd
A vertex is created and the latitude and the longitude of the 2 vertex are displayed on the
object property dialog box

Mark

nd Editing of the line

Resetting the Add the 2 point
color and width is
starting point
enabled.
selection state

The number of
vertices becomes 2.

The coordinates of the

nd
2 point are entered.

5. rd
Click on the position on which the 3 vertex is to be created.
A triangle is created by connecting the three vertices. A preview screen is displayed, enabling
the checking of the fill statuses of the polygon and Alerts area.

The preview of the result of filling the area is displayed.

rd
The latitude and longitude of the 3 vertex are displayed on the object property dialog box.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-100

 1
2
3
4
The editing of the line color, line width, fill color, and
transparency is enabled. 5
The number of vertices becomes 3. 6
7
rd
The coordinates of the 3 vertex are entered. 8
9
10
11
12
6. To add another vertex continuously, click on the position on which the vertex is to be
created. 13
14
15
th
When the 4 vertex is determined, the preview display is
updated. 16
When not adding any further vertices, determine the polygon or Alerts area by double-clicking 17
the button or clicking the right button.
18
7. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
19
8. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 7.
20
14.10.4.1 Creating a vertex by entering the position 21
1. Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar. 22
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears.
23
2. Enter the latitude and longitude of the vertex of the object in the [Position] box and
click on the [Enter] button. 24
The position of one vertex of the object is determined.
25
The [Bearing] box and the [Distance] box are enabled.

3. Enter the values of the latitude and the longitude of the next vertex in the [Position] 26
box. Alternatively, enter the bearing from the vertex that was determined immediately
27
previously in the [Bearing] box and the [Distance] input box.

14-101 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 4. Click on the [Enter] button.

5. Determine 3 or more vertices by repeating Steps 2 to 4.

6. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

7. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 6.

14.10.4.2 Creating an object with EBL/VRM operation

1. Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an
object in the EBL/VRM mode".)

2. Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker.

The EBL/VRM marker is displayed.

3. Place the EBL/VRM marker on the starting position and click the mouse button.
A vertex is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the parameter
information is reflected on the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
dialog box".)

Starting point

4. Click on the position of the reference point.

nd
The EBL/VRM marker that determines the 2 vertex is displayed.

5. Place the EBL/VRM marker on the 2

nd
vertex position and click the button.
A vertex is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property information
is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box".)

nd
2 vertex

The EBL/VRM marker is reset to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-102

 1
6. rd
Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position of the 3 vertex and click the button.
2
A triangle is created by connecting the three vertices. The preview screen is displayed, enabling
the checking of the fill state of the polygon and Alerts area. 3
4
5
Preview of the area fill result is displayed.
6
7. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box. 7
8. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 1 to 7. 8
9
14.10.5 Creating circle, ellipse, and fan areas (Area 10
object) 11
Circle, ellipse, and fan areas can be created in the same way as for creating a circle, an ellipse, or an
12
arc of the Line object.

1. Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

13
An icon list is opened. 14
2. Select an icon of circle, ellipse, or arc. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type".)
15
3. Click on the position to be the center with the cursor.
A center is created and the vertex property information is displayed on the object property
16
dialog box. 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-103 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 4. Draw a circle, an ellipse, and an arc.
Display of
radius

Display of
radius

Display of
radius

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-104

 1
At creation of an arc, the starting angle and the ending angle of the arc to be created are the
previous values or the initial values (starting angle: 0°, ending angle: 90°). To change the 2
starting angle and the ending angle, change the values in [Start Angle] and [End Angle] on the
object property dialog box. 3
Mark 4
Mark
Radius 10.0NM
5
Mark
6
Click the center 7
position
8
After determination, the arc is selected and the cursor 9
moves to the center setting mode for the next arc.
10
5. Determine the object by clicking the button again.
11
6. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
12
7. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 3 to 6.
13
14.10.5.1 Creating an object by specifying the center position and 14
the object size
15
1. Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying 16
latitude and longitude".)
17
2. Enter the coordinates of the center of the circle, ellipse, or arc and click on the [Enter]
button on the [Enter Position] dialog box. 18
A center point is created on the position of the specified coordinates and the property
information is reflected in the object property dialog box (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
19
dialog box".) 20
3. Set the following parameters on the object property dialog box. 21
• Circle: Enter a value of [Radius].
• Ellipse: Enter values of [Horizontal] and [Vertical]. 22
• Arc: Enter values of [Radius], [Start Angle], and [End Angle].
23
4. To create an object on another position continuously as required, repeat Steps 2 and
3. 24
25
26
27

14-105 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.10.6 Creating a text (Text object)
Any character information can be displayed on the user map.

1. Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.

An icon list is opened.
Select a text (Txt) icon. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type".)

2. With the cursor, click on the position on which an object is to be created.

Mark

A text box is created at the position on which the button was clicked and a text is displayed.

The parameters of the text that was created are displayed on the object property dialog box.

Select a character color from the list.

Select a character size from the list.

Enter the coordinates of the text display position.

Enter the angle from the 12 O'clock bearing when angling the
text.

Enter a text (up to 64 characters).

To use a template, select a template from the list by clicking the
button.

3. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

For the text input method, refer to "14.10.6.3 Editing a text", for the template usage method,
refer to "14.10.6.4 Editing a template", and for the text angling method, refer to "14.10.6.5
Changing a text angle".

4. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 and 3.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-106

 1
14.10.6.1 Creating a text by specifying the latitude and longitude
2
1. Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying 3
latitude and longitude".)
4
2. Enter the latitude and longitude of the object to be created and click on the [Enter]
button. 5
An object is created on the specified latitude and longitude and the property information is
6
reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property dialog box".)

3. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

7
For the text input method, refer to "14.5.6.3 Editing a text", for the template usage method, refer 8
to "14.5.6.4 Editing a template", and for the text angling method, refer to "14.5.6.5 Changing a
text angle". 9
4. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat steps 2 and 3. 10
11
14.10.6.2 Creating a text with EBL/VRM operation
1. Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.
12
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an 13
object in the EBL/VRM mode".)
14
2. Click on the position of the reference point position of the EBL/VRM marker.
The EBL/VRM marker is displayed. 15
3. Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position on which an object is to be created and 16
click the button.
An object is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property 17
information is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
dialog box".)
18
4. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.
19
For the text input method, refer to "14.10.6.3 Editing a text", for the template usage method,
20
refer to "14.10.6.4 Editing a template", and for the text angling method, refer to "14.10.6.5
Changing a text angle". 21
5. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 4. 22
23
24
25
26
27

14-107 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.10.6.3 Editing a text
1. Click on the [Text] input box
A character input full keyboard is displayed.

2. Create a text.
For the method of using the character input full keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Name and function of
each section of the keyboard".

3. Close the character input full keyboard by clicking on the [Enter] key.

4. To change a character color, select a required character color from the [Color] combo
box.

5. To change a character size, select a required character size from the [Font size]
combo box.

14.10.6.4 Editing a template

By registering a frequently used text as a template, the template can be used at text creation.

1. Click on the [Edit Template] button.

The [Template] dialog box appears.

Text input area

[Register] button

Template List

[Delete] button

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-108

 1
2. Click on a text input area.
A character input full keyboard is displayed. 2
3
4
5
6
7
3. Create a text.
For the method of using the character input full keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Name and function of
8
each section of the keyboard". 9
4. Close the character input full keyboard by clicking on the [Enter] key.
10
5. Click on the [Register] button.
11
6. Close the [Template] dialog and click on [] on the right side of the text input area of
the object properties dialog.
12
[Template List] is displayed.
13
7. Select any template.
14
8. To delete unnecessary templates, select the unnecessary templates in the [Template
List] and click on the [Delete] button.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-109 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.10.6.5 Changing a text angle
Under the factory setting, a text is oriented horizontally. The text can be angled or inverted according to
the text creation position.

1. Click on the [Angle] input box.

A numeric value input keyboard is displayed.

2. Enter an angle.
Specify an angle in clockwise based on the direction of the 12 O'clock as 0°. Under the factory
setting, the angle is set to 90° (horizontal).
For the method of using the numeric value input keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Name and function
of each section of the keyboard".

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-110

 1
14.10.7 Creating an arrow (Line object)
2
An arrow can be displayed on the user map or chart.
3
1. Click on the [Type] button on the drawing toolbar.
An icon list is displayed. 4
2. Select the arrow icon. (Refer to "14.2.3 Selecting an object type".) 5
3. Click on the starting position with the cursor. 6
A starting point is created and the property information of the starting point is displayed on the
object property dialog box. 7
Mark 8
9
10
Starting point
11
12
13
14
15
Latitude and longitude of starting point
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Note 23
The color, line type, and line width of a starting point cannot be changed.
24
25
26
27

14-111 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 4. Click on the position of the ending point with the cursor.
An ending point is created and the property information of the ending point is displayed on the
object property dialog box.

Mark

Ending
point

Latitude and longitude

of ending point

5. Adjust the parameters on the object property dialog box.

6. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps to 3 to 5.

14.10.7.1 Creating an object by specifying the starting point/ending

point position coordinates
1. Click on the [Enter POSN] button on the drawing toolbar.
The [Enter Position] dialog box appears (Refer to "14.2.6 Creating an object by specifying
latitude and longitude".)

2. Enter the coordinates of the starting point and click on the [Enter] button.
A starting point of the arrow is created on the position of the specified coordinates and the
property information is reflected in the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object
property dialog box".)

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-112

 1
3. Enter the coordinates of the ending point and click on the [Enter] button. 2
An ending point of the arrow is created on the position of the specified coordinates and the
property information is reflected in the object property dialog box. 3
4. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 1 to 3. 4
5
14.10.7.2 Drawing an object with EBL/VRM operation 6
1. Click on the [EBL/VRM] button on the drawing toolbar.
The cursor changes to the EBL/VRM reference point cursor. (Refer to "14.2.5 Creating an
7
object in the EBL/VRM mode".) 8
2. Click on the position of the reference point of the EBL/VRM marker.
9
The EBL/VRM marker is displayed.

3. Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position of the starting point and click the button.
10
4. Click on the reference position of the EBL/VRM marker.
11
A starting point is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property
12
information is displayed on the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property
dialog box".) 13
14
15
16
Starting point
17
5. Place the EBL/VRM marker on the position of the ending point and click the button. 18
An ending point is created on the position on which the button was clicked and the property
information is displayed on the object property dialog box. (Refer to "14.2.8 Object property 19
dialog box".)
20
Click
Ending point
21
22
23
24
6. To create an object on another position continuously, repeat Steps 2 to 5.
25
26
27

14-113 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.10.8 Property of a Sounding object

Only a Sounding object has the Property screen different from other objects, enabling input of a
Sounding value.

Sounding value input box

Note
In the case of C-MAP, you can not enter the sounding value.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-114

 1
14.10.9 Editing attributes of an object 2
The attribute input rules of the ENC object that is handled by manual update are specified in “S-57
3
Appendix A Chapter 2 – Attributes”. The following six types of ENC object attributes are available. 4
Attribute type 5
enumerated('E') One of the options can be selected.
6
list('L') Although the attribute is the same as enumerated, multiple options can be
selected. 7
float('F') A decimal digit can be input.
8
integer('I') An integer can be input.
coded Free text 9
string('A') 10
free text('S') Free text
11
To display an object correctly at manual update, the attributes must be input as described in “S-57 12
Appendix A Chapter 2 – Attributes”.
For types ‘E’, ‘L’, ‘F’, and ‘I’, options and input ranges are displayed in the input dialog. For types ‘A’ 13
and ‘S’, enter values according to the rules by referencing “C.6.5 Attributes of an ENC object”.
14
14.10.9.1 Type E 15
16
17
18
Select an attribute value from the list. 19
Check when the attribute value is unknown. 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-115 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.10.9.2 Type L
The selected attribute value of the Values group is
added to the Selected Values group.

Selectable attribute value list. Check the attribute

value to be added to the Selected Values group.

The selected attribute value is deleted from the

Selected Values group.

Selectable attribute value list

Check the attribute value to be deleted.

14.10.9.3 Type F

Enter an attribute value.

Check when the attribute value is unknown.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-116

 1
14.10.9.4 Type I
2
3
4
5
Enter an attribute value.
6
Check when the attribute value is unknown.
7
8
9
10
11
12
14.10.9.5 Type A/S
13
14
Enter an attribute value.
For the input rules, refer to “D.6.5 Attributes of an
15
ENC object”.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-117 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.10.10 Highlighted display of an object
Highlighted display of a manual update object varies depending on the editing operation or the
geometry.

Operation Geometry Before update After update

Adding an object Point (No object)

Line (No object)

Area (No object)

Deleting an object Point

Line

Area

Moving an object Point

(Deletes the moving
source and highlights
the moving destination
at addition)
Line

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-118

 Operation Geometry Before update After update 1
Area
2
3
Editing an object Point
4
(Addition of ENC 5
object attribute only)
6
Line 7
8
9
Area
10
11
12
Editing an object Point 13
(Changing the
14
attribute of the ENC
object) 15
Line
16
17
18
Area
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-119 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

Highlighted display of manual update in route monitoring indicates the difference with the manual
update operation performed against the latest automatic update chart status.
Example
(1) Latest status of automatic update

Difference
(2) Move the ENC object in manual update mode and save it. Move

End the manual update mode.

The state of moving from the latest status of automatic
Update is indicated.

Delete Difference

(3) Restart the manual update mode and delete the

ENC object that was moved by the previous
editing.
The state of deleting of the latest status of the automatic update is indicated.

Highlighted display of manual update in manual update mode indicates the difference with the manual
update operation that is performed against the state that has been saved previously.
Example
(1) Restart the manual update mode and delete the ENC object that was moved by the previous
editing.

Manual update mode Difference

Move

Start editing

DeleteDifference Delete Difference

Save

These highlight symbols are manual update symbols that have been saved previously.

The symbol in magenta can be picked by the cursor.

The symbol in grey cannot be picked by the cursor.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-120
 1
14.10.11 Reviewing manual update 2
(1) Reviewing manual update
3
The review function can be used for checking the update history on the screen in chart units. In
review display mode, “Review” is displayed in the Cursor mode column and manual update 4
operation is disabled.
When a chart is updated in Chart Maintenance mode, the manual update operations that have 5
been performed up to then cannot be displayed for review.
6
Save Save Save
7
8
9
[1] Add a buoy and a ferry route. [2] Delete the buoy. [3] Change the ferry route.
10
A review display example for the above editing is shown below. 11
Review for the 1st editing (addition of a buoy and a ferry route) is displayed.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Review for the 2nd editing (deletion of the buoy) is displayed. 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-121 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 Review of the 3rd editing (change of the ferry route) is displayed.

To enter in this mode, use the following procedure on a normal menu.

1) Select [Menu]-[Chart]-[Manual Update].

2) Select a chart to be reviewed by clicking on the [Select Chart] button.
3) Click on the [Load] button and open the Load Update History dialog.
4) Select a history to be reviewed and click on the [OK] button.
5) Check [Review] on the tool bar.
(By maintaining [Review] checked, history can be displayed subsequently by performing 3)
and 4).)

Comment
Review Load

Note
Comments can not be written in C-MAP.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-122

 1
2
3
4
Select a history to be reviewed. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
When a history to be reviewed is selected and
the OK button is clicked on, the dialog is 13
closed and the history is drawn.

(2) Displaying manual update history

14
15
The manual update editing contents are output to the update log of the chart in text format.
16
1) Click the right mouse button on the chart and select [Readout Information] on the shortcut
17
menu.
The cross-hairs cursor changes to the box cursor ( ).
18
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the edited chart by manual update, then click the left
19
mouse button.
The ［Pick Report］ dialog box is opened. 20
3) Select the [Update log] tab of [Pick Report]. The updated contents are displayed following
21
<MANUAL> are displayed in text format.
22
Hint! 23
• The history indicates the difference between the unsaved information and the saved information.
For instance, when, in edit mode, [1] an object is added to the initial positon, [2] the object is moved, 24
and [3] the edited contents are saved, the history indicates the new addition to the last position to
which the object was moved.
25
• The latitude and longitude that are output to the history indicates only one coordinate point of the 26
edited line object or the area object. This does not indicate the coordinates of the vertex to which
the object was moved. 27

14-123 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

 Return to the initial page

Return to the previous page

Go to the next page

Go to the last page

st
1 editing history

nd
2 editing history

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-124

14.10.12 Object Delete function 1
The Delete function attaches a deletion symbol on the ENC object or saved manual update object that 2
is targeted.
3
4
5
Delete 6
7
If Delete is executed for the object that was added after the start of editing, the object is deleted. 8
9
10
Delete 11
12
13
Operation/duration Operation 14
Delete operation for the unsaved manual Deletes the object that was operated.
update object 15
Delete operation for the ENC object and Attaches a deletion symbol (orange diagonal line)
saved manual update object on the object that was operated.
16
Required or not required to save Required to save 17
Retention period Not discarded automatically.
Delete operation during Review Not allowed 18
Editing the deleted object Only Remove is allowed.
Picking the deleted object Not allowed
19
20
Execution procedure
This function can be executed from the context menu only. 21
Display the context menu by clicking the right mouse button on the object and select ‘Delete this
22
object’.
23
24
25
26
27

14-125 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

14.10.13 Object Remove function
A saved manual update object can be hidden by using the Remove function. The target object can be
hidden without attaching a deletion symbol (orange diagonal line).

By using this function, the information on the removed object can be retained for 3 months (90 days)
and can be redisplayed from the history by using the Review function.
The information of the object that has been removed 91 days or earlier can no longer be redisplayed by
the Review function.

Remove

Operation/duration Remarks
Remove operation for the ENC object or the Not possible
unsaved manual update object
Remove operation for the saved manual Hides the manual update object that was
update object removed
Required to save or not required to save Required
Retention period 90 days
Remove operation during Review Not possible
Picking the removed object Not possible

Execution procedure
This function can be executed from the context menu and the eraser tool.
(1) Context menu
Display the context menu by clicking the right mouse button on the object and select ‘Remove this
object’.

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-126

 1
(2) Eraser tool
For the details, refer to “14.9.1 Deleting or hiding an object (S-57/S-63)”.
2
3
(3) Discard manual update information by self update
If the chart's edition changes, all manual update information will be discarded. 4
5
14.11 Displaying a Pick Report of Manual
6
Update Objects
7
The display conditions of a pick report of manual update objects are indicated below.
8
Item Display
9
Saved manual update object (ENC) Allowed
Saved manual update object (non-ENC) Not allowed 10
Unsaved manual update object Not allowed
Manual update object during Review Allowed
11
Delete manual update object Not allowed 12
Removed manual update object Not allowed
ENC object Allowed 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

14-127 Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually

Section 14 Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart Manually 14-128
 1
Section 15 Logbook 2
Various types of information (events) during the voyage can be recorded/displayed in a logbook.
3
4
15.1 Browsing a Logbook 5
6
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 7
The menu is displayed.

2 Click on [Logbook] on the menu.

8
The [Logbook] dialog box appears. 9
10
Date selection
box 11
Event group
tab
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Event list Event detail information 22
23
Memo
Events that are recorded/displayed in a logbook can be changed by using the [Settings] menu. For 24
the details, refer to "18.16 Setting Logbook".
25
26
27
付録
15-1 Section 15 Logbook
The following events are recorded in a logbook.
• At Noon: Recorded at 12:00 (LMT) every day.
• Specified Period: Recorded at any time interval.
• Event Mark: Recorded at marking an event mark.
• Manual Position Fix: Recorded at fixing a position manually.
• Chart Manual Updating: Recorded at updating a chart manually.
• System Start: Recorded at the start of the system.
• System Exit: Recorded at the termination of the system.
• Route Alert: Recorded at the occurrence of a Route-related alert.
• Chart Alert: Recorded at the occurrence of a Chart-related alert.
• Auto Sail Alert: Recorded at the occurrence of an automatic sailing related-alert and
sensor alarm
• System Alert: Recorded at the occurrence of an alert that does not belong to the types
that are indicated above
• MOB Start: Recorded when MOB starts.
• MOB Stop: Recorded when MOB stops.

Searching an event based on the date

Enter a date and time in the date selection box.
The events of the date and time that were input are searched. The event list is scrolled and the line of
the first event is highlighted in blue.

Sorting events
When turning on the power, events are registered in the event list starting from the event of the latest
date.
When any of the items of the title line in the event list is clicked on, the events can be sorted based on
the item. Whenever the item is clicked on, the events are sorted in the ascending order or descending
order.

Switching the event groups

Events are classified into the following three event groups. When any of these tabs is clicked, the
associated evens are displayed.

• [User Task Log] tab: Displays the events relating to user operations.
• [Navigation Alert Log] tab: Displays the events relating to navigation alerts.
• [System Alert Log] tab: Displays the events relating to system alerts.

Section 15 Logbook 15-2

 1
15.1.1 Event detail information
2
Navigation record data is displayed as event detail information.
3
Date Time Time difference
4
5
Event name
Event descriptions
6
Own ship's position
Ship's heading 7
Speed through the water
Position sensor type 1
Position sensor type 2
Course over the ground
Speed over the ground
8
4-hour average of SOG
Water depth
Chart name
24-hour average of SOG 9
Wind direction
Current direction Wave direction
10
Current speed Wave height
Wind speed 11
Voyage distance (ground)
Beaufort scale
Air pressure
12
Voyage distance (water) Air temperature
Water temperature 13
Engine revolution
Weather condition 14
Comment
15
16
17
18
Detail information that can be edited 19
The information below can be edited during browsing.
20
[Depth] (Water depth): Enter a value within the range from 0 to 999.9 m.
[Engine Rev.] (Engine revolution): Enter a value within the range from -9999.9 to 9999.9 rpm. 21
[Wind Dir.] (Wind direction): Enter a value within the range from 0 to 359.9°.
[Wind SPD] (Wind speed): Enter a value within the range from 0 to 200.0 kn. 22
[Wave Dir.] (Wave direction): Enter a value within the range from 0 to 359.9°.
[Wave Height] (Wave height): Enter a value within the range from 0 to 50.0 m.
23
[Air Press.] (Air pressure): Enter a value within the range from 0 to 2000.0 hPa. 24
[Air Temp.] (Air temperature): Enter a value within the range from -50.0 to 99.9C.
[Water Temp.] (Water temperature): Enter a value within the range from -10.0 to 50.0C. 25
26
27
付録
15-3 Section 15 Logbook
The information below can be input manually. The setting can be selected from the list.
[Beaufort scale]
0: Calm
1: Light air
2: Light breeze
3: Gentle breeze
4: Moderate breeze
5: Fresh breeze
6: Strong breeze
7: Near gale
8: Gale
9: Strong gale
10: Storm
11: Violent storm
12: Hurricane

[Weather condition]
b: Blue sky
bc: Fine but cloudy
c: Cloudy
o: Overcast
r: Rainy
q: Squalls
s: Snow
f: Foggy

A comment can be input in the [Comment] box by using up to 1000 characters.

Section 15 Logbook 15-4

 1
15.2 Editing a Logbook 2
15.2.1 Adding an event 3
1 Click on the [Event] button. 4
An event mark is plotted at the own ship’s position. An event called "Event Mark" is created with
5
the current time and is registered in the top line of the event list.
The navigation data that has been acquired automatically is displayed as event detail 6
information.
7
Memo
The data that is not automatically acquired is displayed as blank space.
8
9
[Event] button
10
11
12
Created event
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Deleting an event mark
For deletion of event marks, refer to "8.12 Marking the Position of Own Ship with an Event Mark". 23
24
25
26
27
付録
15-5 Section 15 Logbook
15.2.2 Editing event detail information
Use the procedure that is shown below to edit the event detail information that can be edited.
For the detail information that can be edited, refer to "Detail information that can be edited" in "15.1.1
Event detail information".

1 Click on the box of the data that can be edited.

2 Edit the information by using the software keyboard.

3 Click on the [Enter] key.

The editing is determined and the data is stored.

Section 15 Logbook 15-6

 1
15.3 Outputting Event Data 2
By selecting an event, the detail information can be output as a file.
3
15.3.1 Outputting a logbook as a file 4
A logbook data can be output with "File Manager". 5
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 6
The menu is displayed.
7
2 Click on the [Tools] - [File Manager] on the menu.
The [File Manager] dialog box appears. 8
3 Click on the [File Management] tab. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
4 Select the [Logbook] from the [File Type] combo box.
19
5 Select the drive containing logbook data from the [Drive] combo box.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
15-7 Section 15 Logbook
 6 Input the period of the logbook data to be output in [From] and [To] of [Select output
data interval.].

The [Copy] button is enabled.

7 Select the storage destination of the logbook data from the [Drive] combo box of the
output destination.

Section 15 Logbook 15-8

 1
8 Click on the [Copy] button. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
15-9 Section 15 Logbook
Section 15 Logbook 15-10
 1
Section 16 Setting up Screen View 2
Screen display detail is set through the [View] menu. 3
The display procedure of the View setup dialog box is as follows.
4
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
5
2 Click on the [View] button on the menu. 6
The submenu is displayed.
7
The submenu contents vary between RADAR and ECDIS.

[RADAR]
8
9
10
11
12
[ECDIS]
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-1 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
When submenu buttons are clicked, their respective setup dialog boxes are displayed.

Button Dialog box Reference

Multi View 16.1 Setting Chart
Mode Display Mode (Multi
View Mode) (ECDIS
only)

Options 16.2 Setting Screen

Display Options

*The setting items may vary between RADAR and ECDIS.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-2

 1
16.1 Setting Chart Display Mode (Multi 2
View Mode) (ECDIS only) 3
In the [View-Multi View Mode] dialog box, chart display modes can be set.
4
16.1.1 Setting Multi-Screen 5
For details about how to use the multi-screen, refer to "8.10.1 Display of multi view." 6
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar. 7
The menu is displayed.
8
2 Click on [View] - [Multi View Mode] on the menu.
The [View-Multi View Mode] dialog box appears. 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
You can select a chart display mode from the following four modes.
17
• [Single View] Mode: Displays a chart in full screen.
• [Top-Bottom] Mode: Divides the screen into top and bottom sections; the same or 18
different charts can be displayed in two views of View 1 and
View 2.
19
• [Right-Left] Mode: Divides the screen into left and right sections; the same or 20
different charts can be displayed in two views of View 1 and
View 2. 21
• [Picture in Picture] Mode: Displays the chart in View 2 on top of the chart in View 1 as a
child dialog box.
22
1 Click on the icon of the chart display mode to be used. 23
A selection frame appears on the icon of the selected mode.
24
2 Click on the [Select Area from View1 for View2] button.
The button is highlighted.
25
3 On the chart in View 1, select an area you want to display in View 2. 26
The selected area is displayed in View 2.
27
付録
16-3 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
16.2 Setting Screen Display Options
In the [View-Options] dialog box, the screen display options can be set.

Take the following steps to display the [View-Options] dialog box.

1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.

The menu is displayed.

2 Click on the [View] - [Options] on the menu.

The [View-Options] dialog box appears.

Disclosure button

Classification pane Edit pane

The [View-Options] dialog box consists of the classification pane and edit pane.
Click on the Disclosure button to hide the classification pane.

1 Click on the screen view of which you want to set up the options in the classification
pane.
The Option setup dialog box for the screen view you have selected appears in the edit pane.

2 Set up in the edit pane.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-4

 1
Display targets for classification pane
The classification pane displayed in RADAR and ECDIS and reference of the explanation are 2
as follows.
3
Display target
Classification pane
RADAR ECDIS
Reference 4
Own Ship   16.2.1 Setting up the display of Own Ship symbol
5
Own Track -  16.2.2 Setting up the display of ECDIS own ship’s
track 6
Own Track  16.2.3 Setting up the display of ECDIS own ship’s
track 7
Route   16.2.4 Setting up the display of Route Monitoring
8
14.2.5 Changing the color of the alternative route
User Map   16.2.6 Setting up the display of User Map 9
Mariner’s Mark/Line -  16.2.7 Setting up the display of Mariner's Mark/Line
RADAR   16.2.8 Setting up Radar Overlay and Transparency
10
of Echo/Trails
11
Target   16.2.9 Setting up the display of TT/AIS Target
Target Track   16.2.10 Setting up the display of Other Ship’s Track 12
Chart Common   16.2.11 Setting up the display of Chart Common
Chart Display  - 16.2.12 Setting up the display of RADAR Chart
13
Chart Display -  16.2.13 Setting up the display of ECDIS Chart 14
AIO   16.2.14 Setting up AIO/T&P display
Graphical Indication 16.2.15 Set display of danger detection highlight 15
Tool 16.2.166 Setting up the display of range/bearing
 
measurement function
16
Unit   16.2.177 Setting up the display of Unit of Setting 17
Value
Control   16.2.188 Setting up display of Own Ship Track 18
Control, display format of Own Ship/Cursor Position
and display of Sub-Information dialog
19
Depth Graph   16.2.199 Setting up the Water Depth display 20
Rudder Graph   16.2.20 Setting up the Rudder graph 21
Gyro/Rudder Graph   16.2.2121 Setting up the Gyro/Rudder graph 22
Engine Graph   16.2.222 Setting up the Engine Graph 23
ROT   16.2.233 Setting up the graph range of the ROT 24
slide bar
25
26
27
付録
16-5 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
 Screen display set in the [View-Options] dialog box
In the [View-Options] dialog box, the following screen display is set.

Target category Item

Graphical Objects Own Ship
Own Track
Route
User Map
Mariner’s Mark/Line
RADAR
Target
Target Track
GPS Buoy
Chart Common
Chart View
AIO
Graphical Indication
Tools
Unit Unit
Control Control

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-6

 1
16.2.1 Setting up the display of Own Ship symbol
2
When you select [Own Ship] in the classification pane, the "Own Ship" dialog is displayed in the edit
pane.
3
Configure the setting for own ship symbols.
4
The edit pane is divided into two dialogs.
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button. 5
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-7 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
 AIS Filter Stabilisation Indicator

Heading Line
Sea Stabilised Vector
Ground Stabilised Vector

Vector Time Mark

Beam Line

Stern Line POS2 Symbol

Vector display at primary position

In the own ship symbol, COG (Course Over the Ground) vector, HDG (Heading) vector, and heading
line can be displayed. The COG or HDG vector can also be displayed by the length proportionate to
the current ship speed in minute by the setting. For example, when the vector length is set to 10
minutes, the vector tip is at the predicted position after 10 minutes if the ship is assumed to navigate at
the current speed.

Time (own ship’s vector length)

Time (own ship’s vector length)

Vector Time Mark Vector Time Mark

(Vector time mark) (Vector time mark)

HDG vector COG vector

• To display the COG (Course Over the Ground) vector, check [Ground Stabilised Vector] in [Vector].
• To display the HDG (Heading) vector, check [Sea Stabilised Vector] in [Vector].
• To display the heading line, check [Heading and Beam Line].

For details on the setting of type and length of the vector to be displayed, refer to the following table.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-8

 1
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
2
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Type Select an own ship symbol from the combo box (symbols For RADAR: 3
of other ships are also linked). AUTO
Outline
4
: Auto Minimized Symbol 5
[default]
: Simplified Symbol
For ECDIS: 6
Simplified Symbol
: Outline
[default]
7
: Minimized Symbol Outline 8
*In Auto, the display is switched between Outline and 9
Minimized Symbol depending on the size of the symbol.
When the beam side of the Outline symbol is 3mm or 10
more, the symbol is displayed in Outline and when the
symbol is less than 3mm, it is displayed in Minimized 11
Symbol.
12
The beam side is 3mm or more
13
Heading and Selecting this enables to display heading lines and beam To enable: Select. 14
Beam Line lines. To disable: Clear.
(Heading Note 15
line/beam line This item can only be set on the ECDIS screen.
display) 16
Stern Line Selecting this enables to display a stern line. To enable: Select.
Note To disable: Clear. 17
This item can only set in the RADAR screen.
Ground Stabilised Selecting this enables to display a ground stabilised To enable: Select.
18
Vector vector. To disable: Clear.
19
Sea Stabilised Selecting this enables to display a sea stabilised vector. To enable: Select.
Vector To disable: Clear.
20
Time Enter the own ship's vector length in the box. 0 to 120
(Length of own 21
ship's vector)
Stabilization Selecting this enables to display the stabilization To enable: Select. 22
Indicator indicator. To disable: Clear.
23
Note
When both the Ground Stabilised Vector and the Sea 24
Stabilised Vector are effective, this automatically takes
effect.
25
Vector Time Mark Selecting this enables the interval of the vector time To enable: Select.
mark. To disable: Clear. 26
27
付録
16-9 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Interval (vector Select a vector time mark interval from the pull-down 1 to 6 min
time mark menu when Vector Time Mark is valid.
interval)
POS2 Symbol Selecting this enables to display the POS2 symbol. To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
Note
This item may not be displayed depending on the
equipment setting. The setting is not possible on the
RADAR screen.

Shortcuts
Click on any of available shortcuts to display the related dialog box.

Shortcut Setup Dialog

Setting of AIS Filter [AIS Filter Setting] dialog box
Settings of AZ [AZ Setting] dialog box
Settings of Anti-Grounding Look-ahead [Anti-Grounding Look-ahead Setting] dialog box

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-10

 1
16.2.2 Setting up the display of ECDIS own ship’s
2
track
3
When you select [Own Track] in the classification pane, the [Own Track] dialog is displayed in the edit
pane. 4
Configure the settings for own tracks.
Information of own tracks is recorded in the SSD at every second. Information of a maximum of 24 5
hours is displayed on a chart as own tracks.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
10
23
1400
Time Label
24
Past Position 25
Past Track 26
27
付録
16-11 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Past Track Selecting this enables to display the past To enable: Select.
track. To disable: Clear.
Plot Color (plot When Past Track is enabled, select a White (Black), Gray, Pink, Magenta,
color of track) plot color of the track from the list Blue, Cyan, Green, Yellow, Orange,
(preview not supported). Dark Red

Note
When the background of the screen
is being set to Day1 or Day2, Black
can be selected instead of White.
Track Period When Past Track is enabled, select a 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24 h
track period from the list (preview not
supported).
Time Label Selecting this enables to display the time To enable: Select.
label interval. To disable: Clear.
Interval (time label When Time Label is enabled, select a 1, 3, 5, 10, 30, 60,120 min
interval) time label interval from the list (preview
not supported).
Past Position Selecting this enables to display the past To enable: Select.
position. To disable: Clear.
Interval When Past Position is enabled, select an 0.5 min, 1 min, 2 min, 4 min, 0.1
(past position interval of track points from the list NM, 0.2 NM, 0.5 NM, 1 NM
interval) (preview not supported).
Current Vector Enable the current track display by Enable: Check.
checking the item when Past Track is Disable: Uncheck.
enabled.
Current Size Set a vector length when Current Vector 0.1 ~ 99.9kn/cm
is enabled.

Interval When Current Vector is enabled, select 3sec, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec, 1min,
the display interval. 3min, 5min, 10min, 30min, 60min,
0.1NM, 0.2NM, 0.3NM, 0.5NM,
1NM, 3NM, 5NM, 10NM
Layer A/B/C/D/E When Current Vector is enabled, enable Enable: Check.
the display of each of the layers, A, B, C, Disable: Uncheck.
D, and E by checking the item.
Color selection When Layer A/B/C/D/E/F is enabled, White, (Black), Gray, Amber,
combo box select the display color of each item. Magenta, Blue, Cyan, Green,
Yellow, Orange, Dark Red

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-12

 1
16.2.3 Setting up the display of RADAR own ship’s 2
track
3
If you are using RADAR standalone license, In the [Service]－[Installation]－[Settings]－[Own
Track] dialog you can switch between ECDIS own ship's track and RADAR own ship's track. 4
・Plot Interval:1s … ECDIS own ship’s track
5
・Plot Interval:User Setting(View-Options-Own Track Menu) … RADAR own ship's track.
6
7
8
9
10
When you select RADAR own ship's track, the contents of the [View]－[Options]－[Own Track]
11
dialogue change to the setting of RADAR own ship's track.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-13 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Display tab
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Own Track Switching on / off display of own ship's On：Turn on display
Display track. Off：Turn off display

Plot tab
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Track Type combo Selecting type of own ship's track. Standard：Always selectable
box

Plot Color combo Selecting the track color from the list. White、Gray、Amber、Magenta、
box Blue、Cyan、Green、Yellow、Orange、
Dark Red
Plot Interval Selecting the track plot interval from the Off、3s、5s、10s、30s、1min、3min、
combo box list. 5min、10min、30min、60min、1NM、
3NM、5NM、10NM、0.1NM、0.2NM、
0.3NM、0.5NM
Time Label check Switching on / off display of Time Label On：Check
box interval. Off：Uncheck
Interval combo When Time Label is enabled, selecting 1min、3min、5min、10min、30min、
box the Time Label interval from the list. 60min、120min

Clear tab
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Track Color Selecting and erasing the color of own All、White、Gray、Amber、Magenta、
combo box ship's track. Blue、Cyan、Green、Yellow、Orange、
When you select a color, a confirmation Dark Red
dialog will be displayed.
Press OK to execute erase.

Each tab
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
File Load/Save When you click the shortcut, the [File
Shortcut Load / Save] screen of [Tools]-[File
Manager] is displayed.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-14

 1
16.2.4 Setting up the display of Route Monitoring
2
When you select [Route] in the classification pane, the [Route] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.
Configure the settings for route monitoring.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
W003 Comment 18
06:12U

19
20
21
Cross Track Limit Line 22
W002 Comment Comment
04:24U
23
24
W001 Comment ETA 25
02:54U

26
27
付録
16-15 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Show ETA Selecting this enables to display the ETA To enable: Select.
(estimated time of arrival at WPT) while To disable: Clear.
route monitoring.

Format When ETA is enabled, select a display UTC/LMT

format of the ETA while route monitoring
by clicking on the corresponding button.
: UTC
: LMT

XTD Limit Line Selecting this enables to display XTD limit To enable: Select.
lines. To disable: Clear.

Color When XTD Limit Line is enabled, select a IALA-A, IALA-B

display color of XTD limit lines by clicking
on the corresponding button.
IALA-A: Starboard - green, Port - red
IALA-B: Starboard - red, Port - green

Show WPT Name Selecting this enables to display a To enable: Select.

(Comment display) comment on the vicinity of the target. To disable: Clear.

WPT Name Font Size When Show WPT Name is enabled, select Standard, Small
(Comment font size) a font size of comments by clicking on the
corresponding button (preview not
supported).

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-16

 1
16.2.5 Changing the color of the alternative route 2
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the Left Tool Bar.
The menu is displayed.
3
2 Click on [View] - [Options] from the menu. 4
The [View-Options] dialog box is displayed.
5
3 Select [Route] (ship track) in the category pain.
The [Route] dialog box is displayed.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
4 Select a color in [Alternate Route]. 21
Blue : Displays Alternate Route in blue.
Orange : Displays Alternate Route in orange.
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-17 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
16.2.6 Setting up the display of User Map
When you select [User Map] in the classification pane, the [User Map] dialog is displayed in the edit
pane.
Set up the display of User Map.
The edit pane is divided into two dialogs.
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button.
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-18

 1
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
2
Area Description of Setting Setting Value
Object Type Click on the button to specify All On/Individual 3
(Object display condition) whether to display or hide the
object mark, and select the mark
Types of selectable marks 4
Symbol: , , , , 
to be displayed.
Area: Polygon, Circle, Ellipse, Fan 5
All On: Displays all marks.
Line: Solid Line, Dotted Line,
Individual: Displays selected
Dashed Line, Circle, Ellipse, Arc,
6
marks.
Arrow
7
Text: Text
Area Fill Set the fill color display to Off/On 8
(Fill) On/Off. Check the On mark.
Symbol/Simple Line Color Set to On/Off the display of the Off/On
9
(Symbol and Simple Line color that targets the symbol
10
Color) and simple line. Check the color
that is to be set to On. 11
Mark Size Set the mark display size. 1 (Minimum) /2/3/4/5 (Maximum)
(Mark size)
12
Comment Font Size Set the font size of the Standard/Small 13
(Comment font size) comment.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-19 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
16.2.7 Setting up the display of Mariner's Mark/Line
When you select [Mariner’s Mark/Line] in the classification pane, the [Mariner’s Mark/Line] dialog is
displayed in the edit pane.
Select mariner’s marks and lines you want to display on the user map by selecting the corresponding
check boxes.
You can select the following marks and lines.

• Clearing Line
• Tidal Stream
• Information Mark
• Highlighting
• Event Mark
• Plotted Position

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-20

 1
16.2.8 Setting up Radar Overlay and Transparency
2
of Echo/Trails
3
When you select [RADAR] in the classification pane, the [RADAR] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below. 17
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
18
RADAR Overlay The radar overlay display turns ON by Without interswitch setting
selecting the [RADAR Overlay] RADAR1/RADAR2 19
Select the required radar system from
the pull-down menu. With interswitch setting 20
RADAR1 to 8
Note
21
- When this is turned OFF, even the
alerts related to the radar will not be
displayed.
22
- This item is displayed on the ECDIS
screen if RADAR interface is available.
23
Transparency of Click on the control on the slider and set 0 to 15 24
Echo/Trails up the transparency of echoes/trails. 0 = Opaque (Nontransparent)
15 = Transparent (Completely 25
transparent)
26
27
付録
16-21 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
16.2.9 Setting up the display of TT/AIS Target
When you select [Target] in the classification pane, the [Target] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.
Configure the settings for TT/AIS targets.

ECDIS screen RADAR screen

TT Symbol AIS Symbol

10 100

TT Target ID

AIS Target ID

TT Vector TT2 Symbol

TT1 Symbol AIS Symbol

10 20 100

TT Target ID

TT Target ID AIS Target ID

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-22

 1
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
2
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
AIS Symbol Selecting this enables to display the AIS To enable: Select. 3
symbol. To disable: Clear.
Sleeping Class A, Class Selecting this enables to display the To enable: Select. 4
B sleeping AIS of class A, ClassB. To disable: Clear.
Physical AtoN Selecting this enables to display the To enable: Select.
5
Physical AIS AtoN when the AIS Symbol is
selected.
To disable: Clear.
6
Virtual AtoN Selecting this enables to display the Virtual
AIS AtoN when the AIS Symbol is selected.
To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
7
TT Symbol Select this item to enable the TT symbol. To enable: Select. 8
Select the TT Symbol to be used from the To disable: Clear.

combo box.
9
TT1 Symbol
10
TT2 Symbol
TT1 Symbol indicates the TT target 11
information that is received from RADAR1
and the TT Target ID is displayed as “T1-***” 12
(*** indicates the target number or ship
13
name).
TT2 Symbol indicates the TT target 14
information that is received from RADAR2
and the TT Target ID is displayed as “T2-***” 15
(*** indicates the target number or ship
name).
16
Note 17
This item is only enabled on the RADAR
screen. 18
TT Vector Selecting this enables to display the TT
vector.
To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
19
Note 20
This item takes effect only on the ECDIS
screen. 21
GPS Buoy Selecting this enables to display the GPS To enable: Select.
Buoy symbol. To disable: Clear. 22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-23 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
TT Target ID Select a display mode of the TT target ID Off, On, TT Track
from the combo box.
Off: Hide
On: Show
TT Track: Displays only the target that
shows other ship's track.
Display
Ship's Name: When the ship’s name has
been input in the [TT Target INFO] (property
of tracked target) dialog, that ship name is
displayed. If the ship’s name has not been
input, the identification number is displayed.
Display

AIS Target ID Select a display mode of the AIS target ID Off, On, AIS Track, Ship's
from the combo box. Name
Off: Hide
On: Show
AIS Track: Displays only the target that
shows other ship's track (target track).
Ship's Name: When the ship’s name has
been input in the [AIS Target INFO]
(property of AIS target) dialog, that ship
name is displayed. If the ship’s name has
not been input, the identification number is
displayed.

Display

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-24

 1
16.2.10 Setting up the display of Other Ship’s Track
2
When you select [Target Track] in the classification pane, the [Target Track] dialog is displayed in the
edit pane.
3
The [Target Track] dialog consists of the [Display], [Plot] and [Clear] tabs.
4
[Display] tab
On the [Display] tab, set up the display of other ship’s tracks.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10(10) 15(5) 20
21
Target Track
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-25 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Target Track Display Select to show/hide target tracks by clicking on All On, All Off
(display of other the corresponding buttons and then specify the When Individual is
ship’s tracks) target tracks you want to display by checking selected:
them. Select from Tracks 1 to 10
All On: Shows all of target tracks. and from Tracks 11 to 20.
All Off: Hides all of target tracks.
Individual: Shows selected target tracks.

Shortcut
Click on any of available shortcuts to display the related dialog box.

Shortcut Setup Dialog Box

File Load/Save [File Load/Save] dialog box in File Manager

[Plot] tab
The edit pane of the [Plot] tab is divided into two dialogs.
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button.
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-26

 1
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
2
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
For All Target Track Click on the check box and select a White (Black), Gray, Amber, 3
plot color of target tracks from the Magenta, Blue, Cyan, Green,
list. Yellow, Orange and Dark Red 4
For Individual Target Track Click on the check box and select White (Black), Gray, Amber,
plot colors of individual target Magenta, Blue, Cyan, Green, 5
tracks (Tracks 1 to 10 and Tracks Yellow, Orange and Dark Red
11 to 20) from the list. 6
Plot Interval Select a plot interval of target Off, 3s, 5s, 10s, 30s, 1 min, 3
tracks from the combo box. min, 5 min, 7
10 min, 30 min, 60 min, 1 NM,
3 NM, 5 NM, 10 NM, 0.1 NM, 8
0.2 NM, 0.3 NM, 0.5 NM
* White/Black interchanges under the following conditions. 9
RADAR screen: Always White
ECDIS screen: Black at Day1/Day2 (or Day), white at Day3/Dusk/Night
10
Shortcut 11
Click on any of available shortcuts to display the related dialog box. 12
Shortcut Setup Dialog Box
13
File Load/Save [File Load/Save] dialog box in File Manager
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-27 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
[Clear] tab

To erase tracks by specifying a color

1 Select the color of other ship’s track to be erased from the [Track Color] combo box.
You can select from All, White, Gray, Amber, Magenta, Blue, Cyan, Green, Yellow, Orange and
Dark Red.
White/Black interchanges under the following conditions.
RADAR screen: Always White
ECDIS screen: Black at Day1/Day2 (or Day), white at Day3/Dusk/Night
A message dialog box prompting you to confirm erasing appears.

Color you selected

2 To execute erasing, click on the [OK] button. To cancel erasing, click on the [Cancel]
button or the [X] button.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-28

 1
Erasing by specifying a track number
2
1 Select the number of other ship’s track to be erased from the [Track Number] combo
box. 3
Options of the track to be erased include All, Track 1, Track 2, Track 3,Track 4, Track 5,Track 6,
Track 7, Track 8, Track 9, Track 10, and Track 11 – 20.
4
An erase confirmation message dialog is displayed. 5
6
Selected track number
7
8
9
2 To execute erase, click the [OK] button. To cancel erase, click the [Cancel] button or
the [x] button.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-29 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
16.2.11 Setting up the display of Chart Common
When you select [Chart Common] in the classification pane, the [Chart Common] dialog is displayed in
the edit pane.
The edit pane is divided into two dialogs.
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button.
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-30

 1
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Area Boundary Select a display method of area boundary by clicking on the Plane,
2
corresponding button. Symbolized
Plane: Displays a plane boundary (an area boundary
3
is indicated by dotted lines).
4
5
Area boundary 6
7
8
Symbolized: Displays a symbol boundary (an area 9
boundary is indicated by symbol lines).
10
11
Area boundary 12
13
14
Chart Symbol Select a type of chart symbols you want to use on the chart
by clicking on the corresponding button.
Paper Chart,
Simplified
15
Paper Chart: The same symbols on paper charts are used
as symbols for lighthouses, etc.
16
17
18
19
20
Simplified: Colored symbols are displayed. 21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-31 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Full Light Lines When selected, display of maximum length of full light lines To enable: Select.
are enabled. To disable: Clear.

When [Full Light Lines] are enabled

Light range of lighthouse

When [Full Light Lines] are disabled.

Scale Minimum When selected, scale display smaller than the minimum To enable: Select.
scale setting value is disabled. To disable: Clear.

When [Scale Minimum] When [Scale Minimum]

is enabled is disabled

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-32

 1
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Depth Refer to "Depth." 2
C-MAP Ed.3
Database
Select this to show a chart database chart. Shown: Selected
Hidden: Clear
3
*Only the imported chart databases can be selected.
During manual updating of a chart, the C-MAP database list 4
cannot be changed. Therefore, the following restrictions are
imposed while the Manual Update tool bar is displayed by
selecting [Chart] - [Manual Update] in the menu.
5
• Chart Type of [View1] / [View2] cannot be changed in the
[View-Options] dialog.
6
• The C-MAP Ed.3 Database check box cannot be
changed.
7
The Manual Update tool bar is closed, the restrictions are
released.
8
9
Depth
Use [Depth] items to set up the depth.
10
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 11
Shallow Contour The shallow contour displayed on the chart is displayed at 0 to 200
12
the set depth.
For the display example, refer to "(1) Example of displaying 13
Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour."
Safety Depth The spot depth that is lower than the set value is highlighted 0 to 200 14
for display.
15
Safety Contour The set depth value on the chart (or depth that is lower than 0 to 200
the set value) is highlighted for display. 16
In the sea area that is shallower than the set value, an alarm
occurs. 17
*If the safety contour appropriate to the set depth is not
provided on the chart, the safety contour that is deeper than
18
the set value is displayed. 19
For the display example, refer to "(1) Example of displaying
Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour." 20
Deep Contour The deep contour displayed on the chart is displayed at the 0 to 200
set depth.
21
For the display example, refer to "(1) Example of displaying 22
Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour."
Four Shades Normally, the sea is displayed on the chart by four colors at To enable: Select. 23
(Sea area each depth. When [Four Shades] is disabled, the sea is To disable: Clear.
four-color displayed by two colors with [Safety Contour] as a boundary.
24
display) This item is set to clearly separate the sea into the safe area 25
and the area where navigation requires caution.
For the display example, refer to "(2) Example of Displaying 26
Four Shades."
27
付録
16-33 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Shallow Pattern Of depth that can be set at 4 levels, a lattice-like line is To enable: Select.
added to the shallow sea set in [Shallow Contour] and To disable: Clear.
[Safety Contour].
This item is set to display the area where navigation
requires caution conspicuously.
For the display example, refer to "(3) Example of Displaying
Shallow Pattern."
Shallow Water A dangerous route obstacle existing in the sea area that is To enable: Select.
Dangers shallower than safety contour is displayed by mark. To disable: Clear.
(Isolated For the display example, refer to "(4) Example of displaying
obstacles in Shallow Water Dangers."
shallow water)

(1) Example of displaying Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour

Shallow Contour Deep Contour

Land Shallow

Slightly shallow

Slightly deep

Deep

Safety Contour

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-34

 1
(2) Example of displaying Four Shades

Land
2
3
Shallow Contour 4
5
Safety Contour
6
7
Safety Depth 8
Deep Contour
9
10
11
12
13
When [Four Shades] is enabled (the sea area is displayed by four colors.)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
When [Four Shades] is disabled (the sea area is displayed by two colors.)
26
27
付録
16-35 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
(3) Example of displaying Shallow Pattern

Shallow Pattern

When [Shallow Pattern] is enabled (the shallow pattern is displayed)

When [Shallow Pattern] is disabled (the shallow pattern is not displayed)

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-36

 1
(4) Example of displaying Shallow Water Dangers
2
3
4
Dangerous course
obstacle
5
6
Safety Contour
7
8
When Shallow Water Dangers is enabled 9
10
11
12
Dangerous course
obstacle 13
14
Safety Contour
15
16
When Shallow Water Dangers is disabled 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-37 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
Restrictions on [Safety Contour] and [Deep Contour]
1) When entering in [Shallow Contour]
If “Safety Contour < Shallow Contour  Deep Contour”, the Safety Contour value is corrected to the
Shallow Contour value.
If “Safety Depth < Shallow Contour  Deep Contour”, the Safety Contour is corrected to the
Shallow Contour value.
If Safety Contour, Safety Depth  Deep Contour < Shallow Contour”, the Safety Contour, Safety
Depth, and Deep Contour values are corrected to the Shallow Contour value.
2) When entering in [Deep Contour]
If “Shallow Contour  Deep Contour < Safety Contour”, the Safety Contour value is corrected to the
Deep Contour value.
If “Shallow Contour  Deep Contour < Safety Depth”, the Safety Depth value is corrected to the
Deep Contour value.
If “Deep Contour < Shallow Contour  Safety Contour, Safety Depth”, the Safety Contour, Safety
Depth, and Shallow Contour values are corrected to the Deep Contour values.
3) When entering in [Safety Contour]
If “Shallow Contour  Deep Contour < Safety Contour”, the Deep Contour value is corrected to the
Safety Contour value.
If “Safety Contour < Shallow Contour  Deep Contour”, the Shallow Contour value is corrected to
the Safety Contour value.
4) When entering [Safety Depth]
If “Shallow Contour  Deep Contour < Safety Depth”, the Deep Contour value is corrected to the
Safety Depth value.
If “Safety Depth < Shallow Contour  Deep Contour”, the Shallow Contour value is corrected to the
Safety Depth value.

The compensated setting values are flashed temporarily.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-38

 1
16.2.12 Setting up the display of RADAR Chart
2
When you select [Chart Display] in the classification pane, the [Chart Display] dialog is displayed in the
edit pane.
3
The edit pane is divided into two dialogs.
4
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button.
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
The chart information uses the same reference and display mode as the radar / AIS, including CCRP,
geodetic datum, display scale, motion mode, and bearing mode.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-39 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Chart Type Select a type of charts to be displayed S-57/C-Map 3
by click on the corresponding button.
S-57: Shows S-57 charts.
C-Map 3: Shows C-Map Ed3 charts.
Text Size Drag the control on the slider and set 0 to 6
up the text size (7 levels).
Clicking on the [Def.] (factory
presetting) button resets the current
value to the default value.
Primary Chart INFO. Select to enable to show Primary Chart To enable: Select.
*1
Set INFO. Set, and then select the items To disable: Clear.
you want to display.
Display items
Coastline, Safety Contour,
Dangers To Navigation, Fixed and
Floating Aids to Navigation
Land Area Selecting this enables to display land To enable: Select.
areas. To disable: Clear.
Depth Contour Selecting this enables to display depth To enable: Select.
contours. To disable: Clear.
Scale Boundary Selecting this enables the display of To enable: Select.
scale boundary. To disable: Clear.

Sounding Selecting this enables the display of To enable: Select.

sounding. To disable: Clear.

Text Selecting this enables to display text. To enable: Select.

To disable: Clear.
Other Objects Select a display method of objects Off/Base, Standard
other than land, depth contour and text
from the combo box.
Off: Hides other objects.
Base: Shows objects other than
the above which are
included in the display
category [Base].
Standard: Shows objects other than
the above which are
included in the display
category [Standard].

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-40

 1
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
NO-DATA-Pattern Selecting this enables to display To enable: Select.
2
NO-DATA-Pattern. To disable: Clear. 3
NO-DATA-Pattern is the display pattern
of the area that does not have chart 4
data.
(Example)
5
6
7
8
9
When display of NO-DATA-Pattern is 10
disabled, the RADAR screen is
displayed in the background. 11
*1
12
The primary chart information set is chart features and symbols defined in source documents of
IMO Resolution A.817(19) and IEC 61174. 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-41 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
16.2.13 Setting up the display of ECDIS Chart
When you select [Chart View] in the classification pane, the [Chart View] dialog is displayed in the edit
pane.
The edit pane is divided into three dialogs.
To advance to the next dialog: Click on the [Next] button.
To return to the previous dialog: Click on the [Back] button.
You can set up the same values on both the [View1] and [View2] tabs.

By setting the [Readout undisplayed chart objects] check box to ON or OFF in Page 1/3, it is possible
to select whether the object without Viewing Group setting is displayed on the pick report.
When the check box is checked, the object is displayed.

[Readout undisplayed chart objects] check box

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-42

 1
Setting a Group Layer
When the [Group Layer] check box is set to ON in Page 2/3, the Viewing Layers are grouped. 2
The grouped lists are displayed under the main-sub layers.
3
4
[Group Layer] check box
5
6
7
Grouped lists
8
9
10
11
12
13
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below. 14
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
15
Chart Type Select a type of charts to be displayed by clicking on the S-57, C-Map 3,
corresponding button. ARCS 16
S-57: Shows S-57 charts.
C-Map 3: Shows C-Map Ed3 charts. 17
ARCS: Shows ARCS charts.
Text Size Drag the control on the slider and set up the text size (7 0 to 6
18
levels).
Clicking on the [Def.] (Factory settings) button resets the text
19
size to the factory preset value.
For the details of the examples of changing text size, refer to
20
"Example of changing text size".
21
Chart Load Select a display switching mode for the S-57 chart by clicking AUTO, Fix
on the button. 22
[AUTO]: Automatically switches and shows charts.
[Fix]: Fixes and shows the chart being currently displayed. 23
Layer When showing S-57/C-MAP charts, select the objects you Refer to "Contents
want to display by selecting the check boxes of desired to be displayed as 24
objects. layers".
Text When showing S-57/C-MAP charts, select the texts you want Refer to "Contents
25
to display by selecting the check boxes of desired texts. to be displayed as
texts". 26
27
付録
16-43 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
Example of changing text size

Standard

Small Large

Small Large Large Small

Small Large Large Small

Large

Small

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-44

 1
Contents to be displayed as layers
Set up the items to be displayed when the chart display category is [Custom]. 2
There are three types of layers: [-], [S] and [A].
3
[-]: Items whose display categories are none of [BASE], [STD(Standard)] nor [All].
[S]: Items to be displayed when the display category is [STD]. 4
[A]: Items to be displayed when the display category is [All].
The items that are displayed vary according to the setting of Group Layer to ON or OFF. 5
Type ENC Layer (Group Layer OFF) 6
[S] Unknown
Generic Object
7
Chart scale boundary, overscale data 8
Land region, Sea area/named water area
Lake, Sloping ground, Slope top, Causeway, Dam, Dyke 9
Radar/Visually conspicuous object, Built up area
Swept area
10
Sand wave, Tunnel on seabed, Mooring cables 11
Navigation line
Recommended track/traffic lane/route centreline 12
Ferry route
13
RADAR line , Limit of shore radar, Radio calling in point
Restricted area 14
Submarine transit lane, Military practice area, Sea plane landing area,
Offshore production area 15
Fairway
16
Caution area
Fishing ground, Marine farm 17
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
18
Archipelagic sea lane 19
Buoy, Beacon, Light float, Mooring buoy, Light Vessel
Daymark 20
Distance mark
Navigational system mark
21
topmarks 22
Gridiron
light 23
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
24
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning
25
26
27
付録
16-45 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
 Type ENC Layer (Group Layer OFF)
[A] Accuracy
Nautical publication
Highlight info
Highlight document
Highlight date dependent
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation
Dunes, Hills, Ridge, Clifftop, Contours and elevation
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbor facility
Berth, Crane, Drydock, Mooring facility, Gate
Spot Sounding
Depth contours
Contour label
Water turbulence
Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Cable area, Pipeline area
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Submarine cable/pipeline
Continental shelf area
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station
Chart boundary
ENC edition date
most recent chart update number
Grid
[-] Updated Review

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-46

 1
Type C-MAP Ed.3 Layer (Group Layer OFF)
[S] Unknown 2
Generic Object
3
Chart scale boundary, overscale data
Land region, Sea area/named water area 4
Lake, Sloping ground, Slope top, Causeway, Dam, Dyke
Radar/Visually conspicuous object, Built up area
5
Swept area 6
Sand wave, Tunnel on seabed, Mooring cables
Navigation line 7
Recommended track/traffic lane/route centreline
Ferry route
8
RADAR line , Limit of shore radar, Radio calling in point 9
Restricted area
Submarine transit lane, Military practice area, Sea plane landing area, 10
Offshore production area
11
Fairway
Caution area 12
Fishing ground, Marine farm
Anchorage area, Anchor berth
13
Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
14
Archipelagic sea lane
Buoy, Beacon, Light float, Mooring buoy, Light Vessel 15
Daymark
Distance mark
16
Navigational system mark 17
topmarks
Gridiron 18
light
Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
19
Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Traffic, Signal station, Warning 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-47 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
 Type C-MAP Ed.3 Layer (Group Layer OFF)
[A] Accuracy
Nautical publication
Highlight info
Highlight document
Highlight date dependent
Coverage, Compilation scale of data
Local magnetic anomaly, Magnetic variation
Dunes, Hills, Ridge, Clifftop, Contours and elevation
Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
Check point, Harbor facility
Berth, Crane, Drydock, Mooring facility, Gate
Spot Sounding
Depth contours
Contour label
Water turbulence
Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
Cable area, Pipeline area
Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
Submarine cable/pipeline
Continental shelf area
Custom zone, Free port area, Harbor area
Fishery zone
Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescue station
Grid
［-］ Update Review

Type ENC Layer (Group Layer ON)

[S] Unknown
Drying line
Buoys, beacons, aids to navigation
Buoys, beacons, structures
Lights
Boundaries and limits
Prohibited and restricted areas
Chart scale boundaries
Cautionary notes
1
Ships' routeing systems and ferry routes
Archipelagic sea lanes
Miscellaneous

1
routeing: UK notation
Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-48
 1
Type ENC Layer (Group Layer ON)
[A] Accuracy 2
Highlight date dependent
3
Highlight info
Highlight document 4
Contour label
Spot soundings
5
Submarine cables and pipelines 6
All isolated dangers
Magnetic variation 7
Depth contours
Seabed
8
Tidal 9
Miscellaneous
Chart boundary 10
ENC edition date
11
most recent chart update number
Grid 12
[-] Update Review
13
Type C-MAP Ed.3 Layer (Group Layer ON) 14
[S] Unknown
Drying line 15
Buoys, beacons, aids to navigation
16
Buoys, beacons, structures
Boundaries and limits 17
Prohibited and restricted areas
Chart scale boundaries 18
Cautionary notes
2
19
Ships' routeing systems and ferry routes
Archipelagic sea lanes 20
Miscellaneous
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
2
routeing: UK notation
16-49 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
 Type C-MAP Ed.3 Layer (Group Layer ON)
[A] Accuracy
Highlight date dependent
Highlight info
Highlight document
Contour label
Spot soundings
Submarine cables and pipelines
All isolated dangers
Magnetic variation
Depth contours
Seabed
Tidal
Miscellaneous
Grid
［-］ Update Review

Contents to be displayed as texts

ENC Text (Group Layer OFF)

Important text (Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
Name/Number of: buoys, beacons, so on
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication
Nature of seabed
Geographic names
Value of: magnetic variation, swept depth
Height of islet or land feature
Berth number
Current velocity
National language

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-50

 1
C-MAP Ed.3 Text (Group Layer OFF)
Important text(Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on) 2
Name/Number of: buoys, beacons, so on
3
Light description
Note on chart data or nautical publication 4
Nature of seabed
Geographic names
5
Value of: magnetic variation, swept depth
6
Height of islet or land feature
Berth number 7
Current velocity
National language
8
9
ENC Text (Group Layer ON)
Important text 10
Other text
Names
11
Light description 12
All other
National language 13
14
C-MAP Ed.3 Text (Group Layer ON)
Important text 15
Other text
Names
16
Light description 17
All other
National language 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-51 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
16.2.14 Setting up AIO/T&P display
When you select [AIO/T&P] in the classification pane, the [AIO/T&P] dialog box appears in the edit
pane.

The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

All AIO Objects Select and enable the display of all AIO To enable: Select.
objects. To disable: Clear.
Temporary Notice (T) Select and enable the display associated To enable: Select.
with Temporary Notice (T). To disable: Clear.
Preliminary Notice (P) Select and enable the display associated To enable: Select.
with Preliminary Notice (P). To disable: Clear.
ENC Preliminary Notice Select and enable the display associated To enable: Select.
(EP) with ENC Preliminary Notice (EP). To disable: Clear.
No Information Objects Select and enable the display associated To enable: Select.
with No Information Objects. To disable: Clear.
All T&P Objects Select and enable the display of all T&P To enable: Select.
objects To disable: Clear.
Temporary Notice (T) Select and enable the display associated To enable: Select.
with Temporary Notice (T). To disable: Clear.
Preliminary Notice (P) Select and enable the display associated To enable: Select.
with Preliminary Notice (P). To disable: Clear.

Note
T&P will not be displayed if the display scale is a small scale of more than 1 / 20,000,000.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-52

 1
16.2.15 Set display of danger detection highlight 2
When you select [Graphical Indication] in the classification pane, the [Graphical Indication] dialog box
appears in the edit pane.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 18
Graphical Indication for
the Charted Feature
Select and enable the highlighting function of the
detection object on the chart
To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
19
object
20
Crossing Safety Activate the partial highlight display function of the To enable: Select.
Contour object where the execution result of Safety Check
becomes Crossing Safety Contour error.
To disable: Clear. 21
Navigational Hazards Activate the partial highlight display function of the To enable: Select. 22
object where the execution result of Safety Check To disable: Clear.
becomes Navigational Hazards error. 23
Prohibited Areas and Prohibited Area or Areas with Special Condition To enable: Select.
Areas with Special activates the partial highlighting function of the error To disable: Clear. 24
Conditions part.
Settings for Click to open the Depth / Safety Contour screen of the 25
Depth/Safety Contour Alert setting.
Settings for Click to open the Look-ahead screen of the Alert
26
Look-ahead setting.
27
Settings for Special Click to open the Special Condition Area screen of the
Condition Area Alert setting. 付録
16-53 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
16.2.16 Setting up the display of range/bearing
measurement function
When you select [Tools] in the classification pane, the [Tools] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.

The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Range Rings Selecting this enables to display range To enable: Select.
rings. To disable: Clear.
Bearing Scale Selecting this enables to display the To enable: Select.
bearing scale. To disable: Clear.
Note
This item is displayed on the ECDIS
screen only. This item is enabled only
when overlay is set to On.
EBL1/EBL2 Selecting this enables to display the To enable: Select.
EBL1/EBL2 markers. To disable: Clear.
VRM1/VRM2 Selecting this enables to display the To enable: Select.
VRM1/VRM2 markers. To disable: Clear.
PI (parallel line cursor) Select this to enable to display the PI To enable: Select.
cursors, and then select the PI cursors To disable: Clear.
you want to display by selecting them.
PI cursor selections
Index Line 1 to Index Line 8
Node Fixed EBL/VRM Selecting this enables to display the To enable: Select.
node fixed EBL/VRM. To disable: Clear.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-54

 1
16.2.17 Setting up the display of Unit of Setting 2
Value
3
Note
Some items may not be displayed depending on the installation setting. 4
5
When you select [Unit] in the classification pane, the [Unit] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-55 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Depth (water depth) Select a unit of water depth from the combo box. m, ft, fm
Ship Speed Select a unit of the ship speed from the combo kn, m/s, km/h
box.
Current Speed Select a unit of the current speed from the combo kn, m/s, km/h
box.
Wind Speed Select a unit of the wind speed from the combo kn, m/s, km/h
box.
Propeller Revolution Select a unit of the propeller's revolution per rpm, min-1
minute from the combo box.
Propeller Pitch Angle Select a unit of the propeller's pitch angle from the °, %
combo box.
Thruster Revolution Select the unit of thruster revolution from the rpm, min-1
combo box.
Thruster Pitch Angle Select a unit of the thruster's pitch angle from the °, %, NOTCH
combo box.
Air TEMP Select a unit of the air temperature from the °C, °F
combo box.
Water TEMP Select a unit of the water temperature from the °C, °F
combo box.
Air Pressure Select a unit of the air pressure from the combo hPa, mbar
box.
Wind Direction(True) Select a wind direction (true) display method from 16points, Degree
the combo box.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-56

 1
16.2.18 Setting up display of Own Ship Track Control, 2
display format of Own Ship/Cursor Position
and display of Sub-Information dialog 3
When you select [Control] in the classification pane, the [Control] dialog is displayed in the edit pane.
4
5
[RADAR Screen] [ECDIS Screen]
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
The descriptions of settings are shown in the table below.
19
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Show Own Track Selecting this enables to display own track To enable: Select.
20
Control control. To disable: Clear.
21
Note
This item takes effect only on the RADAR 22
screen.
Show Sub Information Select this to enable to display the sub To enable: Select.
23
Window (sub information information dialog box, and then select the To disable: Clear.
dialog box display) tab(s) you want to display. 24
Note
Tab selections
POSN DIFF(Difference
25
• The [Depth] tab can only be selected between POSN(Main) and
when equipped with a water depth sensor. POSN(Sub)), Depth, 26
• The [Current] tab can only be selected Current
when equipped with a GPS, a gyro and a 27
log sensor.
付録
16-57 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
16.2.19 Setting up the Water Depth display
When [Depth Graph] is selected on the classification pain, the [Depth Graph] dialog is shown on the
Edit pain.

The following table shows the setting details:

Setting item Description Setting values

Depth Range(Docking) Select a depth range for the docking depth AUTO, 10 m, 25 m, 50 m
graph from the combo box.
Depth Range(Voyage) Select a depth range for the route depth graph AUTO, 50 m, 100 m, 250
from the combo box. m
Time Range Select a time range for the depth graph from 10 min, 15 min, 30 min,
the combo box. 60 min, 12 hours
Reference Switch the reference of the water depth value. AUTO, Keel,
AUTO: Switch the reference of the water Transducer(When
FURUNO is selected),
depth value according to the received
Surface(When FURUNO
value.
is selected)
Keel: Set the reference of the water depth to
keel.
Transducer: Set the reference of the water
depth to transducer. It can be selected
only when FURUNO is selected in
[Device Installation] - [Echo Sounder
1].
Surface: Set the reference of the water depth
to surface. It can be selected only
when FURUNO is selected in [Device
Installation] - [Echo Sounder 1].

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-58

 1
16.2.20 Setting up the Rudder graph
2
When [Rudder Graph] is selected on the classification pain, the [Rudder Graph] dialog is displayed on
the edit pain.
3
4
Note
This dialog may not be displayed depending on the equipment setting. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
The following table shows the setting details:
18
Setting item Setting Setting value
19
Time Range Select a time range for the Rudder graph from 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min
the combo box. 20
Rudder Range Select a rudder angle for the Rudder graph from 30°, 40°, 50°, 60°, 70°, 80°
the combo box. 21
22
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-59 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
16.2.21 Setting up the Gyro/Rudder graph
When [Gyro/Rudder Graph] is selected on the classification pain, the [Gyro/Rudder Graph] dialog is
displayed on the edit pain.

Note
This dialog may not be displayed depending on the equipment setting.

The following table shows the setting details:

Setting item Setting Setting value

Time Range Select a time range for the Gyro/Rudder graph 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min
from the combo box.
Rudder Range Select a rudder angle for the Gyro/Rudder 30°, 40°, 50°, 60°, 70°, 80°
graph from the combo box.

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-60

 1
16.2.22 Setting up the Engine Graph
2
When [Engine Graph] is selected on the classification pain, the [Engine Graph] dialog is displayed on
the edit pain. 3
Note
4
This dialog may not be displayed depending on the equipment setting. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
The following table shows the setting details: 18
Setting item Setting Setting value 19
Time Range Select a time range for the engine speed graph 10 min, 15 min, 30 min,
form the combo box. 60 min 20
Maximum rpm Select an engine speed on the Ahead side form
the combo box.
AH100, AH200, AH300,
AH500, AH1000
21
Minimum rpm Select an engine speed on the Astern side form 0, AS50, AS100 22
the combo box.
23
24
25
26
27
付録
16-61 Section 16 Setting up Screen View
16.2.23 Setting up the graph range of the ROT slide
bar
When [ROT] is selected on the classification pain, the [ROT] dialog is displayed on the edit pain.

The following table shows the setting details:

Setting item Setting Setting value

ROT Scale Select a graph range for the ROT slide bar from 30-0-30, 60-0-60,
the combo box. 90-0-90, 120-0-120,
150-0-150, 300-0-300

Section 16 Setting up Screen View 16-62

 １
Section 17 Setting up Alerts 2
By setting this equipment to generate an alert when the own ship’s position or the condition meets the 3
specific condition or any other ship or obstacle approaches to a specific range, preliminary measures
4
can be taken, avoiding collisions, grounding, and deviation from the route can be avoided.
This section explains the method of setting conditions (threshold values) for generating alerts, alert 5
processing operations, and alert timer setting using the [Alert] menu.
6
7
17.1 Selecting Setting Items
8
When the [Alert] menu is opened, the [Alert] dialog box appears.
9
By selecting a setting item in the [Alert] dialog box, the setting dialog of the selected item can be
displayed. 10
11
17.1.1 Displaying the [Alert] dialog box 12
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed.
13
2 Click on the [Alert] button on the menu.
14
The [Alert] dialog box appears. 15
Disclosure button
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B
Classification pane Edit pane

17-1 Section 17 Setting up Alerts

 The [Alert] dialog box consists of the classification pane and the edit pane.
By clicking the Disclosure button ( ), you can hide the classification pane. To show the
classification pane again, click the Disclosure button ( ).

17.1.2 Selecting a setting item

1 Click the alert classification you want to set up in the classification pane.
The setting dialog of the selected item is displayed in the edit pane.

2 Set up in the edit pane.

The following items can be set in the [Alert] dialog box.

Setting item Setting contents Function restriction

Collision Avoidance Set the following conditions to generate a
collision avoidance alert.
• CPA/TCPA limit value
• Status of the AIS target to be targeted for a lost
alarm
Refer to "17.2 Collision Avoidance Alert
Generation Conditions".
New Target Alarm Set the following conditions to generate an
automatic acquisition target alarm.
• Area (AZ) for TT target automatic acquisition
• Enable/disable AZ
Refer to "17.3 New Target Alarm Generation
Conditions".
Depth/Safety Contour Set the following conditions to generate a Only the "Below keel
grounding avoidance alert. water depth alarm"
• Below keel water depth alarm can be set on the
• Safety contour line approach alarm RADAR screen.
Refer to "17.4 Depth/Safety Contour Alert The "Safety contour
Generation Conditions". line approach alarm"
can also be set on the
ECDIS screen and the
chart radar screen
(when the chart option
is set for the radar as
chart display option).
Look-ahead (Forward Set a forward forecast monitoring ECDIS screen and
forecast monitoring) Refer to "17.5 Setting Up Look-ahead". chart radar screen
(when the chart option
is set for the radar as
chart display option)

Section 17 Setting up Alerts 17-2

 １
Setting item Setting contents Function restriction
Special Condition Set the conditions for generating a warning by ECDIS screen and
2
Area detecting a danger detection vector. chart radar screen 3
Refer to "17.6 Special Condition Area Generation (when the chart option
Conditions". is set for the radar as 4
chart display option)
Track Control Set the conditions for generating an automatic
5
route retention alert. 6
Refer to "17.7 Track Control Alert Generation
Conditions". 7
Position Integrity Set the conditions for generating a position monitor
(Position sensor warning and a HDOP limit caution.
8
integrity) Refer to "17.8 Position Integrity Alert Generation
9
Conditions".
AMS Set the actions to be taken at the next stage for an 10
(Alert Management unacknowledged alert.
System) Refer to "17.9 Setting up Alert Processing".
11
Timer Set a time for generating the alert.
12
Refer to "17.10 Setting Up the Alert Timer".
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-3 Section 17 Setting up Alerts

17.2 Collision Avoidance Alert Generation
Conditions
When you select [Collision Avoidance] in the classification pane, the [Collision Avoidance] dialog is
displayed in the edit pane.
In this dialog, the collision detection condition (CPA/TCPA limit) and the AIS target status, which is the
target of alert detection, can be set.
For the details of CPA/TCPA, refer to "6.2 Collision Avoidance (Explanation)".

Note
As for the values of collision detection conditions, please specify the optimal values according to
the ship type, sea area, weather and marine conditions. (For the condition and type of each alert,
refer to "6.7 Alert Display".)

17.2.1 Setting the CPA/TCPA limit values

1 Enter the value of [CPA Limit] in a range from 0.1 NM to 9.9 NM.

2 Enter the value of [TCPA Limit] in a range from 1 min to 99 min.

Section 17 Setting up Alerts 17-4

 １
17.2.2 Setting the status of the AIS target that is 2
targeted for lost warning
3
1 Select a target for detecting a lost warning of the AIS target from the [AIS Lost Alarm]
combo box. 4
ACT&Danger&Select: Activated AIS targets, danger targets and numeric value display 5
targets are included.
Danger: Danger targets are included.
6
Off: Lost warnings are not generated. 7
Note 8
Lost warnings for sleeping AIS targets will not be generated.
9
Memo 10
If Off is being set, the following message is displayed in the alert status area.
AIS Lost Alarm is Disabled 11
12
2 Select a target for detecting a CPA/TCPA alarm of the AIS target from the [AIS
CPA/TCPA Alarm] combo list. 13
ACT & Sleeping: Activated AIS targets and sleeping AIS targets are included. 14
Active: Activated AIS targets are included.
Off: CPA/TCPA alarms are not generated.
15
16
Note
During the ECDIS task, the Collision Avoidance item is hidden from the classification pane, 17
and CPA / TCPA alert and Lost alert are not detected and sounded.
Also, drawing on the chart of AIS dangerous ship and AIS lost target will not be done.
18
Regarding TT, the dangerous ship and the lost target are drawn.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-5 Section 17 Setting up Alerts

17.3 New Target Alarm Generation
Conditions
When you select [New Target Alarm] in the classification pane, the [New Target Alarm] dialog is
displayed in the edit pane.
In this dialog, it is possible to set the AZ (automatic acquisition/activation zone) and switch the AZ to
enable/disable.
For the details of the setting of the AZ, refer to "6.5.1.1 Automatic acquisition mode".

When one of these is

selected, AZ1 or AZ2 takes
effect.
When this is clicked on, the
cursor mode is set to a Make
AZ mode.
Enter the start angle.
Enter the end angle.
Enter the start distance.
Enter the end distance.

Settings of AZ1 Settings of AZ2

(Automatic Acquisition/Activation (Automatic Acquisition/Activation
Area 1) Area 2)

AZ1 AZ2

Start angle
End angle

End distance
Start distance

Section 17 Setting up Alerts 17-6

 １
17.3.1 Switching AZ1/AZ2 to enable/disable 2
3
17.3.1.1 Enabling AZ1 or AZ2
Select the [Use AZ1] or [Use AZ2] check box.
4
A TT target / AIS target in the applicable AZ is automatically acquired / activated and it becomes a 5
target of collision detection.
A" " mark and identification number are assigned to the acquired TT target on the radar screen, 6
which are moved together with the TT target, and then a vector is displayed within 1 min.
7
17.3.1.2 Disabling AZ1 or AZ2 8
Clear the [Use AZ1] or [Use AZ2] check box.
Acquired and activated zones disappear from the RADAR screen. However, already acquired TT
9
targets are continuously tracked. Moreover, activated AIS targets remain activated. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-7 Section 17 Setting up Alerts

17.4 Depth/Safety Contour Alert
Generation Conditions
When [Depth/Safety Contour] is selected in the classification pane, the [Depth/Safety Contour] dialog
is displayed in the edit pane.
In this dialog, the threshold values for generating "Depth below keel alarm" and "Crossing safety
contour alarm" can be set up.

Note
[Crossing safety contour alarm] cannot be displayed on the RADAR screen.

Each threshold value can be set in a range between 0 and 200 m.

In the [Shallow contour], [Safety depth] and [Deep contour] input boxes, the values set in [Options] -
[Chart Common] of the View menu are displayed.
When [View Settings for Chart Common] is clicked, the [Chart Common] dialog box of the View menu
appears.
For the details of each setting item, refer to "16.2.9 Setting up the display of Chart Common".
• Shallow Contour
• Safety Depth
• Safety Contour
• Deep Contour

Section 17 Setting up Alerts 17-8

 １
Automatic compensation of entered values
The threshold values must satisfy the following conditions. 2
• Shallow Contour  Safety Contour  Deep Contour
• Shallow Contour  Safety Depth  Deep Contour
3
Safety Contour and Safety Depth are not related. 4
If there is any contradiction in the entered values, the following automatic compensations will be
performed. 5
Condition Compensation
6
Safety contour value (or Safety Depth value) < Replace the Shallow contour value with the Safety 7
Shallow contour value contour value (or Safety Depth value)
Deep contour value < Safety contour value (or Replace the Deep contour value with the Safety 8
Safety Depth value) contour value (or Safety Depth value)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-9 Section 17 Setting up Alerts

17.5 Setting Up Look-ahead
When [Look-ahead] is selected in the classification pane, the [Look-ahead] dialog is displayed in the
edit pane.
In this dialog, the selection of the sizes of both a danger detection vector/sector and the switching to
enable/disable of them are possible.

This unit can monitor when own ship tries to cross over the preset safety contour or danger area, or
when dangerous objects enter the sector specified around own ship. For this monitoring, danger
detection vectors and sectors can be displayed. As for danger detection vectors, detection ranges for
crossover of safety contours and danger areas can be specified in units of minutes or nautical miles,
and notches on vectors and tips of vectors indicate predicted positions if navigated at the current
speed. Also, the radius of a sector can be set up in units of miles or minutes.

Radius of a danger detection sector Length of a dangerous detection vector

(1.0 min to 30.0 min/0.1 NM to 5.0 NM) (1.0 min to 30.0 min/0.1 NM to 5.0 NM)

Angle of a danger detection sector Width of a dangerous detection vector

(0.1 degrees to 360.0 degrees) (Width of own ship to 25.0 m)
Dangerous Detection Vector and Sector

Section 17 Setting up Alerts 17-10

 １
17.5.1 Switching to enable/disable a danger 2
detection vector/sector
3
To enable a danger detection vector/sector, select [Use Area(Rectangle)] and/or [Use Area(Sector)]
check box. 4
A danger detection vector and a danger detection sector appear on the chart.
5
To disable a danger detection vector/sector, clear [Use Area(Rectangle)] and/or [Use Area(Sector)]
check box. 6
A danger detection vector and a danger detection sector disappear from the chart.
7
8
17.5.2 Setting up the size of a danger detection 9
vector
10
1 Enter a value in [Length].
Specify it in a range between 1.0 and 30.0 min or between 0.1 and 5.0 NM. 11
The unit of the vector length can be switched between min and NM by clicking on the Change
Unit button,
12
2 Enter a value in [Width]. 13
Specify the vector width in a range between own ship's beam +15 m to 250.0 m.
14
15
17.5.3 Setting up the size of a danger detection 16
sector 17
1 Enter a value in [Radius].
Specify it in a range between 1 and 30 min or between 0.1 and 5.0 NM.
18
The unit of the sector radius can be switched between min and NM by clicking on the Change 19
Unit button,
20
2 Enter a value in [Width].
Specify the sector width in a range between 0.1 and 360.0°. 21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-11 Section 17 Setting up Alerts

17.6 Special Condition Area Generation
Conditions
When [Special Condition Area] is selected in the classification pane, the [Special Condition Area]
dialog is displayed.
In this dialog, set an area for generating a alert when the symbol on the chart touches the danger
detection vector.

Section 17 Setting up Alerts 17-12

 １
Select the check box of the area that is targeted for the alert.
Clear the check box of the area not to be targeted for the alert. 2
3
When you select Warnning or Caution in the Alert Priority combo box, the alert priority is set at once.
If priority is changed during alert occurrence, it will be regenerated. 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

17-13 Section 17 Setting up Alerts

17.7 Track Control Alert Generation
Conditions
When [Track Control] is selected in the classification pane, the [Track Control] dialog is displayed.
In this dialog, the conditions for generating warnings regarding Course Difference Limit, End of Track
Limit, and ECC Limit can be set up.

Enter a threshold value for generating each warning.

Course difference limit:

Specify the difference between the planned course and own ship's bearing in angle, within a range
between 0.5 and 45.0°.
End of track limit:
Specify the time remaining to reach the destination so as to generate an alert for approaching to the
proximity of the final destination in a range as follows.
When equipped with Autopilot：TCS Ed1 or when not equipped with Autopilot ・・・ Set it in the range of
1.0 to 5.0 min.
When equipped with Autopilot：TCS Ed2 ・・・ Set it in the range of 3.0 to 6.0 min.

Memo
When equipped with Autopilot：TCS Ed2, "End Of Track" warning escalates to "End Of Track"
alarm 30 seconds after the warning occurs.

ECC limit:
Specify the time remaining to reach the wheel over point so as to generate an early course change
warning in a range between 1.0 and 5.0 min.

Section 17 Setting up Alerts 17-14

 １
17.8 Position Integrity Alert Generation 2
Conditions 3
When [Position Integrity] is selected in the classification pane, the [Position] dialog is displayed. 4
In this dialog, the generation condition of the Position monitor warning and the HDOP limit can be set
up. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
17.8.1 Setting up the generation condition of the 20
Position monitor warning 21
Enter the following threshold values for generating the position monitor warning.
22
Position Discrepancy Limit:
The difference in distances when two GPS positions are compared at every second is used as a 23
threshold value. Specify the difference in a range between 0.010 and 9.990 NM.
24
Note 25
Position Discrepancy Limit takes effect when two GPSs are installed.
APP A
APP B

17-15 Section 17 Setting up Alerts

Radius Limit (GPS):
The radius of a monitoring circle having the predicted position of a GPS 1 sec later at the center is
used as a threshold value. If the position actually measured is not within the time monitoring circle
specified in [Time Limit], it will be subjected to an alert. Specify the radius limit in a range between 10
and 100 m.

Radius Limit (DGPS):

The radius of a monitoring circle having the predicted position of DGPS 1 sec later at the center is used
as a threshold value. If the position actually measured is not within the time monitoring circle specified
in [Time Limit], it will be subjected to an alert. Specify the radius limit in a range between 10 and 100 m.

Time Limit:
The time during which the position actually measured by a GPS/DGPS deviates from the monitoring
circle is used as a threshold value. The time limit can be specified in a range between 1 and 29s.

17.8.2 Setting up the HDOP exceeded caution

generation condition
In the [HDOP Limit] combo box, select a threshold limit of HDOP (Horizontal Dilution of Precision).
Select either one of [4], [10] and [20].

Section 17 Setting up Alerts 17-16

 １
17.9 Setting up Alert Processing 2
When [AMS] is selected in the classification pane, the [AMS] dialog is displayed on the edit pane. 3
In this dialog, the time to activate the action at the next stage when acknowledge is not performed for
an alert can be set up. 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Enter the wait time until an alert at the next stage is generated in [Time Limit]. 16
Reactivation of Silenced Alert: 17
Set, in a range between 0 and 60s., the time required to reactivate the alert sound that was silenced
temporarily. 18
Transfer to BNWAS: 19
When a BNWAS (Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System) is connected, specify the time to transfer
an unacknowledged alert to the BNWAS in a range between 0 and 60s. 20
Repetition of UNACK Warning: 21
Specify the time to regenerate an unacknowledged alert as an audible warning in a range between 0
and 300s. A warning will be generated repeatedly until it is acknowledged. 22
The default value is 60 s. 23
Note 24
• This is not applicable to the ECCW (Early Course Change Warning).
25
APP A
APP B

17-17 Section 17 Setting up Alerts

17.10 Setting Up the Alert Timer
When [Timer] is selected in the classification pane, the [Timer] dialog is displayed on the edit pane.
In this dialog, the time to generate an alarm can be set up.

17.10.1 Setting up the timer

To turn on the timer, select the [(LMT)] check box.
To turn off the timer, clear the [(LMT)] check box.

17.10.2 Setting up the time

When you click on the [Timer(LMT)] input box, the numeric value input keyboard appears. Specify the
time at which to generate an alarm in a range between 00:00 and 23:59.
For the use of the numeric value input keyboard, refer to "3.16.2 Name and function of each section of
the keyboard".

Section 17 Setting up Alerts 17-18

 １
Section 18 Setting up the Operation 2
Mode 3
4
18.1 Basic Operation of the [Settings] 5
Dialog Box
6
You can set up the operation mode in the [Settings] dialog box.
7
1 Click on the [Menu] button on the left toolbar.
The menu is displayed. 8
2 Click on the [Settings] button. 9
The [Settings] dialog box appears.
The [Settings] dialog box consists of the classification pane and the edit pane. 10
Click on the Disclosure button (>>) to hide the classification pane. To show the edit pane again,
click on the Disclosure button (<<).
11
Title bar Scroll bar Disclosure button [X] (Close) button
12
13
Edit pane title 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Classification pane Edit pane
APP A
Display Example for the ECDIS
APP B

18-1 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 3 When all the classification panes are not displayed, drag the scroll bar upwards and
downwards.

Scroll bar

ECDIS display example

4 Click on the item you want to set up in the classification pane.

The setup dialog of the item you selected is displayed.

5 Set up in the edit pane.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-2

 １
Classification pane display targets
The table below provides the descriptions of the classification panes that are displayed by 2
RADAR and ECDIS and the related sections.
3
Display target
Classification pane
RADAR ECDIS
Related section 4
Signal Process(Basic) -  18.2 Basic Settings for Radar Signal Processing 5
Signal Process   18.3 Setting Radar Signal Processing
Obs, Scene Preset  - 18.4 Presetting Each Observation Scene
6
Trails  - 18.5 Setting Other Ship’s Radar Trails 7
TXRX  - 18.6 Setting Radar Antennas
8
Association   18.7 Setting Associations
Ship’s Dynamic Trait   18.8 Setting Dynamic Traits of Own Ship 9
TT Test  - 18.9 Setting Operation Tests
10
Filter   18.10 Setting AIS Filters
Target Track   18.11 Setting the Target Track Function to 11
ON/OFF
12
Route   18.12 Setting Parameter Values at Route Plan
Creation 13
14
*1
Autosail   18.13 Setting Automatic Sailing Parameter
Values
Temporary Route   18.14 15
Chart
*2
-  18.15 Setting Chart Operation 16
Logbook -  18.16 Setting Logbook
NAVTEX   18.17 Setting NAVTEX
17
General   18.18 Setting Navigation Equipment 18
Color and Brightness   18.19 Setting Colors and Brightness
Sounds   18.20 Setting Sounds
19
Key Assignment   18.21 Setting Key Assignment 20
Preferences   18.22 Setting Preferences Information
21
Screen capture   18.23 Setting Screen Capture
*1 Displayed when the automatic sailing option is attached. 22
*2 Displayed when the chart display option is attached.
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-3 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

18.2 Basic Settings for Radar Signal
Processing
Select [Signal Process (Basic)] in the classification pane.
Set a basic processing method of radar signals in the setting dialog of the edit pane (ECDIS screen
only).

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Gain Rotate the dial to set the mode to the 0 to 100
receiving sensitivity adjustment
mode.
Sea (sea clutter Rotate the dial to set the mode to the 0 to 100
adjustment) sea clutter adjustment mode. MAN: Manually removes sea clutters.
By clicking on the dial in adjustment AUTO: Automatically removes sea
mode or clicking on the button next to clutters.
the slider, the mode can be switched
between manual (MAN) and
automatic (AUTO).

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-4

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Rain (rain/snow Rotate the dial to set the mode to the 0 to 100
2
clutter rain/snow clutter adjustment mode.
adjustment) By clicking on the dial in adjustment
MAN: Manually removes rain/snow
clutters.
3
mode or clicking on the button next to
the slider, the mode can be switched
AUTO: Automatically removes
rain/snow clutters.
4
between manual (MAN) and
automatic (AUTO). 5
IR Set up the IR (Interference Removal) Off
function. IR Low
6
IR Middle
7
IR High
Target Enhance Set up the Target Enhance function. ENH Off 8
ENH Level1
ENH Level2 9
ENH Level3
10
Echo Process Set up the Echo Process function. PROC Off
If the ship's heading cannot be 3 Scan CORREL 11
acquired, [PROC Off] is set. 4 Scan CORREL
5 Scan CORREL 12
Remain
Peak Hold 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-5 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

18.3 Setting Radar Signal Processing
Set [Signal Process] in the classification pane.
Set various processing methods for radar signals in the setting dialog of the edit pane.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Video Latitude Set up the gradation of the radar video. Narrow
Normal
Wide
Super Wide
Video Noise Set up to remove noise and signals which are Off
Rejection considered to be clutters of radar video. Level1(Low)
Level2(High)
Auto Dynamic Range When this is selected, the dynamic range is To enable: Select.
Control automatically adjusted. To disable: Clear.
Process Switch Specify a particular area and set up a mode for Off
performing video processing on the inside and Range Fix
outside of the particular area. AUTO
2nd Process Mode Set up a processing mode used in the outside of the PROC Off
particular area. This is enabled when other than [Off] 3Scan CORREL
is being selected in the Process Switch combo box. 4Scan CORREL
5Scan CORREL
Remain
Peak Hold

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-6

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Process Switch Set up the boundary range of a particular area. 0.1 to 25.5 NM 2
Range Enabled when [Range Fix] is selected in the Process
Switch combo box. 3
Fast Target Detection When this item is enabled, high-speed moving targets To enable: Select.
that are suppressed by the scan correlation To disable: Clear. 4
processing can be detected more easily.
SART If it is enabled, the Radar Transponder (SART: Search To enable: Select. 5
and Rescue Radar Transponder) screen can be To disable: Clear.
displayed. This item is valid on the RADAR screen 6
only.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-7 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

18.4 Presetting Each Observation Scene

Adjust the preset of the observation scene according to the oceanographic condition,
with the thorough understanding of the features of the radar signal processing
setting. The optimum radar performance may not be able to be demonstrated due to
the contents of the changed setting or the oceanographic condition at that time.

There are 12 types of observation scenes; you can preset each observation scene.
When you select [Obs, Scene Preset] in the classification pane, the items that can be preset are
divided into six setup dialogs, which are then displayed in the edit pane.
To proceed to the next page: Click the [Next] button.
To return to the previous page: Click the [Back] button.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-8

 １
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Obs.Scene Set up the observation scene. Standard
12
Coast 13
Open-sea
Fishnet 14
Storm
Calm
15
Rain 16
Bird
Long Range 17
Buoy
User1
18
User2 19
IR Set up the IR (Interference Removal) Off
function. IR Low 20
IR Middle
IR High 21
Target Enhance Set up the Target Enhance function. ENH Off
22
ENH Level1
ENH Level2 23
ENH Level3
Echo Process Set up the Echo Process function. PROC Off 24
If the ship's heading cannot be acquired, 3 Scan CORREL
[PROC Off] is set. 4 Scan CORREL
25
5 Scan CORREL APP A
Remain
Peak Hold APP B

18-9 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Sea (sea clutter You can switch between MAN and AUTO. MAN: Manually removes sea
adjustment) clutters.
AUTO: Automatically removes
sea clutters.
Rain (rain/snow You can switch between MAN and AUTO. MAN: Manually removes
clutter adjustment) rain/snow clutters.
AUTO: Automatically removes
rain/snow clutters.
0.75 (0.75 to 1.5) NM Select a pulse with of 0.75 NM range. <Radar Antenna 10kW>
SP1/MP1
<Radar Antennas 25kW,
30kW>
SP1/MP1
<Solid state>
SP1/MP1
1.5 (1.5 to 3) NM Select a pulse width of 1.5 NM range. <Radar Antenna 10kW>
SP1/MP1/MP2
<Radar Antennas 25kW,
30KW>
SP1/MP1/MP2/MP3
<Solid state>
SP1/MP1/MP2
3 (3 to 6) NM Select a pulse width of 3 NM range. <Radar Antenna 10kW>
SP1/MP1/MP2/LP1
<Radar Antenna 25kW>
SP1/MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1
<Radar Antenna 30KW>
MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1
<Solid state>
SP1/MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
6 (6 to 12) NM Select a pulse width of 6 NM range. <Radar Antenna 10kW>
SP1/MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
<Radar Antenna 25kW>
SP1/MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
<Radar Antenna 30KW>
MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
<Solid state>
MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
12 (12 to 16) NM Select a pulse width of 12 NM range. <Radar Antenna 10kW>
SP1/MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
<Radar Antenna 25kW>
SP1/MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
<Radar Antenna 30KW>
MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
<Solid state>
MP2/LP1/LP2

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-10

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Video Latitude Set up the radar image. Narrow
2
Normal
Wide
3
Super Wide 4
Video Noise Set up to remove noise and signals which Off
Rejection are considered to be clutters of radar Level1(Low) 5
images.
Level2(High)
6
Auto Dynamic Range When this is selected, the dynamic range To enable: Select.
Control is automatically adjusted. To disable: Clear. 7
Process Switch Specify an area and set up a mode for Off
performing video processing on the inside Range Fix 8
and outside of the area.
AUTO
9
2nd Process Mode Set up a processing mode used in the PROC Off
outside of the area. This is enabled when
other than [Off] is being selected in the
3Scan CORREL 10
4Scan CORREL
Process Switch combo box.
5Scan CORREL 11
Remain
Peak Hold
12
Process Switch
Range
Set up the boundary range of a particular
area.
0.1 to 25.5 NM 13
Fast Target Detection When this item is enabled, high-speed To enable: Select. 14
moving targets that are suppressed by the To disable: Clear.
scan correlation processing can be 15
displayed more easily.
This setting takes effect when the [2nd 16
Process Mode] is [PROC3 to 5].
Trails Mode Select a radar trail display mode. True 17
Relative
Trails Ref Level Set up a video level required to draw radar Level1(Low)
18
trails. The higher the level gets, the higher
the threshold value for drawing radar trails
Level2 19
Level3
becomes.
Level4(High) 20
Trails Reduction Set up the radar trail reduction processing Off
level. The higher the level gets, the Level1(Wide)
21
stronger the reduction processing level
becomes.
Level2
Level3(Narrow)
22
MAX Length Select the maximum value of the time to Short 23
display radar trails. Long
Trails Length Set up the interval for displaying radar <When Short is specified>
24
trails. Off/15s/30s/1 min/3 min/
6 min/10 min/15 min/30 min/60
25
min
<When Long is specified>
APP A
Off/30 min/1 hour/2 hour/3
hour/…(thereafter, at intervals of
APP B
1 hour)…/24 hour

18-11 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Gain Offset Set up the gain offset for sensitivity -32 to 32
compensation.
PRF Set up the operation mode of the Normal
transmitter's repetition transmission Economy
frequency.
High Power
[Economy] cannot be selected when a
solid state radar antenna is connected. If
a solid state radar antenna is connected
while [Economy] is being selected, the
setting will be reset to the default (factory
preset) value.
Small Buoy Detection Turn On/Off the small target detection To enable: Select.
mode. To disable: Clear.
Fishnet Detection Turn On/Off the fishnet detection mode. To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
Antenna Height Set up the radar antenna height. Default
When this is set to [Default], the value -5m
that has been set in [Antenna Height] by 5-10m
selecting [Service] - [Adjustment] -
10-20m
[TXRX] is used.
20m-

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-12

 １
Overview of the Observation Scene Preset function
2
Default Data
3
Open-sea 4
5
6
Data that can Be Called
Currently Used Data 7
Observation
Reset JRC
8
Interference Removal
Scene Selection
Defaults Video Processing
Open-sea Target Enhance

9
User Default Data 10
Load User
Setting
11
Open-sea
Save User 12
Setting

13
14
15
16
17
Setting Item Description of Setting
Save Present State The current settings are saved as the setting values of the currently selected 18
observation scene. When this item is clicked on, the confirmation screen is
displayed. To save the setting, click on [OK] and to cancel the operation, 19
click on [Cancel].
Save User Setting Data that can be called is saved as the user default values of the selected 20
observation scene. When this item is clicked on, the confirmation screen is
displayed. To save the setting, click on [OK] and to cancel the operation, 21
click on [Cancel].
Load User Setting Load the user default values to the data that can be called. When this item is 22
clicked on, the confirmation screen is displayed. To call the set data, click on
[OK] and to cancel the operation click on [Cancel]. 23
Reset JRC Defaults Load the default values to the data that can be called. When this item is
clicked on, the confirmation screen is displayed. To call the set data, click on 24
[OK] and to cancel the operation click on [Cancel].
25
APP A
APP B

18-13 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

18.5 Setting Other Ship’s Radar Trails
Select [Trails] in the classification pane.
Set other ship’s radar trails in the setting dialog of the edit pane (RADAR screen only).

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Trails Mode Select a radar trail display mode. True
Relative
Trails Ref Level Set up a video level required to draw radar trails. Level1(Low)
The higher the level gets, the higher the threshold value Level2
for drawing radar trails becomes. Level3
Level4(High)
Trails Reduction Set up the radar trail reduction processing level. Off
The higher the level gets, the stronger the reduction Level1(Wide)
processing level becomes. Level2
Level3(Narrow)
MAX Length Select the maximum value of the time to display radar Short
trails. Long

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-14

 １
18.6 Setting Radar Antennas 2
Select [TXRX] in the classification pane.
3
Set radar antennas in the setting dialog of the edit pane (RADAR screen only).
4
18.6.1 Setting radar antennas 5
Set radar antennas.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
18
PRF Fine You can reduce the setting value of the repetition 0 to 31 19
Tuning transmission frequency by 0.2% (maximum value is 0).
Stagger Select On/Off of the Radio Wave Interference Reduction To enable: Select. 20
Trigger function. To disable: Clear.
It is not displayed when a solid state radar antenna is 21
connected. The previous setting value is maintained,
however. 22
PRF Set up the operation mode of the transmitter's repetition Normal
transmission frequency. Economy
23
[Economy] is not displayed when a solid state radar antenna
is connected. If a solid state radar antenna is connected while
High Power
24
an operation mode is being specified, the setting will be reset
to the default value. 25
Ice Class Turn On/Off the Ice Class Standby mode. To enable: Select.
Standby Mode To disable: Clear.
APP A
Note
APP B
If a small solid state radar antenna is connected, the setting in [Stagger Trigger] will not be saved
and it will turn On (its check box is already selected) at each startup.
18-15 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode
18.7 Setting Associations
Select [Association] in the classification pane.
Set TT/AIS in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
The AIS target and the tracking target are checked if they are identical and if so, an association symbol
is displayed for the targets. In this case, the AIS target symbol is automatically activated.

Note
If you don't want to perform an identical target judgement, or if you want to display hidden
symbols, turn the association setting to Off.

RADAR ECDIS

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-16

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Association Turn On/Off the association setting. To enable: Select.
2
To disable: Clear.
3
Priority Select a priority of association target AIS
display. TT 4
Bearing Set up the bearing difference of the 0.0 to 9.9°
association target. 5
Range Set up the range difference of the
association target.
0 to 999 m 6
Course Set up the course difference of the 0 to 99° 7
association target.
Speed Set up the speed difference of the 0 to 99 kn 8
association target.
Applicable AIS Target Select a state of the AIS which will be ACT
9
an association target. Only the AIS
target you specified will be an
Active&Sleeping/Slp
10
association target.
TT/AIS Priority Select priority of association target AIS
11
display. TT
12
TT1/TT2 Priority Select priority of association target TT1
display. TT2 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-17 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

18.8 Setting Own Ship's Dynamic Trait
Select [Ship’s Dynamic Trait] in the classification pane.
Set dynamic traits of own ship in the setting dialog of the edit pane.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

Reach Set up the distance to reach the turn. 0 to 2000 m
Turn Mode Set up the Turn mode. Radius
Rate
Radius Enter the radius of the turn rate. 0.10 to 2.00 NM
This is displayed when [Radius] is selected in
the [Turn Mode] box.
Rate Enter the speed of the turn rate. 20 to 720°/min
This is displayed when [Rate] is selected in
the [Turn Mode] box.
Acceleration Enter the rate of change of speed 0.0 to 100.0 kn/mir
(acceleration) of own ship's dynamic trait.
Deceleration Enter the rate of change of speed 0.0 to 100.0 kn/mir
(deceleration) of own ship's dynamic trait.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-18

 １
18.9 Setting Operation Tests 2
Select [TT Test] in the classification pane.
3
Set an operation test in the setting dialog of the edit pane (RADAR screen only).
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 16
Test Video Set up the type of test video. Off
VDIN
17
TT Simulator Set up the scenario of the TT Off 18
Simulator mode. Scenario1
Scenario2 19
Scenario3
Scenario4 20
Scenario5
Scenario6
21
Gate Display Switches between On/Off of the Gate To enable: Select. 22
Display mode. To disable: Clear.
Vector Constant Set up the vector's tracking 1 to 8
23
performance.
24
VD Level Mode Display the threshold value display Auto Threshold1
(Manual) method of the quantization mode at
manual acquisition.
Auto Threshold2 25
Manual Threshold
APP A
APP B

18-19 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
VD Level (Manual) Set up the quantization level when 0 to 255
acquiring manually.
VD Level (Auto) Set up the quantization level when 0 to 255
acquiring automatically.
Gate Size Display the gate size to be used for Small
tracking. Medium
Large
Tracking The number of currently acquired -
targets is displayed in a range from 0
to the maximum TT display count.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-20

 １
18.10 Setting AIS/TT Filters 2
Select [Filter] in the classification pane. 3
Set an AIS/TT filter in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
By setting an AIS/TT filter, targets within the area can be displayed preferentially or only the inside of 4
the area can be displayed.
5
6
7
8
9
Current display 10
11
12
13
Input boxes 14
(display when
created)
15
16
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
17
AIS When this is selected, filtering AIS target is To enable: Select. 18
performed in the operation mode being To disable: Clear.
selected in Filtering mode.
19
TT When this is selected, filtering external target To enable: Select.
is performed in the operation mode being
selected in Filtering mode.
To disable: Clear. 20
Sector Filter When this is selected, the Sector Filter is To enable: Select. 21
displayed on the screen and filtering is To disable: Clear.
performed in the operation mode being
selected in Filtering mode.
22
Start Angle Set up the starting angle of the Sector Filter.
The angle value indicates the relative bearing
0.0 to 359.9° 23
based on the ship’s heading as the reference.
When entry is confirmed, the entered value 24
takes effect immediately.
End Angle Set up the end angle of the Sector Filter. The 0.0 to 359.9°
25
angle value indicates the relative bearing
based on the ship’s heading as the reference. APP A
When entry is confirmed, the entered value
takes effect immediately. APP B

18-21 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Ring Filter When this is selected, the Ring Filter is To enable: Select.
displayed on the dialog box and filtering is To disable: Clear.
performed in the operation mode being
selected in Filtering mode.
Distance Set up the distance of the Ring Filter. When 0.0 to 120.0 NM
entry is confirmed, the entered value takes
effect immediately.
Filtering Mode Select an operation mode of the AIS/TT filter. Display
Display: Targets cannot be displayed outside Priority
of the AIS/TT filter range.
Priority: Priority is determined within the
range of the AIS/TT filter and targets
are displayed based on the priority.

Creating a filter in the dialog

Creating a Sector Filter

1 Click on the [Sector] tab.

2 Click on [Make Target Filter].

The button is highlighted and the cursor mode is set to the Make Target Filter mode.

3 Move the cursor, place it on the starting angle of the Sector filter you want to set up,
and then click on it.

4 Move the cursor, place it on the end angle of the Sector filter you want to set up, and
then click on it.

Creating a Ring Filter

1 Click on the [Ring] tab.

2 Click on [Make Target Filter].

The button is highlighted and the cursor mode is set to the Make Target Filter mode.

3 Move the cursor, place it on the distance of the Ring filter you want to set up, and then
click on it.

Note
When the AZ function is ON, a distance smaller than the outer arc of AZ cannot be set for the Ring
filter.

Memo
<Priority setting>
• The sleeping target in the AIS/TT filter has a higher priority than the sleeping target outside of
the AIS/TT filter (preferentially displayed).
<AIS/TT Filter OFF>
• The sleeping target in the AIS/TT filter has the same prioirty as the sleeping target outside of
the filter.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-22

 １
18.11 Setting the Target Track Function to 2
ON/OFF 3
Select [Target Track] in the classification pane.
Set the target track function to ON/OFF in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Target Track Function Turn On/Off the target track To enable: Select.
18
function. To disable: Clear.
19
Shortcuts 20
Click on any of the following shortcuts to display the related dialog box. 21
Shortcut Settings Dialog Box
22
View for Target Track [Target Track] dialog box
File Load/Save [File Manager] dialog box 23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-23 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

18.12 Setting Parameter Values at Route
Plan Creation
Select [Route] in the classification pane.
Set various parameter values at route plan creation in the setting dialog of the edit pane.

Set up the factory setting values for routes to be created during route planning.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

XTD (PORT) Set up the cross track limit of the port side. 0.01 to 9.99 NM
XTD (STBD) Set up the cross track limit of the starboard 0.01 to 9.99 NM
side.
Arrival radius Set up the radius of the WPT (waypoint) 0.01 to 9.99 NM
arrival circle.
Speed Set up the planned speed. 1.0 to 99.9 kn
Sail Set up sailing (RL (Rhumb Line) or GC (Great RL
Circle)). GC
Turning Radius Set up the turn radius. 0.10 to 9.99 NM
Time Zone Set up the time zone. -13:30 to +13:30

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-24

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Distance Calculation Set up the calculation method of the distance Straight
2
Mode between WPTs. with Turn
3
Straight: Calculates the distance between
WPTs linearly (red line). 4
WPT 3 5
6
WPT 1 WPT 2 7
With Turn: Calculates the distance between 8
WPTs using a predicted route (red
line). 9
WPT 3 10
11
WPT 1 WPT 2 12
Monitoring Set up the route monitoring method. Wheel-over Line, Arrival 13
Wheel-over Line: monitored by using Circle
Wheel-over line (WOL) along each WPT. 14
Arrival Circle: monitored by using the arrival
circle along each WPT. 15
The setting will be changed according to the
type of auto pilot during automatic sailing. 16
MAX Latitude Because a WPT cannot be entered at a 30°00.000' to 85°00.000'
latitude higher than the latitude you set up 17
when planning a route, this threshold is used
to check the latitude of the destination during 18
active route reception. If the threshold value
is abnormal, an active route will not be loaded
even if it is received.
19
When creating a GC leg, if a leg is positioned
over the latitude you set up, the composite
20
sailing will take effect automatically and the
leg will be divided into three segments.
21
(GC-RL-GC)
22
Minimum Leg Length Select a multiplier for determining the 1, 2, 4, 6, 8
for Limit Check "Minimum Leg Length" which will be used for
limit check.
23
Minimum leg length =
(Ship length)  Multiplier ( multiplier)
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-25 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

18.13 Setting Automatic Sailing Parameter
Values
Select [Autosail] in the classification pane.
Set various parameter values relating to automatic sailing in the setting dialog of the edit pane.

Note
• Displayed when the automatic sailing option is attached.
• When PT900 is installed as auto pilot, [Autosail] is not displayed.

Example of screen display under the following Example of screen display under the following
conditions: conditions:
• Tokyo Keiki TCS Category C • Tokyo Keiki TCS Category B (old system)
• Tokyo Keiki TCS Category B (new system) • YDK TCS Category C

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-26

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Tracking Gain Set up the tracking gain. This can be set up even during Low
2
automatic sailing.
The tracking gain value specifies how quickly the ship
Middle
High
3
will return to the original course when it has deviated
from the course. 4
You can select from three tracking gain settings of
[High], [Middle] and [Low]. 5
For example, assume that the target gain value is being
set to "16 deg./NM" and the own ship is positioned at 1 6
NM right of the tracking gain.
In this case, specify the distance for the own ship to 7
approach the target at an angle of 16°.
If the distance between the own ship and the target 8
course is shortened, this angle will also be reduced.
When the own ship has reached the target course, the 9
angle will be the same as WP1 viewed from 0 of a
WPT, and the more the LD will be, the larger this angle 10
will get.
Note that you may lose the control of the helm 11
depending on the tracking gain value, so be careful with
the setting. 12
Drift Correction Set up the drift correction. This can be set up even None
during automatic sailing. High 13
When this is set to On (High/Middle/Low), control is Middle
performed considering the tide if the own ship's speed
Low
14
is 5 knots or faster.
15
Commanded
bearing Drift
16
Expected actual route 17
None: Off (Drift correction will not be performed.)
18
High: Drift correction will be performed. The drift
correction value is equivalent to the tidal vector
(100%).
19
Middle: Drift correction will be performed. The drift
correction value is 2/3 of the tidal vector.
20
Low: Drift correction will be performed. The drift
correction value is 1/3 of the tidal vector.
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-27 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Dead Band (On/Off) Set up On/Off of the dead band. This can be set up To enable: Select.
even during automatic sailing. To disable: Clear.
To prevent yawing while navigation, it is necessary to
provide dead bands at both sides of the current
course.
If the own ship is positioned within the dead band
course, the course will be fixed at [Track Course]. For
more details, see the following drawing.

Next WPT

Dead bands

Previous WPT Set heading

(parallel to the route)

Dead Band (setting Specify the dead band value. This can be set up even 0.001 to 0.999 NM
value) during automatic sailing.
Turning Gain Set up the turning gain. This can be set up even 0 to 4
during automatic sailing.
Display when the The turning gain represents how much the turning
TCS is radius will be changed according to the XTD when
changing the course.
• Tokyo Keiki TCS
Category C You can select the turning gain in a range from 0 to 4.
• Tokyo Keiki TCS • 0: Changes the course using the planned
Category B (new radius without depending on the XTD during
system) course change.
• 1 to 4: Changes the turning radius according to the
XTD during course change. (1 is the
weakest gain and 4 is the strongest gain.)

Shortcut
Click on the following shortcut to display the related dialog box.

Shortcut Settings Dialog Box

Alert for Track Control [Track Control] dialog box

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-28

 １
18.14 Setting the Temporary Route Setting 2
Values 3
Select [Temporary Route] in the classification pane.
4
In the setting dialog of the edit pane, perform the necessary setting relating to the temporary route.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Before starting automatic sailing, move own ship along the leg.
18
19
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Pre Run Speed Set a planned ship speed of the temporary route to 0.0 to 99.9 kn 20
calculate the minimum leg length.
Pre Run Time Set a planned time of the temporary route to calculate 1.0 to 30.0 min
21
the minimum leg length.
22
Pre Run Distance Set a planned distance of the temporary route. 0.10 to 9.99 NM
Enter Angle Set an entrance angle of the temporary route. 30.0 to 90.0° 23
Turning Radius Set an initial turn radius of the temporary route. 0.10 to 1.00 NM
24
Planned ROT Set the predicted value of ROT(Rate of Turn). 9.5°/min～
Calculated from Pre Run Speed and Turning Radius, 95.5°/min 25
when entering the value of Planned ROT, the value of
Turning Radius is calculated and fluctuates.
APP A
XTD MAX Set the maximum XTD of the temporary route. 0.0 to 1.0 NM
Course Difference Set the difference of the leg bearing of the predicted 0.5 ~ 45.0° APP B
Limit course and ship’s heading.

18-29 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Memo
The minimum leg length is expressed in the following formula.
Minimum leg length = (planned ship speed of the temporary route  planned time of the temporary
route) + planned distance of the temporary route + reach

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-30

 １
18.15 Setting Chart Operation 2
3
Note
The Deletion Mode (Chart Maintenance) is displayed on the ECDIS screen and the RADAR 4
screen (chart display option). Others are displayed on the ECDIS screen only.
5
Select [Chart] in the classification pane.
6
Set chart operation in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-31 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Border Range Set up the range for the own ship in order to move the chart. 30 to 80 %
This is displayed only on the ECDIS screen.

• When the own ship is sailing in the direction of the arrow

in the figure below.

• If the border range you set up is 50%,

the screen display switches when the own ship reaches a
50% area from an edge of the screen.

• If the border range you set up is 70%,

the screen display switches when own ship reaches the
border range.

Margin (Chart When head-up, if own ship turns at the angle specified here, 0 to 90°
Rotation) the chart will also turn. For example, if the margin is set to
10°, the chart will turn when own ship turns 10° or more.
AUTO Set whether the chart is accepted automatically at completion Accepted
Accepting of chart import. automatically:
S-57 Updated Check
Chart Not accepted
automatically: Not
check
Deletion Set the operation mode of the Delete button on the status Only S-63 Cell
Mode(Chart screen in Chart Maintenance. Permit
Maintenance) Only S-63 Cell Permit: Deletes the license only when the S-63 Cell Permit
Delete button is pressed. and Chart
S-63 Cell Permit and Chart: Deletes the license and chart
when the Delete button is pressed.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-32

 １
Memo
The setting of Deletion Mode(Chart Maintenance) is valid only under S-63 (ENC that requires the 2
permit). Under S-57 (ENC that does not require the permit), the chart is also deleted regardless of
3
this setting.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-33 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

18.16 Setting Logbook
Select [Logbook] in the classification pane.
Set Logbook in the setting dialog of the edit pane (ECDIS screen only).

[Logging Events] tab

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
At Noon When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved at 12:00 (LMT). To disable: Clear.
Every ([Logging Events] When this is selected, log data is <Check box>
tab) saved at the interval specified in To enable: Select.
the combo box.
To disable: Clear.
<Selections in the combo box>
1/3/5/10/15/30/60 min
Event Mark When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when the EVENT button is To disable: Clear.
pressed.
Manual Position Fix When this is selected, the time, To enable: Select.
bearing, position, objects used To disable: Clear.
during manual position fixing in
cross bearing or running fix are
saved.
Chart Manual Updating When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when the chart is manually To disable: Clear.
updated.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-34

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
System Start When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
2
saved when the system is started. To disable: Clear.
3
System Exit When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when the system is shut To disable: Clear. 4
down.
Route Alert When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select. 5
saved when a route-related alert is To disable: Clear.
generated. 6
Chart Alert When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
saved when a chart-related alert is To disable: Clear.
7
generated.
Autosail Alert When this is selected, log data is To enable: Select.
8
saved when an autosail-related
alert is generated.
To disable: Clear.
9
System Alert When this is selected, log data is
saved when a system-related alert
To enable: Select.
10
To disable: Clear.
is generated.
11
MOB Start/Stop When this item is enabled, MOB Enable: Check.
start and MOB stop are recorded. Disable: Uncheck. 12
[View Filter] tab 13
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 14
At noon When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved at 12:00 (LMT) are To disable: Clear. 15
displayed in the list.
Specified Period When this is selected, the events To enable: Select. 16
saved at the interval specified in To disable: Clear.
[Logging] are displayed in the list. 17
Event Mark When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved when the EVENT button To disable: Clear.
18
was pressed are displayed in the
list. 19
Manual Position Fix When this is selected, the events
saved during manual position
To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
20
fixing in cross bearing or running
fix are displayed in the list. 21
Chart Manual Updating When this is selected, the events
saved when the chart was
To enable: Select.
To disable: Clear.
22
manually updated are displayed in
the list. 23
System Start When this is selected, the events
saved when the system was
To enable: Select.
24
To disable: Clear.
started are displayed in the list.
25
System Exit When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved when the system was shut
down are displayed in the list.
To disable: Clear. APP A
APP B

18-35 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Route Alert When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved when a route-related alert To disable: Clear.
was generated are displayed in
the list.
Chart Alert When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved when a chart-related alert To disable: Clear.
was generated are displayed in
the list.
Autosail Alert When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved when an autosail-related To disable: Clear.
alert was generated are displayed
in the list.
System Alert When this is selected, the events To enable: Select.
saved when a system-related alert To disable: Clear.
was generated are displayed in
the list.
Latest Display Days ( ) The days on which the items 1 to 90
saved in the Other event were
specified are displayed in a range
between 1 and 90.
MOB Start/Stop When this item is enabled, MOB Enable: Check.
start and MOB stop are displayed. Disable: Uncheck.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-36

 １
18.17 Setting NAVTEX 2
Select [NAVTEX] in the classification pane.
3
Set the display method for the NATVEX message that is displayed by clicking on the [NAVTEX] button
on the information reference window in the editing pane setting dialog. 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Setting item Setting contents Setting value
Navigational Alarm Set highlighted display of the Enable: Check
17
navigation alarm.
When the item is enabled, the
Disable: Uncheck 18
message is displayed with black
characters on the white background. 19
Weather Alarm Set highlighted display of the weather
alarm.
Enable: Check 20
Disable: Uncheck
When the item is enabled, the
message is displayed with black
21
characters on the white background.
22
Ice Warning Set highlighted display of the Ice Enable: Check
Warning. Disable: Uncheck 23
When the item is enabled, the
message is displayed with black 24
characters on the white background.
Search and Rescue Set highlighted display of the search Enable: Check 25
Information and rescue information. Disable: Uncheck
When the item is enabled, the APP A
message is displayed with black
characters on the white background. APP B

18-37 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

Extended Set highlighted display of the Enable: Check
Navigational navigation alarm supplementary Disable: Uncheck
Information information.
When the item is enabled, the
message is displayed with black
characters on the yellow background.
[Display Filtering for When this button is clicked on, the -
NAVTEX Messages] [Display Filtering for NAVTEX
button Messages] dialog is opened.
For details, refer to “Displaying only
the NAVTEX messages that satisfy a
specific condition”.
Display Filtering for When this button is clicked on, the
NAVTEX Receiver］ [Display Filtering for NAVTEX
button Receiver] dialog is opened.
For details, refer to “Receiving only
the NAVTEX messages that satisfy a
specific condition”.

Displaying only the NAVTEX messages that satisfy a specific condition

When the [Display Filtering for NAVTEX Messages] button is clicked on, the [Display Filtering for
NAVTEX Messages] dialog is displayed.
In this dialog, NAVTEX messages to be displayed can be filtered.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-38

 １
Setting item Setting contents Setting value
Station – Display Select a base station from which Enable: Check
2
Filtering messages are to be displayed.
By checking the Display Filtering
Disable: Uncheck 3
check box, the check box of each
base station can be checked. 4
Select a required base station by
checking the check box. 5
Month/Year Only the messages that are received
on the selected month/year are
Enable: Check 6
Disable: Uncheck
displayed.
Select a required month/year by
7
checking the check box.
8
Message – Display Select a type of the messages to be Enable: Check
Filtering displayed.
Disable: Uncheck 9
By checking the Display Filtering
check box, the check boxes of 10
message types can be checked.
Select a required message type by 11
checking the check box.
Message – Filtering Whether to perform display filtering Enable: Check 12
Depend on Position by position is selected. Disable: Uncheck
By checking the Filtering Depend on 13
Position check box, you can select
detailed filtering conditions. 14
Message – Filtering Choose whether to perform display Enable: Check
Depend on Position – filtering by the distance from the Disable: Uncheck 15
Range from Own ship's position.
Ship When checked, filtering is performed 16
by the distance from the ship's
position to the set value of the Radius 17
input box.
Message – Filtering Enter the distance of the filter from 0.1~300 NM 18
Depend on Position – your ship. 1.0~30.0 min
Radius Click the NM / min button to switch 19
the unit.
Message – Filtering Choose whether to perform display Enable: Check
20
Depend on Position – filtering by route selected during route
Crossing Monitoring monitoring.
Disable: Uncheck 21
Route When checked, filtering is carried out
by the route monitoring range. 22
Message – Filtering
Depend on Position –
Choose whether to perform display
filtering by route selected during route
Enable: Check
23
Disable: Uncheck
Crossing Planning planning.
Route When checked, filtering is carried out
24
by the route planning range.
25
APP A
APP B

18-39 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

Receiving only the NAVTEX messages that satisfy a specific condition
Click the Display Filtering for NAVTEX Receiver button to open the "Display Filtering for NAVTEX
Receiver" (NAVTEX Message Receive Filtering) dialog.
In this dialog, you can filter (narrow down) the displayed NAVTEX message.

1 Click the Display Filtering for NAVTEX Receiver button.

A dialog box labeled "Waiting for a response from the NAVTEX receiver" is displayed.

2 When the NAVTEX receiver is connected, open the "Display Filtering for NAVTEX Receiver"
dialog (NAVTEX Message Receive Filtering) dialog.

If there is no response from the NAVTEX receiver, a popup with "No response from NAVTEX
receiver" is displayed. When this popup is displayed, check the connection with the NAVTEX
receiver.

Setting item Setting contents Setting value

FREQUENCY Displaing NAVTEX frequency. RX(518 KHz)
Setting Type Select the setting type of the RX Station / Message Type
NAVTEX receiver. Setting
Printer Message Output
Setting
INS Message Output Setting
Station – Display Choose from which base station to Enable: Check
Filtering receive and output messages. Disable: Uncheck
If you check the Display Filtering
check box, you can check the check
box of each base station.
Next, check the check box of the
desired base station and select it.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-40

 １
Setting item Setting contents Setting value
Month/Year Only messages received at the Enable: Check
2
selected year / month are displayed.
Check the check box of the desired
Disable: Uncheck
3
year and month and select it.
4
Message – Display Choose which type of message you Enable: Check
Filtering want to display. Disable: Uncheck 5
If you check the Display Filtering
checkbox, you can check the
checkbox of message type.
6
Next, select the check box of the kind
of the desired message and select it.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-41 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

18.18 Setting Navigation Equipment
Select [General] in the classification pane.
Set navigation equipment in the setting dialog of the edit pane.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

GYRO Setting Enter the initial value of the gyro. 0.0 to 359.9°

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-42

 １
18.19 Setting Colors and Brightness 2
Select [Color and Brightness] in the classification pane.
3
Set the color and the brightness of the display contents in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
(1) (1) (1) 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
(2)
16
[1] [Def.] (default value) button
When this button is clicked on, all the setting items of the mode that is selected on the [Day/Night] 17
combo box are reset to the default values.
18
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 19
Day/Night Set up the color of the dialog box itself. Day1 [default]
Select the chart display colors from the Day2 20
three types of Day1, Day3 and Night when Day3
the ARCS is used.
Dusk
21
Night 22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-43 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
[Display Color] tab
Outer PPI/Dialog Set up the color outside the PPI. Dark [default]
The label changes depending on the Black
screen to be called. The label will be Outer
PPI/Dialog for the RADAR screen, and
Dialog for others.
Inner PPI Set up the color inside the PPI. This item Blue
is displayed only on the RADAR screen. Dark Blue
Black [default]
Character Set up the text color. White [default]
Green
RADAR Video Set up the color of radar video. Yellow [default]
Displays on the ECDIS screen which has Green
a PADAR screen and PADAR display Orange
function.
Purple
Dark Red
RADAR Trails(Time) Set up the color of radar trails. White
This item is displayed only on the RADAR Blue
screen. Cyan [default]
Green
*1
Target Symbol Set up the color of the target symbol. White/Black
Cyan
Green [default]
Orange
*1
Range Rings Set up the color of range rings. White/Black
Cyan [default]
Green
Orange
*1
EBL1/VRM1/PI Set up the color of EBL1, VRM1 and White/Gray
parallel index lines. Cyan
Green
Orange [default]
*1
EBL2/VRM2 Set up the color of EBL2 and VRM2. White/Gray [default]
Cyan
Green
Orange
*1
Own Set up the color of own ship symbol, White/Black [default]
Symbol/HL/Vector heading line and vector. Cyan
Green
Orange

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-44

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
ALL GPS Buoy Set up the color of all GPS Buoy symbols. White/Black
*1
[default]
2
Set up the same color for all GPS buoy
symbols.
Gray /Amber /Magenta /Blue
/Cyan /Green /Yellow /Orange
3
/Dark Red
4
Individual Select a color for each GPS buoy. White/Black/Gray /Amber
Set up the GPS Buoy 1 to 10, Other /Magenta /Blue /Cyan /Green 5
respectively. /Yellow /Orange /Dark Red
[Brightness] tab
6
Character Set up the text brilliance. Level1(Dark) [default of Day 3] 7
Level2 [default of Day 2, Dusk]
Level3 [default of Day 1] 8
Level4(Light) [default of Night]
RADAR Video Set up the brilliance of radar video. Level1(Dark)
9
Level2
Level3
10
Level4(Light) [default] 11
RADAR Trails Set the brightness of the radar image trail. Level1(Dark)
Displayed on the RADAR screen only. Level2 12
Level3
Level4(Light) [default] 13
Target Symbol Set up the brilliance of the target symbol. Level0(Dark)
Level1
14
Level2 15
Level3
[default of Day3/Dusk/Night]
16
Level4(Light)
[default of Day1/2]
17
Range Rings Set up the brilliance of range rings. Level1(Dark)
Level2 [default of Night] 18
Level3 [default of DAY3/Dusk]
Level4(Light) [default of 19
Day1/2]
EBL/VRM/PI Set up the brilliance of EBL, VRM and Level1(Dark) 20
parallel index lines. Level2
Level3 [default of
21
DAY3/Dusk/Night]
Level4(Light) [default of
22
Day1/2]
Own Set up the brilliance of own ship symbol, Level1(Dark)
23
Symbol/HL/Vector heading line and vector. Level2 24
Level3 [default of
DAY3/Dusk/Night]
Level4(Light) [default of
25
Day1/2]
APP A
APP B

18-45 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
Panel Set the brightness of the operation unit. Off
Level1(Dark)
[default of Dusk/Night]
Level2
[default of Day3]
Level3
[default of Day2]
Level4(Light)
[default of Day1]
*2
Display Set the value that is input in the box for the 0 to 100
brightness of the display unit.
*1: Under either of the following conditions in the ECDIS task, Black or Gray can be selected instead of
White.
- ENC is displayed while [Day/Night] is set to Day1 or Day2.
- ARCS is displayed while [Day/Night] is set to Day.

*2: The brightness default values are as follows.

26inch screen 19inch screen

Day1/Day2/Day3: 67 Day1/Day2/Day3: 42
Dusk: 60 Dusk: 20
Night: 11 Night: 4

(2) Next botton

It is displayed when the GPS buoy is available.
When you click the second page is displayed, you can set the color of the GPS buoy.
If it is disabled, it will be hidden.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-46

 １
18.20 Setting Sounds 2
Select [Sounds] in the classification pane.
3
Set the volumes of the operation sound and operation error sound and alarm melody in the setting
dialog of the edit pane. 4
When the volume or melody is changed, the selected volume or melody is played back, enabling the
user to set while listening to the sound. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-47 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting item Setting contents Setting value
[Volume] tab
Key ACK Set the volume of the sound emitted when Off
the key is pressed. Level1(Soft)
Level2
Level3 [Default]
Level4(Loud)
Misoperation Set the volume of the operation error sound. Off
Level1(Soft)
Level2
Level3 [Default]
Level4(Loud)
Response/Notification Set the volume of the control response sound Off
to external equipment and control completion Level1(Soft)
notification sound (including the interswitch
Level2
control) from external equipment.
Level3 [Default]
Level4(Loud)
Message Notification Set the volume of the message notification Off
sound. Level1(Soft)
Level2
Level3 [Default]
Level4(Loud)
Alert Setting Set the volume of the sound notifying that the Off
Reminder alarm condition has not been set. Level1(Soft)
Level2
Level3 [Default]
Level4(Loud)
Navigation 1 Alarm Set the volume of the navigation alarm Level1(Soft)
*2
*1
sound. Level2
Navigation 2 Alarm
Level3
*1
Navigation 3 Alarm Level4(Loud) [Default]
CPA/TCPA Alarm Set the volume of the CPA/TCPA alarm Level1(Soft)
*2
sound. Level2
Level3
Level4(Loud) [Default]
*2
Warning Set the volume of the system alarm sound. Off
Level1(Soft)
Level2
Level3
Level4(Loud) [Default]
Emergency Alarm Set the volume of the Emergency Alarm Level1(Soft)
*2
sound. Level2
Level3
Level4(Loud) [Default]

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-48

 １
Setting item Setting contents Setting value
[Melody] tab
2
Navigation 1 Alarm Set the melody of the Navigation 1 alarm. Sound1 3
Sound2[Default]
Sound3 4
Sound4
Navigation 2 Alarm
*1
Set the melody of the Navigation 2 alarm. Sound1
5
Sound2[Default]
Sound3
6
Sound4 7
*1
Navigation 3 Alarm Set the melody of the Navigation 3 alarm. Sound1
Sound2[Default] 8
Sound3
Sound4
9
CPA/TCPA Alarm Set the melody of the CPA/TCPA alarm. Sound1 10
Sound2[Default]
Sound3 11
Sound4
Warning Set up the melody of Warning. Sound1
12
Sound2[Default]
13
Sound3
Sound4 14
*1 Navigation 2 Alarm and Navigation 3 Alarm are not practically used.
*2 For these volumes, only Level 4 (Loud) may be able to be selected depending on the setting.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-49 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

18.21 Setting Key Assignment
Select [Key Assignment] in the classification pane.
Set the keys in the operation unit and the function assigned to the [MULTI] dial in the setting dialog of
the edit pane.
Only the items whose functions are available on the task screen are displayed on the screen.

The [User Keys] and [AZ Key] tabs are displayed only when the optional operation unit is installed.

Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value

[User Keys] tab
DISP Off Key Select a function to assign to the DISP Off key on the Data Off
operation unit. HL Off
[DISP Off Key] is displayed only when the optional
operation unit is installed.
It will be displayed neither on the CONNIG screen nor
on the AMS screen.
User Key 1 Select a function to assign to the [USER1] key on the Show Preset Menu
operation unit. Zoom
[User Key 1] is displayed only when the optional Capture Screen
operation unit is installed.
Show Chart
Acquire
Cancel TT

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-50

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
User Key 2 Select a function to assign to the [USER2] key on the Show Preset Menu
2
operation unit.
[User Key 2] is displayed only when the optional
Zoom
Capture Screen
3
operation unit is installed.
Show Chart 4
Acquire
Cancel TT 5
Below is a list of functions that can be assigned to User Keys.
6
7
Function name Function description
Show Preset Menu The screen registered separately is displayed. 8
Zoom Turn Zoom function on / off.
Capture Screen Get screen capture.
9
Show Chart Turn chart dispray on / off. 10
Acquire Capturing manually under the cursor.
Cancel TT Cancel (delete) the TT under the cursor. 11
By pressing and holding for more than 5 seconds, all
12
TTs are canceled.
13
Below is a list of screens that can be assigned to Show Preset Menu.
14
Screen name
15
Route Monitoring
Anchor Watch 16
Manual Position Fix
View - Option
17
Alert 18
Settings
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-51 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
[Multi Dial] tab
Vector Time When this is selected, the vector length setup function To enable: Select.
will be manipulated with the [MULTI] control. To disable: Clear.
This item is displayed on both the RADAR screen and
the ECDIS screen.
Trails Length When this is selected, the radar trail length setup To enable: Select.
function will be manipulated with the [MULTI] control. To disable: Clear.
This item is displayed on the RADAR screen.
C UP Angle When this is selected, the course adjustment function To enable: Select.
in the course-up mode will be manipulated with the To disable: Clear.
[MULTI] control.
This item is displayed on both the RADAR screen and
the ECDIS screen.
Own Track Color When this is selected, the own ship track color switch To enable: Select.
function will be manipulated with the [MULTI] control. To disable: Clear.
This item is displayed on both the RADAR screen and
the ECDIS screen.
Manual Tune When this is selected, the manual tuning function will To enable: Select.
be manipulated with the [MULTI] control. To disable: Clear.
This RADAR screen items are displayed.
This item is not displayed in the Slave (sub-display)
mode, however.
Display When this is selected, the display brightness Always enabled.
Brightness adjustment function will be manipulated with the
[MULTI] control.
It cannot be changed since power is always on.
Panel When this is selected, the operation unit brightness To enable: Select.
Brightness adjustment function will be manipulated with the To disable: Clear.
[MULTI] control. This item is always displayed.
Gain When this is selected, the gain adjustment function will To enable: Select.
be manipulated with the [MULTI] control. To disable: Clear.
When the RADAR function can be used, the item will
be displayed.
Sea When this is selected, the sea adjustment function will To enable: Select.
be manipulated with the [MULTI] control. To disable: Clear.
When the RADAR function can be used, the item will
be displayed.
Rain When this is selected, the rain adjustment function will To enable: Select.
be manipulated with the [MULTI] control. To disable: Clear.
When the RADAR function can be used, the item will
be displayed.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-52

 １
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value
[AZ Key] tab
2
AZ 1 When this is selected, AZ1 can be turned On/Off by To enable: Select. 3
pressing the [AZ] key. To disable: Clear.
All checked items can be turned On/Off at once by 4
pressing the [AZ] key.
AZ 2 When this is selected, AZ2 can be turned On/Off by To enable: Select. 5
pressing the [AZ] key. To disable: Clear.
All checked items can be turned On/Off at once by 6
pressing the [AZ] key.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-53 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

18.22 Setting Preferences Information
Select [Preferences] in the classification pane.
The main operation/setting information relating to each task of RADAR and ECDIS can be stored and
called collectively.

Mark to show loaded

preferences

Preferences Name list

Load the selected

preferences.
Save the current preferences. Delete button
Reset the displayed
preferences to the default
values.

A maximum of 10 preferences names are displayed in the Preferences Name list. If all the file name
characters do not fit in the display area, the remaining file name characters will be displayed with an
abbreviation symbol (...).

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-54

 １
To save a preferences
2
1 Click on the [Save] button.
The confirmation dialog box appears. 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2 Enter a preferences name, and then click on the [OK] button. 10
The current preferences are saved.
A maximum of 64 characters can be entered for a file name. If all the file name characters do
11
not fit in the display area, the remaining file name characters will be displayed with an
12
abbreviation symbol (...).
To cancel saving, click on the [Cancel] button. 13
When saving is completed, an item is added to a blank line in the Preferences Name list. 14
To load preferences 15
1 Select the name of the preferences you want to load, and then click on the [Load] 16
button.
The confirmation dialog box appears.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
2 Click on the [OK] button. 24
The selected preferences are loaded.
A maximum of 64 characters can be entered for a file name. If all the file name characters do
25
not fit in the display area, the remaining file name characters will be displayed with an APP A
abbreviation symbol (...).
To cancel loading, click on the [Cancel] button. APP B

18-55 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

To delete preferences

1 Select the name of the preferences you want to delete, and then click on the [Delete]
button.

The confirmation dialog box appears. A maximum of 64 characters can be entered for a file
name. If all the file name characters do not fit in the display area, the remaining file name
characters will be displayed with an abbreviation symbol (...).

2 Click on the [OK] button.

The selected preferences are deleted.
To cancel deleting, click on the [Cancel] button.

To set up default display

1 Click on the [Default Setting] button.

The confirmation dialog box appears.

2 Click on the [OK] button.

The display configurations are changed to the default values.
To cancel changing, click on the [Cancel] button.

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-56

 １
Items of preferences and default display configurations
The items of preferences and default display configurations are shown in the tables below.
2
Task "Route monitoring"
3
Preferences save target Factory setting value, value 4
Item saved and action when Set
Location Item Default button is pressed 5
Display
category
ECDIS screen
- Chart Information Area
Display category Standard Display
6
Range ECDIS screen
- Chart Information Area
Either selection scale or
selection range
Range 3 NM 7
Orientation ECDIS screen • Motion mode True motion 8
- Chart Information Area • Bearing mode North-up
TM reset value 9
position Common screen Position source Continuation
sensor - Own Ship Information 10
or
Maintenance screen 11
- Sensor Selection
Past track View Past Track display Past Track display On/Off: 12
- Options - Own Track On/Off On
(For ECDIS) Plot Color Plot Color: White (Black)
*
13
Track Period Track Period: 12h
Time Label display
On/Off
Time Label display On/Off:
On
14
Time Label Interval Time Label Interval: 30min
Past Position display Past Position display 15
On/Off On/Off: Off
Past Position Interval Past Position Interval: 16
0.5min
Look-ahead Alert Area(Rectangle) Area(Rectangle) function
17
time - Look-ahead function On/Off On/Off: On
Rectangle Length value Rectangle Length value: 18
6min
Rectangle Length unit Rectangle Length unit: 19
min
Rectangle Width value Rectangle Width value:
30m
20
Area(Sector) function
On/Off
Area(Sector) function
On/Off: On
21
Sector Radius value: 1.0NM
Sector Radius value
Sector Radius unit Sector Radius unit: NM 22
Sector Width value Sector Width value: 45.0º

Area View Area boundary Plain

23
Boundary - Options - Chart Common
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-57 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Preferences save target Factory setting value, value
Item saved and action when Set
Location Item Default button is pressed
Depth View • Shallow Contour • Shallow Contour: 5
- Options - Chart Common • Safety Depth • Safety Depth:
• Safety Contour Continuation
• Deep Contour • Safety Contour:
• For shades Continuation
• Shallow Pattern • Deep Contour: 30
• Shallow Water • For shades: Off
Dangers • Shallow Pattern: Off
• Shallow Water Dangers:
On
Chart View • Chart Symbol • Chart Symbol: Paper
Symbol - Options - Chart Common • Full Light Line Chart
• Consider Scale • Full Light Line: Off
Minimum • Consider Scale Minimum:
Off
Redraw Setting • Border Range • Border Range:80
－Chart • Margin(Chart Rotation) • Margin(Chart Rotation):
• • 10°
Display of View View1 View1
charts - Options - Chart Display
• Text Size • Text Size: 5
(ECDIS)
• Group Layer • Group Layer: On
• Layer (Each item) • Layer: National Language
continues. See below for
• Text (Each item)
others.
•
• All On except [S]unknown
View2 object, [A]Nautical
• Text Size publication information
and [-]Update Review.
• Group Layer
• Text: All Off except
• Layer (Each item) Important text
• Text (Each item) View2
• Each item: same setting
as View 1
Unit View • Current Speed • Current Speed: Kn
－OptionsーUnit • Wind Speed • Wind Speed: Kn
• Depth • Depth: m
Own Ship View • Sea stabilized vector • Sea stabilized vector: On
－OptionsーOwn Ship • Type • Type: Simplified Symbol
Chart Chart • Enable Date • Enable Date Dependent
－Date Dependent View Dependent View View: Off
Dangerous ECDIS display • Chart drawing • Chart drawing
objects (Dangerous objects (Dangerous objects
highlight highlight) highlight): On

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-58

 １
Preferences save target Factory setting value, value
Item saved
Location Item
and action when Set 2
Default button is pressed
Update ECDIS display • Manual Update • Manual Update change 3
Review change history (Object history (Object drawing):
drawing) Off
4
Target past ECDIS display • Other shipping routes • Other shipping routes: Off 5
position

NAVTEX Display Filtering for • NAVTEX • NAVTEX

6
filter NAVTEX Messages Receive filter setting Receive filter setting: Off
7
－Position group
Multi View View • Multi view window • Multi view window other 8
－Multiview other than Single View than Single View window:
window Single View
9
Edit User
Map
User Map Editor • Edit dialog • Edit dialog: Exit 10
Edit Manual Manual Update Editor • Edit dialog • Edit dialog: Exit 11
Update
Route Route planning dialog • Edit dialog • Edit dialog: Exit 12
planning
Chart Chart Maintenance • Chart Maintenance • Chart Maintenance dialog:
13
Maintenance dialog Exit 14
Diagnosis Maintenance • Diagnosis dialog • Diagnosis dialog: Exit
－Diagnosis 15
CONNING Soft stamping display • CONNING block • CONNING block overlay:
block overlay Exit
16
Chart 1 ECDIS display • Chart drawing • Chart drawing 17
(Chart 1 chart) (Chart 1 chart): Exit
18
* White/Black interchanges under the following conditions.
In Day1/Day2 (or Day), Black, in Day3/Dusk/Night, White
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-59 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Task "Collision avoidance"

Preferences save target Factory setting value, value

Item saved and action when Set
Location Item Default button is pressed
Gain and RADAR screen • Reception sensitivity • Reception sensitivity
anti-clutter - Radar signal adjustment value (Gain) adjustment value (Gain):
functions information
• Sea clutter adjustment 80
value (Sea) • Sea clutter adjustment
• Sea clutter rejection mode value (Sea): 40
• Rain/snow clutter • Sea clutter rejection
adjustment (Rain) mode: AUTO
• Rain/snow clutter rejection • Rain/snow clutter
mode adjustment (Rain): 50
• Rain/snow clutter
rejection mode: AUTO
Tuning RADAR screen • Tuning mode AUTO/MAN • Tuning mode AUTO/MAN:
- Radar system • Fine tuning value (under AUTO
information
MAN) • Fine tuning value (under
MAN): 0
Range RADAR screen • Range scale 6NM
- Presentation mode
information
Fixed rings RADAR screen • Range rings display On/Off Off
- Presentation mode
information
AIS Lost Alert - Collision AIS Lost Alarm Off
Alarm Avoidance - AIS Lost • AIS Lost Alarm detection
Alarm target setting
On/Off
VRMs RADAR screen VRM1 (VRM2) VRM1:
- EBL/VRM read
• Display On/Off • Display On/Off: On
information area
• Control right • Control right: On
• Distance value • Distance value: 0.25NM
• EBL1/VRM1 measurement • EBL1/VRM1
reference point (blank measurement reference
space/C/D and floating point: Blank space
position. In the case of C, (CCRP)
the information is stored in
VRM2: Display Off
the form of DC coordinate
and in the case of D, the • Unit of VRM distance:
information is stored in the NM
form of latitude/longitude.)

• Unit of VRM distance

(commonly applied to both
VRM1 and VRM2)

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-60

 １
Preferences save target Factory setting value, value
Item saved and action when Set 2
Location Item Default button is pressed
EBLs RADAR screen RADAR screen - EBL1 3
- EBL/VRM read EBL/VRM read
information area information area
• Display On/Off: On 4
EBL1 (EBL2) • Control right: On

• Display On/Off • Bearing value: 000.0 5

• Control right • EBL bearing 6
• Bearing value True/Relative: True
• EBL bearing
7
True/Relative 8
(commonly applied to
both EBL1 and EBL2) 9
Parallel index RADAR screen RADAR screen – PI • Display On/Off: On
lines - PI (Parallel Index) (Parallel Index) • Control right: Off
10
• Display On/Off
• Control right
• Bearing value: 0
11
• Interval: 0.5NM
PI measurement
Display for All Lines: On
12
reference point (blank Mode: All
space/C/D and floating Unit: NM 13
position. In the case of Operation Area: One Side
C, the information is
Floating: Off 14
Heading Link: Off
stored in the form of Reference Bearing: True 15
DC coordinate and in
the case of D, the 16
information is stored in
the form of
17
latitude/longitude.) 18
Display RADAR screen True motion
mode of the - Presentation mode
• Motion mode
North-up 19
radar picture information • Bearing mode TM reset position
RADAR screen
20
Stabilization • Stabilization mode
- Presentation mode GND
Sea/Ground
information (combo box) 21
RADAR screen
• Off-Centre
22
buttonOff-Center
Off-centring - Presentation mode Off-center: Off=On center
information On/Off status and 23
Off-Center DC position
RADAR screen • Trail true/relative • Trail true/relative: True
24
Target trails
- Other ship's information • Trail length • Trail length: 6min
25
Past RADAR screen
• Past POSN Off
positions - Other ship's information APP A
APP B

18-61 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

 Preferences save target Factory setting value, value
Item saved and action when Set
Location Item Default button is pressed
RADAR screen • Vector/past position
Vector mode Relative
- Other ship's information true/relative
RADAR screen
Vector time Vector Length 6min
- Other ship's information
Automatic Alert • AZ1 function On/Off • AZ1 function On/Off: Off
radar target - New Target Alarm • AZ1 Start Angle value • AZ1 Start Angle value:
acquisition
• AZ1 End Angle value 315.0°
• AZ1 Start Distance • AZ1 End Angle value:
value 045.0°
• AZ1 End Distance • AZ1 Start Distance value:
value 3.00NM
• AZ2 function On/Off • AZ1 End Distance value:
• AZ2 Start Angle value 3.50NM
• AZ2 End Angle value • AZ2 function On/Off: Off
• AZ2 Start Distance • AZ2 Start Angle value:
value 135.0°
• AZ2 End Distance • AZ2 End Angle value:
value 225.0°
• AZ2 Start Distance value:
3.00NM
• AZ2 End Distance value:
3.50NM
Graphical View • AIS Symbol display • AIS Symbol display
AIS reported - Options - Target On/Off On/Off: On
target display
Radar and Settings • Association function On
AIS Target - TT/AIS - Association On/Off
fusion
Collision RADAR screen • CPA limit • CPA limit: 2.0NM
warning - Other ship's information • TCPA limit • TCPA limit: 12min
(Vector/Past
POSN/Limit/Trails)

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-62

 １
18.23 Setting Screen Capture 2
Select [Screen capture] in the classification pane. 3
Set the screen capture in the setting dialog of the edit pane.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Setting Item Description of Setting Setting Value 16
AUTO Capture
Interval
Set up the interval at which the Screen
Capture dialog box is automatically
0 to 999 min
17
saved. If this is set to 0, the Screen
Capture dialog box will not automatically 18
be saved.
AUTO File Erase Specify whether or not to delete the To enable: Select.
19
screen shot file automatically. To disable: Clear.
20
Shortcut Settings Dialog Box 21
File Management [File Management] dialog box
22
23
24
25
APP A
APP B

18-63 Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode

Section 18 Setting up the Operation Mode 18-64
 Overview 1
2

JMR-7200/9200 series
Name and Function of Each Unit

JMR-7230-S3/S Common Basic Operations 3

JMR-7225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH Range and Bearing Measurement Methods 4
JMR-7210-6X/6XH
JMR-7272-S Basic Operation of the Radar 5
JMR-7282-S/SH Target Tracking and AIS 6
JMR-9230-S3/S True and False Echoes on Display 7
JMR-9225-7X3/9X3/6X/9X/6XH
JMR-9210-6X/6XH
Functions of the ECDIS 8
JMR-9272-S Route Planning 9

MARINE RADAR EQUIPMENT INSTRUCTION MANUAL (Function)

JMR-9282-S/SH Route Monitoring 10
Monitoring a Dragging Anchor 11
Automatic Sailing 12
Marine Radar Equipment Operating a Chart 13
Creating a User Map/ Updating a Chart
Manually 14
Logbook 15
Instruction Manual
Setting Up Screen View 16
<Function>
Setting Up Alerts 17
Setting Up the Operation Mode 18
Adjusting and Setting Up Equipment (for
Services) 19
Not use the asbestos
Playing Back Data Recorded During
Navigation [Playback] 20
Maintenance & Inspection 21
For further information,contact:
Failures and After-Sale Services 22
About Disposal 23
URL Head office : http://www.jrc.co.jp/eng/
Specifications 24
Marine Service Department Radar Antenna Block Diagrams APP A
1-7-32 Tatsumi, Koto-ku, Tokyo 135-0053, Japan
e-mail : [email protected] Alert List APP B
One-call : +81-50-3786-9201
ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
Setting the Interswitch APP C
CODE No.7ZPNA4447E AUG. 2017 Edition 6
Menu List and Materials APP D